PMC

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B-63983EN/01
 • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by  or  in the main body.
B-63983EN/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
B-63983EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... s-1

1 OVERVIEW OF PMC .............................................................................1
1.1 WHAT IS PMC?.............................................................................................2
1.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC ................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC ................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses ............................................................................................ 3
1.2 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE? .................................................................6
1.2.1 Ladder Diagram Format .......................................................................................... 6
1.2.2 Signal Name (Symbol Name) .................................................................................. 7
1.2.3 Comment.................................................................................................................. 7
1.2.4 Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils..................................................................... 8
1.2.5 Line Number and Net Number ................................................................................ 8
1.2.6 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder Sequence Program ........ 9
1.3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE ..................................10
1.3.1 Determining Specification..................................................................................... 10
1.3.2 Creating Ladder Diagram ...................................................................................... 10
1.3.3 Editing Sequence Program .................................................................................... 11
1.3.4 Transferring and Writing Sequence Program to PMC .......................................... 12
1.3.5 Checking Sequence Program................................................................................. 13
1.3.6 Storage and Management of Sequence Program ................................................... 13
1.4 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM .................................................14
1.4.1 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program .......................................................... 15
1.4.2 Repetitive Operation.............................................................................................. 16
1.4.3 Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd Level).................................... 17
1.4.4 Structured Sequence Program ............................................................................... 19
1.4.4.1 Implementation...................................................................................................19
1.4.4.2 Subprogramming and nesting.............................................................................25
1.4.4.3 Notes on using subroutines.................................................................................29
1.4.5 Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals ........................................................... 31
1.4.6 Interlock................................................................................................................. 36
1.4.7 Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC ............................................. 37
1.5 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION .............................................................................38
1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage................................................. 40
1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link ........................................................................... 42

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/01

1.5.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC......................................................................... 43

2 PMC SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................45
2.1 SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................46
2.1.1 Basic Specifications............................................................................................... 46
2.1.2 Program Capacity .................................................................................................. 49
2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity ................................................................... 50
2.1.4 Addresses............................................................................................................... 52
2.1.5 Basic Instructions .................................................................................................. 54
2.1.6 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of Instruction Group) ................. 55
2.1.7 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.) ............................... 58
2.2 PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES........................................................................61
2.2.1 Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC (F, G) ................................... 61
2.2.2 Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine (X, Y) .............................. 62
2.2.3 Internal Relay Addresses (R)................................................................................. 65
2.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) ........................................................ 66
2.2.5 Extended Relay Addresses (E) .............................................................................. 74
2.2.6 Message Display Addresses (A)............................................................................ 75
2.2.7 Timer Addresses (T).............................................................................................. 76
2.2.8 Counter Addresses (C) .......................................................................................... 77
2.2.9 Keep Relay Addresses (K) .................................................................................... 79
2.2.10 Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K)............................................................ 80
2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K)........................................................................ 81
2.2.12 Data Table Addresses (D) ..................................................................................... 87
2.2.13 Subprogram Number Addresses (P) ...................................................................... 93
2.2.14 Label Number Addresses (L) ................................................................................ 94
2.3 PMC PARAMETERS ...................................................................................95
2.3.1 Cautions for Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile Memory................................ 96
2.3.2 PMC Parameter Format ......................................................................................... 97
2.4 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM.................................................103
2.4.1 Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 103
2.4.2 PMC System Parameters ..................................................................................... 106
2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs ................................................................ 108
2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS................................118
2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B............................................ 118
2.5.2 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-MODEL A/B ..................................... 120
2.5.3 The convert method of source program using FANUC LADDER-III ................ 122

c-2
B-63983EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

3 I/O LINK .............................................................................................123

3.1 WHAT IS THE I/O LINK?...........................................................................124
3.1.1 Configuration of an I/O Link............................................................................... 125
3.1.2 Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of the I/O Link .......................... 127
3.2 ASSIGNMENT METHOD...........................................................................128
3.2.1 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A ..................................................... 133
3.2.2 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B...................................................... 137
3.2.3 Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection Panel I/O Modules and
Distribution I/O Operator's Panel I/O Modules................................................... 140
3.2.4 Assignment Method for the Power Mate............................................................. 147
3.2.5 Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units ........................................... 148
3.2.6 Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's Panel .............................. 150
3.2.7 Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit................................................. 152
3.2.8 FS0 Operator's Panel ........................................................................................... 154
3.3 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION.................................163
3.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................. 163
3.3.2 Example ............................................................................................................... 166
3.3.3 Notes ................................................................................................................... 171
3.4 I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION ...........................................172
4 LADDER LANGUAGE........................................................................173
4.1 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................174
4.1.1 Details of the Basic Instructions.......................................................................... 176
4.1.2 RD Instruction ..................................................................................................... 177
4.1.3 RD.NOT Instruction ............................................................................................ 178
4.1.4 WRT Instruction .................................................................................................. 179
4.1.5 WRT.NOT Instruction......................................................................................... 180
4.1.6 AND Instruction .................................................................................................. 181
4.1.7 AND.NOT Instruction ......................................................................................... 182
4.1.8 OR Instruction ..................................................................................................... 183
4.1.9 OR.NOT Instruction ............................................................................................ 184
4.1.10 RD.STK Instruction............................................................................................. 185
4.1.11 RD.NOT.STK Instruction.................................................................................... 186
4.1.12 AND.STK Instruction.......................................................................................... 187
4.1.13 OR.STK Instruction............................................................................................. 189
4.1.14 SET Instruction.................................................................................................... 191
4.1.15 RST Instruction.................................................................................................... 192
4.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................193
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/01

4.2.1 Format of the Functional Instructions ................................................................. 193

4.3 TIMER........................................................................................................201
4.3.1 TMR (Timer: SUB 3) .......................................................................................... 202
4.3.2 TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24) ........................................................................... 204
4.3.3 TMRC (Timer: SUB 54)...................................................................................... 206
4.4 COUNTER .................................................................................................209
4.4.1 CTR (Counter: SUB 5) ........................................................................................ 210
4.4.2 CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56) .......................................................................... 216
4.4.3 CTRC (Counter: SUB 55) ................................................................................... 219
4.5 DATA TRANSFER .....................................................................................222
4.5.1 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43) ................................................................. 223
4.5.2 MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44) .............................................................. 224
4.5.3 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47) ............................................................... 225
4.5.4 MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes: SUB 45) ........................... 226
4.5.5 MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8)......................................................... 228
4.5.6 MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28)....................................... 230
4.5.7 XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer: SUB 35).................................. 232
4.5.8 XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18) .......................................................... 242
4.6 COMPARISON ..........................................................................................245
4.6.1 COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32)...................................... 246
4.6.2 COMP (Comparison: SUB 15)............................................................................ 249
4.6.3 COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16).................................................................. 251
4.7 DATA SEARCH .........................................................................................253
4.7.1 DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34) .............................................................. 254
4.7.2 DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17)............................................................................. 257
4.8 BIT OPERATION .......................................................................................260
4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57) ............................................................ 261
4.8.2 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58) ........................................................... 263
4.8.3 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59) ........................................................................... 265
4.8.4 AND (Logical AND: SUB 60) ........................................................................... 267
4.8.5 OR (Logical OR: SUB 61) ................................................................................. 269
4.8.6 NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62) ............................................................................ 271
4.8.7 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11) ............................................................................ 273
4.8.8 SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33)............................................................................. 275
4.9 CODE CONVERSION ...............................................................................278
4.9.1 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7) ....................................................................... 279
4.9.2 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27)....................................................... 283

c-4
B-63983EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.9.3 DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14) ................................................................... 286

4.9.4 DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31)................................................. 288
4.9.5 DEC (Decode: SUB 4) ....................................................................................... 291
4.9.6 DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25).................................................................... 293
4.10 OPERATION INSTRUCTION ....................................................................297
4.10.1 ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36) .................................................................... 298
4.10.2 SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37)................................................................. 301
4.10.3 MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38) ........................................................... 304
4.10.4 DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39) ...................................................................... 307
4.10.5 ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19).......................................................................... 310
4.10.6 SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20) ...................................................................... 312
4.10.7 MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21)................................................................. 314
4.10.8 DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22)............................................................................ 316
4.10.9 NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40).......................................... 318
4.10.10 NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23)................................................. 321
4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS..................................323
4.11.1 DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41) ................................................................... 324
4.11.2 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42)................................................................. 339
4.11.3 WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51) .............................................. 346
4.11.4 WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52) .............................................. 349
4.11.5 AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53) ......................................................... 351
4.12 PROGRAM CONTROL..............................................................................360
4.12.1 COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9) .............................................................. 361
4.12.2 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29) .................................................. 364
4.12.3 JMP (Jump: SUB 10).......................................................................................... 365
4.12.4 JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30)................................................................................ 368
4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68).......................................................................... 369
4.12.6 JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73).......................................................................... 371
4.12.7 LBL (Label: SUB 69) ......................................................................................... 373
4.12.8 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65) ................................................ 375
4.12.9 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66) ......................................... 377
4.12.10 SP (Subprogram: SUB 71).................................................................................. 378
4.12.11 SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72)................................................................. 379
4.12.12 END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1) ............................................ 380
4.12.13 END2 (2nd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 2) ........................................... 380
4.12.14 END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48).......................................... 381
4.12.15 END (End of a Ladder Program: SUB 64)......................................................... 381

c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/01

4.12.16 NOP (No Operation: SUB 70)............................................................................ 381

4.13 ROTATION CONTROL..............................................................................382
4.13.1 ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6)......................................................................... 383
4.13.2 ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26) ........................................................ 387
4.14 INVALID INSTRUCTIONS .........................................................................391
4.15 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING......................................................................392
5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS ......................................................................394
5.1 FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA ..............................................................395
5.2 LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED RESPONSE....................396
5.2.1 Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response Window Instruction ........ 397
5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS ..............................................................398
5.4 CNC INFORMATION .................................................................................402
5.4.1 Reading CNC System Information (High-speed Response)................................ 402
5.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response) ................................................... 404
5.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response)..................................................... 406
5.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (High-speed Response) ................... 409
5.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (Low-speed Response)..................... 411
5.4.6 Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response)...................................................... 413
5.4.7 Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response) ....................................................... 415
5.4.8 Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed Response) .................................... 417
5.4.9 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response) ..................................... 419
5.4.10 Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response)..................................................... 421
5.4.11 Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response) ...................................................... 423
5.4.12 Reading the Current Program Number (High-speed Response).......................... 425
5.4.13 Reading the Current Sequence Number (High-speed Response) ........................ 427
5.4.14 Reading CNC Status Information (High-speed Response) ................................. 429
5.4.15 Reading the Current Program Number (8-digit Program Numbers)
(High-speed Response)........................................................................................ 431
5.4.16 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (Low-speed Response) ................ 433
5.4.17 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (High-speed Response) ........................... 435
5.5 AXIS INFORMATION.................................................................................437
5.5.1 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) ......... 437
5.5.2 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of Controlled Axes
(High-speed Response)........................................................................................ 439
5.5.3 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of Controlled Axes
(High-speed Response)........................................................................................ 441

c-6
B-63983EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.5.4 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip Operation (G31)) of

Controlled Axes (High-speed Response) ............................................................ 444
5.5.5 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed Response).............. 446
5.5.6 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled Axes
(High-speed Response)........................................................................................ 448
5.5.7 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed (High-speed Response)................................ 450
5.5.8 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis (High-speed Response)..... 452
5.5.9 Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response)...................................... 454
5.5.10 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds (High-speed Response) .................................... 456
5.5.11 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor
(Low-speed Response) ........................................................................................ 460
5.5.12 Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed Response) ................................ 462

6 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN......................................................465

6.1 OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT KEY
ORGANIZATION........................................................................................467
6.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens ........................................................................... 467
6.1.2 Basic Screen Operations...................................................................................... 468
6.2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR SCREENS...................470
6.2.1 Programmer Protection Function......................................................................... 470
6.2.2 PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions ........................................................... 480
6.2.3 Password Function............................................................................................... 483
6.3 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY...............................................................................486
7 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
([PMC MAINTE]) ................................................................................488
7.1 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ([STATUS] SCREEN)..................489
7.1.1 Forced I/O Function............................................................................................. 492
7.1.2 Forced I/O Screen................................................................................................ 496
7.2 CHECKING PMC ALARMS ([PMC ALARM] SCREEN).............................500
7.3 SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC PARAMETERS..................................501
7.3.1 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)............................... 502
7.3.2 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen)............................ 505
7.3.3 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)......................... 507
7.3.4 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)....................................... 510
7.4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER I/O ([I/O] SCREEN)...518
7.4.1 Writing to the Memory Card ............................................................................... 521
7.4.2 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING] Screen) .............................. 523

c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/01

7.4.3 Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen)................................................................ 525

7.4.4 Setting an I/O Target PMC.................................................................................. 528
7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card......................................... 531
7.4.6 Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card....................................... 532
7.4.7 Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card Files .................................. 534
7.4.8 Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM.................................................... 536
7.4.9 Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM............................................ 537
7.4.10 Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files ...................................... 538
7.4.11 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY ................................................ 539
7.4.12 Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY .............................................. 540
7.4.13 Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files.......................................... 542
7.4.14 Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) ........ 544
7.4.15 Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port) ...... 545
7.4.16 Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other Devices
(via the RS-232C Port) ........................................................................................ 547
7.4.17 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card .............................................. 548
7.4.18 Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card ............................................ 550
7.4.19 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files....................................... 552
7.4.20 Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY...................................................... 554
7.4.21 Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY.................................................... 555
7.4.22 Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files .............................................. 557
7.4.23 Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port)............. 559
7.4.24 Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices (via the RS-232C Port)........... 560
7.4.25 Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other Devices
(via the RS-232C Port) ........................................................................................ 562
7.4.26 Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory Card.............................. 563
7.4.27 Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files..................................................................... 565
7.5 DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS ([I/O LINK] SCREEN) ...567
7.6 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL STATUS .............................569
7.6.1 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) .......................................................... 570
7.6.2 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen).................................... 571
7.6.3 Execution of Trace .............................................................................................. 577
7.6.4 Operation after Execution of Trace ..................................................................... 579
7.6.5 Automatic Start of Trace Setting......................................................................... 582
7.6.6 Trace Result Output............................................................................................. 583

c-8
B-63983EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS

([PMC LADDER]) ...............................................................................588
8.1 DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST ([LIST] SCREEN) .................................591
8.1.1 Setting the Program List Screen .......................................................................... 595
8.2 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER] SCREEN) ....................596
8.2.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen.............................. 599
8.2.2 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen ... 605
8.2.3 Display Format for Parameters............................................................................ 612
8.2.4 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER Screen .................. 616
8.3 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ...............................................................619
8.3.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen.................................. 621
8.3.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen ........................................... 625
8.3.3 NET EDITOR Screen .......................................................................................... 631
8.3.4 Structure of Valid Net ......................................................................................... 640
8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen ................................................... 641
8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen................... 643
8.3.7 Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR
Screen .................................................................................................................. 644
8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen..................................................................... 647
8.3.9 Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen .................................................. 649
8.4 SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE NECESSARY LADDER NET
([SWITCH] SCREEN]) ...............................................................................650
8.4.1 Collective Monitor Function ............................................................................... 650
8.4.2 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function.................................................................. 652
8.5 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION.......................................................656
8.5.1 Screen Structures ................................................................................................. 657
8.5.2 Operating on the Screen ...................................................................................... 658
8.6 FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE ...............................661
8.6.1 Address Map Display Screen .............................................................................. 662
8.6.2 Operating on the Screen ...................................................................................... 663
8.7 FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT UNSUSED ADDRESSES ......664
8.8 AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED PARAMETER NUMBERS ......665
8.9 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS.............................................................667
9 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS
([PMC CONFIG]) ................................................................................668
9.1 DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA ([TITLE] SCREENS) ..............669
9.1.1 Displaying Title Data .......................................................................................... 669
c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63983EN/01

9.1.2 Editing Title Data ................................................................................................ 671

9.2 DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT DATA
([SYMBOL] SCREENS) .............................................................................673
9.2.1 Displaying Symbol and Comment Data .............................................................. 673
9.2.2 Editing Symbol and Comment Data .................................................................... 675
9.2.3 Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data.................................................. 678
9.2.4 Registering New Symbol and Comment Data..................................................... 681
9.3 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA ([MESAGE] SCREENS) .684
9.3.1 Displaying Message Data .................................................................................... 684
9.3.2 Editing Message Data.......................................................................................... 687
9.3.3 Editing Desired Message Data ............................................................................ 691
9.4 DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE ALLOCATION DATA
([MODULE] SCREENS).............................................................................695
9.4.1 Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data ............................................................. 695
9.4.2 Editing I/O Module Allocation Data ................................................................... 697
9.5 DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS ([SETING] SCREENS) ....700
9.6 DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND CHANGING THE TARGET
PMC ([PMC STATUS] SCREENS) ............................................................708
9.6.1 Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs.......................................................... 710
9.7 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE ONLINE
FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN)..............................................................711
9.7.1 Setting Parameters for the Online Function ........................................................ 712
9.7.2 Communication Status......................................................................................... 715
9.7.3 About Ethernet Communication Parameters ....................................................... 717
9.7.4 About connection log of Ethernet........................................................................ 720
9.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS
([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS)................................................................722
9.8.1 Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type ................................................... 723
9.8.2 Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0 Operator's Panel ........................ 725
9.8.3 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable I/O Link Assignment
Function ............................................................................................................... 728
9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS).................................................................731
9.9.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters........................................................ 732
9.9.2 Setting the CNC-PMC Interface.......................................................................... 734
9.9.3 Setting the Machine Signal Interface .................................................................. 739
9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution .......................................... 743

c-10
B-63983EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

10 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE .......................747

10.1 ALARM MESSAGE LIST ...........................................................................748
10.1.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen........................... 748
10.1.2 PMC System Alarm Messages ............................................................................ 751
10.1.3 Operation Errors .................................................................................................. 753
10.1.4 I/O Communication Error Messages ................................................................... 764
10.2 I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND ACTIONS TO TAKE ...........768
10.2.1 Causes of Communication Errors........................................................................ 769
10.2.2 Check Items ......................................................................................................... 772
10.2.3 Sample Cases....................................................................................................... 776

c-11
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1 OVERVIEW OF PMC

-1-
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.1 WHAT IS PMC?

The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable

controller (PC) built into a CNC to perform sequence control for a
machine tool (spindle rotation, tool change, machine operator's panel
control, and so on).
Sequence control is to perform control steps successively in a
predetermined sequence or according to the logic operation.
Programs for performing sequence control for machine tools are called
sequence programs. Generally, sequence programs coded in the
Ladder language are used.

1.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC

The following is the basic configuration of the PMC:

CNC PMC Machine

Internal External
I/O Sequence I/O

program

Signal input to PMC

Internal relay
Signal output from PMC

Fig. 1.1.1 Basic configuration of PMC

The sequence program reads input signals, performs operations, and

outputs results in a predetermined sequence.

1.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC

Input signals of the PMC include signals input from the CNC (such as
M and T function signals) and signals input from the machine (such as
the cycle start button and feed hold signal button). Output signals of
the PMC include signals output to the CNC (such as the cycle start
command and feed hold signal command) and signals output to the
machine (such as turret rotation and spindle stop). The PMC controls
these I/O signals by executing a sequence program to control the
machine tool.

-2-
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses

PMC signal addresses indicate the locations of I/O signals exchanged

with the machine, I/O signals exchanged with the CNC, and signals for
internal relays and data (PMC parameters) in nonvolatile memory.
PMC addresses are roughly classified as shown in Fig. 1.1.3 (a).

F X Signals
Signals to/from
PMC
to/from CNC machine
G Y (MT)

Nonvolatile memory
(1) Variable timer (T)
Internal relay (R) (2) Counter (C)
(3) Keep relay (K)
(4) Data table (D)

Extra relay (E) (5) Extra relay (E)

(NOTE)

Fig. 1.1.3 (a) PMC-related addresses

NOTE
Optionally, extra relays (E) may be assigned to
nonvolatile memory locations.

The PMC signal address format consists of an address number and bit
number (0 to 7) as follows:

Bit number (0 to 7)
Address number (letter followed by decimal
number)

Fig. 1.1.3 (b) PMC address format

The first letter of an address number represents the type of the

signal.
In sequence programs, an address of a byte may be specified. In
the above example, specify X127 to specify a byte address. In this
case, the period "." and bit number are unnecessary.

-3-
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Table 1.1.3 lists the address symbols and corresponding signals.

Table 1.1.3 Address Symbols and signal types

Symbol Signal type
F Input signal from CNC to PMC (CNC → PMC)
G Output signal from PMC to CNC (PMC → CNC)
X Input signal from machine to PMC (MT → PMC)
Y Output signal from PMC to machine (PMC → MT)
R Internal relay
E Extra relay
A Message display
T Variable timer
C Counter
K Keep relay
D Data table
L Label number
P Subprogram number

(1) Addresses of signals between the PMC and CNC (F and G)

These addresses are assigned to interface signals between the
CNC and PMC. The relationships between the signals and
addresses are defined by the CNC.
F indicates an input signal from the CNC to PMC.
G indicates an output signal from the PMC to CNC.

(2) Addresses of signals between the PMC and machine (X and Y)

I/O signals exchanged with an externally connected machine can
be assigned to any addresses within an available range to control
the machine.
X indicates an input signal from the machine to PMC.
Y indicates an output signal from the PMC to machine.

(3) Addresses of internal relays and extra relays (R and E)

These addresses are used to temporarily store operation results
during sequence program execution processing.
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile memory
locations.
The address locations of internal relays also include a reserved
area used by the PMC system software. The signals in the
reserved area cannot be written by sequence programs.

(4) Signal addresses for message display (A)

Instruction “DISPB” used in sequence programs include
instructions to display a message on the CNC screen. These
addresses are used by such instructions.

-4-
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

(5) Nonvolatile memory addresses

The contents of these address locations are not erased even when
the power is turned off.
These addresses are used for management of the data items listed
below. These data items are called PMC parameters.
(a) Variable timer (T)
(b) Counter (C)
(c) Keep relay (K)
A reserved area used by the PMC system software is partly
included.
(d) Data table (D)
(e) Extra relay (E)
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile
memory locations.
These addresses are used to temporarily store operation
results during sequence program execution processing.

(6) Other addresses

(a) Label number (L)
Sequence program instructions include an instruction to
cause a jump to a specified position in the middle of
processing. This address indicates the jump destination used
by this instruction. The contents of L address can not be
read/written in sequence program.
(b) Subprogram number (P)
In sequence programs, a main program can call subprograms.
P addresses indicate the numbers of these subprograms. The
contents of P address can not be read/written in sequence
program.

-5-
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.2 WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE?

The Ladder language is one of sequence programming languages. This

programming language, which represents the sequence and logic
operations of I/O signals by ladder diagrams, is widely used by
sequence control engineers. This language is mainly used for PMCs.

1.2.1 Ladder Diagram Format

Designers develop and see ladder diagrams in the design stage.

However, other people (for example, many maintenance engineers)
have much more chances to see ladder diagrams than the designers of
the ladder diagrams have. Therefore, the designers should create
ladder diagrams so that these diagrams are intelligible to any one.
The following is the format of ladder diagrams:

Line No. Signal name (symbol name) Address

Net No. Comment

The meanings of ladder diagram contents will be described later.

-6-
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.2.2 Signal Name (Symbol Name)

Symbol names representing I/O signal names can be assigned to PMC
addresses. It is recommended that signal names (symbol names)
suitable for I/O signals be assigned as explained below.

(1) Signal names may consist of any alphanumeric characters and the
special symbols. The number of characters that can be entered
varies depending on the PMC model. For the allowable number of
characters, see the table in Subsection 2.1.1.
(2) As the names of the signals between the CNC and PMC, use the
signal names indicated in the address table of the PMC without
modifications.
(3) Some CNC signals are input from the machine or output to the
machine. The names of these signals are distinguished by
prefixing X or Y to the names of signals between the CNC and
PMC.
For example, a single block input signal is represented as XSBK
by prefixing X, while a start lamp output signal is represented as
YSTL by prefixing Y.
The names of some signals between the CNC and PMC, however,
exceed the maximum allowable number of characters as a result
of prefixing X or Y to the names. In such a case, delete the last
character of the signal name.
(*SECLP → X*SECL)
(4) The same signal name (symbol name) cannot be assigned to more
than one signal address.

1.2.3 Comment
A comment can be added to each symbol in the symbol table so that it
can be indicated as a comment on a relay or coil in the sequence
program. The number of characters that can be entered varies
depending on the PMC model. For the number of characters that can be
entered, see the table in Subsection 2.1.1.
For all relays and coils that are output signals to the machine, add a
comment to provide a detailed signal explanation. For other auxiliary
relays, provide explanations of the signals if these relays have
significant meanings in sequence control.
In particular for machine-related input signals, be sure to provide a
detailed signal explanation as a comment in the symbol table.
Add detailed comments to signals dedicated to the machine so that one
can guess the meanings of these signals just from the symbol names.

-7-
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.2.4 Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils

Ladder diagrams use the following relay symbols:

Relays (contacts)
Instruction
Function
representation
Normally open contact
-| |-
(contact A)
Normally closed contact
-|/ |-
(contact B)

Coils
Instruction
Function
representation
-¡- Coil
-¡¡- Negated coil
-(S)- Set coil
-(R)- Reset coil

These instructions perform a 1-bit operation and are called basic

instructions.
In addition, there are functional instructions that enable easy
programming of complicated operations for processing byte, word, and
double-word data, which are difficult to program just using basic
instructions. The symbol formats of the functional instructions are
slightly different from instruction to instruction. For details, see the
description of each functional instruction in Chapter 4.

1.2.5 Line Number and Net Number

A line number is indicated in every line of ladder diagrams.

A continuous ladder circuit from a contact to a coil is called a net. A
net number is also indicated for each net.

-8-
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.2.6 Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and Ladder

Sequence Program

In general relay sequence circuits, because of a limited number of relay

contacts, one contact may be shared by several relays to minimize the
number of contacts used. Fig. 1.2.6 (a) gives an example.

A
R1

B
R2

Fig. 1.2.6 (a)

With the PMC, relay contacts are considered to be unlimited, so ladder

diagrams are created as shown in Fig. 1.2.6 (b).

A
R1

A B
R2

Fig. 1.2.6 (b)

In a relay sequence circuit having no contact between a branch point

and a coil as shown in Fig. 1.2.6 (c), a similar ladder diagram can be
created even for the PMC.

A B
R1

R2

Fig. 1.2.6 (c)

-9-
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.3 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE

This section briefly explains how to create a program for providing

sequence control for a machine tool by using the Ladder language as an
example. When creating a sequence program, see the necessary
manual for editing after understanding the contents of this chapter
thoroughly.

1.3.1 Determining Specification

First, determine the specifications of the control target. Calculate the

number of I/O signals, and determine the interfaces of the I/O signals.
In this step, creation of interface specifications is recommended.

1.3.2 Creating Ladder Diagram

After determining specifications, represent control operations with a

ladder diagram. Timer, counter, and other functions that cannot be
represented by relay symbols are called functional instructions.
Represent these functional instructions with corresponding symbols.
When using offline programmer or built-in edit function explained in
"Editing Sequence Program" in the next subsection, you can enter a
sequence program in a ladder diagram form. At the time of sequence
program editing, you can make entry while creating a ladder diagram
on the display screen, so you need not prepare a ladder diagram in
advance.
If you want to create a sequence program efficiently, however, it is
recommended that you should create a ladder diagram in advance.
Ladder diagrams are referenced as maintenance drawings by FANUC
maintenance engineers, maintenance engineers of machine tool
builders, and maintenance engineers of end users not only domestically
but also in foreign countries. Therefore, try to create as intelligible
ladder diagrams as possible.

- 10 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.3.3 Editing Sequence Program

A sequence program in the Ladder language is edited with one of the

following two methods:

(1) PC programmer
FANUC supplies FANUC LADDER-III as sequence program
development software for FANUC PMC. Use of FANUC
LADDER-III allows you to edit a program in the Ladder language
on a personal computer.

(2) Built-in programmer

The PMC software built into the CNC has a built-in edit function.
With this function, a program in the Ladder language can be
edited.

By using either of these editing methods, a sequence program can be

entered in a ladder diagram form from the EDITOR screen. FANUC
LADDER-III can also output an entered sequence program to a printer
in a ladder diagram form.
Furthermore, FANUC LADDER-III provides a function for converting
a program in a ladder diagram form to mnemonic form or vice versa.
By using this function, you can edit the program in mnemonic form
with a text editor.
Fig. 1.3.3 shows an example of a ladder diagram, and Table 1.3.3
shows an example of a mnemonic form.

Auxiliary function
completion
signal

Fig. 1.3.3

- 11 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Table 1.3.3
Step No. Instruction Address No. & bit No. Remarks
1 RD F7.0 MF
2 OR F7.2 SF
3 OR F7.3 TF
4 RD.NOT.STK F7.0 MF
5 OR R211.7 MFIN
6 AND.STK
7 RD.NOT.STK F7.2 SF
8 OR R211.5 SFIN
9 AND.STK
10 RD.NOT.STK F7.3 TF
11 OR R211.6 TFIN
12 AND.STK
13 WRT G4.3 FIN

During sequence program editing, signal names (symbols) and

comments can be entered for I/O signals, relays, and coils. Easy-to-
understand signal names and comments should be entered to improve
program maintainability.

1.3.4 Transferring and Writing Sequence Program to PMC

After completing editing for the sequence program, input (transfer) the
program to the PMC. This operation is unnecessary when you have
edited the program by using the built-in programmer.
When you have edited the sequence program by using the PC
programmer, input the sequence program from the editing environment
(the personal computer (PC)) to the PMC. The following input
methods can be used:

(1) Input from the I/O screen

For data input, connect the PC containing the sequence program to
the CNC via RS-232C. Alternatively, save the sequence program
from the PC to a memory card, then input the memory card
contents to the PMC.

(2) Input from the online monitor screen

For data input, connect the PC containing the sequence program to
the CNC via Ethernet or RS-232C.

After inputting the sequence program, write it in the flash ROM. This
operation can be done with the DATA I/O screen of the PMC.

- 12 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.3.5 Checking Sequence Program

After writing the sequence program in the flash ROM, check the
sequence program.
The sequence program can be checked in the following two ways:

(1) Checking with a simulator

Connect a simulator (consisting of lamps and switches) instead of
the machine. Instead of using input signals from the machine, turn
the switches on and off to input signals, and confirm output
signals by checking the on/off states of the lamps.

(2) Checking by system operation

Connect the machine to make checks. Before starting the
operation, take safety measures because when the sequence
program is executed for the first time, an unpredictable motion
can occur.

1.3.6 Storage and Management of Sequence Program

When the sequence program is completed after checking, it should be

stored and managed by the machine tool builder.
The sequence program can be output to the printer in a ladder diagram
form by using the PC programmer.
The output ladder diagram should be attached as a maintenance
drawing to the machine together with other attached materials such as a
power magnetics cabinet circuit diagram.

- 13 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.4 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Sequence programs in the Ladder language are executed in the order of

instructions coded in the ladder diagrams.
Fig. 1.4 shows how a sequence program is executed.

Sequence program
memory

Sequence
program
input

Control target such as machine tool

Input circuit

Output circuit

Internal relay (RAM)

Fig. 1.4 Sequence program execution by PMC

The RD instruction causes the CPU to read the signal of the input
circuit at address X0.0 and set the read data in the operation register.
Next, the AND instruction causes the CPU to AND the set data with the
internal relay state at address R10.1 and set the result in the operation
register. The CPU then executes the subsequent instructions at high
speed, and the operation result is output to the output circuit at address
Y0.0.

- 14 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.1 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program

In general relay sequence circuits, relays operate at exactly the same

time. This means that when relay A operates in the following figure,
relays D and E operate at exactly the same time (when contacts B and C
are both off).

Fig 1.4.1 (a)

In PMC sequence control, on the other hand, relays in the circuit

operate sequentially. When relay A in Fig. 1.4.1 (a) operates, relay D
operates, then relay E operates.
Therefore, in PMC sequence control, relays operate in the order coded
in the ladder diagram (the order of programming). The sequential
operations in this sequence are performed at high speed, but some
instructions are affected by the execution order.
Accordingly, in the ladder diagrams shown in Fig. 1.4.1 (b), there is a
distinctive difference in operation between the PMC sequence and the
sequence of the relay circuit.

Fig. 1.4.1 (b) Circuit examples

- 15 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

(1) For relay sequence circuit

(A) and (B) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b) operate in the same manner. When A
(P.B) is turned on, current flows through coils B and C, turning on
B and C simultaneously. After C is turned on (after relay
operation time), B is turned off.

(2) For PMC programming

In (A) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b), as with the relay sequence circuit, when A
(P.B) is turned on, B and C are turned on, then B is turned off after
a certain time elapses (after a time required for one cycle of the
PMC sequence). In (B) in Fig. 1.4.1 (b), turning on A (P.B) turns
on C but does not turn on B even momentarily.

1.4.2 Repetitive Operation

A sequence program is executed until the end of the ladder diagram

(the end of the program) is reached, then program execution is repeated
from the beginning of the ladder diagram (the beginning of the
program).
The execution time from the beginning to the end of the ladder diagram
(the time required for one cycle) is a time for processing the sequence
program once and is called a scan.
This processing time depends on the sequence control scale (the
number of steps) and the size of the 1st level sequence described below.
A shorter processing time results in a better signal response in the
sequence.

- 16 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.3 Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd Level)

A sequence program consists of two operation parts: a high-speed

sequence part called the 1st level, which is executed every several ms,
and a normal sequence part called the 2nd level. When the model used
allows use of the 3rd level, the 3rd level sequence part is added. (See
Fig. 1.4.3 (a).)

Sequence program

1st level sequence part Specifies end of 1st level

sequence
Division 1

Division 2
2nd level sequence part

Division n

Specifies end of 2nd level

3rd level sequence part
sequence
(only with model that can
use 3rd level)
Specifies end of 3rd level sequence

Fig. 1.4.3 (a) Sequence program structure

The 1st level sequence part is a high-speed sequence part that is

executed every ladder execution cycle. With the Series30i-A, the
ladder execution cycle is 4 or 8 ms, which is set in a CNC parameter. If
the execution of the 1st level program requires a long time, the overall
execution time including the 2nd level (sequence processing time) is
extended. So, the 1st level sequence part should be created so that it
can be processed in a short time where possible. The 2nd level
sequence part is executed every (ladder execution cycle × n) ms (where
n is the number by which the 2nd level is divided). The 3rd level
sequence part is executed when the PMC is idle.

(1) Division of the 2nd level program

The 2nd level program must be divided to execute the 1st level
program. The order of sequence program execution is illustrated
in Fig. 1.4.3 (b), where the number of divisions is assumed to be n.
After the last division (division n) of the 2nd level program is
executed, the sequence program is executed from the beginning.
Therefore, when the number of divisions is n, the execution cycle
of the overall sequence program is expressed as the ladder
execution cycle × n ms.

- 17 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

As the amount of the 1st level sequence part increases, the amount
of the 2nd level sequence portion executed within the ladder
execution cycle decreases. As a result, the number of divisions n
increases, which increases the overall execution time including
the 2nd level (sequence processing time). Therefore, the 1st level
sequence program part should be minimized where possible. The
division number of 2nd level may be indefinite because of
changing of the working condition of functional instructions in 1
st level and 2 nd level.

1st level
Last division n
Division 1 Division 2
2nd level
3rd level
3rd level processing

Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms) Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms) Ladder execution cycle(4 or 8 ms)

Fig. 1.4.3 (b) Sequence program execution order

(2) 1st level sequence part

High-speed sequence operation. Only high-speed sequence
processing such as processing of a pulse signal with a short signal
width in time is performed.
These signals include emergency stop and feed hold signals.

(3) 3rd level sequence part

The 3rd level sequence processing is performed during the
remaining time from the end of the last division (n) of the 2nd
level until the 1st level processing restarts (see Fig. 1.4.3 (b)).
It is possible to program the 3rd level, but the execution cycle
period of time for processing the 3rd level sequence part is not
guaranteed to maintain program compatibility with conventional
models. Therefore, the 1st and 2nd level sequence parts should be
programmed without using the 3rd level sequence part.

- 18 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.4 Structured Sequence Program

Structured ladder coding has the following advantages:

• Programming is easy to understand, therefore programming
becomes easier.
• Program errors can be found easily.
• Troubleshooting can be done easily.

1.4.4.1 Implementation

Three major implementation techniques are supported.

(1) Use of routines

Ladder sequence processing units are created so that they can be
treated as routines.

Job A

Job B

(2) Nesting
Ladder routines created in (1) are connected to configure a ladder
sequence.

Job A Job A1 Job A11

Job B Job A12

Job An

- 19 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

(3) Conditional branch

The main program loops and determines conditions. If conditions
are satisfied, a subprogram process is executed. If the conditions
are not satisfied, the subprogram process is skipped.

Application example
(1) Example
Suppose that there are four major jobs.

If Y0 is 1, workpiece machining request is assumed to be issued,

and processing is performed. (Conditional)
A: <1> Pick up workpiece from pallet. (A1)
<2> Machine workpiece. (A2)
<3> Return workpiece to pallet. (A3)
B: <4> Move pallet.

(2) Program configuration

- 20 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

(3) Program coding

Machine workpiece.

Machine workpiece.

Move pallet.

Pick up workpiece from pallet.

Machine workpiece.

Return workpiece to pallet.

- 21 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Pick up workpiece
from pallet. Ladder representation

Ladder representation
Machine workpiece.

Ladder representation
Return workpiece to pallet.

Move pallet. Ladder representation

- 22 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

Specifications
(1) Main program
A ladder program consisting of the 1st ladder level and 2nd ladder
level is called a main program. You can create just one main
program. Subprogram calls from the 1st ladder level are not
allowed. Any number of subprogram calls from the 2nd ladder
level may be made. Functional instructions JMP and COM must
be closed within the main program and each subprogram.

(2) Subprogram
Programs called from the 2nd ladder level are referred to as
subprograms. A subprogram is a program unit enclosed by
functional instructions SP and SPE. Up to 512 or 5000
subprograms can be created for one PMC.

(3) Nesting
A subprogram can call another subprogram.
Up to eight levels of subprograms can be nested.
Recursive calls are not permitted.

- 23 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

(4) Programming order when subprograms are used

1st level sequence

part

2nd level sequence

part

3rd level sequence

part (only with model
that can use 3rd
level)

Code subprograms after 2nd and 3rd

levels.

Subprograms

End of sequence
End of entire sequence program is
program
indicated by END instruction.

Fig. 1.4.4.1

- 24 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.4.2 Subprogramming and nesting

Function
A conditional call (or unconditional call) is coded in the main program,
and the name of a subprogram to be executed is specified. In the
subprogram, the subprogram name and a ladder sequence to be
executed are coded.
When a conditional call specifying Pn (representing a program name)
is made, a subprogram named Pn is called and executed.
A subroutine name can be assigned by adding a symbol or comment to
Pn.
In the example shown in Fig. 1.4.4.2 (a), the main program calls three
subprograms. These calls are all conditional calls. Subprogram P1 is
named SUBPRO. Subprogram P1 calls subprogram PROCS1
unconditionally.

Fig. 1.4.4.2 (a) Example of subprogramming and nesting

- 25 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Execution method
The main program is always active. Subprograms are active only when
called by another program.
In the following example, subprogram SUBPRO is called by signal A.

Program cycle

Signal A

Main
program

Subprogram

Management
program

Execution flow
(1) A subprogram call by functional instruction CALL transfers
control to the subprogram.
(2) When the execution of the subprogram is completed, control is
returned to the main program.
(3) When the execution of the main program is completed, the ladder
program postprocessing is performed.

- 26 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

Creating a program
After the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd level ladder programs, create subprograms
in the similar manner.

Creation example

Be sure to code this.

- 27 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Inhibit items

(1) Subprograms are nested.

(2) A subprogram is created within the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd level ladder
program.

- 28 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.4.3 Notes on using subroutines

(1) DISPB
(2) EXIN
(3) WINDR (low-speed type only)
(4) WINDW (low-speed type only)
(5) AXCTL

For the above functional instructions, ACT = 1 must be held until

transfer completion information (coil) is set to 1.
When using these functional instructions in subprograms, note the
following prohibition:

(1) When one of the above functional instructions is being used

within a subprogram and is not yet completed (processing is in
progress), the subprogram call is canceled. (ACT for the CALL
instruction is set to 0.)

The subsequent operation of the above functional

instruction is not guaranteed.

(2) When one of the above functional instructions is being used

within a subprogram and is not yet completed (processing is in
progress), the subroutine is called from another subprogram.

Because the preceding function is being processed,

the subsequent operation of the above functional
instruction is not guaranteed.

When a subprogram using the above functional instructions is called

from more than one place, exclusive control is required. An example of
using the WINDR instruction (low-speed type) is given below.

- 29 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Example:
A subprogram is called from two places. (When the WINDR
instruction is used)

Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2

Set DATA1.

Set DATA2.

Explanation:
Subprogram 1 controls ACT (A) and W1 (B) of WINDR (subprogram
2).
The main program determines which data (C1 or C2) is to be used
according to A controlled by subprogram 1. Upon completion of the
WINDR instruction, the next data is set, and the other CALL
instruction is executed. In the subsequent operation, these steps are
repeated.

- 30 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.5 Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals

Signals input to the PMC include input signals from the CNC (such as
M function and T function signals) and input signals from the machine
(such as cycle start and feed hold signals). Signals output from the
PMC include output signals to the CNC (such as cycle start and feed
hold signals) and output signals to the machine (such as turret rotation
and spindle stop signals).
The relationships between these signals and the PMC are shown in Fig.
1.4.5 (a), in which input signals are input to the input memory of the
PMC, and output signals are issued from the PMC.
As shown in Fig. 1.4.5 (a), the input signals are synchronized during 1
scan of the 2nd level sequence part.

CNC
Input memory of CNC Sequence program
Input signal from 1st level sequence
CNC part

Transferred at
start of 2nd level 2nd level synchronous
input signal memory

Input signal from

CNC
Transferred every 8 ms

Input signal from 2nd level sequence

machine part

Output memory of CNC

Output signal to
CNC

Output signal memory

Output signal to Output signal to

machine machine

Input signal memory

Input signal from Input signal from 3rd level sequence

machine machine part
Transferred every 2 ms

Fig. 1.4.5 (a) I/O signals of PMC

- 31 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Input signal processing

(1) Input memory of the CNC
Signals input from the CNC to PMC are set in the memory of the
CNC and are normally transferred to the PMC at intervals of 4 or
8 ms. Since the 1st and 3rd level sequence parts directly reference
and process these signals, these signals are not synchronized with
input signals from the CNC. See the description of following
“Notes on programming asynchronous I/O signals”.

(2) Input signals from the machine (DI/DO card)

Signals input from the machine are transferred to the input signal
memory via the input circuit (DI/DO card). The 1st and 3rd level
sequence parts read the input signals from the input signal
memory and process them.

(3) Input signal memory

The input signal memory stores signals transferred from the
machine at intervals of 2 ms.
The 1st and 3rd level sequence parts of the PMC read and process
signals stored in this memory. In this case, the signal set in the
input signal memory is not synchronized with the 1st and 3rd level
sequence parts. For notes on asynchronous processing, see the
description of following “Notes on programming asynchronous
I/O signals”.

(4) 2nd level synchronous input signal memory

The 2nd level synchronous input signal memory stores signals
processed by the 2nd level sequence part of the PMC. Signals
synchronized with the 2nd level sequence part are set in this
memory.
Input signals in the input signal memory and input signals from
the CNC are automatically transferred to the 2nd level
synchronous input signal memory at the beginning of the 2nd
level sequence part. Therefore, the status of the 2nd level
synchronous input signal memory is kept unchanged during the
time from the beginning of the 2nd level sequence part until the
end of the sequence part.
The programmer function automatically performs processing so
that the 1st and 3rd level sequence parts use input signals in the
input signal memory and input signals from the CNC while the
2nd level sequence part uses the 2nd level synchronous input
signal memory. (This need not be considered during
programming.)

- 32 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

Output signal processing

(1) Output memory to the CNC
Signals output from the PMC to CNC are set in the output memory
of the CNC. Normally, the PMC transfers signals to the output
memory of the CNC at intervals of 4 or 8 ms.

(2) Output signals to the machine (DI/DO card)

Signals output to the machine are transferred from the output
signal memory of the PMC to the output circuit (DI/DO card).

(3) Output signal memory

The output signal memory is set by the sequence program of the
PMC. Signals set in the output signal memory are transferred to
the machine at intervals of 2 ms.

NOTE
1 The statuses of the input memory of the CNC, input
signals from the machine, output memory of the
CNC, and output signals to the machine can be
viewed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen of the PMC.
For the SIGNAL STATUS screen, see Section 7.1.
2 I/O signals exchanged with the machine are normally
transferred at intervals of 2 ms when the I/O Link is
used. Depending on the channel setting of the I/O
Link, however, the transfer interval varies. For
details, see Section 3.1.

- 33 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

Notes on programming asynchronous I/O signals

Normal input signals from the CNC are transferred to the PMC at
intervals of 4 or 8 ms. Normal output signals to the CNC are
transferred from the PMC at intervals of 4 or 8 ms. Therefore, I/O
signals exchanged with the CNC are usually transferred at intervals of
4 or 8 ms. When creating a sequence program, note that the input
signals from the CNC are not synchronized with the 1st and 3rd level
sequence program parts. Because the input signals from the CNC are
asynchronous, the status of an input signal from the CNC may change
during execution of the 1st level sequence program part, which can lead
to a problem as shown in Fig. 1.4.5 (b). To prevent such a problem,
write the TF signal to an internal relay at the beginning of the 1st level
sequence part so that the subsequent operation of the 1st level sequence
program part references the internal relay. Then, the TF signal can be
treated as a synchronous signal. See Fig. 1.4.5 (c).
Signals input from the machine via the I/O Link and signals input from
other control units over a network are also asynchronous, so these
signals should be treated in a similar manner.

If the TF status changes to 1 after TF=0 is read first,

W1 and W2 may be set to 1 momentarily.

Fig. 1.4.5 (b)

When the TF signal is made synchronized, neither W1

nor W2 is set to 1.

Fig. 1.4.5 (c)

- 34 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

Difference in signal status between 1st level and 2nd level sequence parts

The status of the same input signal may become different between the
1st and 2nd level sequence parts. The 1st level sequence part uses the
input signal memory for signal processing while the 2nd level sequence
part uses the 2nd level synchronous input signal memory. Therefore, it
is possible that an input signal for the 2nd level sequence part lags
behind the input signal for the 1st level sequence part by a cycle of the
2nd level sequence execution at the worst.
When creating a sequence program, note the following:
Signal status
A.M On (pulse signal with short pulse width in time)
B Off
C On
When the 1st level is executed, the following difference can occur
between Fig. 1.4.5 (d) and Fig. 1.4.5 (e):

(1) For Fig. 1.4.5 (d)

Even when W1 = 1, W2 may not be 1. (This is because the A.M
signal may differ between the 1st level and 2nd level.)

(2) For Fig. 1.4.5 (e)

If W1 = 1, W2 is always 1.
When performing the sequence shown in Fig. 1.4.5 (d), do the
following:
At the 1st level, perform the high-speed sequence processing
applied when the A.M signal status changes (operating).
At the 2nd level, perform the sequence processing applied when
the A.M signal status does not change (stopped).

NOTE
In the middle of 1st level processing, a signal status
change may occur asynchronously with the
sequence program processing. For details, see
Subsection 1.4.7.

- 35 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1st level

2nd level

Fig. 1.4.5 (d) Fig. 1.4.5 (e)

1.4.6 Interlock

In sequence control, considering how to provide an interlock is a key

design issue from the safety point of view. Of course, an interlock must
be provided by sequence programs. Furthermore, an interlock must
also be provided at the end of the electrical circuit in the power
magnetics cabinet of the machine. Even when an interlock is provided
logically by a sequence program (software), the interlock by the
sequence program will not work if the hardware for executing the
sequence program fails for a certain cause. Therefore, be sure to
provide an interlock within the power magnetics cabinet of the machine
to ensure safety of the operator and prevent machine damage.

- 36 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.4.7 Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC

I/O signals transmitted over networks (such as an Ethernet, I/O Link2,

PROFIBUS, DEVICENET, and FL-NET) (signals assigned to
addresses R, D, and E) are updated asynchronously with PMC
sequence program execution.
Similarly, other applications (FOCAS1, C executor, real-time custom
macros, etc.) update I/O signals asynchronously with PMC sequence
program execution. Therefore, when a signal updated via a network or
by another application is to be used by a PMC sequence program, the
following should be noted:

(1) Note on input signals

When an input signal transmitted via a network or another
application is referenced at more than one place in the PMC
sequence program, the same value is not guaranteed to be
referenced within the same cycle of the sequence program.
To reference the same input signal value within the same cycle,
store the input signal status in an area such as an internal relay.

(2) Note on output signals

When an output signal is transmitted via a network or another
application, it may be transmitted to a slave unit in the middle of
the PMC sequence program execution cycle. Care should be
exercised when the slave unit references more than one signal.

(3) Note on multiple-byte data

When multiple-byte data is input or output via a network or
another application, concurrence of the data (a condition free
from data splitting) is not guaranteed. To ensure data concurrence,
perform handshaking, which does not cause data splitting during
data I/O.

- 37 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.5 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION

The multi-PMC function allows one PMC system to execute multiple

sequence programs at the same time.

PMC memory for each sequence program is basically independent, and

the same PMC address can be used for different purposes of the
individual PMCs. Extra relays (E addresses) can be shared among
PMCs as shared memory. All PMCs can read from and write to this
area, so the area can be used for the interface between the PMCs.

1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC

X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-,

F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-,
M0-, N0-, M0-, N0-, M0-, N0-,
R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-,
T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-,
K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-,
P1-, L1- P1-, L1- P1-, L1-

Shared memory (E0 and up)

Fig. 1.5 (a) PMC memory of multi-PMC function

A program for each PMC is saved as an independent file and can be

edited, updated, and backed up separately.

The CNC systems and the I/O Link channels to be controlled by PMCs
can be changed by CNC parameter setting. In a parameter-set
configuration, one PMC may control all CNC systems, or each PMC
may control a different CNC system.

- 38 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

Fig. 1.5 (b) shows a configuration example.

CNC PMC

Machine 1st PMC Operator's

control group panel for
machine
control, etc.
(1)

Peripheral
2nd PMC equipment,
etc.

Loader
3rd PMC Operator's
control group
panel for
loader, etc.

Fig. 1.5 (b) Multi-PMC function configuration example

If the Series 30i-A system is used to control more than one CNC path,
some paths can be grouped to share data within a group and to stop all
the paths in the group if an alarm condition occurs in one of the paths.
The group is referred to as the machine group.
The system supports up to 3 machine groups. Each group has a
separate emergency stop signal address.
A PMC is basically assigned to each machine group.

- 39 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.5.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage

For the multi-PMC function, the order of PMC execution and

execution time percentages of the PMCs can be set with CNC
parameters.

Execution order
If parameters related to the execution order are not set (0 is set), the
following order sequence is assumed by default:

1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC

Other processing such as

tracing

Fig. 1.5.1 (a) Default execution order of multiple PMCs

Execution time percentage

If parameters related to execution time percentages are not set (0 is set),

the following execution time percentages are assumed by default:

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

1st PMC 2nd 3rd

PMC PMC
(75%)
(15%) (10%)

Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms)

Fig. 1.5.1 (b) Execution time percentages of multiple PMCs

- 40 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

An example of changing the execution order and execution time

percentages by setting CNC parameters is explained below. In the
following, sequence programs are executed in the order from the third
PMC to the first PMC to the second PMC with the execution time
percentage of the third PMC set to 30%, the percentage of the first
PMC to 50%, and the percentage of the second PMC to 20%:

3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

Other processing such as

tracing

Fig. 1.5.1 (c) Example of setting execution order of multiple PMCs

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

(30%) (50%) (20%)

Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms)

Fig. 1.5.1 (d) Example of setting execution time percentages of multiple

PMCs

For details of parameter setting, see Subsection 2.4.3.

- 41 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

1.5.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link

The I/O addresses of I/O Link channels can be assigned with CNC
parameters.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), all channels are assigned to the
first PMC by default as follows:

1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327

Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527

Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727

Fig. 1.5.2 (a) Default I/O addresses of I/O Link channels

In the following example, channel 1 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of

the first PMC, channel 2 is assigned to X/Y200 to X/Y327 of the first
PMC, channel 3 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the second PMC,
and channel 4 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the third PMC:

1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327

2nd PMC
Channel 3
X/Y0 to X/Y127

3rd PMC
Channel 4
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Fig. 1.5.2 (b) Example of I/O address assignment for I/O Link channels

For details of parameter setting, see Subsection 2.4.3.

- 42 -
B-63983EN/01 1.OVERVIEW OF PMC

1.5.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC

The PMC to control the interface between the CNC and PMC and PMC
addresses (F/G addresses) can be set with CNC parameters.
With these parameter settings, a desired interface control system can be
built, in which the entire CNC-PMC interface of the CNC may be
controlled by a single PMC or the CNC-PMC interface may be
controlled by multiple PMCs.
For the CNC-PMC interface, a memory area consisting of 10 blocks,
each of which is an addressable, 768-byte DI/DO area, is provided.
When viewed from the ladder program in each PMC, these addresses
begin with 0.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), the initial settings are assumed,
where the F/G addresses of the CNC equals the F/G addresses of the
first PMC as follows:

CNC 1st PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0 to F/G767 of 1st PMC
F/G1000 to F/G1767 of CNC F/G1000 to F/G1767 of 1st PMC
F/G2000 to F/G2767 of CNC F/G2000 to F/G2767 of 1st PMC
F/G3000 to F/G3767 of CNC F/G3000 to F/G3767 of 1st PMC
F/G4000 to F/G4767 of CNC F/G4000 to F/G4767 of 1st PMC
F/G5000 to F/G5767 of CNC F/G5000 to F/G5767 of 1st PMC
F/G6000 to F/G6767 of CNC F/G6000 to F/G6767 of 1st PMC
F/G7000 to F/G7767 of CNC F/G7000 to F/G7767 of 1st PMC
F/G8000 to F/G8767 of CNC F/G8000 to F/G8767 of 1st PMC
F/G9000 to F/G9767 of CNC F/G9000 to F/G9767 of 1st PMC

Fig. 1.5.3 (a) Initial settings for CNC-PMC interface

- 43 -
1.OVERVIEW OF PMC B-63983EN/01

In the following example, F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767 of

the CNC are assigned to F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767 of
the first PMC, and F/G3000 to F/G3767 of the CNC are assigned to
F/G0 to F/G767 of the second PMC:

CNC 1st PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0 to F/G767 of 1st PMC

F/G1000 to F/G1767 of CNC F/G1000 to F/G1767 of 1st PMC

F/G2000 to F/G2767 of CNC

2nd PMC
F/G0 to F/G767 of 2nd PMC

Fig. 1.5.3 (b) Setting example for CNC-PMC interface

For details of parameter setting, see Subsection 2.4.3.

- 44 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2 PMC SPECIFICATIONS

- 45 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.1 SPECIFICATIONS

2.1.1 Basic Specifications

Table 2.1.1 (a) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Function Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check safety
First PMC
(option) (option) PMC (Note 1)
Programming language Ladder Ladder Ladder Ladder
Number of ladder levels 3 3 3 2
Level 1 execution period 4 or 8 ms 4 or 8 ms 4 or 8 ms 4 or 8 ms
(Note 2)
Processing power
• Basic instruction 25 ns/step 25 ns/step 25 ns/step 1 µs/step
processing speed
Program capacity (Note 3)
• Ladder Up to about 64,000 Up to about 64,000 Up to about 64,000 Up to about 3,000
steps steps steps steps
• Symbol/comment At least 1 KB At least 1 KB At least 1 KB At least 1 KB
• Message At least 8 KB At least 8 KB At least 8 KB At least 8 KB
Instructions
• Basic instructions 14 14 14 14
• Functional instructions 66 (80) 66 (80) 66 (80) 60 (80)
(Note 4)
• Variable timers 250 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces
• Fixed timers 500 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces
• Variable counters 100 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• Fixed counters 100 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• DIFUs/DIFDs 1000 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces
PMC memory
• Internal relay (R)
• User area 8,000 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes
• System area 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes
• Extra relay (E) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) -
• Message display (A)
• Display requests 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points
• Status displays 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points
• Nonvolatile memory
• Timer (T)
• Variable timer 500 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
• Variable timer 500 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
precision (Note 6)
• Counter (C)
• Variable counter 400 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
• Fixed counter 200 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes
• Keep relay (K)
• User area 100 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes
• System area 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes
• Data table (D) 10,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes

- 46 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2.1.1 (b) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Function First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check safety
(option) (option) PMC (Note 1)
PMC memory
• Subprograms (P) 5,000 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces
• Labels (L) 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces
CNC interface
• Input (F) 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes (Note 7)
(Note 7) (Note 7) (Note 7)
• Output (G) 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes (Note 7)
(Note 7) (Note 7) (Note 7)
DI/DO
• I/O Link
• Inputs (X) Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 64 points
(Note 8) (Note 8) (Note 8)
• Outputs (Y) Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 64 points
(Note 8) (Note 8) (Note 8)
Symbol/comment
Number of symbol 16 16 16 16
characters
Number of comment 30 (Note 10) 30 (Note 10) 30 (Note 10) 30 (Note 10)
characters
Program storage area Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 768 KB of flash 128 KB of flash ROM
(Note 9) ROM ROM ROM

- 47 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

NOTE
1 This PMC is used for dual-check safety. It is used to
watch both safety-related signals and ladder
programs. Refer to "FANUC Series 30i dual-check
safety Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details.
2 NC parameter No. 11930 is used to specify a level-1
execution period. See Subsection 2.4.3 for details.
Note, however, that it is impossible to specify a
level-1 execution period for each PMC separately.
3 The maximum overall program size (including the
maximum number of ladder steps, symbols/
comments, and messages) varies depending on
option settings. See Tables 2.1.2 (a) to 2.1.2 (d) for
details.
4 For the number of functional instructions, each
parenthesized number indicates the number of all
functional instructions, and each non-parenthesized
number, the number of valid functional instructions.
5 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC
function. To put it another way, its size covers all of
the first, second, and third PMCs.
6 This area is used to specify the precision of the
variable timer. Do not use this area in user programs.
7 It is possible to specify which program is used to
control a specific CNC system. See "Interface
between CNC and PMC" in Subsection 2.4.3 for
details.
8 Each CNC unit can use up to four I/O Link channels
(4,096 input points and 4,096 output points).
However, only one I/O Link channel (1,024 input
points and 1,024 output points) can be used in the
standard continuation. Using more than one channel
requires installing an I/O Link point extension option
for each additional channel.
It is possible to specify which program is used to
control a specific I/O Link channel. See "I/O Link
input/output addresses" in Subsection 2.4.3 for
details.
9 The capacity of the program storage area varies
depending on option settings. See Tables 2.1.2 (a) to
2.1.2 (d) for details.
10 When you use only the full-size character. The
number of comment character becomes half of the
normal specification.

- 48 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.1.2 Program Capacity

Table 2.1.2 (a) Program capacity for the first PMC
Maximum program size
Number-of-ladder-step option
(flash ROM capacity)
3000-step option
5000-step option
8000-step option 128 KB
12000-step option
16000-step option
24000-step option 256 KB
32000-step option
384 KB
40000-step option
48000-step option 512 KB
64000-step option 768 KB

Table 2.1.2 (b) Program capacity for the second PMC

Maximum program size
Number-of-ladder-step option
(flash ROM capacity)
8000-step option
128 KB
16000-step option
32000-step option 384 KB
48000-step option 512 KB
64000-step option 768 KB

Table 2.1.2 (c) Program capacity for the third PMC

Maximum program size
Number-of-ladder-step option
(flash ROM capacity)
8000-step option
128 KB
16000-step option
32000-step option 384 KB
48000-step option 512 KB
64000-step option 768 KB

Table 2.1.2 (d) Program capacity for the dual-check safety PMC
Maximum program size
Number of ladder steps
(flash ROM capacity)
3000 steps (Note 1) 128 KB

NOTE
1 The dual-check safety option supports this quantity of
steps.

- 49 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.1.3 Sequence Program Memory Capacity

The following table lists the memory capacity used by sequence

programs. When creating sequence programs, keep their total size
within this memory capacity.

Table 2.1.3 (a)

Required memory size
Category Item
(Note 1)
Ladder (Note 2) Basic instruction 4 bytes
Functional instruction 4 bytes
(except for Table 2.1.3 (b))
Functional instruction 4 bytes
parameter
Symbol/comment One symbol/comment 24 bytes
(Note 2) One comment character 1 byte (Note 3)
(half size)
Message (Note 2) One message character 1 byte (Note 4)
(half-size alphanumeric
characters)
Others Area used by the system About 16K bytes

Table 2.1.3 (b) Functional instructions having a non-standard size

Functional instruction Required memory size
TMR 8 bytes
DEC 8 bytes
JMP 8 bytes
CALL 8 bytes
CALLU 8 bytes
JMPB 12 bytes
LBL 8 bytes
JMPC 12 bytes

- 50 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE
1 The total sequence program size (including all items
such as ladders, symbols/comments, and
messages) cannot exceed the sequence program
memory storage capacity. If a ladder, symbol/
comment, or message is large, the size of other
categories may be limited.
2 The PMC programmer may adjust arrangement of
these items in the sequence program memory to
improve processing efficiency. As a result, up to 1K
byte (1024 bytes) may be added to the sum of the
sizes of individual items.
3 Each full-size character takes a memory capacity of
2 bytes.
4 For half-size katakana, special characters, full-size
hiragana, kanji, and special characters, each
character in a character code notation (including
leading and trailing "@" characters) takes a memory
capacity of one byte. See descriptions about the
DISPB function instructions for the character input
code notation.

- 51 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.1.4 Addresses

Table 2.1.4 (a) Addresses of the PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Dual-check
Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Signal input to the PMC X X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127
from the machine X200 to X327 X200 to X327 X200 to X327
X400 to X527 X400 to X527 X400 to X527
X600 to X727 X600 to X727 X600 to X727
X1000 to X1127 X1000 to X1127 X1000 to X1127
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Signal output from the Y Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127
PMC to the machine Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327
Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527
Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727
Y1000 to Y1127 Y1000 to Y1127 Y1000 to Y1127
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Signal input to the PMC F F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767
from the CNC F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767
F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767
F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767
F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767
F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767
F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767
F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767
F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767
F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767
Signal output from the G G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767
PMC to the CNC G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767
G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767
G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767
G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767
G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767
G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767
G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767
G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767
G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767
Signal input to the PMC M M0 to M767 M0 to M767 M0 to M767 M0 to M767
(Note 2)
Signal output from the N N0 to N767 N0 to N767 N0 to N767 N0 to N767
PMC (Note 2)
Internal relay R
• User area R0 to R7999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499
• System area R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499
Extra relay E E0 to E9999 E0 to E9999 (Note 3) E0 to E9999 (Note 3) (Note 4)

- 52 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2.1.4 (b) Addresses of PMCs for the Series 30i-A

30i-A
Dual-check
Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Message display A
• Display request A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249
• Status display A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249
Timer T
• Variable timer T0 to T499 T0 to T79 T0 to T79 T0 to T79
• Variable-timer precision T9000 to T9499 T9000 to T9079 T9000 to T9079 T9000 to T9079
(Note 2)
Counter C
• Variable counter C0 to C399 C0 to C79 C0 to C79 C0 to C79
• Fixed counter C5000 to C5199 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039
Keep relay K
• User area K0 to K99 K0 to K19 K0 to K19 K0 to K19
• System area K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
Data table D D0 to D9999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999
Subprogram P P1 to P5000 P1 to P512 P1 to P512 P1 to P512
Label L L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999

NOTE
1 This area is reserved for PMC management software.
No I/O can be allocated in this area. Do not use it in
user programs.
2 This area is used to specify the precision of a variable
timer. Do not use it in user programs.
3 This area is common memory for the multi-PMC
function. It is possible for each program to read the
same value from, and write it to, the area.
4 No extra relay is available for the dual-check safety
PMC.

- 53 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.1.5 Basic Instructions

Table 2.1.5 Basic instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Dual-check
Instruction name Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
RD ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RD.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
WRT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
WRT.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR.NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RD.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RD.NOT.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR.STK ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SET ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
RST ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(¡: Usable. ×: Unusable.)

- 54 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.1.6 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of Instruction

Group)

Table 2.1.6 (a) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
(arranged in sequence of instruction group)
30i-A
Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third
Processing DCS
group name No. First PMC PMC PMC
(Note 4)
(option) (option)
Timer 1 TMR 3 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.3) 2 TMRB 24 Fixed-timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 TMRC 54 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Counter 1 CTR 5 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.4) 2 CTRB 56 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 CTRC 55 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Data transfer 1 MOVB 43 1-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
(Section 4.5) 2 MOVW 44 2-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
3 MOVD 47 4-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
4 MOVN 45 Transfer of arbitrary number of bytes ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 MOVE 8 Data transfer after logical product ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 XMOVB 35 Index modification binary data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 XMOV 18 Index modification data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Comparison 1 COMPB 32 Binary comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.6) 2 COMP 15 Comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 COIN 16 Coincidence check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Data search 1 DSCHB 34 Binary data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.7) 2 DSCH 17 Data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Bit operation 1 DIFU 57 Rising-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.8) 2 DIFD 58 Falling-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
3 EOR 59 Exclusive OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4 AND 60 Logical AND ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 OR 61 Logical OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 NOT 62 Logical NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 PARI 11 Parity check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 SFT 33 Shift register ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Code 1 COD 7 Code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
conversion 2 CODB 27 Binary code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 4.9) 3 DCNV 14 Data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4 DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 DEC 4 Decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 DECB 25 Binary decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)

- 55 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

Table 2.1.6 (b) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
(arranged in sequence of instruction group)
30i-A
Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third
Processing DCS
group name No. First PMC PMC PMC
(Note 4)
(option) (option)
Operation 1 ADDB 36 Binary addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 2 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4.10) 3 MULB 38 Binary multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4 DIVB 39 Binary division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 ADD 19 BCD addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 SUB 20 BCD subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 MUL 21 BCD multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 DIV 22 BCD division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
9 NUMEB 40 Binary constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
10 NUME 23 BCD-constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CNC function 1 DISPB 41 Message display ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
(Section 2 EXIN 42 External data input ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
4.11) 3 WINDR 51 CNC window data read ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
4 WINDW 52 CNC window data write ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
5 AXCTL 53 PMC axis control ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
Program 1 COM 9 Common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
control 2 COME 29 End of common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(Section 3 JMP 10 Jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4.12) 4 JMPE 30 End of jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
5 JMPB 68 Label jump 1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
6 JMPC 73 Label jump 2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
7 LBL 69 Label ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
8 CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
9 CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
10 SP 71 Subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
11 SPE 72 End of subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
12 END1 1 End of first-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
13 END2 2 End of second-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
14 END3 48 End of third-level program ¡(Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ∆ (Note 3)
15 END 64 End of ladder program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
16 NOP 70 No operation ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Rotation 1 ROT 6 Rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
control
(Section 2 ROTB 26 Binary rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
4.13)
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)

- 56 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2.1.6 (c) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
(arranged in sequence of instruction group)
30i-A
Instruction Instruction SUB Second Third
Processing DCS
group name No. First PMC PMC PMC
(Note 4)
(option) (option)
Invalid 1 SPCNT 46 Spindle control ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
instruction 2 DISP 49 Message display ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(Section 3 MMCWR 98 MMC window data read ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
4.14) 4 MMCWW 99 MMC window data write ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
5 PSGNL 50 Position signal output ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
6 PSGN2 63 Position signal output 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
7 FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
8 FNC91 91 Arbitrary-function instruction 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
9 FNC92 92 Arbitrary-function instruction 3 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
10 FNC93 93 Arbitrary-function instruction 4 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
11 FNC94 94 Arbitrary-function instruction 5 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
12 FNC95 95 Arbitrary-function instruction 6 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
13 FNC96 96 Arbitrary-function instruction 7 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
14 FNC97 97 Arbitrary-function instruction 8 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)

NOTE
1 These instructions are intended to maintain source-
level compatibility with programs for conventional
models. They are treated as a NOP instruction
(instruction that performs no operation).
2 The 3rd level sequence part is available for the
conpativility with programs for conventional models.
However the execution cycle period of time for
processing the 3rd level sequence part is not
guaranteed. See Section 1.4.3 “Processing priority”.
3 These instructions are intended to maintain source-
level compatibility with programs for other models. A
program can be created on level 3, but it is not
executed.
4 This term stands for the dual-check safety
PMC(option).

- 57 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.1.7 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.)

Table 2.1.7 (a) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Instruction SUB
Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS
name No. First PMC
(option) (option) (Note 4)
END1 1 End of first-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
END2 2 End of second-level program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
TMR 3 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DEC 4 Decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CTR 5 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ROT 6 Rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COD 7 Code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MOVE 8 Data transfer after logical product ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COM 9 Common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMP 10 Jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
PARI 11 Parity check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DCNV 14 Data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COMP 15 Comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COIN 16 Coincidence check ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DSCH 17 Data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
XMOV 18 Index modification data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ADD 19 Addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SUB 20 Subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MUL 21 Multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIV 22 Division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NUME 23 Constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
TMRB 24 Fixed-timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DECB 25 Binary decoding ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ROTB 26 Binary rotation control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CODB 27 Binary code conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COME 29 End of common line control ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMPE 30 End of jump ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
COMPB 32 Binary comparison ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SFT 33 Shift register ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DSCHB 34 Binary data search ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
XMOVB 35 Index modification binary data transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
ADDB 36 Binary addition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)

- 58 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2.1.7 (b) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Instruction SUB
Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS
name No. First PMC
(option) (option) (Note 4)
SUBB 37 Binary subtraction ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
MULB 38 Binary multiplication ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIVB 39 Binary division ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NUMEB 40 Binary constant definition ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DISPB 41 Message display ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
EXIN 42 External data input ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
MOVB 43 1-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
MOVW 44 2-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
MOVN 45 Transfer of arbitrary number of bytes ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SPCNT 46 Spindle control ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
MOVD 47 4-byte transfer ¡ ¡ ¡ ×
END3 48 End of third-level program ¡(Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ¡ (Note 2) ∆ (Note 3)
DISP 49 Message display ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
PSGNL 50 Position signal output ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
WINDR 51 CNC window data read ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
WINDW 52 CNC window data write ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
AXCTL 53 PMC axis control ¡ ¡ ¡ ∆
TMRC 54 Timer processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CTRC 55 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CTRB 56 Counter processing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIFU 57 Rising-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
DIFD 58 Falling-edge detection ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
EOR 59 Exclusive OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
AND 60 Logical AND ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
OR 61 Logical OR ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NOT 62 Logical NOT ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
PSGN2 63 Position signal output 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
END 64 End of ladder program ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMPB 68 Label jump 1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
LBL 69 Label ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
NOP 70 No operation ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SP 71 Subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
SPE 72 End of subprogram ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
JMPC 73 Label jump 2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)

- 59 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

Table 2.1.7 (c) Functional instructions for PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Instruction SUB
Processing Second PMC Third PMC DCS
name No. First PMC
(option) (option) (Note 4)
FNC90 90 Arbitrary-function instruction 1 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC91 91 Arbitrary-function instruction 2 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC92 92 Arbitrary-function instruction 3 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC93 93 Arbitrary-function instruction 4 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC94 94 Arbitrary-function instruction 5 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC95 95 Arbitrary-function instruction 6 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC96 96 Arbitrary-function instruction 7 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
FNC97 97 Arbitrary-function instruction 8 ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
MMCWR 98 MMC window data read ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
MMCWW 99 MMC window data write ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
(¡: Usable. ∆: Executed as NOP instruction (Note 1). ×: Unusable.)

NOTE
1 These instructions are intended to maintain source-
level compatibility with programs for conventional
models. They are treated as a NOP instruction
(instruction that performs no operation).
2 The 3rd level sequence part is available for the
conpativility with programs for conventional models.
However the execution cycle period of time for
processing the 3rd level sequence part is not
guaranteed. See Section 1.4.3 “Processing priority”.
3 These instructions are intended to maintain source-
level compatibility with programs for other models. A
program can be created on level 3, but it is not
executed.
4 This term stands for the dual-check safety
PMC(option).

- 60 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2 PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES

This section describes the use of each PMC address. See Subsection
2.1.4 for explanations about all address types and ranges.

2.2.1 Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC (F, G)
This subsection briefly describes interface addresses. Refer to the
applicable CNC connection manual for details.

(1) Signals from the CNC to the PMC

The following table lists the range of addresses for the signals sent
from the CNC to the PMC.
Refer to address tables in the applicable CNC connection manual
for details about the signals.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767
F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767
F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767
F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767
F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767
F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767
F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767
F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767
F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767
F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767

(2) Signals from the PMC to the CNC

The following table lists the range of addresses for the signals sent
from the PMC to the CNC.
Refer to address tables in the applicable CNC connection manual
for details about the signals.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767
G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767
G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767
G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767
G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767
G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767
G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767
G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767
G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767
G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767

- 61 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.2.2 Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine (X, Y)

(1) If the FANUC I/O Link is used

(a) Signals input from the machine to the PMC

First/second/third PMC
The addresses for four channels, X0 to X127, X200 to
X327, X400 to X527, and X600 to X727, can be used
for the signals input to PMCs. Each address is not fixed
at a specific channel. They can be assigned to any
channel. See "I/O Link channel input/output
addresses" in Subsection 2.4.3 for details.

Dual-check safety (DCS)

The addresses for one channel, X0 to X127, are used
for the signals input to the DCS.
These addresses are fixed at channel 3 or channel 4.

(b) Signals output from the PMC to the machine

First/second/third PMC
The addresses for four channels, Y0 to Y127, Y200 to
Y327, Y400 to Y527, and Y600 to Y727, can be used
for signals output from PMCs. Each address is not
fixed at a specific channel. They can be assigned to any
channel. See "I/O Link channel input/output
addresses" in Subsection 2.4.3 for details.

Dual-check safety (DCS)

The addresses for one channel, Y0 to Y127, are used for
the signals output from the DCS.
These addresses are fixed at channel 3 or channel 4.

(2) Address-fixed CNC signals input from the machine

The CNC processes signals input from the machine (listed in
Table 2.2.2) by referencing fixed addresses. Be sure to assign
specified addresses.

- 62 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2.2.2 Address-fixed input signals

Address
Signal name Symbol
Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
Common Common skip signal SKIP X4.7 X13.7 X11.7
to T/M Emergency stop signal (machine group 1) *ESP X8.4 (Note 1)
Emergency stop signal (machine group 2) *ESP X8.0 (Note 1)
Emergency stop signal (machine group 3) *ESP X8.1 (Note 1)
Deceleration signal for 1st-axis reference
*DEC1 X9.0 X7.0 X10.0
position return
Deceleration signal for 2nd-axis reference
*DEC2 X9.1 X7.1 X10.1
position return
Deceleration signal for 3rd-axis reference
*DEC3 X9.2 X7.2 X10.2
position return
Deceleration signal for 4th-axis reference
*DEC4 X9.3 X7.3 X10.3
position return
Deceleration signal for 5th-axis reference
*DEC5 X9.4 X7.4 X10.4
position return
Deceleration signal for 6th-axis reference
*DEC6 X9.5 X7.5 X10.5
position return
Deceleration signal for 7th-axis reference
*DEC7 X9.6 X7.6 X10.6
position return
Deceleration signal for 8th-axis reference
*DEC8 X9.7 X7.7 X10.7
position return

- 63 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

NOTE
1 If the Series 30i-A system is used to control more
than one path, some paths can be grouped to
share data within a group and to stop all the paths
in the group if an alarm condition occurs in one of
the paths. The group is referred to as the machine
group.
The system supports up to 3 machine groups.
Each group has a separate emergency stop signal
address.
2 The emergency stop signal address is common
signal address in a machine group. But other
signals has indivisual address with each path. For
example, in the following configuration, X11.7
does not mean “the common skip signal” in first
PMCs. In second PMCs, it means “the common
skip signal”.

CNC PMC

Path 1 First PMC

Path 2 Second PMC

Path 3

3 Path-specific, X address-based input signals are

assigned to up to 3 paths. For additional paths,
therefore, bit 2 of CNC parameter No. 3008 must
be used to assign such input signals.
4 The X address for an axis-specific deceleration
signal (*DECn) for reference position return is
assigned to 8 axes of each of up to 3 paths. For
additional paths and axes, therefore, bit 2 of CNC
parameter No. 3008, CNC parameter Nos. 3013
and 3014 must be used to assign the X address.

- 64 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.3 Internal Relay Addresses (R)

The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used
as internal relays.
Signals that interface with other control units can be assigned to these
bytes over the FA network.
Turning on the power clears these areas to 0.

30i-A
First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check
(option) (option) safety PMC
(option)
Number of User area 8000 1500 1500 1500
bytes System area 500 500 500 500

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R0
Second PMC First PMC
Third PMC
R1 Dual-check safety
PMC
.
.
.
∼ ∼
R1499

.
.
.
∼ ∼
R7999

R9000

R9001

.
.
.
∼ ∼
R9499

- 65 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R)

Internal addresses (R) 9000s are an area managed by the system

program.

Operation results of functional instructions

This area holds information necessary for individual ladder levels, such
as the operation results of functional instructions. This information is
saved/restored when the task is switched.

(1) R9000 (operation output register for the ADDB, SUBB, MULB,
DIVB, and COMPB functional instructions)

The result is 0.
The result is negative.
The result has
overflowed.

(2) R9000 (error output for the EXIN, WINDR, and WINDW
functional instructions)

The result is erroneous.

(3) R9002 to R9005 (operation output registers for the DIVB

functional instruction)
The remainder of a division performed with the DIVB functional
instruction is output to these addresses.

- 66 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

System timers
Four signals can be used as system timers.
Their specifications are as follows.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9091

Normally OFF signal

Normally ON signal

200 ms cyclic signal

(104 ms ON and 96 ms OFF)

1 s cyclic signal
(504 ms ON and 496 m OFF)

CAUTION
1 Each signal is initially OFF.
2 The signals R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set at the
beginning of the first ladder level on every cycle.
3 Each pulse signal (ON-OFF signal) has an error of ±8
or 4 ms (ladder execution period).

- 67 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

Ladder execution start signal

Ladder stop signal
Ladder execution status signal

Using the ladder execution start and stop signals in a ladder program
can detect when the ladder program starts and stops.
Referencing the ladder execution status signal from an external system
or program, such as the network board, C executor program, FOCAS1
Ethernet, or HSSB library, can detect the execution status of the ladder
program.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9015
R9015.0: "Ladder execution start
signal" (can be referenced
only from the ladder
program)
R9015.1: "Ladder stop signal" (can be
referenced only from the
ladder program)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9091

R9091.2: "1st Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed

R9091.3: "2nd Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed

R9091.4: "3rd Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed

Signal operation

- 68 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Ladder execution status Execution

Stop

"Ladder execution start

signal"

"Ladder stop signal"

"Ladder execution status

signal"

One ladder One ladder

scan cycle scan cycle

- 69 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(1) Ladder execution start signal (R9015.0)

When directed to start ladder program execution, the system
software starts executing the ladder program, turns on this signal,
and keeps it on for the first one scan cycle. Like R9000, this
signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is securely
turned on for the first one scan cycle after the start of execution no
matter on what execution level the signal is referenced. This
signal is turned on when:
(a) Ladder execution begins at power turn-on.
(b) The [RUN] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(c) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs the
ladder to start.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution has begun, making it possible to program
preprocessing related to ladder execution.

CAUTION
Reference this signal only within a ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder execution
separately for each ladder execution level.

(2) Ladder stop signal (R9015.1)

When directed to stop ladder program execution, the system
software turns off this signal and keeps it off for the last one scan
before stopping ladder program execution. Like R9000, this
signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is securely
turned off for the last one scan before the stop of execution no
matter on what execution level the signal is referenced. This
signal is turned off when:
(a) The [EXIT] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(b) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs the
ladder to stop.
(c) On the PMC DATA I/O screen, the ladder program is loaded
to the PMC.
(d) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package stores the
ladder program to the PMC.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution stops, making it possible to program
postprocessing related to ladder execution (that is, preprocessing
for ladder execution stop). Before the ladder is stopped, for
example, it is possible to put signals in an proper state for safety
purposes.

- 70 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

CAUTION
1 Reference this signal only within the ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder execution
separately for each ladder execution level.
2 If the power is turned off or a CNC system alarm
occurs, ladder execution and I/O signal transfer are
immediately stopped for safety purposes. In this
case, therefore, this signal cannot be used.

(3) Ladder execution status signal (R9091.2,R9091.3,R9091.4)

Referencing this signal from an external system or program, such
as the network board, C executor program, FOCAS1 Ethernet, or
HSSB library, can detect the execution status of the ladder
program.

(4) Example of using the signals

(a) Example of calling a subprogram just before the ladder stops

- 71 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(b) Example of forcibly turning off an output signal

programmed on the first ladder level just before the ladder
stops

Input Output

(c) Example of sending an execution-in-progress signal to the

outside
Outputting the status of this signal as the DO signal (output
address from the PMC) assigned to the I/O Link causes the
CNC unit to be interlocked with an external system.

CNC unit
Y0.0
R9015.1 Y0.0 I/O Link slave

I/O Link

- 72 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Extended relay area volatile/nonvolatile status signal

The extended relay area (address E) can be optionally configured as

nonvolatile. Referencing this signal can check whether the extended
relay area is nonvolatile.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9091

Extended relay (E) area volatile/

nonvolatile status signal
0: Volatile
1: Nonvolatile

- 73 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.2.5 Extended Relay Addresses (E)

The following table lists the number of signals (bytes) that can be used
as extended relays.
Extended relays can be used in the same manner as for internal relays.
Turning on the power clears this area to 0.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of bytes 10000 10000 10000 -

For the multi-PMC function, this area is common memory. It is

possible for each PMC program to read the same value from, and write
it to, the area.

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
E0

E1

.
.
.
∼ ∼
E9999

NOTE
The extended relay addresses (E) can be optionally
configured as nonvolatile. When they are
nonvolatile, turning off the power does erase the
memory contents.

- 74 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.6 Message Display Addresses (A)

These addresses are intended to be used for a message display request

and message status display.
The following table lists how many messages can be used (number of
messages = number of bytes × 8).
Turning on the power clears this area to 0.
See descriptions about the DISPB functional instruction in Chapter 4
for explanations about how to use this area.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Display
Number of 250 250 250 250
request
bytes
Status display 250 250 250 250
Display
Number of 2000 2000 2000 2000
request
messages
Status display 2000 2000 2000 2000

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A0
Message display request

A1

.
.
.
∼ ∼
A249

A9000
Message status display

A9001

.
.
.
∼ ∼
A9249

- 75 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.2.7 Timer Addresses (T)

These addresses are an area for variable timers used with the TMR
instruction and an area for the precision of the variable timers.
The following table lists how many timers can be used (number of
timers = number of bytes/2).
The number of timer precision values matches that of the timers.
Turning off the power does not cause the memory contents to be erased
because these areas are nonvolatile memory.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of bytes 500 80 80 80
Number of timer
500 80 80 80
precision(bytes)
Number of timers 250 40 40 40

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Variable
timer
T0
Second PMC First PMC
T1 Third PMC
Dual-check
safety PMC
.
. ∼ ∼
.
T79

.
. ∼ ∼
.
T499

Variable-timer
T9000 precision
Second PMC First PMC
T9001 Third PMC
Dual-check
safety PMC
.
. ∼ ∼
.
T9079

.
. ∼ ∼
.
T9499

- 76 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.8 Counter Addresses (C)

These addresses are an area for variable counters used with the CTR
instruction and an area for fixed counters used with the CTRB
instruction.
The numbers of the counters that can be used are:
The number of variable counters = number of bytes/4
The number of fixed counters = number of bytes/2
Turning off the power does not cause the memory contents to be erased
because these areas are nonvolatile memory.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of
400 80 80 80
Variable bytes
counters Number of
100 20 20 20
counters
Number of
200 40 40 40
Fixed bytes
counters Number of
100 20 20 20
counters

- 77 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0 Variable
Second PMC First PMC
C1
Preset value counter
Third PMC
Counter Dual-check
C2 No. 1 safety PMC
Cumulative value
C3

.
.
.
∼ ∼
C76
Preset value
C77
Counter
C78 No. 20
Cumulative value
C79

.
.
.
∼ ∼
C396
Preset value
C397 Counter
No. 100
C398
Cumulative value
C399

C5000 Fixed
Second PMC First PMC
C5001
Cumulative value counter
Third PMC
Dual-check
. safety PMC
.
.
∼ ∼
C5038
Cumulative value
C5039

.
.
.
∼ ∼
C5198
Cumulative value
C5199

- 78 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.9 Keep Relay Addresses (K)

These addresses are areas for keep relays and PMC parameters.
The following table lists the number of bytes that can be used. It also
lists information related to the nonvolatile memory control addresses
and the area (system area) used by the management software.
Turning off the power does not cause the memory contents to be erased
because these areas are nonvolatile memory.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of User area 100 20 20 20
bytes System area 100 100 100 100
Nonvolatile memory control
K909 K909 K909 K909
address
Area used by the
K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
management software

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K0
Second PMC First PMC
Third PMC
K1 Dual-check
safety PMC
.
.
.
∼ ∼
K19

.
.
.
∼ ∼
K99

K900

K901

.
.
.
∼ ∼
K999

- 79 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.2.10 Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K)

This address is intended to be used in, for example, the configuration in

which the position of a movable mechanical part (such as a lathe turret)
is stored as code data (such as BCD) to nonvolatile memory to preserve
the current machine position even when the power is turned off.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K909 MWRTF2 MWRTF

On the KEEP RELAY screen, it is possible to set and display the

address of the nonvolatile memory. It is also possible for a sequence
program to read or write the address.
If the power is accidentally turned off when the turret is rotating, the
turret stops at an unexpected position and a mismatch occurs between
the current position stored in the memory and the actual turret position.
When the power is resumed and a normal operation begins, the
mismatch results in an incorrect sequence operation.
To prevent such a malfunction, make a check by using nonvolatile
memory control in a sequence program as follows:
(1) Write "1" to MWRTF for the nonvolatile memory control before
the turret starts moving.
(2) Start the turret.
(3) After the turret has stopped, reset MWRTF to "0".
(4) If the power is turned off after the turret has started, therefore,
MWRTF stays at "1".
(5) When the CNC power is turned on, MWRTF2 is set to "1"
automatically if MWRTF is "1", thus informing the sequence
program of the failure.
To sum up, the sequence program performs steps (1) to (4) and
checks for an abnormal condition, using MWRTF2. If an
abnormal condition (NWRTF2 = 1) is detected, an alarm is raised
to the operator, using a user-created alarm output program.
(6) Recognizing the alarm, the operator resets MWRTF and
MWRTF2 to "0" on the KEEP RELAY screen.
(7) After making the memory content match the actual turret position,
restart operation.

- 80 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.11 System Keep Relay Addresses (K)

The following table lists the keep relay area used by the system (PMC
management software).

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Area used by the
K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
management software

Explained below is the meaning of each bit of the system keep relay
address. The bits and addresses left unused are reserved for use by the
system.
The system keep relays indicated with an asterisk (*) can be set up,
using setting parameters.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K900 DTBLDSP MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK

[Data type] Bit

LADMASK PMC program view inhibit(*)
0: The sequence program is allowed to be viewed.
1: The sequence program is inhibited from being viewed.
PRGRAM Programmer function enable(*)
0: The built-in programmer function is disabled.
1: The built-in programmer function is enabled.
AUTORUN PMC program execute(*)
0: The sequence program is automatically started when the power is
turned on.
1: The sequence program is started, using the sequence program
execution soft key.
MEMINP Memory write permit(*)
0: The forcing and override functions are disabled.
1: The forcing and override functions are enabled.

NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Override
enable" (K906.0).

DTBLDSP Data table GRP setting display(*)

0: The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is displayed.
1: The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is not displayed.

- 81 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K901 IGNDINT EDTENBL

[Data type] Bit

EDTENBL Editing permit(*)
0: The sequence program is inhibited from being changed.
1: The sequence program is allowed to be changed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K902 PROTPRM HIDEPRM IOLKRTRY ALLWSTOP FROM-WRT

[Data type] Bit

FROM-WRT Save after edit(*)
0: After being edited, the sequence program is not automatically
written to flash ROM.
1: After being edited, the sequence program is automatically written
to flash ROM.
ALLWSTOP PMC stop enable(*)
0: The sequence program is inhibited from being started/stopped.
1: The sequence program is allowed to be started/stopped.
IOLKRTRY
0: A retry is performed at an I/O Link communication error.
1: A retry is not performed at an I/O Link communication error.
HIDEPRM PMC parameter view inhibit(*)
0: PMC parameters are allowed to be displayed and sent to the
outside.
1: PMC parameters are inhibited from being displayed or sent to the
outside.
PROTPRM PMC parameter change inhibit(*)
0: PMC parameters are allowed to be changed and read.
1: PMC parameters are inhibited from being changed or read.

- 82 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K906 SRCST EOUTPUT IOLNKCHK IOGRPSEL OVRRID

[Data type] Bit

OVRRID Override enable(*)
0: The override function is disabled.
1: The override function is enabled.

NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Memory
write permit" (K900.4).

IOGRPSEL IO GROUP SELECTION screen(*)

0: The selectable I/O Link assignment function setting screen is not
displayed.
1: The selectable I/O Link assignment function setting screen is
displayed.
IOLNKCHK
0: The I/O Link connection check function is enabled.
1: The I/O Link connection check function is disabled.
EOUTPUT
0: On the I/O screen, the E address is output when PMC parameters
are output.
1: On the I/O screen, the E address is not output when PMC
parameters are output.
SRCST Trace function start(*)
0: The trace function is not executed when the power is turned on.
1: The trace function is automatically executed when the power is
turned on.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K909 MWRTF2 MWRTF LASER_IO

[Data type] Bit

LASER_IO
0: The contents of the DI/DO area are not transferred during initial
ladder execution.
1: The contents of the DI/DO area are transferred during initial
ladder execution.
MWRTF For nonvolatile memory control. See Subsection 2.2.10.
MWRTF2 For nonvolatile memory control. See Subsection 2.2.10.

- 83 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

K916 Message shift start address (LOW)

K917 Message shift start address (HIGH)
Message shift start address(*)
[Valid data range] Range of the A addresses
This area is used to specify the message shift start address value (word
type) by converting it to bit data form.
The bit offset for the A addresses is calculated as follows:

A address Calculation Bit offset

Ax.y x×8+y = z

Example:
A0.0 0×8+0 = 0
A249.7 249 × 8 + 7 = 1999

K918 Message shift amount (LOW)

K919 Message shift amount (HIGH)
Message shift amount(*)
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This area is used to specify the message shift amount value (word type)
by converting it to bit data form.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K920 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0

[Data type] Bit

Groups 0 to 7 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 0 to 7 to addresses X/Y0 to X/Y127 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K921 Group 15 Group 14 Group 13 Group 12 Group 11 Group 10 Group 9 Group 8

[Data type] Bit

Groups 8 to 15 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 8 to 15 to addresses X/Y0 to X/Y127 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.
- 84 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K922 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0

[Data type] Bit

Groups 0 to 7 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 0 to 7 to addresses X/Y200 to X/Y327 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K923 Group 15 Group 14 Group 13 Group 12 Group 11 Group 10 Group 9 Group 8

[Data type] Bit

Groups 8 to 15 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 8 to 15 to addresses X/Y200 to X/Y327 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K924 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0

[Data type] Bit

Groups 0 to 7 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 0 to 7 to addresses X/Y400 to X/Y527 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

- 85 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K925 Group 15 Group 14 Group 13 Group 12 Group 11 Group 10 Group 9 Group 8

[Data type] Bit

Groups 8 to 15 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 8 to 15 to addresses X/Y400 to X/Y527 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K926 Group 7 Group 6 Group 5 Group 4 Group 3 Group 2 Group 1 Group 0

[Data type] Bit

Groups 0 to 7 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 0 to 7 to addresses X/Y600 to X/Y727 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K927 Group 15 Group 14 Group 13 Group 12 Group 11 Group 10 Group 9 Group 8

[Data type] Bit

Groups 8 to 15 For the selectable I/O Link assignment function, whether to enable or
disable assignment of groups 8 to 15 to addresses X/Y600 to X/Y727 is
specified.
0: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
enabled.
1: Assignment of each group to the corresponding bit position is
disabled.

- 86 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.12 Data Table Addresses (D)

PMC sequence control sometimes requires a sizable amount of numeric

data (hereinafter referred to as data table). If the contents of a data
table can be set or read freely, they can be used as various PMC
sequence control data, such as tool numbers of tools on the ATC
magazine.
Each table can have an arbitrary size as long as it fits the data table
memory, and 1-, 2-, and 4-byte binary and BCD data can be used for
each table separately; so it is possible to configure efficient, easy-to-
use tables.
Data in a data table can be set in PMC nonvolatile memory or displayed
via the DATA TABLE screen.
Data set in data tables can also be easily read and written with the
sequence program using functional instructions such as data search
(DSCHB) and index modification data transfer (XMOVB).
The following table lists the number of bytes that can be used.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of bytes 10000 3000 3000 3000

(1) Data table configuration

The PMC data table consists of table control data and data tables.
The table control data manages the data form (binary or BCD) and
size of each table.
Creating a data table requires first setting up table control data
from the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen.
The sequence program cannot read or write the table control data.
If the Floppy Cassette is used to read or write the contents of the
nonvolatile memory, however, the table control data is read or
written together. Fig. 2.2.12 (a) roughly shows the configuration
of the data table. Fig. 2.2.12 (b) shows it in detail.

- 87 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

Table control data Data table

Address number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D0
Data held separately Second PMC First PMC
Third PMC
∼ from data table ∼ D1 Dual-check
(address D)
safety PMC
.
.
.
∼ ∼
D2999

.
.
.
∼ ∼
D9999

Fig. 2.2.12 (a) General configuration of data table

NOTE
In some cases, the start address of a data table is
odd. If an odd number of 1-byte data tables are
created, for example, the start address of the next
data table may be odd. This setting is acceptable.
However, an even start address assures faster
operations than an odd start address. We
recommend you use even start addresses whenever
possible.

- 88 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Number of table n
groups

Table parameter

Data type
Table group 1
control data
Number of data items

Table start address

Table parameter

Table group 2 Data type

Table control data
control data
Number of data items

Table start address

Table parameter

Data type
Table group n
control data
Number of data items

Table start address

Address
D0 Intra-table number
D1 0 Data
D2 1 Table group 1
:
n1
Intra-table number
0
1
2 Data
3 Table group 2 Data table
:
n2
Intra-table number

Intra-table number
0 Data
1 Table group n
: (Note) n1, n2, and np are the last
np intra-table number of the
respective data tables.

Fig. 2.2.12 (b) Detailed configuration of data tables

- 89 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(2) Table control data

The table control data is used to manage data tables.
Unless this data is correctly set up, it is impossible to create data
tables, explained in (3), correctly.
While referencing the descriptions in this item, first set up table
control data and then data tables.
(a) Number of table groups
This item specifies how many groups are to form the data
table, using a binary number.
(b) Table group 1 control data to table group n control data
Each data table is provided with table control data. The
meaning of data (table start address, table parameter, data
type, and the number of data items) set up as table control
data is the same for all table groups.
(i) Table start address
This item specifies the start address of a data area used
for each data table.
(ii) Table parameter

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SIGN HEX MASK COD
COD
0: Data in the data table is in binary form.
1: Data in the data table is in BCD form.
MASK
0: The contents of the data table is not protected.
1: The contents of the data table is protected.
HEX
0: Data in the data table is in binary or BCD form.
1: Data in the data table is in HEX form.

SIGN
0: Data in the data table is signed.
1: Data in the data table is unsigned.

NOTE
1 The setting of COD (bit 0) is valid if HEX (bit 2) = 0.
2 The setting of SIGN (bit 3) is valid if COD (bit 0) = 0
and HEX (bit 2) = 0.

- 90 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(iii) Data type

This item specifies the length of data in the data table.
0 : 1 byte long
1 : 2 bytes long
2 : 4 bytes long
(iv) Number of data items
This item specifies the number of data items in the data
table.

(3) Data table

A data table can be divided into several groups, and each group
can be created within the memory range (address D) for the data
table.
The number of groups is determined according to the number of
table control data table groups.

Intra-table number

Table group 1
(1-byte data)

Table group 2
(2-byte data)

Data in each data table can be 1-, 2, or 4-byte data depending on

the data type of the corresponding table control data.
If the table data is 1-byte data, one intra-table number in the
corresponding data table is assigned to one byte of data. If the
table data is 2-byte data, one intra-table number is assigned to two
bytes of data.

- 91 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(4) Creating data for a data table

Data for a data table is created by specifying an intra-table number
for the data table and entering the data into the table from the
DATA TABLE screen. A specific method for specifying intra-
table numbers is available for individual data table groups
separately.

NOTE
The sequence program can also read and write the
data table.

- 92 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.13 Subprogram Number Addresses (P)

These addresses are used to specify jump destination subprogram

labels in the CALL and CALLU instructions.
Each subprogram number must be unique in the entire sequence
program.
The following tables lists the number of subprograms that can be used.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Number of subprograms 5000 512 512 512

- 93 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.2.14 Label Number Addresses (L)

These addresses are used to specify jump destination labels (positions

within the sequence program) in the JMPB and JMPC instructions.
The same label number can be specified for different instructions as
long as the instructions are not within the same program unit (main
program or subprogram).
The following table lists the number of labels that can be used.

30i-A
Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check
First PMC
(option) (option) safety PMC
Number of labels 9999 9999 9999 9999

- 94 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.3 PMC PARAMETERS

The term "PMC parameter" refers to any of the timer, counter, keep
relay parameters, and data table. PMC parameters are held in
nonvolatile memory, whose contents are not lost even when the power
is turned off.

(1) Timer
This parameter specifies a timer value.
It is possible to set and display the timer value on the TIMER
screen.
The sequence program can read and write the timer setting.

(2) Counter
This parameter is used for a counter preset value and cumulative
value. It is possible to set and display these values on the
COUNTER screen. Sequence program instructions can also read
and write these settings. See Subsection 2.2.8 for details of the
counter addresses.
Counter data is two bytes in ether BCD or binary form. Higher-
order bits are held at higher addresses. Whether the counter
address is BCD or binary is determined according to the
corresponding PMC system parameter.
The default setting is binary form.

(Example) If the counter addresses of the PMC are C0 and C1,

and the preset value is 1578

BCD format (1578)

Binary format (1578)

- 95 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

To change the lower digit of the preset value to a certain value,

using a 1-byte processing instruction in the sequence program,
write the new data by specifying C0 with an output address in the
parameter of a functional instruction.

(3) Keep relay

This parameter is used for parameters for sequence control, keep
relays, and others.
It can be set and displayed from the KEEP RELAY screen.
It can also be read and written, using instructions in the sequence
program.
The data set up or displayed from the KEEP RELAY screen is 8-
bit binary data. On the KEEP RELAY screen, therefore, each of
the eighth digits is set or displayed as 0 or 1.

(4) Data table

The data table enables a set of numeric data (data table) to be used
for PMC sequence control.
See Subsection 2.2.12 for details.

2.3.1 Cautions for Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile Memory

All data in the nonvolatile memory can be read and written with the
sequence program. The memory from which the sequence program
reads and to which it writes is not nonvolatile in effect. It has the same
data as in the nonvolatile memory in a form of nonvolatile memory
image (RAM). For this reason, turning off the power lets the data of
nonvolatile memory image disappear. However, data is sent from the
nonvolatile memory as nonvolatile memory image immediately after
the power is resumed, thus restoring the previous data correctly.
If the sequence program rewrites the nonvolatile memory image, the
changed data is automatically sent to the nonvolatile memory.
Data at more than one address in the nonvolatile memory image can be
rewritten at any time. The changed data is automatically sent to the
nonvolatile memory.
Therefore, reading from and writing to the nonvolatile memory with
the sequence program does not require any special processing. Writing
to the nonvolatile memory takes time (about 100 ms), however.

- 96 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.3.2 PMC Parameter Format

This subsection describes the format used in outputting the contents of

the PMC nonvolatile memory to an external device.

(1) Header information

The data begins with header information. Its format is as follows:
[Format]
%; (PMC = xxx, MSID = n)
PMC = xxx "xxx" is the model name of the PMC.
MSID = n "n" is ID information.
The following table lists values that can be set as "xxx" or "n".

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC Safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
xxx 30i-A 30i-A 30i-A 30i-A
n 1 2 3 9

(2) Timer (T)

[Format]
N60xxxx Pnnnnn; Timer setting
N Sum of the timer address (T) offset and 600000.
The sum can range from N600000 to N600xxx and
from N609000 to N609xxx. "xxx" can take the
values listed below.
P Timer address value in decimal notation. It can
range from 0 to 32767 for a range of N600000 to
N600498.

(Example)
N600000 P1; (Timer number 1 T0)
N600002 P20; (Timer number 2 T2)
.
N600498 P32767; (Timer number 250 T498)

N609000 P0; ( T9000)

N609002 P0; ( T9002)
.
N609498 P0; ( T9498)

NOTE
At present, N609000 to N609xxx are a reserved
area, and P0 is set up for it.

- 97 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
xxx 498 038 038 038

(3) Counter (C)

[Format]
N61xxxx Pnnnnn; Counter preset and current values
N Sum of the counter address (C) and 610000. The
sum can range from N610000 to N610xxx and from
N615000 to N615nnn. "xxx" and "nnn" can take
the values listed below.
P Counter address value in decimal notation. It has a
size of 2 bytes and can range from 0 to 32767 for a
range of N610000 to N610xxx. The preset and
current values alternate. For a range of N615000 to
N615nnn, each counter value can range from 0 to
32767, and only the current values appear. The
counter addresses are assumed to be binary for
input/output no matter whether the counter data
type is specified as BCD or binary.

(Example)
N610000 P7; (Counter number 1 C0)
N610002 P7; ( C2)
.
N610396 P9999; (Counter number 100 C396)
N610398 P0; ( C398)

N615000 P7; (Fixed-counter number 1 C5000)

N615002 P20; (Fixed-counter number 2 C5002)
.
N615198 P9999; (Fixed-counter number 100 C5198)

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
xxx 398 078 078 078
nnn 198 038 038 038

- 98 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(4) Keep relay (K)

[Format]
N62xxxx Pnnnnnnnn;
N Sum of the keep relay address (K) offset and
620000. The sum can range from N620000 to
N6200xx and from N620900 to N620999.
P Keep relay address value in binary notation. It can
range from 00000000 to 11111111 for a range of
N620000 to N6200xx. For a range of N620900 to
N620999, it can range from 00000000 to 11111111.

(Example)
N620000 P00000000; (K0)
N620001 P11111111; (K1)
.
N620099 P10101010; (K99)

N620900 P00000000; (K900)

N620901 P11111111; (K901)
.
N620999 P10101010; (K999)

"xx" indicating a range can take the values listed below.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
xx 99 19 19 19

- 99 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(5) Data (D)

(a) Data table control

[Format]
N630000 Pnn; Total number of table groups (1 to
100)
N630002 Pnnnnnnnn; Group 1 table parameter (bit type)
N630003 Pn; Group 1 data type (0, 1, 2)
N630004 Pnnnn; Number of data items in group 1 (1 to
xxxxx)
N630006 Pnnnn; Start address of data in group 1 (0 to
nnnn)
N630010 Pnnnnnnnn; Group 2 table parameter (bit type)
N630011 Pn; Group 2 data type (0, 1, 2)
N630012 Pnnnn; Number of data items in group 2 (1 to
xxxxx)
N630014 Pnnnn; Start address of data in group 2 (0 to
nnnn)
N Sum of the control data table address offset and
630000. The sum can range from N630000 to
N630600.
P Control data table address value.
"Total number of groups" Range: 1 to 100
"Table parameter" Range: 00000000 to
11111111
"Data type" Range: 0 to 2
"Number of data items in a group" Range: 1 to xxxxx
"Start address of data in a group" Range: 0 to nnnn

(Example)
N630000 P2;
N630002 P00000000;
N630003 P0;
N630004 P10;
N630006 P0;
N630010 P00000001;
N630011 P0;
N630012 P10;
N630014 P10;

"xxxxx" and "nnnn" indicating a range can take the values listed
below.
30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
xxxxx 10000 3000 3000 3000
nnnn 9999 2999 2999 2999

- 100 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(b) Data table

[Format]
N64xxxx Pnnnnn;
N Sum of the data table address (D) offset and 640000.
The sum can range from N640000 to N64nnnn.
P Data table address value. Its size depends on the
"data type" of data table control data and is
represented using a signed decimal number. It can
rage from -128 to 127, from -32768 to 32767, and
from -2147483648 to 2147483647, respectively, for
1-, 2-, and 4-byte data.

(Example)
N640000 P-128;
N640001 P100;
N640002 P0;
.
N640010 P1000;
N640012 P-1;
.
N649992 P50000000;
N649996 P50000000;

"nnnn" indicating a range can take the values listed below.

30i-A
Dual-check
Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
nnnn 9999 2999 2999 2999

- 101 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(6) Expansion memory (E)

[Format]
N69xxxx Pnnnnn;
N Sum of the expansion memory (E) offset and
690000. The sum can range from N690000 to
N699999.
P Expansion memory (E) address value represented
using a signed decimal number. It can range from
-128 to 127.
(Example)
N690000 P-128;
N690001 P100;
.
N697998 P127;
N697999 P0;
%

NOTE
1 E address is output in the first PMC parameter.
2 Setting keep relay K906.3 to 1 disables the E
address from being output.

- 102 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

2.4 PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM

2.4.1 Setting Parameters

The parameters set up on the PMC SETTING screen are called the
setting parameters. Part of the system keep relays described earlier can
be set up using setting parameters.
This subsection describes the setting parameters for each setup menu.
See Section 9.8 for explanations about the setting screen and how to
use it.

(1) Trace function start (K906.5 0: Manual. 1: Automatic.)

This item specifies whether to allow the trace function to be
executed automatically when the power is turned on. The default
setting is "Manual" (not automatic execution).

(2) Editing permit (K901.6 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the functions related to
program editing. The default setting is "No" (not to enable).

(3) Save after edit (K902.0 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to perform an automatic write to flash
ROM after program editing. The default setting is "No" (not to
perform an automatic write).

(4) Memory write permit (K900.4 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the forcing and override
functions. The default setting is "No" (not to enable).

NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Override
enable" (K906.0).

(5) Data table GRP setting display (K900.7 0: Yes. 1: No.)

This item specifies whether to display the DATA TABLE
CONTROL screen. The default setting is "Yes" (to display).

(6) PMC parameter view inhibit (K902.6 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to inhibit the PMC PARAM screens
(TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY, DATA TABLE screens)
from being displayed and the PMC parameter data from being sent
to the outside. The default setting is "No" (not to inhibit).

- 103 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

(7) PMC parameter change inhibit (K902.7 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to inhibit data from being input from
the PMC PARAM screens (TIMER, COUNTER, KEEP RELAY,
and DATA TABLE screens) and the PMC parameter data from
being input from the outside. The default setting is "No" (no to
inhibit).

(8) PMC program view inhibit (K900.0 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to inhibit the sequence program from
being viewed. The default setting is "No" (not to inhibit).

(9) IO GROUP SELECTION screen (K906.1 0: Hide. 1: Display.)

This item specifies whether to display the selectable I/O Link
assignment function setting screen. The default setting is "Hide"
(not to display).

(10) PMC program execute (K900.2 0: Automatic. 1: Manual.)

This item specifies whether to cause the sequence program to be
started automatically when the power is turned on. The default
setting is "Automatic" (to cause automatic start).

(11) PMC stop enable (K902.2 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to allow the sequence program to
start/stop. The default setting is "No" (not to allow).

(12) Programmer function enable (K900.1 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the built-in programmer
function. The default setting is "No" (not to enable).

(13) Override enable (K906.0 0: No. 1: Yes.)

This item specifies whether to enable the override function. The
default setting is "No" (not to enable).

NOTE
Using the override function requires setting "Memory
write permit" (K900.4).

(14) Message shift amount (K918, K919)

This item specifies how much to shift the message display request
bits in displaying language-specific information, using the DISPB
functional instruction. No default setting is available.

(15) Message shift start address (K916, K917)

This item lets you input the start bit address for the area of
message display request bits to be shifted in displaying
language-specific information, using the DISPB functional
instruction. No default setting is available.

- 104 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(16) Selectable I/O Link assignment function: Selecting a valid group:

(0: No. 1: Yes.)
This item specifies a group to be enabled or disabled for the
selectable I/O Link assignment function for individual addresses.
The default setting is 0 (disable) for all groups.

See Section 3.3 for the selectable I/O Link assignment function.

- 105 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.4.2 PMC System Parameters

The parameters set up on the PMC SYSTEM PARAMETER screen are

called the system parameters.
This subsection describes the system parameters for each setup menu.
See Section 9.8 for explanations about the how to operate the SYSTEM
PARAMETER screen.

(1) Counter type

This item specifies the data type of a counter value used on the
COUNTER screen (CTR functional instruction). It can be
represented in either binary or BCD form.

(2) FS0-compatible operator's panel

This item specifies whether to connect an operator's panel for the
FS0. If the setting is "Yes", specify also the DI/DO address to
which the operator's panel is actually connected, the address of the
KEY image transferred from the operator's panel, and the address
of the LED image to be transferred to the operator's panel.
(a) DI address
This item specifies the start address of the external DI to
which the operator's panel is actually connected, using PMC
addresses (X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, or
X600 to X727).
(b) DO address
This item specifies the start address of the external DO to
which the operator's panel is actually connected, using PMC
addresses (Y0 to Y127, Y200 to Y327, Y400 to Y527, or
Y600 to Y727).
(c) Key input image address
This item specifies the start address of the KEY image to be
referenced by the user program, using a PMC address.
Usually, set up an arbitrary internal relay (R) area.

- 106 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(d) LED output image address

This item specifies the start address of the LED image
generated by the user program, using PMC addresses.
Usually, set up an arbitrary internal relay area (R).

(3) Selectable I/O Link assignment function

This item specifies whether to enable/disable the selectable I/O
Link assignment function for each address and the number of the
related basic groups.
(a) Function enable
This item specifies whether to enable/disable the selectable
I/O Link assignment function.
(b) Number of basic groups
This item specifies the number of groups that are always
enabled no matter what machine configuration is employed.

See Section 3.3 for explanations about the selectable I/O Link
assignment function.

- 107 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.4.3 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs

The CNC parameters related to the PMCs can be divided into those for
controlling communication with FANUC LADDER-III and ladder
editing package and those for setting up the PMCs.

The following table summaries the CNC parameters related to the

PMCs.

Table 2.4.3 (a) Summary of the CNC parameters related to the PMCs
No. Use Remarks
24 Setting up communication with PMC online connection
ladder development tools function
11900 to Execution sequence for multiple First PMC to Third PMC
11902 PMCs
11905 to Percent execution time for First PMC to Third PMC
11907 multiple PMCs
11910 to I/O Link input/output address Channels 1 to 4
11913
11920 to CNC interface control address CNC10 system
11929
11930 Ladder 1 level execution period First PMC to Third PMC
11931#1 Run/stop of Ladder First PMC to Third PMC

- 108 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Communication parameters

00024 Setting up communication with ladder development tools (FANUC LADDER-

III and ladder editing package)

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0 to 255

This item specifies whether to enable/disable the PMC online

connection function.
Entering this parameter makes it possible to enable/disable the PMC
online setup function without displaying the PMC online setup screen.

Setting RS-232C High-speed interface

0 The settings on the PMC online setup screen are
changed.
1 To be used (channel 1) Not to be used
2 To be used (channel 2) Not to be used
10 Not to be used To be used
11 To be used (channel 1) To be used
12 To be used (channel 2) To be used
255 Communication is forced to stop (equivalent to the [EMG
STOP] soft key).

NOTE
1 The setting of this parameter is put into effect when it
is changed or the power is turned on. It is
unnecessary to turn the power off and on again after
the parameter is re-set.
2 The setting changed on the PMC online setup screen
is not reflected to this parameter.
3 As for the RS-232C, the communication settings,
such as a baud rate, specified on the PMC online
setup screen are valid. The valid settings are a baud
rate of 9600 bps, no parity, and two stop bits if no
change has been made on the PMC online setup
screen since installation.

- 109 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

PMC setup parameters

Execution sequence for multiple PMCs

11900 PMC having the first priority in execution sequence

11901 PMC having the second priority in execution sequence

11902 PMC having the third priority in execution sequence

NOTE
Once any of these parameters is re-set, it is
necessary to turn the power off and on again.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
This item specifies the execution sequence for each PMC if the multi-
PMC function is used.

Setting PMC
0 Standard setting (see below)
1 First PMC
2 Second PMC
3 Third PMC

When all these parameters are 0, the standard execution sequence

setting shown below is used.

Second
First PMC PMC Third PMC

Other processing such as

tracing

Fig. 2.4.3 (a) Standard execution sequence for multiple PMCs

CAUTION
If any of these parameters is nonzero, a duplicate or
missing number results in the PMC alarm "ER50
PMC EXECUTION ORDER ERROR", thus disabling
all the PMCs from starting.

- 110 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Percent execution time for multiple PMCs

Percent execution time for the PMC having the first priority in execution
11905
sequence

Percent execution time for the PMC having the second priority in execution
11906
sequence

Percent execution time for the PMC having the third priority in execution
11907
sequence

NOTE
Once any of these parameters is re-set, it is
necessary to turn the power off and on again.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0 to 100

This item specifies the percent execution time for each PMC if the
multi-PMC function is used.

When all these parameters are 0, the standard execution time settings
listed below are used.

Table 2.4.3 (b) Standard settings of the percent execution time for
multiple PMCs
PMC PMC PMC
having the having the having the
Multi-PMC configuration
first second third
priority priority priority
First PMC only 100%
First and second PMCs 85% 15%
First and third PMCs 85% 15%
First, second, and third PMCs 75% 15% 10%

NOTE
1 If these parameters are set to too low a value, it may
be impossible to start the first level on every scan.
2 Even if you input the same program in both second
and thrid PMC, the scan time of both programs may
not correspond because of changing of the waiting
time by execution timming.
3 If the sum of these parameter settings exceeds 100,
the PMC alarm "ER51 PMC EXECUTION
PERCENTAGE ERROR" occurs, thus disabling all
PMC from starting.

- 111 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

I/O Link input/output addresses

11910 I/O Link channel 1 input/output addresses

11911 I/O Link channel 2 input/output addresses

11912 I/O Link channel 3 input/output addresses

11913 I/O Link channel 4 input/output addresses

NOTE
Once any of these parameters is re-set, it is
necessary to turn the power off and on again.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 103, 200 to 203, 300 to 303, 900 to 903
This item specifies input/output addresses for an I/O Link channel.

Table 2.4.3 (c) I/O Link channel input/output addresses

Setting Input/output address
0 Standard setting (see below)
100 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the first PMC
101 X200 to X327/Y200 to Y327 for the first PMC
102 X400 to X527/Y400 to Y527 for the first PMC
103 X600 to X727/Y600 to Y727 for the first PMC
200 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the second PMC
201 X200 to X327/Y200 to Y327 for the second PMC
202 X400 to X527/Y400 to Y527 for the second PMC
203 X600 to X727/Y600 to Y727 for the second PMC
300 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the third PMC
301 X200 to X327/Y200 to Y327 for the third PMC
302 X400 to X527/Y400 to Y527 for the third PMC
303 X600 to X727/Y600 to Y727 for the third PMC
900 X0 to X127/Y0 to Y127 for the dual-check safety PMC

- 112 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

If all these parameters are 0, all channels are assigned to the first PMC
(standard setting) as shown below.

First PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327

Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527

Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727

Fig. 2.4.3 (b) Standard input/output address setting for the I/O Link
channel

CAUTION
1 If any of these parameters is nonzero, a duplicate
number results in the PMC alarm "ER52 IOLink
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ERROR", thus disabling
all the PMCs from starting.
2 If these parameters are not set up in part, it is
impossible to assign a PMC address to the related
channel.

- 113 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

CNC-PMC interface

11920 CNC-PMC interface 1 input/output address

11921 CNC-PMC interface 2 input/output address

11922 CNC-PMC interface 3 input/output address

11923 CNC-PMC interface 4 input/output address

11924 CNC-PMC interface 5 input/output address

11925 CNC-PMC interface 6 input/output address

11926 CNC-PMC interface 7 input/output address

11927 CNC-PMC interface 8 input/output address

11928 CNC-PMC interface 9 input/output address

11929 CNC-PMC interface 10 input/output address

NOTE
Once any of these parameters is re-set, it is
necessary to turn the power off and on again.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 109, 200 to 209, 300 to 309
This item assigns a PMC F/G address to a CNC F/G address.

CNC First PMC

CNC F/G address First-PMC F/G address

Second PMC
Second-PMC F/G address

Third PMC
Third-PMC F/G address

Fig. 2.4.3 (c) CNC-PMC interface assignment concept

- 114 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Table 2.4.3 (d) CNC-PMC interface input/output address

Setting Input/output address
0 Standard setting (see below)
100 F0 to 767/G0 to G767 for the first PMC
101 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 for the first PMC
102 F2000 to F2767/G2000 to G2767 for the first PMC
103 F3000 to F3767/G3000 to G3767 for the first PMC
104 F4000 to F4767/G4000 to G4767 for the first PMC
105 F5000 to F5767/G5000 to G5767 for the first PMC
106 F6000 to F6767/G6000 to G6767 for the first PMC
107 F7000 to F7767/G7000 to G7767 for the first PMC
108 F8000 to F8767/G8000 to G8767 for the first PMC
109 F9000 to F9767/G9000 to G9767 for the first PMC
200 F0 to F767/G0 to G767 for the second PMC
201 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 for the second PMC
202 F2000 to F2767/G2000 to G2767 for the second PMC
203 F3000 to F3767/G3000 to G3767 for the second PMC
204 F4000 to F4767/G4000 to G4767 for the second PMC
205 F5000 to F5767/G5000 to G5767 for the second PMC
206 F6000 to F6767/G6000 to G6767 for the second PMC
207 F7000 to F7767/G7000 to G7767 for the second PMC
208 F8000 to F8767/G8000 to G8767 for the second PMC
209 F9000 to F9767/G9000 to G9767 for the second PMC
300 F0 to F767/G0 to G767 for the third PMC
301 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 for the third PMC
302 F2000 to F2767/G2000 to G2767 for the third PMC
303 F3000 to F3767/G3000 to G3767 for the third PMC
304 F4000 to F4767/G4000 to G4767 for the third PMC
305 F5000 to F5767/G5000 to G5767 for the third PMC
306 F6000 to F6767/G6000 to G6767 for the third PMC
307 F7000 to F7767/G7000 to G7767 for the third PMC
308 F8000 to F8767/G8000 to G8767 for the third PMC
309 F9000 to F9767/G9000 to G9767 for the third PMC

- 115 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

If all these parameters are 0, the standard setting is used, that is, "CNC
F/G address = first-PMC F/G address" is satisfied.

CNC First PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 for the CNC F/G0 to F/G767 for the first PMC

F/G1000 to F/G1767 for the CNC F/G1000 to F/G1767 for the first PMC

F/G2000 to F/G2767 for the CNC F/G2000 to F/G2767 for the first PMC

F/G3000 to F/G3767 for the CNC F/G3000 to F/G3767 for the first PMC

F/G4000 to F/G4767 for the CNC F/G4000 to F/G4767 for the first PMC

F/G5000 to F/G5767 for the CNC F/G5000 to F/G5767 for the first PMC

F/G6000 to F/G6767 for the CNC F/G6000 to F/G6767 for the first PMC

F/G7000 to F/G7767 for the CNC F/G7000 to F/G7767 for the first PMC

F/G8000 to F/G8767 for the CNC F/G8000 to F/G8767 for the first PMC

F/G9000 to F/G9767 for the CNC F/G9000 to F/G9767 for the first PMC

Fig. 2.4.3 (d) CNC-PMC interface initial settings

CAUTION
1 If any of these parameters is nonzero, a duplicate
number results in the PMC alarm "ER54 NC-PMC I/F
ASSIGNMENT ERROR", thus disabling all the PMCs
from starting.
2 If these parameters are not set up in part, it is
impossible to assign a PMC address to the related
CNC F/G address.

- 116 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

Level 1 execution period

11930 Ladder level execution period

NOTE
Once this parameters is re-set, it is necessary to turn
the power off and on again.

[Input type] Byte input

[Data type] Integer
[Valid data range] 0, 4, 8
This item specifies an execution period for ladder level 1.

Setting Meaning
4 Executed at a 4-ms interval.
0, 8 Executed at an 8-ms interval.

CAUTION
1 Setting this parameter to a value other than 0, 4, or 8
results in the PMC alarm "ER55 LEVEL1
EXECUTION CYCLE ERROR", thus disabling all
PMCs from starting.

Start or stop of the ladder

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11931 PPC

[Data type] Bit

PPC This item specifies start or stop of the ladder as follows:
0: The ladder is started or stopped independently for each
PMC.
1: The ladders in all PMCs are started or stopped together.

NOTE
Once this parameters is re-set, it is necessary to turn
the power off and on again.

- 117 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.5 COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL MODELS

2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B

The PMCs for the Series 30i-A are highly compatible with the PMC-
MODEL SA1 and PMC-MODEL SB7 for the Series 16i/18i/21i-
MODEL B on the source level.

Table 2.5.1 Compatibility with the PMCs for the Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B
30i-A
First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual-check
Model
(option) (option) safety PMC
(option)
PMC-SA1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
PMC-SB7 ¡ ▲ ▲ ▲
(¡: Upward-compatible. ▲: Partly compatible)

Transporting programs require modification because the specifications

of the following functions have been changed.

(1) For the Series 16i/18i/21i –MODEL B, the first level execution
period is fixed at 8 ms. For the Series 30i-MODEL A, however, it
can be switched between 4 and 8 ms, using a CNC parameter.
(2) For the PMC-MODEL SB7, the basic instruction execution speed
is 33 ns/step. For the PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A, it is 25
ns/step.
(3) As the execution speed of instructions become fast, the following
items about execution timing may be changed.
- The execution cycle of both first and second level of ladder
- The timing of the execution cycle of first level of ladder
according to the partition of second level ladder
- The timing between ladder execution and I/O transfer
The working test of the machine is necessary.
(4) The used size of system and symbol/comment are changed.
Generally, the program size for S30i PMC becomes bigger than
one for PMC-SB7 even if the same source program is converted.
If the program size exceed the capacity of the flash ROM, please
change the ladder step option or reduce the symbol and comment.
(5) For the PMC-MODEL SA1 and PMC-MODEL SB7, the timer
precision defined with the TMR functional instruction is fixed at a
certain value. For the PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A, the
timer precision can be set up for each timer number separately.
See Subsection 4.3.1 for details.

- 118 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(6) The nonvolatile memory control keep relay (MWRTF and

MWRTF2) has been changed from K16 to K909.
(7) In the PMC-MODEL SA1 and loader control PMCs, the keep
relay system area has been changed from "K17 to K20" to "K900
to K999".
(8) A part of window function for PMC-MODEL SA1 and SB7 is not
supported. See “5 Window function” for available window
function.
(9) The contents of the completion codes for some window functions
are changed. See “5 Window function” for the completion codes.
(10) The MMCWR, MMCWW, and FNC90 to FNC97 functional
instructions are treated as a NOP.
(11) Programs can be created on the third level because of program
compatibility. The operations on the third level are not
guaranteed with respect to timing, however. Use only the first and
second levels in programming.

PMC parameter compatibility

Parameters prepared for conventional PMC models can be loaded to

the PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A.

The PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A have a smaller address range
than the models indicated as "Partly compatible" in Table 2.5.1. So the
parameters prepared for these models can be loaded partly into the
PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A. Any data that does not fit the
address range is discarded.
See Subsection 2.3.2.

- 119 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.5.2 Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-MODEL A/B

The PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A are compatible with the
PMC-MODEL NB6 for the Series 15i-MODEL A/B with respect to
instructions on the source level except for some functions. The
specifications of these functions have been changed, thus requiring
modification in transporting programs. In addition, the arrangement
and specifications of the DI/DO signals (addresses G and F) used with
the CNC vary between the 30i- MODEL A and 15i-MODEL A/B. For
their sequences, it is necessary to modify signal addresses and control
logic.

(1) For the Series 15i-MODEL A/B, the first level execution period is
fixed at 8 ms. For the Series 30i-MODEL A, however, it can be
switched between 4 and 8 ms, using a CNC parameter.
(2) For the PMC-MODEL NB6, the basic instruction execution speed
is 85 ns/step. For the PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A, it is 25
ns/step.
(3) As the execution speed of instructions become fast, the following
items about execution timing may be changed.
- The execution cycle of both first and second level of ladder
- The timing of the execution cycle of first level of ladder
according to the partition of second level ladder
- The timing between ladder execution and I/O transfer
The working test of the machine is necessary.

(4) The used size of system and symbol/comment are changed.

Generally, the program size for S30i PMC becomes bigger than
one for PMC-SB7 even if the same source program is converted.
If the program size exceed the capacity of the flash ROM, please
change the ladder step option or reduce the symbol and comment.
(5) For the PMC-MODEL NB6, the timer precision defined with the
TMR functional instruction is fixed at a certain value. For the
PMCs for the Series 30i-MODEL A, the timer precision can be set
up for each timer number separately. See Subsection 4.3.1 for
details.
(6) The arrangement and specifications of the DI/DO signals
(addresses G and F) used with the CNC vary between the 30i-
MODEL A and 15i-MODEL A/B. Refer to the respective
connection manuals.
(7) The nonvolatile memory control keep relay (MWRTF and
MWRTF2) has been changed from K16 to K909.
(8) The SPCNT functional instruction is not supported. It is treated
as a NOP.

- 120 -
B-63983EN/01 2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS

(9) As for the WINDR and WINDW functional instructions, there is

no compatibility between the new and conventional PMC models,
because the structures of their control data are different.
(10) Programs can be created on the third level because of program
compatibility. The operations on the third level are not
guaranteed with respect to timing, however. Use only the first and
second levels in programming.

PMC parameter compatibility

Parameters prepared for the PMC-MODEL NB6 can be loaded to the

PMCs for the 30i-MODEL A.

- 121 -
2.PMC SPECIFICATIONS B-63983EN/01

2.5.3 The convert method of source program using FANUC

LADDER-III

The version of FANUC LADDER-III applied to Series 30i-A PMC is

4.0 or more.
- For new users A08B-9210-J505
- For up grade A08B-9210-J506

When you want to change ladder from old PMC to S30i-A PMC, you
can convert the source program using FANUC LADDER-III. Please
refer to following manual for details.

FANUC LADDER-III OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66234EN

“10.3 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAM BETWEEN PMC
MODELS”

The sequence of the conversion to S30i-A first PMC from PMC-SB7 is

as follows.

i) Convert a source program into the mnemonic file by FANUC

LADDER-III.([Tool]->[Source Program Convert])

ii) Change the system parameters in the mnemonic file for PMC-SB7
by text editor. (“4 PMC-SB7” -> “4 30i-A PMC”)

If the mnemonic file has insufficient parameters for S30i-A first PMC
from PMC-SB7, the initial values are set with conversion for the source
program.
The mnemonic file format of the system parameter for S30i-A first
PMC is as follows.

%@0
2 BINARY 2 : Counter type ( BINARY or BCD )
3 NO 3 : Operator panel ( YES or NO )
4 30i-A PMC 4 : PMC type ( 30i-A PMC )
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) ( 1-16 )
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 ( -1, 0-127 )
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 ( 0-16 )
%

iii) Create a new LAD file for S30i-A first PMC by FAPT
LADDER-III.

iv) Convert the mnemonic file to the source program.([Tool] ->

[Mnemonic Convert])

- 122 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3 I/O LINK

- 123 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.1 WHAT IS THE I/O LINK?

The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which passes input/output

signals between the PMC and each I/O device at a high speed.
For each channel, up to 1024 DI points and up to 1024 DO points can
be connected and controlled from the PMC.

NOTE
1 To use channels 2 to 4 of the I/O Link, the I/O Link
point expansion option is required for each channel.
2 The transfer cycle of signals from I/O devices is 2
ms with channels 1 and 2, or 4 or 8 ms (execution
cycle of the first ladder level) with channels 3 and 4.

- 124 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.1.1 Configuration of an I/O Link

The following figure shows a basic configuration of the I/O Link.

Slaves

I/O Unit I/O Unit

Group 0
I/O Link
master

Group 1
Operator's panel
connection unit

Group 2
Power Mate

: : : : :
: : : : :

Group 15

(1) The I/O Link consists of one master and multiple slaves.
Master: CNC (such as Series 30i-A)
Slaves: I/O Unit-MODEL A, Power Mate, operator's panel
connection unit, and other devices
(2) Up to 16 groups of slaves can be connected to one I/O Link.
Group numbers 0 to 15 are sequentially assigned. Number 0 is
assigned to the group nearest to the master.
The number of connected slaves in a group differs depending on
the types of slaves.
(3) Any slave can be connected in any group. One group must
consist of slaves of the same type, however.

- 125 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

NOTE
1 Turn the power to the slaves and master on
simultaneously or turn the power to the slaves on
before turning the power to the master.
2 When turning the power to the master off, also turn
the power to all slaves off. Turn the power to all
slaves on again before turning the power to the
master on or turn the power to all slaves and the
master on simultaneously. Turn the power to the
master on after turning the power to all slaves on or
turn the power to the master and all slaves on
simultaneously.
3 For the maximum number of slaves per group that
can be connected, refer to the hardware connection
manual for each I/O device used as a slave.

- 126 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.1.2 Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of the I/O Link

The I/O Link has up to 1024 input points and up to 1024 output points
for each channel when viewed from the master. These I/O points can
be assigned to each slave to periodically pass I/O data between the
master and each slave.
Each slave occupies the predetermined number of I/O points.
The total number of I/O points occupied by all slaves connected to one
channel is up to 1024 points (128 bytes) for each of input and output.
The number of I/O points occupied by one group is up to 256 points
(32 bytes) for each of input and output.

NOTE
The number of occupied I/O points may differ from
the actual number of I/O points. For example, if the
number of input points is smaller than or equal to that
of output points for a group, the number of input
points is assumed equal to that of output points. For
this reason, when the number of input points for the
actually connected hardware components is 128 and
that of output points is 256, the number of occupied
input points is assumed to be 256 because there is
the following relationship between the numbers of
input points and of output points:
128 (number of input points) ≤ 256 (number of
output points)
For more specific rules, see Section 3.2.

- 127 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.2 ASSIGNMENT METHOD

To use an I/O device as a slave, assign connection information to X

addresses (input) and Y addresses (output) of the PMC. The machine
tool builder should determine addresses to be used for input/output of
each I/O device in a sequence program. Connection information can
be assigned to these determined addresses using the PMC screen or
FANUC LADDER-III. The information is written in the flash ROM
together with the sequence program. For this reason, the set
information is not changed unless the sequence program is changed.
Information to be set to addresses includes the connection location and
module name of each I/O device.
The connection location of an I/O device is represented by its group,
base, and slot numbers. For the module name, set a name representing
the number of occupied I/O points.

Setting the connection location

I/O devices can roughly be divided into the following three types
according to the method for specifying the connection location.

(1) Type of I/O device whose connection location is specified with

its group, base, and slot numbers
I/O Unit-MODEL A is of this type. Specify the connection
location with its group, base, and slot numbers.
The range of valid settings of each item is as follows:
Group = 0 to 15
Base = 0 and 1
Slot = 1 to 10 (number of a slot on a I/O Unit-MODEL
A base board)
(2) Type of I/O device whose connection location is specified with
its group and slot numbers
I/O Unit-MODEL B and handy machine operator's panels are of
this type. Always set the base number to 0.
The range of valid settings of each item is as follows:
Group = 0 to 15
Base = 0 (Always set 0.)
Slot = 0 to 30 (NOTE)

NOTE
For detailed information on settings, see Subsections
3.2.2 and 3.2.6.

- 128 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

(3) Type of I/O device whose connection location is specified with

its group number
Machine operator's panel interface unit, I/O Link connection unit,
Power Mate, and other devices are of this type. One unit of this
type occupies one group. When using this type, always set the
base number to 0 and the slot number to 1.
The range of valid settings of each item is as follows:
Group = 0 to 15
Base = 0 (Always set 0.)
Slot = 1 (Always set 1.)

Setting the module name

Set the module name at the X or Y address assigned as input/output of

each I/O device. For the module name, see Tables 3.2 (a) to (c).
The number of bytes of the address occupied is determined for each
module name. The number of occupied I/O points per byte is 8.

NOTE
1 Assign the start byte of an analog input module
(AD04A) or analog output module (DA02A) to an
even input address (X ) or even output address
(Y ).
2 Always read an A/D converted digital value from an
input address (X ) or write a digital value to be
converted to an analog value to an output address
(Y ) in word (16-bit) units.

For details of the assignment method, see the assignment method for
each I/O device described later.

When you want to set assignment data using the I/O module screen,
for required operations, see Section 9.4.

- 129 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Table 3.2 (a) Module names (1)

Module name Occupied
Name Specifications
(actual module name) address
Input modules for ID32A (AID32A1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J101
I/O Unit-MODEL A ID32B (AID32B1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J102
ID32H (AID32H1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J111
ID16C (AID16C) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J103
ID16D (AID16D) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J104
ID16K (AID16K) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J113
ID16L (AID16L) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J114
ID32E (AID32E1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J105
ID32E (AID32E2) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J110
ID32F (AID32F1) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J106
ID32F (AID32F2) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J109
IA16G (AIA16G) 2 bytes for input A03B-0807-J107
AD04A (AAD04A) 8 bytes for input A03B-0807-J051
CT01A (CT01A in operation mode A)
(ACT01A) 4 bytes for input A03B-0807-J053
CT01B (CT01B in operation mode B)
ES01A (AES01A) 1 byte for input A03B-0807-C108
ID08F (AID08F) 1 byte for input A03B-0807-C112
Output modules for OD32A (AOD32A1) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J162
I/O Unit-MODEL A OD08C (AOD08C) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J151
OD08D (AOD08D) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J152
OD16C (AOD16C) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J153
OD16D (AOD16D) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J154
OD32C (AOD32C1) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J155
OD32C (AOD32C2) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J172
OD32D (AOD32D1) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J156
OD32D (AOD32D2) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J167
OA05E (AOA05E) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J157
OA08E (AOA08E) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J158
OA12F (AOA12F) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J159
OR08G (AOR08G) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-J160
OR16G (AOR16G) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J161
OR16H (OR16H2) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J165
DA02A (ADA02A) 4 bytes for output A03B-0807-J052
BK01A (ABK01A) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C164
OA08K (AOA08K) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C169
OD08L (AOD08L) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C170
OD16D (AOD16D2) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-C171
OR08I (AOR08I3) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C166
OR08J (AOR08J3) 1 byte for output A03B-0807-C168
Output modules with an /2 (AOD16DP) 2 bytes for output A03B-0807-J182
output protection function /1 (AOD08DP) 1 byte for input
for I/O Unit-MODEL A A03B-0819-J183
/1 (AOD08DP) 1 byte for output
Input/output module for IO24I (AIO40A) 3 bytes for input
A03B-0807-C200
I/O Unit-MODEL A IO16O (AIO40A) 2 bytes for output

- 130 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Table 3.2 (b) Module names (2)

Module name Occupied
Name Specifications
(actual module name) address
FANUC CNC SYSTEM 4 bytes for input FANUC Series 0-C
FS04A
FANUC Power Mate 4 bytes for output (compatible with the FANUC I/O Link)
8 bytes for input FANUC Power Mate-MODEL
FS08A
8 bytes for output A/B/C/D/E/F/H
OC02I 16 bytes for input
OC02O 16 bytes for output
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D/H
OC03I 32 bytes for input
OC03O 32 bytes for output
I/O Link β amplifier OC02I 16 bytes for input FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series
OC02O 16 bytes for output I/O Link option
Analog input module AD04A (AAD04A) 8 bytes for input
Analog output module DA02A (ADA02A) 4 bytes for output
Connection unit 1 CN01I 12 bytes for input
A20B-1005-0310
CN01O 8 bytes for output
Connection unit 2 CN02I 24 bytes for input
A20B-1003-0200
CN02O 16 bytes for output
Operator's panel /8 8 bytes for input A16B-2200-0661 (sink type)
connection unit A /4 4 bytes for output A16B-2201-0731 (source type)
Operator's panel CN01I 12 bytes for input 16B-2200-0660 (sink type)
connection unit B CN01O 8 bytes for output A16B-2201-0730 (source type)
Machine operator's panel OC02I 16 bytes for input
interface unit OC02O 16 bytes for output
A16B-2201-0110
OC03I 32 bytes for input
OC03O 32 bytes for output
Modules for I/O Unit- bytes for input Specify a value of 1 to 8 indicating the number
#
MODEL B bytes for output of bytes for input/output for .
Specify an area for reading the power on-off
## 4 bytes for input
state of each unit of I/O Unit-MODEL B.
I/O Link connection unit bytes for input Specify a value of 1 to 8 indicating the number
#
bytes for output of bytes for input/output for .
OC02I 16 bytes for input
OC02O 16 bytes for output
OC03I 32 bytes for input
OC03O 32 bytes for output
Distribution I/O CM03I 3 bytes for input Basic unit only
connection panel I/O CM06I 6 bytes for input Uses expansion unit 1.
modules CM09I 9 bytes for input Uses expansion unit 2.
CM12I 12 bytes for input Uses expansion unit 3.
CM13I 13 bytes for input Uses the first MPG.
CM14I 14 bytes for input Uses the second MPG.
CM15I 15 bytes for input Uses the third MPG.
CM16I 16 bytes for input Uses DO alarm detection.
CM02O 2 bytes for output Basic unit only
CM04O 4 bytes for output Uses expansion unit 1.
CM06O 6 bytes for output Uses expansion unit 2.
CM08O 8 bytes for output Uses expansion unit 3.

- 131 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Table 3.2 (c) Module names (3)

Module name Occupied
Name Specifications
(actual module name) address
Distribution I/O CM06I 6 bytes for input
operator's panel I/O CM13I 13 bytes for input Uses the first MPG.
modules CM14I 14 bytes for input Uses the second MPG.
CM15I 15 bytes for input Uses the third MPG.
CM16I 16 bytes for input Uses DO alarm detection.
CM04O 4 bytes for output
CM08O 8 bytes for output
External I/O cards A and /6 6 bytes for input A16B-2201-0071(A)
D for the Power Mate /4 4 bytes for output A16B-2202-0733(D)
External I/O cards B and OC01I 12 bytes for input A16B-2201-0070(B)
E for the Power Mate OC01O 8 bytes for output A16B-2202-0732(E)
External I/O cards C and /3 3 bytes for input A16B-2600-0150(C)
F for the Power Mate /2 2 bytes for output A16B-2600-0170(F)
Handy machine 2 bytes for input
#2
operator's panel 2 bytes for output
(NOTE 3) ## 4 bytes for input
AS-i converter unit OC03I 32 bytes for input
OC03O 32 bytes for output

NOTE
1 For the specifications and connection of each I/O
device, refer to the relevant hardware connection
manual.
2 For the assignment method for each I/O device, see
Subsections 3.2.1 to 3.2.8.
3 As assignment data for a handy machine operator's
panel, assign multiple module names successively.
For details, see Subsection 3.2.6.

- 132 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.2.1 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A

Figs. 3.2.1 (a) and 3.2.1 (b) show sample configurations of I/O Unit-
MODEL A.

I/O Unit I/O Unit

I/O Link
A A Group 0
master
I I

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
1 1
A B
Base 0 Base 1

Fig. 3.2.1 (a)

I/O Unit I/O Unit

I/O Link
A A Group 0
master
I I
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
1 1
A B
Base 0 Base 1

I/O Unit I/O Unit

A A Group 1
I I
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
1 1
A B
Base 0 Base 1

Operator's panel Group 2

connection unit

Base 0

Group 3
Power Mate

Base 0

Fig. 3.2.1 (b)

- 133 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Assignment method

(1) Group number

For I/O Unit-MODEL A, up to two I/O units can be connected
when interface module AIF01A is used as the basic unit and
expansion interface module AIF01B is also used. This is called
the base expansion function. This set of up to two I/O units
comprises one group (see Fig. 3.2.1 (a)). When required I/O
modules cannot be contained only in one group or when multiple
I/O units are to be distributed at distant locations on the machine
side, the second AIF01A can be connected to the first AIF01A
using a cable to add a group. (See Fig. 3.2.1 (b).)

(2) Base number

One group consists of up to two I/O base units. The base number
of the I/O unit on which interface module AIF01A is mounted is
0; the base number of the other I/O unit is 1.
In other words, when the base expansion function is used, the
base number of the basic unit is always 0 and that of the
expansion unit is always 1. When the base expansion function is
not used, the base number is always 0.

(3) Slot number

On one I/O base unit, up to five (ABU05A) or ten (ABU10A)
I/O modules can be mounted depending on the type of I/O base
unit. The location of each module on the I/O base unit is
represented by a slot number. For each base unit, the location of
the I/O interface module is 0 and slot numbers 1 to 10 are
assigned from left to right. Each module can be mounted into
any desired slot. I/O modules may not be mounted closely from
left to right. An intermediate slot may not be used.

(4) Module name

For module names, see Tables 3.2 (a) to (c) in Section 3.2 above.
Actual module names begin with A. When setting a module
name, remove this A. Some actual module names may end with
a numeric character. In this case, when setting a module name,
also remove the numeric character.
(Example 1) To set module AID16D, enter ID16D.
(Example 2) To set module AID32A1, enter ID32A.

- 134 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

NOTE
For I/O Unit-MODEL A, when assigning 3, 5, 6, or 7
bytes, change the module name as follows.
Do not use IO24I, /3, /5, /6, or /7 as a module name.

Module names
Before change → After change
IO24I → /4
/3 → /4
/5 → /8
/6 → /8
/7 → /8

Number of occupied I/O points

Obtain the number of occupied I/O points as follows.

[Number of output points]

Total number of points required for output Number of occupied
modules used in one group I/O points
0 to 32 32
40 to 64 64
72 to 128 128
136 to 256 256

NOTE
When obtaining the number of points, assume that
the number of points required for AOA05E is 8 and
that of points required for AOA12F is 16.

[Number of input points]

Total number of points required for input modules Number of occupied
used in one group I/O points
0 to 32 32
40 to 64 64
72 to 128 128
136 to 256 256

If the obtained total number of input points is smaller than or equal to

that of output points in the same group, however, the number of input
points is assumed equal to that of output points. For this reason, when
the number of input points for the actually connected hardware
components is 128 and that of output points is 256, the number of
occupied input points is assumed to be 256.

- 135 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Related hardware manual

"FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual"

(B-61813E)

NOTE
For the specifications and connection of I/O Unit-
MODEL A and related I/O modules, refer to the
hardware connection manual for each I/O device.

- 136 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.2.2 Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B

I/O Unit-MODEL B can be used together with I/O Link devices such
as the Power Mate, operator's panel interface unit, connection unit,
and I/O Unit-MODEL A. In this case, I/O Unit-MODEL B comprises
one group and other units cannot be contained in the group.
An example of connection is shown below.

I/O LINK
MASTER

[GROUP] = 0
Power Mate

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
[GROUP] = 1

Operator's panel
interface unit

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
[GROUP] = 2

→SLOT No. →SLOT No.

I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A

[GROUP] = 3

[BASE] = 0 [BASE] = 1

I/O Unit-B
interface unit
I/O Unit-B I/O Unit-B
DI/DO unit DI/DO unit
(Unit No. = 1) (Unit No. = 20)

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1 [BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 20

I/O Unit-B I/O Unit-B

DI/DO unit DI/DO unit
(Unit No. = 5) (Unit No. = 10)

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 5 [BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 10

I/O Unit-B I/O Unit-B

DI/DO unit DI/DO unit
(Unit No. = 30) (Unit No. = 9)

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 30 [BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 9

- 137 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Assignment method

As the group number, set the group number used in the configuration.
As the base number, always set 0. As the slot number, set the unit
number of a DI/DO unit of I/O Unit-MODEL B. To assign power on-
off information, set 0 for the slot number.
Set the following values for the slot number and assignment name:
Slot number: 0: Power on-off information
1 to 30: Unit number
Assignment name: Module name representing the address
occupied by the I/O Unit-MODEL B
DI/DO unit (see Table 3.2 (b).)

Number of input or
output points required
Assignment name Occupied address
for [basic unit] +
[expansion unit]
1 byte #1 1 byte for input/output
2 bytes #2 2 bytes for input/output
3 bytes #3 3 bytes for input/output
4 bytes #4 4 bytes for input/output
6 bytes #6 6 bytes for input/output
8 bytes #8 8 bytes for input/output
10 bytes #10 10 bytes for input/output
Power on-off information ## 4 bytes for input

Example of setting

To connect an I/O Unit-MODEL B DI/DO unit with unit number 10

whose occupied address is 3 bytes in GROUP=1:
Enter 1.0.10.#3.

NOTE
When channels 2 to 4 are also used to connect I/O
devices, the maximum total number of groups used
for connecting I/O Unit-MODEL B with channels 1 to
4 is 8.

- 138 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Interface module incorporating I/O Unit-MODEL A

Interface module AIF02C can control communication both with I/O

Unit-MODEL A and with I/O Unit-MODEL B.

I/O Unit I/O Unit

I/O Link
A A
master Group 0
I I

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5

Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
F F
0 0
2 1
C B
Group 1

I/O Unit-MODEL B I/O Unit-MODEL B I/O Unit-MODEL B

DI/DO unit DI/DO unit DI/DO unit

Group 2
Operator's panel
connection unit

For the AIF02C, the base expansion function of the AIF02A is

removed and the functions of the I/O Unit-MODEL B interface unit
are added.
When I/O Unit-MODEL A is not used, only I/O Unit-MODEL B
cannot be used. The base expansion function cannot also be used.
The AIF02C occupies two groups. Assignment is required for each of
I/O Unit-MODEL A and I/O Unit-MODEL B.

NOTE
For details of the AIF02C, refer to "FANUC I/O Unit-
MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual" (B-
61813E).

Related hardware manual

"FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL B Connection Manual" (B-62163E)

NOTE
For the setting of each I/O Unit-MODEL B unit and
the specifications and connection of related I/O
modules, refer to the hardware connection manual for
each I/O device in addition to the above connection
manual.

- 139 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.2.3 Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection Panel I/O

Modules and Distribution I/O Operator's Panel I/O Modules

For the I/O Link, when assigning connection information of a

connection panel or operator's panel I/O module, set an I/O Link serial
number (0 for the module nearest to the I/O Link master CNC) for the
group number, always set 0 for the base number, and always set 1 for
the slot number. When basic and expansion connection panel I/O
modules are used, assign one connection information item for all
modules in one I/O Link group. For a distribution I/O module unlike
I/O Unit-MODEL A, the slot number need not be specified. For the
module name used to set assignment data, see "Distribution I/O
connection panel I/O modules" in Table 3.2 (b).
An example of assignment is shown below.

Example of assignment

Example)

CNC

JD1A

72 input points (16 general-purpose points + 56 matrix points), 56 output points

(X4…, Y0…)

Operator's panel
I/O module
A20B-2002-0470
JD1B
JD1A

96 input points, 64 output points (X20…, Y10…)

Connection Expansion Expansion Expansion
panel I/O module 1 module 2 module 3
basic module
JD1B
JD1A

24 input points, 16 output points (X100…, Y100…)

Connection
panel I/O
basic module
JD1B
JD1A

- 140 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Group number Base number Slot number Assignment

name
X004 0 0 1 CM14I
X020 1 0 1 CM12I
X100 2 0 1 CM03I
Y000 0 0 1 CM08O
Y010 1 0 1 CM08O
Y100 2 0 1 CM02O

- 141 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Connection panel I/O modules

For signal mapping of connection panel I/O modules, refer to the

connection manual (hardware) for the CNC used as the I/O Link
master.
Assignment data is described below for each configuration of basic
and expansion modules.

CAUTION
Always connect expansion modules 1, 2, and 3 in this
order closely when required. Any intermediate
expansion module cannot be skipped.

Basic Expansion Expansion

module module 1 module 2
JD1B
JD1A

You may want to make the above setting so that

expansion module 1 is not mounted to connect it later
and connection information of only expansion module
2 is assigned, but the setting is disabled.

(1) Only basic module

24 input points, 16 output points

Basic
module
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM03I, output: Y=CM02O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM02O

- 142 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

(2) Basic module + expansion module 1

48 input points, 32 output points

Basic Expansion
module module 1
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM06I, output: Y=CM04O
• When one manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM13I, output: Y=CM04O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM04O

(3) Basic module + expansion module 1 + expansion module 2

72 input points, 48 output points

Basic Expansion Expansion

module module 1 module 2
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM09I, output: Y=CM06O
• When one manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM13I, output: Y=CM06O
• When two manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM14I, output: Y=CM06O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM06O

- 143 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

(4) Basic module + expansion module 1 + expansion module 2 +

expansion module 3

96 input points, 64 output points

Basic Expansion Expansion Expansion

module module 1 module 2 module 3
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM12I, output: Y=CM08O
• When one manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM13I, output: Y=CM08O
• When two manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM14I, output: Y=CM08O
• When three manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM15I, output: Y=CM08O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM08O

- 144 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Operator's panel I/O modules

For signal mapping of operator's panel I/O modules, refer to the

connection manual (hardware) for the CNC used as the I/O Link
master.

(1) Operator's panel I/O module (compatible with matrix input,

A20B-2002-0470)

Input: 16 general-purpose points + 56 matrix points

Output: 56 matrix points

Operator's panel
I/O module
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM12I, output: Y=CM08O
• When one manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM13I, output: Y=CM08O
• When two manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM14I, output: Y=CM08O
• When three manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM15I, output: Y=CM08O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM08O

- 145 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

(2) Operator's panel I/O module (A20B-2002-0520, A20B-2002-

0521)

48 input points
32 output points

Operator's panel
I/O module
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM06I, output: Y=CM04O
• When one manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM13I, output: Y=CM04O
• When two manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM14I, output: Y=CM04O
• When three manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM15I, output: Y=CM04O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM04O

(3) Distribution I/O machine operator's panel

(A20B-8001-0721, A20B-8001-0720, A20B-8001-0210)
Input: 8 points for override signals and so on + 24 general-purpose points + 64
matrix points
Output: 64 matrix points

Operator's panel
I/O module
JD1B
JD1A

(a) When DO alarm detection is not used

• When no manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM12I, output: Y=CM08O
• When one manual pulse generator is used
Input: X=CM13I, output: Y=CM08O
• When two manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM14I, output: Y=CM08O
• When three manual pulse generators are used
Input: X=CM15I, output: Y=CM08O
(b) When DO alarm detection is used
• Regardless of the number of manual pulse generators
Input: X=CM16I, output: Y=CM08O

- 146 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.2.4 Assignment Method for the Power Mate

To use Power Mate-MODEL D/H, Power Mate i-D/H, or I/O Link β

amplifier as an I/O Link slave, assign its connection information on
the I/O Link master.
On the I/O Link slave, assignment is not required because the
addresses are fixed.
An example of connection is shown below.

I/O LINK
MASTER

[GROUP] = 0
Operator's panel
interface unit

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1
[GROUP] = 1

Power Mate

[BASE] = 0, [SLOT] = 1

Assignment method
For the group number, set the group number used in the configuration.
For the base number, always set 0.
For the slot number, always set 1.

Number of input/output Input device assignment Output device assignment

points (input/output) name (module name) name (module name)
32/32 FS04A FS04A
64/64 FS08A FS08A
128/128 OC02I OC02O
256/256 OC03I OC03O

NOTE
1 Assign input and output module names with the
same number of points.
2 For the I/O Link β amplifier, assign OC02I/OC02O.

Examples of settings
To connect Power Mate-D with 256/256 points in group 1:
Enter 1.0.1.OC03I for input and 1.0.1.OC03O for output.

To connect an I/O Link β amplifier in group 1:

Enter 1.0.1.OC02I for input and 1.0.1.OC02O for output.

- 147 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.2.5 Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units

Conventionally, to exchange data between CNCs A and B, the devices

indicated by (a) in the figure below must be connected. (Any I/O
units can be used to exchange data.)

CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B

Model A Model A

(a)
I/O Unit ↔ I/O Unit
Model A Model A

I/O Unit I/O Unit

Model A Model A

An I/O Link connection unit replaces the connected devices to

eliminate cable connection and enable the power to each master or
slave to be turned on and off independently.

CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B

Model A Model A

← These devices are replaced with an

I/O Link connection unit.
I/O Unit (a) I/O Unit
Model A ↔ Model A

I/O Unit I/O Unit

Model A Model A

- 148 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Therefore, when an I/O Link connection unit is used, the connection is

as follows.

CNC A I/O Unit I/O Unit CNC B

Model A Model A

I/O Link
connection unit

I/O Unit I/O Unit

Model A Model A

Assignment method

Assignment data is determined according to the types of I/O devices

replaced with an I/O Link connection unit.

Occupied Input device assignment name Output device assignment

address name
1 to 8 / : Numeric character 1 to 8 / : Numeric character 1 to 8
16 OC02I OC02O
32 OC03I OC03O

Example of setting

To connect a connection unit whose occupied address is 16 bytes in

GROUP=1 as an input device:
Enter 1.0.1.OC02I.

NOTE
For details of the hardware connection method,
particularly connection of a power supply, refer to the
hardware connection manual for each related
master/slave device.

- 149 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.2.6 Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's Panel

An example of connecting a handy machine operator's panel to the I/O

Link is shown below.

I/O Link Handy machine

Group 0
master operator's panel

Operator's panel
Group 1
connection unit

Assignment method

Assign 16 bytes to X addresses and 32 bytes to Y addresses

contiguously starting from any address for each group. Set the group
number used in the configuration for the group number and always set
0 for the base number. Set the slot number and assignment name as
shown in the table below. The number of occupied input points for
each group is 32 bytes, which is the same as that of output points,
because of limitations of the I/O Link.

[Examples of assigning X addresses]

X address Slot number Assignment Occupied
name address
Xn+0 0 ## 4 bytes
Xn+4 1 #2 2 bytes
Xn+6 2 #2 2 bytes
Xn+8 3 #2 2 bytes
Xn+10 4 #2 2 bytes
Xn+12 5 #2 2 bytes
Xn+14 6 #2 2 bytes

- 150 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

[Examples of assigning Y addresses]

Y address Slot number Assignment Occupied
name address
Yn+0 7 #2 2 bytes
Yn+2 8 #2 2 bytes
Yn+4 9 #2 2 bytes
Yn+6 10 #2 2 bytes
Yn+8 11 #2 2 bytes
Yn+10 12 #2 2 bytes
Yn+12 13 #2 2 bytes
Yn+14 14 #2 2 bytes
Yn+16 15 #2 2 bytes
Yn+18 16 #2 2 bytes
Yn+20 17 #2 2 bytes
Yn+22 18 #2 2 bytes
Yn+24 19 #2 2 bytes
Yn+26 20 #2 2 bytes
Yn+28 21 #2 2 bytes
Yn+30 22 #2 2 bytes

- 151 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.2.7 Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit

An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit converts I/O from the I/O Link to the
AS-Interface (called AS-i below) to enable the use of AS-i slave
module DI/DO signals as a standalone unit.
The AS-i comes in two main versions: Ver 2.0 and Ver 2.1. Two
types of I/O Link-AS-i converter units are available for each of these
versions.
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit for Ver 2.0 differs from that for Ver
2.1 in the following points.

For Ver 2.0 For Ver 2.1

Number of 256 input points/256 output 512 input points/512 output
input/output points points points
Occupied groups 1 group Contiguous 2 groups

For each version, an example of connection is shown and the

assignment method is described below.

Example of connection for Ver 2.0

AS-i power Group 0

supply
I/O Link I/O Link-AS-i
master converter unit for
Ver 2.0 AS-i slave AS-i slave

Group 1

Operator's panel
connection unit

Assignment method for Ver 2.0

For the group number ([GROUP]), set the group number used in the
configuration. (Set 0 for the above example of connection.)
For the base number ([BASE]), always set 0.
For the slot number ([SLOT]), always set 1.
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit occupies 256 points (32 bytes) for
both input and output. Therefore, the assignment names are as
follows.

Input device assignment name Output device assignment name

OC03I OC03O
- 152 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Example of connection for Ver 2.1

AS-i power Groups 0 and 1

supply
I/O Link I/O Link-AS-i
master converter unit for
Ver 2.1 AS-i slave AS-i slave

Group 2

Operator's panel
connection unit

Assignment method for Ver 2.1

For the group number ([GROUP]), set the numbers for two contiguous
groups in the configuration. Set 0 and 1 for the above example of
connection.
For the base number ([BASE]), always set 0.
For the slot number ([SLOT]), always set 1.
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit occupies 512 points for both input
and output, 256 points (32 bytes) per group. Therefore, the
assignment names per group are the same as for an I/O Link-AS-i
converter unit for Ver 2.0. Set the same assignment names for each
occupied group number.

Group number Input device assignment Output device assignment

name name
n OC03I OC03O
n+1 OC03I OC03O

NOTE
An I/O Link-AS-i converter unit for Ver 2.1 cannot be
used as a converter unit for Ver 2.0 with assignment
data for Ver 2.0.

- 153 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.2.8 FS0 Operator's Panel

The FS0 operator's panel consists of many key-operated switches,

LEDs, a rotary switch, and other components. The status of each of
key-operated switches and lamps is coded and as many signal lines as
the number of actual switches are not required to connect the
operator's panel to a CNC. PMC management software automatically
codes the status and transfers data.
These operations require only that simple bit images indicating the
switches, LEDs, and other components to be operated by a PMC
ladder program.

CNC

Bit PMC Input Coding

images manage- Xn… Keyboard
Rk…
ment
software
Bit Output Coding
images Ym… LED
Rl…

Input Protect key

Contact Emergency stop
X*…
button
Override rotary
switch, etc.

FS0 operator's panel

G*… PMC Input
ladder X*…
(X)
CNC program
software (user) Interface with
another machine
Output
F*… Y*…

Fig. 3.2.8 (a) Block diagram of connection of an operator's panel

- 154 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

An operator's panel consists of the following keys, LEDs, and other

components:
• Key-operated switches (sheet keys)
42 keys (0-TC)
46 keys (0-MC)
• LEDs (red) on all key-operated switches
• Override rotary switch (4 bits)
• Emergency stop button (1 bit)
• Program protect key (1 bit)

Fig. 3.2.8 (b) Operator's panel for 0-TC

Fig. 3.2.8 (c) Operator's panel for 0-MC

- 155 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Fig. 3.2.8 (d) Machine operator's panel for the 0-TC full-keyboard 9-inch CRT/MDI unit

- 156 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Fig. 3.2.8 (e) Machine operator's panel for the 0-MC full-keyboard 9-inch CRT/MDI unit

- 157 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

Example of connection

CNC

MAIN CPU
I/O Link I/O unit FS0 operator's panel

JD1A
JD1B DI M1A
(I/O Link)
module

CP32

PSU DO M2A
CP6 JD1A module

24 VDC Another I/O unit

DI module: +24 V common, 24 ms

(Example) AID32A1
DO module: 0 V common
(Example) AOD32A1

Assignment method

For the group number ([GROUP]), set the group number used in the
configuration.
For the base number ([BASE]), always set 0.
For the slot number ([SLOT]), always set 1.
For the above example of connection, the FS0 operator's panel
occupies 32 points (4 bytes) for both input and output. Therefore, the
assignment names are as follows.

Input device assignment name Output device assignment name

ID32A OD32A

Operator's panel connection signals

Emergency stop signal (*ESP)

This signal is directly monitored by the CNC and is assigned at the

fixed address.
For connection, refer to the section describing the interface between
the CNC and PMC in the CNC connection manual.

- 158 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Override signals (*OV1 to *OV8) and

program protect key signal (KEY)

For these signals, the relevant key-operated switch contact signals are
directly input to the PMC. Directly process these signals with a PMC
ladder program.
For connection, refer to the section describing the interface between
the CNC and PMC in the CNC connection manual.

Key-operated switch signals (Xn, Xn+2)

Each key-operated switch signal is coded by PMC management

software and input to the relevant PMC address R as a bit image.
Whether a required key is pressed can be determined by checking the
bit image of the key-operated switch using the user PMC ladder
program. (See Tables 3.2.8 (a), 3.2.8 (b), and 3.2.8 (c).) When a key
is pressed, the bit corresponding to the key is 1.
Up to two keys can be input simultaneously. Do not use any keyboard
input method for a user PMC program that requires simultaneous
pressing of three or more keys. If three or more keys are pressed
simultaneously, they are not input correctly.
It takes up to 60 ms until the bit corresponding to a key is set to 1 (0)
after the key is pressed (released).
The address of a key-operated switch signal (Xn to Xn+2: Table 3.2.8
(a)) and the address of its bit image (Rk to Rk+7: Tables 3.2.8 (b) and
(c)) can be defined as the fixed address or an unused address without
restrictions.

LED signals (Ym)

Create each LED signal at PMC address R as a bit image in the user
PMC ladder program. PMC management software converts the bit
image of the LED signal to a coded output signal. (See Tables 3.2.8
(a), (b), and (c).) When a value of 1 is written in an LED bit image,
the corresponding LED is automatically turned on. In the same way,
when a value of 0 is written, the LED is turned off. All LEDs are off
at power-on.
It takes up to 200 ms until an LED is turned on (off) after a value of 1
(0) is written in the corresponding bit image by the PMC.

- 159 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

The address of an LED signal (Ym: Table 3.2.8 (a)) and the address
of its bit image (Rl to Rl+7: Tables 3.2.8 (b) and (c)) can be defined
as the fixed address or an unused address without restrictions.

Table 3.2.8 (a) Key-operated switch and LED signal addresses

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Xn KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0

Xn+1

Xn+2 KST KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0

Ym LD7 LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0

Table 3.2.8 (b) Key-operated switch and LED signal bit image addresses
(for a compact operator's panel)
KEY/LED #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rk/Rl F3 F2 F1 D1 C1 B1 A1

Rk+1/Rl+1 F4 D2 C2 B2 A2

Rk+2/Rl+2 D4 D3 C4 C3 B4 B3 A4 A3

Rk+3/Rl+3 F6 F5 D5 C5 B5 A5

Rk+4/Rl+4 F8 D6 C6 B6 A6

Rk+5/Rl+5 D8 C8 B8 A8 A7

Rk+6/Rl+6 F9 D9 C9 B9 A9

Rk+7/Rl+7 F10 D10 C10 B10 A10

- 160 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Table 3.2.8 (c) Key-operated switch and LED signal bit image addresses
(for a full-keyboard operator's panel)
KEY/LED #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rk/Rl E1 C1 A1 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6

Rk+1/Rl+1 E2 C2 A2 E7 D7 C7 B7 A7

Rk+2/Rl+2 E3 C3 A3 E8 D8 C8 B8 A8

Rk+3/Rl+3 E5 C4 A4 E9 D9 C9 B9 A9

Rk+4/Rl+4 D2 C5 A5 E10 D10 C10 B10 A10

Rk+5/Rl+5 D4 D5 B2 E11 D11 C11 B11 A11

Rk+6/Rl+6 D1 B1 B4 E12 D12 C12 B12 A12

Rk+7/Rl+7 D3 B3 B5 E13 D13 C13 B13 A13

Setting addresses

Use the system parameter screen to set key-operated switch and LED
signal addresses and bit image addresses.
For details of screen operations, see Section 9.8 described later. For
details of parameters to be set, see Section 2.4 described earlier.
The following simply describes how values set on the system
parameter screen are set at addresses shown in Tables 3.2.8 (a), (b),
and (c).

Example:
On the system parameter screen, specify that the FS0 operator's panel
is to be used. Then, set the start key-operated switch address for "DI
address", start LED signal address for "DO address", start key-
operated switch bit image address for "key input image address", and
start LED signal bit image address for "LED output image address".
When the following values are set:

DI address: X0
DO address: Y0
Key input image address: R900
LED output image address: R910

- 161 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

The addresses shown in Tables 3.2.8 (a), (b), and (c) are set to the
following PMC addresses:

Xn → X1000
Xn+1 → X0001
Xn+2 → X0002
Ym → Y1000

Rk / Rl → R0900 / R0910
Rk+1 / Rl+1 → R0901 / R0911
Rk+2 / Rl+2 → R0902 / R0912
Rk+3 / Rl+3 → R0903 / R0913
Rk+4 / Rl+4 → R0904 / R0914
Rk+5 / Rl+5 → R0905 / R0915
Rk+6 / Rl+6 → R0906 / R0916
Rk+7 / Rl+7 → R0907 / R0917

- 162 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.3 SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION

3.3.1 Outline

This function enables the common use of a sequence program for

several machines which have different I/O device configuration with
each other, by setting the parameter to enable/disable each group in
I/O link assignment data.

Machine A Machine B
I/O devices I/O devices

CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O

Mate Unit Mate Unit

I/O link assignment data I/O link assignment data

X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate) X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit) X24 1.0.1 I D32E (I/O Unit)

The I/O link assignment data of both the

machine A and the machine B are merged.
Off line programmer
I/O link assignment data
X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit)
X24 2.0.1 ID32E (I/O Unit)

Make ROM format file with I/O link assignment data that is used in both the
machine A and the machine B.

A sequence program is sent to CNC.

CNC
Set effective I/O groups on parameter.

Power Mate Enable Power Mate Enable

Connection Unit Enable Connection Unit Disable
I/O Unit Disable I/O Unit Enable

Machine A: I/O devices Machine B: I/O devices

CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O

Mate Unit Mate Unit

- 163 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

The I/O devices that are used in all machines can be set as basic part
of configuration that is always effective.

Basic part

Machine A: I/O devices Machine B: I/O devices

CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O

Mate Unit Mate Unit

The I/O link assignment data of the

machine A and the machine B are merged.
Off line programmer

I/O link assignment data

X0 0.0.1 FS08A (Power Mate) Basic part (always connected)
X8 1.0.1 OC02I (Connection Unit) Optional group by parameter
X24 2.0.1 ID32E (I/O Unit) Optional group by parameter

Determine the basic part and the optional part of I/O link assignment data.

The sequence program is sent to CNC

CNC

Set effective I/O group on parameter.

Power Mate Basic Power Mate Basic

Connection Unit Enable Connection Unit Disable
I/O Unit Disable I/O Unit Enable

Machine A : I/O devices Machine B : I/O devices

CNC Power Connection CNC Power I/O

Mate Unit Mate Unit

NOTE
When you set a basic part, you have to assign
devices of basic part continuously from group 0. And
the basic part is connected with the top of the link.

- 164 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

Basic part Optional part

Power Connection I/O

CNC OK
Mate Unit Unit

CNC Power Connection I/O NG

Mate Unit Unit

Optional part
Basic part

This function requires setting the following parameters. These

parameters can be set for each channel. For details of each parameter,
see Sections 2.4 and 9.5.

(1) ENABLE SELECTION:

Enables/Disables this function in the system parameter.
(2) BASIC GROUP COUNT:
Sets the counts of group in basic part in the system parameter.
(This part must be assigned continuously from group 0.) The
basic groups in I/O link assignment data are always effective on
all machine configurations.
(3) EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION:
Sets the group of optional I/O device that is connected with each
machine in the setting parameter. This parameter doesn't affect
the basic part.

NOTE
The use of the "I/O Link point expansion option" for
each of channels 2 to 4 enables this function for the
relevant channel.

- 165 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.3.2 Example

There are three machines which have different configurations of I/O

devices, each other.

• Configuration A
A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator's panel
and a connection panel I/O connected with channel 1 of NC.

Channel 1

CNC Distribution I/O machine Connection panel I/O

operator's panel
Group 0 Group 1

Channel 2
No connection

• Configuration B
A machine which has a distribution I/O machine operator's panel
and a Power Mate connected with channel 1 of NC.

Channel 1

CNC Distribution I/O machine Power Mate

operator's panel
Group 0 Group 1

Channel 2
No connection

- 166 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

• Configuration C
A machine which has the configuration A on channel 1 and two
beta amplifiers on channel 2.

Channel 1

CNC Distribution I/O machine Connection panel I/O

operator's panel
Group 0 Group 1

Channel 2

CNC Beta amp. Beta amp.

Group 0 Group 1

These machines can use a common sequence program which has I/O
link assignment data that includes all I/O device configurations. The
contents of parameters for each I/O device configuration are as shown
below.

(1) The contents of I/O link assignment data in sequence program

Channel 1
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0020 1 0 1 CM03I Connection panel I/O
: : : : : :
X0030 2 0 1 FS08A Power Mate
: : : : : :

Channel 2
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0200 0 0 1 OC02I Beta amp.
: : : : : :
X0220 1 0 1 OC02I Beta amp.
: : : : : :

- 167 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

(2) The contents of parameter

• Configuration A
• System parameter
X0000/Y0000
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1
X0200/Y0200
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 0
• Setting parameter
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0000/Y0000 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0200/Y0200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

• Configuration B
• System parameter
X0000/Y0000
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1
X0200/Y0200
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 0
• Setting parameter
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0000/Y0000 * 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0200/Y0200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

- 168 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

• Configuration C
• System parameter
X0000/Y0000
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 1
X0200/Y0200
ENABLE SELECTION = YES
BASIC GROUP COUNT = 0
• Setting parameter
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0000/Y0000 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Group NO.: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
X0200/Y0200 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(3) The actual contents of I/O link assignment data modified by the
parameter

• Configuration A
Channel 1
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0020 1 0 1 CM03I Connection panel I/O
: : : : : :

Channel 2
No connection

• Configuration B
Channel 1
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0030 1 0 1 FS08A Power Mate
: : : : : :

Channel 2
No connection

- 169 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

• Configuration C
Channel 1
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0000 0 0 1 CM12I Distribution I/O machine
operator’s panel
: : : : : :
X0020 1 0 1 CM03I Connection panel I/O
: : : : : :

Channel 2
Address Group Base Slot Name I/O device
X0200 0 0 1 OC02I Beta amp.
: : : : : :
X0220 1 0 1 OC02I Beta amp.
: : : : : :

- 170 -
B-63983EN/01 3.I/O LINK

3.3.3 Notes

(1) If PMC-parameters are cleared, cycling the power of CNC links

only the basic part.
(2) After selecting the assignment data, the I/O devices are linked
with shifted group number of effective I/O link assignment data.
You can check the actual result of connection using the I/O Link
connection display screen.

I/O link assignment data

Before selection After selection

Group 0 Effective Group 0

Group 1 Not effective Group 1

Group 2 Effective Group 2

Group 3 Not effective

Group 4 Effective

(3) You can not exchange the order of the I/O group number.

WARNING
1 If the machine is linked again with incorrect setting
of I/O link assignment parameters, the machine may
perform unexpected operation. If you want to have
the machine linked with I/O devices under the
selected I/O link assignment data, you have to turn
off and on power after the confirmation of the correct
connection of the I/O devices.
2 To prevent any operator error caused in a case as
described in "WARNING 1" above, it is
recommended that the "I/O Link connection check
function" be enabled. For details, see Section 3.4.

- 171 -
3.I/O LINK B-63983EN/01

3.4 I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION

The I/O Link connection check function always checks whether the
number of I/O Link groups defined in a sequence program is the same
as that of actually connected groups. When the selectable I/O Link
assignment function is used, the I/O Link connection check function
compares the number of selected groups with that of connected groups.
If these numbers of groups do not match, the PMC alarm "ER97 IO
LINK FAILURE (CHx yyGROUP)" is issued. For action to be taken,
see Section 10.1.

NOTE
1 All I/O devices connected to the channel in which
this alarm occurs are not linked.
2 The ladder program is executed regardless of
whether this alarm occurs.

The execution of this function can be controlled using keep relay

K906.2.

K906.2
0: Enables the I/O Link connection check function. (Initial value)
1: Disables the I/O Link connection check function.

CAUTION
If I/O devices are linked in the status in which an I/O
device error or I/O device connection error occurs or
the setting of an I/O device is changed due to an
unintentional operation, the machine may not operate
normally. This function can always be operated to
detect an I/O device error at power-on. To
troubleshoot problems with I/O devices easily, it is
recommended that keep relay K906.2 be set to the
initial value (0).

- 172 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4 LADDER LANGUAGE

- 173 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS

Designing a sequence program entails drawing a ladder diagram.

Draw a ladder diagram by using relay contact symbols as well as
symbols representing the functional instructions described later. The
logic laid out in the ladder diagram is input to the programmer as a
sequence program.
You can input a sequence program to the programmer in two ways -
the relay symbol input method whereby relay contact symbols and
functional instruction symbols drawn in the ladder diagram are used as
they are (−−, −/−, −¡−, etc.) and the mnemonic format input
method that uses the mnemonic language (PMC instructions such as
RD, AND, and OR).
The relay symbol input method allows the ladder diagram format to be
used as it is, thus letting you input a sequence program in an intuitive,
easy-to-understand manner. You will virtually have no trouble
creating a program even if you have little or no knowledge of the
PMC instructions (basic instructions such as RD, AND, and OR).
In fact, however, the content of a sequence program that is input using
the relay symbol input method is internally converted to instructions
that are equivalent to the corresponding PMC instructions. Also, you
need to fully understand the functionalities of the functional
instructions that are described later. It is therefore necessary for you
to carefully read the descriptions of the basic and functional
instructions that are given later in this manual.
For information about how to input PMC instructions to the
programmer using relay and other symbols, see Chapter 8.
When reading the descriptions of the PMC instructions, keep the
following in mind.

(1) Signal addresses

An address is assigned to every relay coil and contact - that is,
every signal - drawn in a ladder diagram (see Fig. 4.1 (a)). An
address consists of an address number and a bit number. A zero
at the beginning of an address may be omitted. For detailed
information about addresses, see Section 2.2.

Signal name Relay name

RO
A B

X8.1 R12.6
C R9.0

Y20.4 Bit number

Address number

Fig. 4.1 (a) Signal addresses

- 174 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(2) Types of instruction

There are two types of PMC instruction - basic instructions and
functional instructions.
(a) Basic instructions
The basic instructions are most frequently used in designing
a sequence program. There are 14 instructions, including
AND and OR, each of which performs a one-bit operation.
(b) Functional instructions
The functional instructions are intended to make it easy to
program those machine operations that are difficult to code
with the basic instructions alone. For the types of
functional instructions, see Subsection 2.1.6.
(3) Storage of logical operation results
There is a register that stores the interim results of logical
operations during the execution of a sequence program.
This register consists of a total of nine bits, which is divided into
a one-bit segment and an eight-bit segment as shown in Fig. 4.1
(b).

Contains the interim

Stack register result of the logical
(Stores the interim results of previous operations temporarily.) operation currently
executed.

ST8 ST7 ST6 ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0

Fig. 4.1 (b) Structure of the register storing the results

of logical operations

When an instruction (such as RD.STK) that temporarily stores

the interim result of a logical operation is executed, the current
content of the register is shifted to the left and the interim logical
operation result is stacked in the register, as shown in the above
figure. Conversely, when an instruction (such as AND.STK) that
retrieves a stacked signal is executed, the register content is
shifted to the right and the signal is retrieved. The last stacked
signal is retrieved first. For information about the actual uses
and operations of these instructions, see the relevant descriptions
in this manual.

- 175 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.1 Details of the Basic Instructions

Table 4.1.1 lists the types of the basic instructions and explains the
processing they perform.
The difference between the two types of formats shown under
Instruction is described below.

Mnemonic format:
The instructions are displayed in this format when you edit or
print a ladder program that has been converted to the mnemonic
format with FANUC LADDER-III, by using a commercially
available text editor.
Mnemonic format (abbreviated):
These are the abbreviated forms of instructions that you can use
when editing a ladder program that has been converted to the
mnemonic format with FANUC LADDER-III, by using a
commercially available text editor. If you input a file in this
abbreviated format and convert it again to the ladder diagram
format with FANUC LADDER-III, the code in the file can still
be recognized as being written in the valid mnemonic format.

Detailed explanations of the individual basic instructions follow.

Table 4.1.1
Instruction
Mnemonic Mnemonic
No. Processing
format format
(abbreviated)
1 RD R Reads the status of the specified signal and sets it in the ST0 bit.
2 RD.NOT RN Reads and reverses the logical status of the specified signal and sets it in the ST0
bit.
3 WRT W Outputs the logical operation result (the status of the ST0 bit) to the specified
address.
4 WRT.NOT WN Reverses and outputs the logical operation result (the status of the ST0 bit) to the
specified address.
5 AND A Produces a logical product.
6 AND.NOT AN Reverses the logical status of the specified signal and produces a logical product.
7 OR O Produces a logical sum.
8 OR.NOT ON Reverses the logical status of the specified signal and produces a logical sum.
9 RD.STK RS Shifts the register content one bit to the left and sets the status of the signal at the
specified address in the ST0 bit.
10 RD.NOT.STK RNS Shifts the register content one bit to the left, reads and reverses the logical status
of the signal at the specified address, and sets it in the ST0 bit.
11 AND.STK AS Sets the logical product of the ST0 and ST1 bits in the ST1 bit and shifts the
register content one bit to the right.
12 OR.STK OS Sets the logical sum of the ST0 and ST1 bits in the ST1 bit and shifts the register
content one bit to the right.
13 SET SET Finds the logical sum of the ST0 bit and the status of the signal at the specified
address and outputs it to the specified address.
14 RST RST Finds the logical product of the reversed status of the ST0 bit and the status of the
signal at the specified address and outputs it to the specified address.
- 176 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.2 RD Instruction

(1) Format

W1
A B C

X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0

RDRD??
D G W2
instruction

X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E

Y5.2
F

Y5.3

Fig. 4.1.2

(Address)
RD

Bit number

Address number

(2) Use this instruction to start coding from contact A (−−). For
examples of how the RD instruction is used, see the ladder
diagram shown in Fig. 4.1.2 and the input example in the
mnemonic format given in Table 4.1.2.
(3) The instruction reads the status (0 or 1) of the signal at the
specified address and sets it in the ST0 bit.
(4) The signal (contact) to be read by the RD instruction may be any
signal (contact) that is input as a logical condition of a coil
(output).

Table 4.1.2
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT R2 .1 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R200 .0 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD X5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT Y5 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R200 .1 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G

- 177 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.3 RD.NOT Instruction

(1) Format

A B C W1

R1.1 F2.2 F3.3 R210.1

RD.NOT??
RD.NOT
instruction D G W2

G5.1 R10.5
R210.2
E

X4.2
F

Y10.7

Fig. 4.1.3

(Address)
RD.NOT

Bit number

Address number

(2) Use this instruction to start coding from contact B (−/−). For
examples of how the RD.NOT instruction is used, see the ladder
diagram shown in Fig. 4.1.3 and the input example in the
mnemonic format given in Table 4.1.3.
(3) The instruction reads and reverses the logical status of the signal
at the specified address and sets it in the ST0 bit.
(4) The signal (contact) to be read by the RD.NOT instruction may
be any contact B that is input as a logical condition of a coil.

Table 4.1.3
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD.NOT R1 .1 A A
2 AND.NOT F2 .2 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT F3 .3 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R210 .1 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD.NOT G5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT X4 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y10 .7 F D+E+F
8 AND R10 .5 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R210 .2 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G

- 178 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.4 WRT Instruction

(1) Format

A C W1

R220.1 G2.2
Y11.1
B
W2
WRT
X4.2 Y14.6 instruction

Fig. 4.1.4

(Address)
WRT

Bit number

Address number

(2) The WRT instruction outputs the result of the logical operation,
namely the status of the ST0 bit (0 or 1), to the specified address.
(3) The instruction can also output a logical operation result to two
or more addresses simultaneously. In that case, use the WRT
instruction as shown in Fig. 4.1.4 and Table 4.1.4.

Table 4.1.4
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD R220 .1 A A
2 OR X4 .2 B A+B
3 AND G2 .2 C (A + B)⋅C
4 WRT Y11 .1 W1 output (A + B)⋅C
5 WRT Y14 .6 W2 output (A + B)⋅C

CAUTION
In each WRT,WRT.NOT instruction, specify different
address. Double coil, which means a coil with an
address is often used in one ladder program, may
occur trobles of the execution timing in the sequence
program. Don’t use “double coil”.

- 179 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.5 WRT.NOT Instruction

(1) Format

A C
W1

R220.1 G2.2
Y11.1
B
W2
X4.2 Y14.6

WRT.NOT instruction

Fig. 4.1.5

(Address)
WRT.NOT

Bit number

Address number

(2) The WRT.NOT instruction reverses and outputs the result of the
logical operation, namely the status of the ST0 bit, to the
specified address. Fig. 4.1.5 and Table 4.1.5 show examples of
how the WRT.NOT instruction is used.

Table 4.1.5
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD R220 .1 A A
2 OR X4 .2 B A+B
3 AND G2 .2 C (A + B)⋅C
4 WRT Y11 .1 W1 output (A + B)⋅C
5 WRT.NOT Y14 .6 W2 output (A + B)⋅C

CAUTION
In each WRT,WRT.NOT instruction, specify different
address. Double coil, which means a coil with an
address is often used in one ladder program, may
occur trobles of the execution timing in the sequence
program. Don’t use “double coil”.

- 180 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.6 AND Instruction

(1) Format

A B C W1

X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0

D G W2

X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E

Y5.2
F
AND
AND??
instruction
Y5.3

Fig. 4.1.6

(Address)
AND

Bit number

Address number

(2) This instruction produces a logical product.

(3) For examples of how the AND instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.6
and Table 4.1.6.

Table 4.1.6
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT R2 .1 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R200 .0 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD X5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT Y5 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R200 .1 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G

- 181 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.7 AND.NOT Instruction

(1) Format

A B C W1

X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0

D G W2

X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E
AND.NOT
instruction
Y5.2
F

Y5.3

Fig. 4.1.7

(Address)
AND.NOT

Bit number

Address number

(2) This instruction reverses the status of the signal at the specified
address and produces a logical product.
(3) For examples of how the AND.NOT instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.7 and Table 4.1.7.

Table 4.1.7
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT R2 .1 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R200 .0 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD X5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT Y5 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R200 .1 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G

- 182 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.8 OR Instruction

(1) Format

A B C W1

X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0

D G W2

X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E

Y5.2
F

Y5.3 OR instruction

Fig. 4.1.8

(Address)
OR

Bit number

Address number

(2) This instruction produces a logical sum.

(3) For examples of how the OR instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.8
and Table 4.1.8.

Table 4.1.8
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT R2 .1 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R200 .0 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD X5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT Y5 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R200 .1 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G

- 183 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.9 OR.NOT Instruction

(1) Format

A B C W1

X10.1 X2.0 R2.1 R200.0

D G W2

X5.1 R5.4
R200.1
E

Y5.2 OR.NOT instruction

F

Y5.3

Fig. 4.1.9

(Address)
OR.NOT

Bit number

Address number

(2) This instruction reverses the status of the signal at the specified
address and produces a logical sum.
(3) For examples of how the OR.NOT instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.9 and Table 4.1.9.

Table 4.1.9
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X10 .1 A A
2 AND X2 .0 B A⋅B
3 AND.NOT R2 .1 C A⋅B⋅C
4 WRT R200 .0 W1 output A⋅B⋅C
5 RD X5 .1 D D
6 OR.NOT Y5 .2 E D+E
7 OR Y5 .3 F D+E+F
8 AND R5 .4 G (D + E + F)⋅G
9 WRT R200 .1 W2 output (D + E + F)⋅G

- 184 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.10 RD.STK Instruction

(1) Format

A C W1

X1.1 Y1.2 Y15.0

B D

X1.3 Y1.4
E F

R2.1 R3.5

RD.STK instruction

Fig. 4.1.10

(Address)
RD.STK

Bit number

Address number

(2) The RD.STK instruction stacks the interim result of a logical

operation. Use this instruction when the signal you specify is
contact A (−−). After shifting the register content one bit to
the left, the instruction sets the status of the signal at the
specified address in the ST0 bit.
(3) For examples of how the RD.STK instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.10 and Table 4.1.10.

Table 4.1.10
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X1 .1 A A
2 AND Y1 .2 C A⋅C
3 RD.STK X1 .3 B A⋅C B
4 AND Y1 .4 D A⋅C B⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D
6 RD.STK R2 .1 E A⋅C + B⋅D E
7 AND R3 .5 F A⋅C + B⋅D E⋅F
8 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F
9 WRT Y15 .0 W1 output A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F

- 185 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.11 RD.NOT.STK Instruction

(1) Format

A B E F W1
RD.NOT.STK instruction

X1.0 X1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y15.7

C D G H

R1.4 R1.5 X1.6 Y1.7

Fig. 4.1.11

(Address)
RD.NOT.STK

Bit number

Address number

(2) The RD.NOT.STK instruction stacks the interim result of a

logical operation. Use this instruction when the signal you
specify is contact B (−/−). After shifting the register content
one bit to the left, the instruction reverses the status of the signal
at the specified address and sets it in the ST0 bit.
(3) For examples of how the RD.NOT.STK instruction is used, see
Fig. 4.1.11 and Table 4.1.11.

Table 4.1.11
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X1 .0 A A
2 AND.NOT X1 .1 B A⋅B
3 RD.NOT.STK R1 .4 C A⋅B C
4 AND.NOT R1 .5 D A⋅B C⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D
6 RD.STK Y1 .2 E A⋅B + C⋅D E
7 AND Y1 .3 F A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F
8 RD.STK Y1 .6 G A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G
9 AND.NOT Y1 .7 H A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G⋅H
10 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F + G⋅H
11 AND.STK (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)
12 WRT Y15 .7 W1 output (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)

- 186 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.12 AND.STK Instruction

(1) Format

A B E F W1

X1.0 X1.1 Y1.2 Y1.3 Y15.7

C D G H

AND.STK instruction
R1.4 R1.5 X1.6 Y1.7

Fig. 4.1.12 (a)

AND.STK

(2) The AND.STK instruction finds the logical product of the

operation result stored in the ST0 bit and that stored in the ST1
bit and sets it in the ST1 bit. The instruction then shifts the
register content one bit to the right and puts the resulting logical
product into the ST0 bit. Fig. 4.1.12 (b) shows a detailed image
of what is shown in Fig. 4.1.12 (a).

ST1 ST0
A B E F

W1

C D G H

AND.STK instruction

Fig. 4.1.12 (b)

- 187 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(3) For examples of how the AND.STK instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.12 (a) and Table 4.1.12.

Table 4.1.12
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X1 .0 A A
2 AND.NOT X1 .1 B A⋅B
3 RD.NOT.STK R1 .4 C A⋅B C
4 AND.NOT R1 .5 D A⋅B C⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D
6 RD.STK Y1 .2 E A⋅B + C⋅D E
7 AND Y1 .3 F A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F
8 RD.STK Y1 .6 G A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G
9 AND.NOT Y1 .7 H A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F G⋅H
10 OR.STK A⋅B + C⋅D E⋅F + G⋅H
11 AND.STK (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)
12 WRT Y15 .7 W1 output (A⋅B + C⋅D)⋅(E⋅F + G⋅H)

- 188 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.13 OR.STK Instruction

(1) Format

A C W1

X1.1 Y1.2 Y15.0

B D

X1.3 Y1.4
E F

R2.1 R3.5

OR.STK instruction
RD.STK??

Fig. 4.1.13 (a)

OR.STK

(2) The OR.STK instruction finds the logical sum of the operation
result stored in the ST0 bit and that stored in the ST1 bit and sets
it in the ST1 bit. The instruction then shifts the register content
one bit to the right and puts the resulting logical sum into the
ST0 bit. Fig. 4.1.13 (b) shows a detailed image of what is shown
in Fig. 4.1.13 (a).

ST1
A C
ST0

B D

W1

E F

OR.STK instruction
OR.STK??

Fig. 4.1.13 (b)

- 189 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(3) For examples of how the OR.STK instruction is used, see Fig.
4.1.13 (a) and Table 4.1.13.

Table 4.1.13
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD X1 .1 A A
2 AND Y1 .2 C A⋅C
3 RD.STK X1 .3 B A⋅C B
4 AND Y1 .4 D A⋅C B⋅D
5 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D
6 RD.STK R2 .1 E A⋅C + B⋅D E
7 AND R3 .5 F A⋅C + B⋅D E⋅F
8 OR.STK A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F
9 WRT Y15 .0 W1 output A⋅C + B⋅D + E⋅F

CAUTION
In the example shown in Table 4.1.13, the OR.STK
instruction is specified at step number 5. You will
obtain the same result if you place the OR.STK
instruction between step numbers 7 and 8. However,
coding similar instructions, such as OR.STK and
AND.STK, successively makes you prone to errors.
It is therefore recommended to code your program as
shown in Table 4.1.13.

- 190 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.1.14 SET Instruction

(1) Format

A C
(S)
R0.0 Y0.0

X0.0
SET instruction

Fig. 4.1.14

(Address)
SET

Bit number

Address number

(2) This instruction keeps the status of the specified address to ON.
It finds the logical sum of the operation result (ST0) and the
specified address and outputs it to the specified address.
(3) For examples of how the SET instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.14
and Table 4.1.14.

Table 4.1.14
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD R0 .0 A A
2 OR X0 .0 B A+B
3 SET Y0 .0 Y0.0 output (A + B) + C

(4) Caution
• Relationship with COM and COME
When placed between the COM and COME instructions, the
SET instruction behaves as follows:
When the COM condition is set to ON (ACT = 1), the SET
instruction runs normally.
When the COM condition is set to OFF (ACT = 0), the SET
instruction does not run.

- 191 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.1.15 RST Instruction

(1) Format

A C
(R)

R0.0 Y0.0

X0.0
RST instruction

Fig. 4.1.15

(Address)
RST

Bit number

Address number

(2) This instruction keeps the status of the specified address to OFF.
It finds the logical product of the operation result (ST0) and the
specified reversed address and outputs it to the specified address.
(3) For examples of how the RST instruction is used, see Fig. 4.1.15
and Table 4.1.15.

Table 4.1.15
Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD R0 .0 A A
2 OR X0 .0 B A+B
3 RST Y0 .0 Y0.0 output (A + B)⋅C

(4) Caution
• Relationship with COM and COME
When placed between the COM and COME instructions, the
RST instruction behaves as follows:
When the COM condition is set to ON (ACT = 1), the RST
instruction runs normally.
When the COM condition is set to OFF (ACT = 0), the RST
instruction does not run.

- 192 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.2 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

When creating a sequence program, you may find it difficult to code

certain types of functions with the basic instructions alone that
perform a one-bit logical operation each. One example is a shortcut
control function for a rotating part that involves numeric and other
complex operations. To facilitate the programming of these functions
that are difficult to code with the basic instructions alone, a set of
functional instructions are available.
This section describes how to use each functional instruction. For a
list of the functional instructions and information about their
specifications, see Subsection 2.1.6.

4.2.1 Format of the Functional Instructions

Before detailed descriptions of the individual functional instructions

are given, this subsection explains the format of the functional
instructions and their general specifications. Be sure to read this
subsection because it contains important information such as the rules
regarding the use of the functional instructions.

(1) Format of the functional instructions

Since the functional instructions cannot be represented using
relay symbols, they need to be represented in the format shown
in Fig. 4.2.1 (a). The structure of a functional instruction
consists of control conditions, an instruction, parameters, an
output coil (W1), a functional instruction operation result register
(R9000 to R9005).

- 193 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions Parameters

A B
(3)

L0 L1 Instruction Parameter 1
C D
(2) Parameter 2
W1
R 2.4 R 3.1 Parameter 3
RST
(1) Parameter 4
R 10.1
R 5.7
ACT
(0)
(Note 1)
R 7.1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

R9001

R9002

R9003

R9004

R9005

Fig. 4.2.1 (a) Structure of a functional instruction

- 194 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Table 4.2.1 (a) Coding format of the functional instructions

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD R1 . 0 A A
2 AND R1 . 1 B A⋅B
3 RD.STK R2 . 4 C A⋅B C
4 AND.NOT R3 . 1 D A⋅B C⋅D
5 RD.STK R5 . 7 RST A⋅B C⋅D RST
6 RD.STK R7 . 1 ACT A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
7 SUB ¡¡ Instruction A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
8 (PRM) (Note 2) ¡¡¡¡ Parameter 1 A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Parameter 2 A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
10 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Parameter 3 A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
11 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Parameter 4 A⋅B A⋅D RST ACT
12 WRT R10 . 1 W1 output A⋅B A⋅D RST W1

NOTE
1 The number within each pair of parentheses shown
for the control conditions represents the position in
the register where the result is to be stored.
2 The term (PRM) in the Instruction fields for step
numbers 8 to 11 means a parameter. You do not
need to input the term (PRM); just enter an address
or numeric data.

(2) Control conditions

The number of control conditions and the meanings of those
conditions differ for each functional instruction.
The control conditions are stored in the register, as shown in
Table 4.2.1 (a). Once set, therefore, the sequence of the control
conditions is fixed. You cannot change the sequence or omit any
of the control conditions.

CAUTION
All functional instructions give precedence to the RST
processing when they include RST in their control
conditions. Therefore, when RST = 1, the functional
instruction carries out the RST processing even if
ACT = 0.

- 195 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(3) Instruction
For the types of functional instructions, see Subsection 2.1.6.
To input the instruction with relay symbols, use the soft keys of
the programmer.
(4) Parameters
Unlike the basic instructions, the functional instructions deal
with numeric values. Therefore, reference data values and
addresses storing data may be entered in their parameters. The
number of parameters and the meanings of those parameters
differ for each functional instruction.
(5) W1
W1 is the destination to which the functional instruction outputs
its operation result when that result can be represented by a one-
bit value, 0 or 1. The designer can freely decide the address of
W1. The meaning of W1 differs for each functional instruction.
Some functional instructions do not have the W1 output.
(6) Data to be processed
The data processed by the functional instructions is in two
formats - binary coded decimal (BCD) format and binary format.
Formerly, the PMC system handled numeric data mainly in the
BCD format. However, dealing with all numeric data in the
binary format is now recommended for the following reasons.
(a) The numeric data exchanged between NC and PMC (M, S,
T, and B codes) is in the binary format.
(b) The CPU carries out all numeric data operations in the
binary format. Therefore, if data is provided in the binary
format, the conversion between the BCD and binary formats
becomes unnecessary, thus speeding up the PMC processing.
(c) The use of binary format data allows you to handle a wider
range of numeric data while at the same time making it
easier to deal with negative numeric data. This leads to an
enhanced operation capability. In principle, binary numeric
data is handled in units of one byte (−128 to +127), two
bytes (−32,768 to +32,767), or four bytes (−2,147,483,648
to +2,147,483,647).
(d) When you enter numeric data using the CNC screen keys or
display numeric data on the CNC screen, you will
experience no inconvenience because binary numeric data
values are all set and displayed in the decimal format. It is
just that the data stored in the internal memory is written in
the binary format. You only need to exercise care when the
sequence program references memory. See item (7) for
examples of numeric data. For the reasons mentioned
above, all the functional instructions described in this
manual are designed to deal with binary data and handle
mainly binary data.

- 196 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(7) Examples of numeric data

(a) BCD format data
Basically, the data processed in the BCD format is handled
in units of one byte (0 to 99), two bytes (0 to 9999), or four
bytes (0 to 99,999,999; for the DCNVB instruction only).
A four-digit BCD data block is stored in two bytes of
consecutive addresses, as in the following example.

(Example) When BCD data 1234 is stored at addresses R250

and R251
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R250 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

3 4

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R251 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

1 2

In the functional instruction, specify the address having the smaller number, R250.
Note) The low-order digits are stored in the smaller number address.

- 197 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(b) Binary format data

Basically, the data processed in the binary format is handled
in units of one byte (−128 to +127), two bytes (−32,768 to
+32,767), or four bytes (−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647).
The data is stored at addresses R200, R201, R202, and
R203, as shown below. Note that negative numbers are set
as two's complements.

One-byte data (−128 to +127) (Example) One-byte data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6 5 4 3 2 1
R200 ± 2 2 2 2 2 2 20 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (+1)
0: Positive
Sign
1: Negative

Two-byte data (−32,768 to +32,767) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (-1)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R200 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (+127)
R201 ± 214 213 212 211 210 29 28

Four-byte data (−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (-127)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R200 27 2 6
2 5
2 4
23
22
2 1
20

R201 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28

R202 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216

R203 ± 230 229 228 227 226 225 224

In the functional instruction, specify the address having the

smallest number, R200.

- 198 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(8) Addresses of numeric data processed by functional instructions

When the numeric data to be processed by a functional
instruction consists of two or four bytes, it is recommended to
specify an even number or a multiple of four as the address of the
numeric data in the relevant parameter of that functional
instruction. Specifying an even-numbered or multiple-of-four
address causes the functional instruction to execute slightly faster.
In the case of a functional instruction that mainly deals with
binary data, such a parameter is marked with an asterisk (*) in
the parameter field of the diagram illustrating the format of the
functional instruction, as shown below.
An even-numbered or multiple-of-four address means that the
letter R is followed by an even number or a multiple of four in
the case of an internal relay, or that the letter D is followed by an
even number or a multiple of four in the case of a data table.

* When the numeric data consists of two or four bytes, specify an even-numbered or multiple-of-four address
for each of those addresses marked with *. Doing so causes the functional instruction to execute faster.

Error output

RST ¡¡¡¡ Format

SUB36 W1
¡¡¡¡ Summand data address *
ADDB
¡¡¡¡ Addend data (address) *
ACT
¡¡¡¡ Addition result output address *

Fig. 4.2.1 (b)

- 199 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(9) Functional instruction operation result register

(R9000 to R9005) (See Fig. 4.2.1 (c).)
The results of executing functional instructions are set in this
register. The register is shared by all the functional instructions.
Therefore, if you do not reference the register immediately after
executing the target functional instruction, the operation data of
that instruction is erased as a subsequent functional instruction is
executed.
Also note that the operation data of this register cannot be
exchanged between sequence programs of different levels. For
example, when the subtraction instruction (SUBB) is executed in
a first level program and the result of its execution is set in the
register, a second level program cannot reference the set
operation data by reading the register in the R9000 range.
The operation data set in this register can be shared by sequence
programs of the same level and is maintained until immediately
before a functional instruction is executed that sets subsequent
operation data in the register. The operation data to be set in this
register differs for each functional instruction. The sequence
program can read this data but not write to this register.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

R9001

R9002

R9003

R9004

R9005

Fig. 4.2.1 (c)

This register consists of six bytes, from R9000 to R9005. A single

block of data can be read from the register in bits or bytes at a time.
To read the data of the first bit of R9000, for example, specify RD
R9000.1.

- 200 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.3 TIMER

The following types of timer instruction are available. Use any of

these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub Processing

name number
1 TMR 3 Timer processing
2 TMRB 24 Fixed timer processing
3 TMRC 54 Timer processing

- 201 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.3.1 TMR (Timer: SUB 3)

This is an on-delay timer.

Since you set the time in nonvolatile memory (T address) using the
timer screen, you can change the set time without changing the ladder
diagram.
The timer number you specify in the parameter is a number displayed
on the timer screen.The data type in this instruction is binary type.

Format
Fig. 4.3.1 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.3.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

Timer relay
ACT W1
SUB 3
TMR
¡¡¡ Timer number

Fig. 4.3.1 (a) Format of TMR instruction

Table 4.3.1 Mnemonic of TMR instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 TMR ¡¡¡ Timer number
3 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Timer relay output W1

In the above mnemonic format, instruction name "TMR" at step

number 2 can be abbreviated as "T".

ACT
W1
T
T indicates the time set in this timer
command.
Fig. 4.3.1 (b) Operation of the timer

Control condition
ACT = 0: Turns off W1.
ACT = 1: Starts the timer.

- 202 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameter
Set the timer number.

WARNING
If the timer number is duplicated, or falls outside the
valid range, the operation will be unpredictable.

Setting timers
The initial value of the timer setting time can be set in steps of 48 ms
for timer numbers 1 to 8 and in steps of 8 ms for timer numbers 9 and
later. (For information about the number of timers of each PMC, see
the table below.) The setting time value is rounded down to a multiple
of the unit time.
For example, if 38 ms is set, the remainder 6 (38 = 8 × 4 + 6) is
discarded, and only 32 ms is actually set.

30i-A
Initial number of the timer
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
setting time
(option) (option) safety PMC
48-ms timer number 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8
8-ms timer number 9 to 250 9 to 40 9 to 40 9 to 40

Timer accuracy
The timer screen allows you to set the accuracy of each timer
individually. The setting time range and error are as shown below.
For detailed information about how to set the timer accuracy, see
Subsection 7.3.1.

Timer type and number Setting time Error

48 ms (1 to 8) (initial value) 48 ms to 1572.8 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
8 ms (9 or larger) (initial value) 8 ms to 262.1 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
1 ms (1 or larger) 1 ms to 32.7 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
10 ms (1 or larger) 10 ms to 327.7 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
100 ms (1 or larger) 100 ms to 54.6 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
1 sec (1 or larger) 1 sec to 546 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
1 min (1 or larger) 1 min to 546 h 0 to ±1 sec

Error is caused only by operation time of the timer instruction. For

example, when a timer instruction is used in the 2nd level sequence
part, the variation does not include the delay time (Max. 2nd level
sequence one cycle time) until the sequence actuates after the set time
is reached.
Timer relay (W1)
When the time preset is reached with ACT = 1, the timer relay turns
on. The designer can freely decide the address of W1.

- 203 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.3.2 TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24)

This timer is used as a fixed on-delay timer.

Time present in this fixed timer is written to the memory together with
the sequence program, so the time once set cannot be changed unless
the whole sequence program is exchanged. The data type in this
instruction is binary type.

Format
Fig. 4.3.2 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.3.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

Timer relay
ACT W1
SUB 24
TMRB
¡¡¡ Timer number
¡¡¡¡ Setting time

Fig. 4.3.2 (a) Format of TMRB instruction

Table 4.3.2 Mnemonic of TMRB instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 24 TMRB instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Timer number
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Setting time
5 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Timer relay output W1

ACT
W1
T
T indicates the time set in this timer
command.
Fig. 4.3.2 (b) Timer operation

Control condition
ACT = 0: Turns off W1.
ACT = 1: Starts the timer.

- 204 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
Specify the timer number of a fixed timer. The timer numbers and the
setting time range are as shown below.

30i-A
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
(option) (option) safety PMC(option)
Timer number 1 to 500 1 to 100 1 to 100 1 to 100
Setting time 1 to 32,760,000 1 to 32,760,000 1 to 32,760,000 1 to 32,760,000
(msec) (msec) (msec) (msec)

WARNING
If the same timer number is used more than once or if
a timer number out of the valid range is used,
operation is unpredictable.

The maximum setting time is approximately 546 minutes.

Precision of the timer

Variation in the setting time is between 0 and ±1st level execution
cycle (4/8 ms). The varing time in this timer is caused only the error
occurred when the timer instruction performs operation process.
Error caused by sequence program processing time (time of 1 cycle of
the second level), etc. are not included.

Timer relay (W1)

The output W1 is turned on after certain time preset in the parameter
of this instruction pasts after ACT = 1. The designer can freely decide
the address of W1.

- 205 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.3.3 TMRC (Timer: SUB 54)

This is the on-delay timer.

A timer setting time is set at an arbitrary address. There is no limit to
the number of timers as long as memory areas can be allocated for the
timer instruction to use. The data type in this instruction is binary type.

Format
Fig. 4.3.3 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.3.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

Timer relay
ACT W1
SUB 54
TMRC
¡ Timer accuracy number
¡¡¡¡ Timer set time address
¡¡¡¡ Timer register address

Fig. 4.3.3 (a) Format of TMRC instruction

Table 4.3.3 Mnemonic of TMRC instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 54 TMRC instruction
3 (PRM) ¡ Timer accuracy number
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Timer set time address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Timer register address
6 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Timer relay output W1

ACT
W1
T
T indicates the time set in this timer
command.
Fig. 4.3.3 (b) Timer operation

Control condition
ACT = 0: Turns off W1.
ACT = 1: Starts the timer.

- 206 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Timer accuracy
The timer accuracy values, setting time range, and error are as
shown below.

Timer Setting The range of setting time (Note) Margin of error

accuracy number
8 ms 0 8 ms to about 262.1 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
48 ms 1 48 ms to about 26.2 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
1 sec 2 1 sec to about 546 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
10 sec 3 10 sec to about 91 h 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
1 min 4 1 min to about 546 h 0 to ±1 sec
1 ms 5 1 ms to about 32.7 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
10 ms 6 10 ms to about 327.7 sec 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)
100 ms 7 100 ms to about 54.6 min 0 to ±1st level sweep interval (4/8 ms)

Error exclusively refers to that taking place while the timer

instruction carries out its operation. It does not include, for
example, error that occurs when the timer instruction is used in
the 2nd level sequence program, such as the delay from the
expiry of the timer until the sequence program initiates
processing (time equivalent to one cycle of the 2nd level at
worst).

NOTE
The value range of the setting time is between 0 and
32,767 for all timer accuracies. For example, when
the timer accuracy is 8 ms, the value 0 means 8 ms
and the value 32,767 means 262,136 ms.

- 207 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(b) Timer set time address

Sets the first address of the timer set time field.
The continuous 2-byte memory space is required for the timer set
time field.
The data table (field D) is normally used as this field.

Timer set time + 0

TIME
Timer set time + 1

TIME: Timer set time (1 to 32,767)

The timer setting time is converted to the binary format based on

the timer accuracy (in units of 8 ms, 48 ms, etc.).
The timer setting time is shown as follows:
8 msec ..................8 to 262,136 msec
48 msec ................48 to 1,572,816 msec
1 sec .....................1 to 32,767 sec
10 sec ...................10 to 327,670 sec
1 min ....................1 to 32,767 min
1 msec ..................1 to 32,767 msec
10 msec ................10 to 327,670 msec
100 msec ..............100 to 3,276,700 msec

(c) Timer register address

Set the start address of a timer register area.
A timer register area must be allocated to a continuous four-byte
memory area starting from the set address. The user area (R
area) is used as a timer register area. This area should be used by
the PMC system, and therefore should not be used by the
sequence program.

Timer register + 0

Timer register + 1
Timer register
Timer register + 2

Timer register + 3

Timer relay (W1)

The output W1 is turned on when the time specified in the parameter
of this instruction elapses after ACT is set to 1. The designer can
freely decide the address of W1.

- 208 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.4 COUNTER

The following types of counter instruction are available. Use any of

these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub Processing

name number
1 CTR 5 Counter processing
2 CTRB 56 Fixed counter processing
3 CTRC 55 Counter processing

- 209 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.4.1 CTR (Counter: SUB 5)

CTR is used as a counter. Counters are used for various purposes for
NC machine tools.
Numerical data such as preset values and count values can be used
with either BCD format or binary format by a system parameter of
PMC.

WARNING
When a incollect BCD data was set to a BCD type
counter, the movement of CTR cannot be sured.
If changing the counter type, be sure to reconfigure
the preset value and count value.

This counter has the following functions to meet various applications.

(a) Preset counter

Outputs a signal when the preset count is reached. The number
can be preset from the counter screen, or set in the sequence
program.
(b) Ring counter
Upon reaching the preset count, returns to the initial value by
issuing another count signal.
(c) Up/down counter
The count can be either up or down.
(d) Selection of initial value
Selects the initial value as either 0 or 1.

A combination of the preceding functions results in the ring counter

below.

8 1
7 2

6 3
5 4

Presetting : 8
Initial value : 1

Such a counter permits the position of a rotor to be memorized.

- 210 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Format
Fig. 4.4.1 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.4.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

Countup output
W1
CN0

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 5 ¡¡¡¡.¡

UPDOWN ¡¡¡
CTR
Counter
¡¡¡¡.¡ number
RST

¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT

¡¡¡¡.¡

Control condition
Fig. 4.4.1 (a) Format of CTR instruction

Table 4.4.1 Mnemonic of CTR instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ UPDOWN CN0 UPDOWN
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST CN0 UPDOWN RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT CN0 UPDOWN RST ACT
5 SUB 5 CTR instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Counter number
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Countup output W1

Control conditions
(a) Specify the initial value. (CN0)
CN0 = 0: Begins the value of the counter with 0.
0, 1, 2, 3, ….., n.
CN0 = 1: Begins the value of the counter with 1 (0 is not used).
1, 2, 3, ….., n.
(b) Specify up or down counter. (UPDOWM)
UPDOWN = 0:
Up counter. The counter begins with 0 when CN0 = 0;
1 when 1.
UPDOWN = 1:
Down counter. The counter begins with the preset value.

- 211 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(c) Reset (RST)

RST = 0: Releases reset.
RST = 1: Enables reset.
W1 becomes 0.
The integrated value is reset to the initial value.

CAUTION
Set RST to 1, only when reset is required.

(d) Count signal (ACT)

"1"

"0"

Count Count

0: Counter does not operate. W1 does not change.

ACT
1: Count is made by catching the rise of ACT.

Parameter
(a) Counter number
The numbers that can be used are shown below.

30i-A
Model 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
(option) (option) safety PMC(option)
Counter number 1 to 100 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20
The preset value and cumulative value that can be set are as
follows:
Binary counter: 0 to 32,767
BCD counter: 0 to 9,999

WARNING
If the counter number is duplicated, or falls outside
the valid range, the operation will be unpredictable.

Countup output (W1)

In case of up counter mode(UPDOWN=0), when the count is up to a
preset value, W1 = 1.
In case of down counter mode(UPDOWN=1) and initial value
0(CN0=0), when the counter reaches 0, W1 is set to 1.
In case of down counter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
1(CN0=1), when the counter reaches 1, W1 is set to 1.
the address of W1 can be determined arbitrarily.

- 212 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Examples of using the counter

[Example 1]
As a preset counter (See Fig. 4.4.1 (b).)
The number of workpieces to be machined is counted. When the
number reaches the preset count, a signal is output.
• L1 is a circuit to make logic 1.
• Since the count ranges from 0 to 9,999, contact B of L1 is used
for making CN0 = 0.
• Since it is to be up counter, contact B of L1 is used make
UPDOWN = 0.
• The reset signal of the counter uses input signal CRST.M from
the machine tool.
• The count signal is M30X, which was decoded from the NC
output M code. M30X contains contact B of CUP to prevent
counting past the preset value, as long as reset is not enabled
after countup.

L1

L1
R200.1
L1 R200.1

R200.1
L1
(CN0) CUP Countup output
R200.1 SUB 5
L1 Y6.1

(UPDOWN) CTR 0001

R200.1
CRST.M
(RST)
X36.0
CUP M30X
(ACT)
Y6.1 R200.3

Fig. 4.4.1 (b) Ladder diagram for the counter, example 1

- 213 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

[Example 2]
Use of the counter to store the position of a rotor. (See Fig. 4.4.1 (c).)

L1
"1"
R200.1
R200.1
L1

R200.1
L1
(CN0)
R200.1 SUB 5 R200.0
REV
(UPDOWN) CTR 0002
R200.1
L1
(RST)
R200.1
POS
(ACT)
X36.0

Fig. 4.4.1 (c) Ladder diagram for the counter, example 2

3 4
5

2
6

1 7

12 8

11 9
10

Fig. 4.4.1 (d) Indexing for a rotor

Fig. 4.4.1 (c) shows a ladder diagram for a counter to store the
position of a rotor of Fig. 4.4.1 (d).

(1) Control conditions

(a) Count start number
When a 12-angle rotor shown in Fig. 4.4.1 (d) is used, the
count starting number is 1.
Contact A of L1 is used for making CN0 = 1.

- 214 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(b) Specify up and down

The signal REV changes according to the then direction of
rotation. It becomes 0 for forward rotation and 1 for reverse
rotation. Thus, the counter is an up counter for forward
rotation and a down counter for reverse rotation.
(c) Reset
In this example, since W1 is not used, RST = 0, and contact
B of L1 is used.
(d) Count signal
The count signal POS turns on and off 12 times each time
the rotor rotates once.
(2) Counter number and W1
In this example, the second counter is used. The result of W1 is
not used, but its address must be determined.
(3) Operation
(a) Setting the preset value
Since the rotor to be controlled is 12-angle as shown in Fig.
4.4.1 (d), 12 must be preset in the counter. It is set from the
counter screen.
(b) Setting the current value
When the power is turned on, the position of the rotor must
be equated with the count on the counter. The count is set
via the counter screen. Once a current value is set, then
correct current positions will be loaded to the counter every
time.
(c) The POS signal turns on and off each time the rotor rotates.
The number of times of the POS signal turns on and off is
counted by the counter 2, as below.
1, 2, 3, . . . 11, 12, 1, 2, . . .
for forward rotation
1, 12, 11, . . . 3, 2, 1, 12 . . .
for reverse rotation

- 215 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.4.2 CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56)

CTRB is used as a counter. Numerical data such as preset values and
count values can be used with binary format. This counter has the
following functions to meet various applications.
(a) Preset counter
Preset the count value. If the count reaches this preset value,
outputs to show that.
(b) Ring counter
This is the ring counter which is reset to the initial value when
the count signal is input after the count reaches the preset value.
(c) Up/down counter
This is the reversible counter to be used as both up counter and
down counter.
(d) Selection of initial value
Either 0 or 1 can be selected as the initial value.

Format
Fig. 4.4.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.4.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

Countup

CN0 W1

SUB 56

¡¡¡ Counter number

UPDOWN
CTRB
¡¡¡¡ Preset value

RST

ACT

Fig. 4.4.2 Format of CTRB instruction

- 216 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Table 4.4.2 Mnemonic of CTRB instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ UPDOWN CN0 UPDOWN
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST CN0 UPDOWN RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT CN0 UPDOWN RST ACT
5 SUB 56 CTRB instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Counter number
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Preset value
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Countup output W1

Control conditions
(a) Specifying the initial value (CN0)
CN0 = 0: The counter value starts with "0". 0,1,2,3,.......,n
CN0 = 1: The counter value starts with "1". 1,2,3,.........,n
(b) Specifying up or down (UPDOWN)
UPDOWN = 0: Up counter
The initial value is "0" when CN0 = 0 or "1" when CN0 = 1.
UPDOWN = 1: Down counter
The initial value is the preset value.
(c) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Cancels reset.
RST = 1: Resets. W1 is reset to 0. The accumulated value is
reset to the initial value.
(d) Count signal (ACT)
ACT = 0: The counter does not operated. W1 does not change.
ACT = 1: The counter operates at the rise of this signal.

Parameters
(a) Counter number
The numbers that can be used are shown below.

30i-A
Model 1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check
(option) (option) safety PMC(option)
Counter number 1 to 100 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20

(b) Preset value

Following value can be set as preset value.
Binary counter: 0 to 32,767
* CTRB is always binary counter. System parameter is
ineffective.

- 217 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Countup output (W1)

In case of the up couter mode (UPDOWN=0), when the counter value
reaches the preset value, W1 is set to 1.
In case of the down couter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
0(CN0=0), when the counter value reaches 0, W1 is set to 1.
In case of the down couter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
1(CN0=1), when the counter value reaches 1, W1 is set to 1.
The W1 address can be specified arbitrarily.

Accumulate value
The address C5000- are used for accumulate value of the CTRB.
One value requires 2 bytes.
Counter number 1 corresponds to C5000 and number 2 corresponds to
C5002.

- 218 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.4.3 CTRC (Counter: SUB 55)

The numeral data of this counter are all binary. This counter has the
following functions and can be used according to the application:
(a) Preset counter
Preset the count value and if the count reaches this preset value,
outputs to show that.
(b) Ring counter
This is the ring counter which is reset to the initial value when
the count signal is input after the count reaches the preset value.
(c) Up/down counter
This is the reversible counter to be used as both the up counter
and down counter.
(d) Selection of the initial value
Either 0 or 1 can be selected as the initial value.

Format
Fig. 4.4.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.4.3 shows the
mnemonic format.
Countup

CN0 W1

SUB 55

UPDOWN ¡¡¡¡ Counter preset value address

CTRC
¡¡¡¡ Counter register address
RST

ACT

Fig. 4.4.3 Format of CTRC instruction

- 219 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Table 4.4.3 Mnemonic of CTRC instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CN0 CN0
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ UPDOWN CN0 UPDOWN
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST CN0 UPDOWN RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT CN0 UPDOWN RST ACT
5 SUB 55 CTRC instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Counter preset value
address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Counter register address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Countup output W1

Control conditions
(a) Specifying the initial value (CN0)
CN0 = 0: The count value starts with "0". 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . n
CN0 = 1: The count value starts with "1". 1, 2, 3, . . . n
(b) Specifying up or down count (UPDOWN)
UPDOWN = 0:
Up counter.
The initial value is "0" when CN0 = 0 or "1" when CN0 = 1.
UPDOWN = 1:
Down counter. The initial value is the preset value.
(c) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Reset cancelled.
RST = 1: Reset. W1 is reset to "0". The accumulated value is
reset to the initial value.
(d) Count signal (ACT)
ACT = 0: The counter does not operate. W1 does not change.
ACT = 1: The counter operates at the rise of this signal.

Parameters
(a) Counter preset value address
The first address of the counter preset value field is set.
The continuous 2-byte memory space from the first address is
required for this field. Field D is normally used.

Counter preset value+0

CTR CTR: Preset value
(0 to 32,767)
Counter preset value+1

The counter preset value is binary. Therefore, it ranges from 0 to

32,767.

- 220 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(b) Counter register address

The first address of the counter register field is set.
The continuous 4-byte memory space from the first address is
required for this field. Field D is normally used.

Counter register +0
CTR Count value
Counter register +1

Counter register +2
WORK WORK: Unusable
Counter register +3

CAUTION
When field R is specified as the counter register
address, the counter starts with count value "0" after
powered on.

Countup output (W1)

In case of the up couter mode (UPDOWN=0), when the counter value
reaches the preset value, W1 is set to 1.
In case of the down couter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
0(CN0=0), when the counter value reaches 0, W1 is set to 1.
In case of the down couter mode (UPDOWN=1) and initial value
1(CN0=1), when the counter value reaches 1, W1 is set to 1.
The W1 address can be specified arbitrarily.

- 221 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5 DATA TRANSFER

The following types of data transfer instruction are available. Use any
of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub Processing

name number
1 MOVB 43 Transfer of 1 byte
2 MOVW 44 Transfer of 2 bytes
3 MOVD 47 Transfer of 4 bytes
4 MOVN 45 Transfer of an arbitrary number of bytes
5 MOVE 8 Logical product transfer
6 MOVOR 28 Data transfer after logical sum
7 XMOVB 35 Binary index modifier data transfer
8 XMOV 18 Indexed data transfer

- 222 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.5.1 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43)

The MOVB instruction transfers 1-byte data from a specified source

address to a specified destination address.

Format

Fig. 4.5.1 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 43

MOVB ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address

¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Fig. 4.5.1 Format of MOVB instruction

Table 4.5.1 Mnemonic of MOVB instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 43 MOVB instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Control condition

(a) Execution specification

ACT = 0: No data is transferred.
ACT = 1: One-byte data is transferred.

Parameters

(a) Transfer source address

Specify the source address for the transfer.

(b) Transfer destination address

Specify the destination address for the transfer.

- 223 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5.2 MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44)

The MOVW instruction transfers 2-byte data from a specified source

address to a specified destination address.

Format
Fig. 4.5.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 44

MOVW ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address

¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Fig. 4.5.2 Format of MOVW instruction

Table 4.5.2 Mnemonic of MOVW instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 44 MOVW instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Control condition
(a) Execution specification
ACT = 0: No data is transferred.
ACT = 1: Two-byte data is transferred.

Parameters
(a) Transfer source address
Specify the source address for the transfer.

(b) Transfer destination address

Specify the destination address for the transfer.

NOTE
Take care not to specify the same address for the
source address and destination address. If the same
address is specified, the instruction is not guaranteed
to operate normally.

- 224 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.5.3 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47)

The MOVD instruction transfers 4-byte data from a specified source

address to a specified destination address.

Format
Fig. 4.5.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 47

MOVD ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address

¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Fig. 4.5.3 Format of MOVD instruction

Table 4.5.3 Mnemonic of MOVD instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 47 MOVD instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Control condition
(a) Input signal
ACT = 0: No data is transferred.
ACT = 1: Four-byte data is transferred.

Parameters
(a) Transfer source address
Specify the source address for the transfer.

(b) Transfer destination address

Specify the destination address for the transfer.

NOTE
Take care not to specify the same address for the
source address and destination address. If the same
address is specified, the instruction is not guaranteed
to operate normally.

- 225 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5.4 MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes: SUB 45)

The MOVN instruction transfers data consisting of an arbitrary

number of bytes from a specified source address to a specified
destination address.

Format
Fig. 4.5.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.4 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 45

MOVN ¡ Number of bytes to be transferred

¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Fig. 4.5.4 Format of MOVN instruction

Table 4.5.4 Mnemonic of MOVN instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 45 MOVN instruction
3 (PRM) ¡ Number of bytes to be transferred
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer source address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Transfer destination address

Control condition
(a) Execution specification
ACT = 0: No data is transferred.
ACT = 1: A specified number of bytes are transferred.

- 226 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Number of bytes to be transferred
Specify the number of bytes to be transferred. An odd number
can also be specified. A number from 1 to 9,999 can be specified.

CAUTION
Make sure that the source data area and destination
data area are within the PMC address range.

(b) Transfer source address

Specify the source address for the transfer.

(c) Transfer destination address

Specify the destination address for the transfer.

NOTE
Take care not to specify the same address for the
source address and destination address. If the same
address is specified, the instruction is not guaranteed
to operate normally.

- 227 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5.5 MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8)

ANDs logical multiplication data and input data, and outputs the
results to a specified address. Can also be used to remove unnecessary
bits from an eight-bit signal in a specific address, etc.
(Logical multiplication data) (Input data) to a specified address
The input data is one byte (eight bits).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Logical ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
multiplication data

Low-order 4-bit logical

multiplication data
High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

Format
Fig. 4.5.5 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.5 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 8
¡¡¡¡ High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
MOVE ¡¡¡¡ Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data
¡¡¡¡ Input data address
¡¡¡¡ Output address

Fig. 4.5.5 (a) Format of MOVE instruction

Table 4.5.5 Mnemonic of MOVE instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 8 MOVE instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ High-order 4-bit logical
multiplication data
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Low-order 4-bit logical
multiplication data
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Output address

- 228 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Execution command

ACT = 0: MOVE instruction not executed.

ACT = 1: Executed.

Example of using the MOVE instruction

If a code signal and another signal co-exist at address X35 for an input
signal from the machine tool, to compare the code signal and a code
signal at another address, the rest of signals in address X35 becomes
an obstacle. Thus, the MOVE instruction can be used to output only
the code signal at address X35 address R210.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address X35

Code signal

Another signal

Logical multiplication data 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

Address R210 0 0 0

Code signal

A SUB 8
0001 High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

MOVE 1111 Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

R228.1 X035 Input data address

R210 Output address

Fig. 4.5.5 (b) MOVE instruction ladder diagram

- 229 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5.6 MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28)

This instruction ORs the input data and the logical sum data and
transfers the result to the destination.

Input data Logical sum data

OR

Output data

Format
Fig. 4.5.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.6 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 28

MOVOR ¡¡¡¡ Input data address

¡¡¡¡ Logical sum data address
¡¡¡¡ Output address

Fig. 4.5.6 Format of MOVOR instruction

Table 4.5.6 Mnemonic of MOVOR instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 28 MOVOR instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data address
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Logical sum data address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Output address

- 230 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control condition

(a) Command (ACT)

ACT = 0: Do not execute MOVOR.
ACT = 1: Execute MOVOR.

Parameters

(a) Input data address

Specifies the address for the input data.

(b) Logical sum data address

Specifies the address of the logical sum data with which to OR
the transferred data.

(c) Output address

This is the address to contain the logical sum obtained. It is also
possible to obtain the logical sum (OR) of the input and the
logical sum data and output the result in the logical sum data
address. For this, you must set the logical sum data address for
the output address.

- 231 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5.7 XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer: SUB 35)

Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. The value type in this
instruction ia binary.
There are two specifications - basic specification and extended
specification - for setting the format specification parameter in the
XMOVB instruction. The extended specification allows two or more
sets of data to be read or written with a single instruction. For the
details of the setting of a format specification parameter, see the
description of parameters.

- 232 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(a) Read data from data table

The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number
of data table elements)

DT[0] D I 3 S B

DT[1] A Index: I Input/output data: S

DT[2]

DT[3] B

DT[4]

DT[5] C

−1]
DT[M−

Data table: DT
The operation of the instruction:
DT[I] → S

Fig. 4.5.7 (a) Read data from data table (basic specification)

The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number
of data table elements)
The number of index array elements: N (It specifies the format specification)

DT[0] D I[0] 1 S[0] A

DT[1] A I[1] 3 S[1] B

DT[2] I[2] 5 S[2] C

DT[3] B I[3] 0 S[3] D

DT[4]
−1]
I[N− −1]
S[N−
DT[5] C
Index Input/output
array: I data array: S
−1]
DT[M−

Data table: DT

The operation of the instruction:

DT[I[n]] → S[n] (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., N−1)

Fig. 4.5.7 (b) Read data from data table (extended specification)

- 233 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(b) Write data to data table

The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number
of data table elements)

S B I 3 DT[0]

Input/output data: S Index: I DT[1]

DT[2]

DT[3] B

DT[4]

DT[5]

−1]
DT[M−

Data table: DT
The operation of the instruction:
S → DT[I]

Fig. 4.5.7 (c) Write data to data table (basic specification)

The number of data table elements: M (It specifies the storage address of number
of data table elements)
The number of index array elements: N (It specifies the format specification)

S A I[0] 1 DT[0] D

S[1] B I[1] 3 DT[1] A

S[2] C I[2] 5 DT[2]

S[3] D I[3] 0 DT[3] B

DT[4]
−1]
S[N− −1]
I[N−
DT[5] C
Input/output Index
data array: S array: I
−1]
DT[M−

Data table: DT
The operation of the instruction:
−1)
S[n] → DT[I[n]] (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., N−

Fig. 4.5.7 (d) Write data to data table (extended specification)

- 234 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Format
Figs. 4.5.7 (e) and (f) show the ladder format and Tables 4.5.7 (a) and
(b) show the mnemonic format.

W1
RW
SUB 35

RST XMOVB ¡ Format specification

¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data table elements
¡¡¡¡ Data table head address DT[ ]
ACT ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address S[ ]
¡¡¡¡ Index storage address I[ ]

Fig. 4.5.7 (e) Format of XMOVB instruction (basic specification)

Table 4.5.7 (a) Mnemonic of XMOVB instruction (basic specification)

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW RW
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RW RST
3 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RW RST ACT
4 SUB 35 XMOVB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Format specification
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data
table elements
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table head address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Index storage address
10 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 235 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

W1
RW
SUB 35

RST XMOVB ¡¡¡¡ Format specification

¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data table elements
¡¡¡¡ Data table head address DT[ ]
ACT ¡¡¡¡ I/O data storage address S[ ]
¡¡¡¡ Index storage address I[ ]

Fig. 4.5.7 (f) Format of XMOVB instruction (extended specification)

Table 4.5.7 (b) Mnemonic of XMOVB instruction (extended specification)

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW RW
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RW RST
3 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RW RST ACT
4 SUB 35 XMOVB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Format specification
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data
table elements
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table head address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ I/O data sotrage address
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Index storage address
10 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

Control conditions

(a) Read, write designation (RW)

RW = 0: Read data from data table.
RW = 1: Write data to data table.
(b) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Reset release.
RST = 1: Reset. W1 = 0.
(c) Activation command (ACT)
ACT = 0: Do not execute XMOVB instruction. There is no
change in W1.
ACT = 1: Execute XMOVB instruction.

- 236 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length. Specify byte length in the first digit of the
parameter.
0001: 1-byte long data
0002: 2-byte long data
0004: 4-byte long data
When setting format specification in the following extended
format, XMOVB can read/write multiple data in data table in 1
instruction.
Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4) to the 1st digit as above-
mentioned. Specifies the number of the index array elements to
the 2nd and 3rd digit. Specifies 0 to the 4th digit.
0nn1: In case of reading/writing multiple (nn) data in data
table by 1 byte length
0nn2: In case of reading/writing multiple (nn) data in data
table by 2 byte length
0nn4: In case of reading/writing multiple (nn) data in data
table by 4 byte length
The nn is the numerical value from 02 to 99. When setting 00 or
01, it works as the basic specification in which one data transfer
is performed by one instruction.

Format specification (extended specification):

0 n n x

The byte length setting

1: 1 byte length
2: 2 byte length
4: 4 byte length

The number of the index array elements

00-01:
It works as the basic specification.
02-99:
Read/Write multiple (nn) data from/to data table.

(b) Storage address of number of data table elements

Set to the memory at the byte length which set the number of the
data table elements in "(a) Format specification" and set the
address to this parameter. The effective range of number of data
table elements is as follows with the byte length which set in "(a)
Format specification".
1 byte length: 1 to 255
2 byte length: 1 to 32,767
(Actually, set a value below the size of the D
area.)
4 byte length: 1 to 2,147,483,647
(Actually, set a value below the size of the D
area.)

- 237 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(c) Data table head address

Sets head address in the data table.
The memory of (byte length) × (number of data table elements)
which was set in "(a) Format specification" and "(b) Storage
address of number of data table elements" is necessary.
(d) Input/Output data storage address
In case of the reading, set the address of the memory which
stores a reading result. In case of the writing, set the address of
the memory which stores a writing result. The memory with the
byte length which set in "(a) Format specification" is necessary.
When setting format specification in the extended format, set the
head address of the array. (In case of the reading, set the head
address of the array in which a reading result is stored. In case of
the writing, set the head address of the array in which a writing
result is stored.) The memory of (byte length) × (number of
index array elements) which was set in "(a) Format specification"
is necessary.
(e) Index storage address
Set the address of the memory in which an index value is stored.
The memory with the byte length set in "(a) Format
specification" is necessary. The effective range of number of
data in index is as follows according to the byte length set in "(a)
Format specification".
Actually, set the value which is smaller than the value to set in
"(b) Storage address of number of data table elements" to the
index.
When setting an index value above the value to set in "(b)
Storage address of number of data table elements", it causes an
error output W1 = 1 in instruction execution.
1 byte length: 0 to 254
2 byte length: 0 to 32,766
4 byte length: 0 to 2,147,483,646
When setting format specification in the extended format, set an
address at the head of the array in which an index value is stored.
The memory of (byte length) × (number of data in index array)
which was set in "(a) Format specification" is necessary.

- 238 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Error output (W1)

W1 = 0: No error
W1 = 1: Error found. In the case where the index value set in "(e)
Index storage address" exceeds the value set in "(b) Storage
address of number of data table elements", it becomes W1 =
1. The reading or writing of the data table isn't executed.
When "(a) Format specification" is used for operation in the
extended format, if the values of one or more elements in the
index array specified in (e) are greater than the value set in
"(b) Storage address of number of data table elements", it
becomes W1 = 1. The reading or writing of a data table is
executed for the normal index values but not executed as for
the wrong index values.

- 239 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Example for extended specification

(a) Read data from data table (extended specification)

The number of data table elements: R0 = 9

The number of index array elements: 4

RW = 0 W1
SUB 35

XMOVB 0041
RST = 0
R0
R100
ACT = 1 R200
D0

R100 D D0 2 R200 A

R101 D1 5 R201 B

R102 A D2 8 R202 C

R103 D3 0 R203 D

R104 Index array Input/output

data array
R105 B

R106

R107

R108 C

Data table

The operation of the instruction:

(1) R102 → R200
(2) R105 → R201
(3) R108 → R202
(4) R100 → R203

Fig. 4.5.7 (g) Example for XMOVB instruction (extended specification)

- 240 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(b) Write data to data table (extended specification)

The number of data table elements: R0 = 9

The number of index array elements: 4

RW = 1 W1
SUB 35

XMOVB 0041
RST = 0
R0
R200
ACT = 1 R100
D0

R100 A D0 2 R200 D

R101 B D1 5 R201

R102 C D2 8 R202 A

R103 D D3 0 R203

Input/output Index array R204

data array
R205 B

R206

R207

R208 C

Data table

The operation of the instruction:

(1) R100 → R202
(2) R101 → R205
(3) R102 → R208
(4) R103 → R200

Fig. 4.5.7 (h) Example for XMOVB instruction (extended specification)

- 241 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.5.8 XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18)

Reads or rewrites the contents of the data table. The value type in this
instruction ia binary.

CAUTION
The data table heading address specified here is
table internal number 0. The table internal number
specified here, however, is different from that
mentioned in Subsection 2.2.12.

Table internal number Data table

0

1
2
Input or output data <1> 3
<2>

Table internal storing

input or output data 2

<1> Read out data from the data table.

<2> Write data in the data table. n

Fig. 4.5.8 (a) Reading and writing of data

Format
Fig. 4.5.8 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.5.8 shows the
mnemonic format.

W1 Error output
BYT

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 18
RW ¡¡¡¡.¡

XMOV
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table (Table capacity)
RST
¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT ¡¡¡¡ Address storing input/output data

¡¡¡¡ Address storing table internal number

¡¡¡¡.¡

Fig. 4.5.8 (b) Format of XMOV instruction

- 242 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Table 4.5.8 Mnemonic of XMOV instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RW BYT RW
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RW RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RW RST ACT
5 SUB 18 XMOV instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address storing input/output data
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address storing table internal
number
10 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT = 0: Data stored in the data table, BCD in two digits long.
BYT = 1: Data stored in the data table, BCD in four digits long.
(b) Specify read or write (RW)
RW = 0: Data is read from the data table.
RW = 1: Data is write in the data table.
(c) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Release reset.
RST = 1: Enables reset, that is, sets W1 to 0.
(d) Execution command (ACT)
ACT = 0: The XMOV instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: The XMOV instruction is executed.

Parameters
(a) Number of data of the data table
Specifies the size of the data table. If the beginning of the data
table is 0 and the end is n, n + 1 is set as the number of data of
the data table.

(b) Data table heading address

Address that can be used in a data table are fixed. When
preparing a data table, the addresses to be used must be
determined beforehand, and the head address placed in that data
table.

- 243 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(c) Address storing input/output data

The input/output data storage address is the address storing the
specified data, and is external to the data table. The contents of
the data table is read or rewritten.

(d) Address storing table internal number

The table internal number storage address is the address storing
the table internal number of the data to be read or rewritten.
This address requires memory specified by the number-of-digits
designation (BYT).

Error output
W1 = 0: There is no error.
W1 = 1: There is an error.
An error occurs if a table internal number exceeding the
previously programmed number of the data table is specified.

- 244 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.6 COMPARISON

The following types of comparison instruction are available. Use any

of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub Processing

name number
1 COMPB 32 Comparison between binary data
2 COMP 15 Comparison
3 COIN 16 Coincidence check

- 245 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.6.1 COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32)

This instruction compares 1, 2, and 4-byte binary data with one

another. Results of comparison are set in the operation output register
(R9000). Sufficient number of bytes are necessary in the memory to
hold the input data and comparison data.

Format
Fig. 4.6.1 shows the ladder format and Table 4.6.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 32

COMPB 00 Format specification

¡¡¡¡ * Input data (address)

¡¡¡¡ * Address of data to be compared

Fig. 4.6.1 Format of COMPB instruction

Table 4.6.1 Mnemonic of COMPB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 32 COMPB instruction
3 (PRM) 00 Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data (address)
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address of data to be compared

Control condition
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT = 0: Do not execute COMPB.
ACT = 1: Execute COMPB.

- 246 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specify data length (1,2, or 4 bytes) and format for the input data
('constants data' or 'address data').

0 0

Specification of data length

1: 1-byte length data
2: 2-byte length data
4: 4-byte length data
Specification of format
0: Constants
1: Address

(b) Input data (address)

Format for the input data is determined by the specification in (a).
(c) Address of data to be compared
Indicates the address in which the comparison data is stored.

Operation output register (R9000)

The data involved in the operation are set in this register. This register
is set with data on operation. If register bit 1 is on, they indicate the
following:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

Zero (input data=data compared)

Negative (input data<data compared)

Overflow

The following table shows the relationship among the [input data],
[data compared], and operation output register.

R9000.5 R9000.1 R9000.0

[Input data] = [data compared] 0 0 1
[Input data] > [data compared] 0 0 0
[Input data] < [data compared] 0 1 0
Overflow 1 0 0

- 247 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Programming examples for the operation output register

(1) When checking that [input data] = [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.0 Check result

(2) When checking that [input data] != [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.0 Check result

(3) When checking that [input data] > [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.1 R9000.0 Check result

(4) When checking that [input data] >= [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.1 Check result

(5) When checking that [input data] < [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.1 Check result

(6) When checking that [input data] <= [data compared]

ACT R9000.5 R9000.0 Check result

R9000.1

(7) When checking for an overflow of the comparison operation

ACT R9000.5 Check result

- 248 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.6.2 COMP (Comparison: SUB 15)

Compares input and comparison values. The value type in this

instruction is BCD.

Format
Fig. 4.6.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.6.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

W1
BYT Comparison result output
SUB 15

¡¡¡¡.¡ COMP
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡ Specification of input data format (constant or address)
¡¡¡¡ Input data
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address

Control condition

Fig. 4.6.2 Format of COMP instruction

Table 4.6.2 Mnemonic of COMP instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT ACT
3 SUB 15 COMP instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Specification of input data format
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Comparison result output W1

- 249 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
(a) Specify the data size. (BYT)
BYT = 0: Process data (input value and comparison value) is
BCD two digits long.
BYT = 1: Process data (input value and comparison value) is
BCD four digits long.
(b) Execution command (ACT)
ACT = 0: The COMP instruction is not executed. W1 does not
alter.
ACT = 1: The COMP instruction is executed and the result is
output to W1.

Parameters
(a) Specification of input data format
0: Specifies input data with a constant.
1: Specifies input data with an address
Not specify input data directly, but specify an address storing
input data.

(b) Input data

The input data can be specified as either a constant or the address
storing it. The selection is made by a parameter of format
specification.

(c) Comparison data address

Specifies the address storing the comparison data.

(d) Comparison result output

W1 = 0: Input data > Comparison data
W1 = 1: Input data ≤ Comparison data

- 250 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.6.3 COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16)

Checks whether the input value and comparison value coincide.

The value type in this instruction is BCD.

Format
Fig. 4.6.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.6.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

W1 Comparison
BYT result output
SUB 16

¡¡¡¡.¡
COIN ¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT

¡ Specification of input data format (constant or address)

¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Input data
¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address

Control conditions

Fig. 4.6.3 Format of COIN instruction

Table 4.6.3 Mnemonic of COIN instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT ACT
3 SUB 16 COIN instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Specification of input data format
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Comparison data address
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Comparison result output W1

- 251 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
(a) Specify the data size.
BYT = 0: Process data (input value, and comparison values).
Each BCD is two digits long.
BYT = 1: Each BCD four digits long.

(b) Execution command

ACT = 0: The COIN instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: The COIN instruction is executed and the results is
output to W1.

Parameters
(a) Specification of input data format
0: Specifies input data as a constant.
1: Specifies input data as an address.

(b) Input data

The input data can be specified as either a constant or an address
storing it. The selection is made by a parameter of format
designation.

(c) Comparison data address

Specifies the address storing the comparison data.

Comparison result output (W1)

W1 = 0: Input data ≠ Comparison data

W1 = 1: Input data = Comparison data

- 252 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.7 DATA SEARCH

The following types of data search instruction are available. Use any
of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub Processing

name number
1 DSCHB 34 Binary data search
2 DSCH 17 Data search

- 253 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.7.1 DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34)

This function instruction instructs data search in the data table.

DSCHB searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address
storing it counting from the beginning of the data table. If the data
cannot be found, an output is made accordingly.
The numerical data handled in this instruction are all in binary format
and number of data (table capacity) in the data table can be specified
by specifying the address, thus allowing change in table capacity even
after writing the sequence program in the flash ROM.

Table number Data table

0
Search data 1
100 2 100
3
Search result output
2

Fig. 4.7.1 (a)

Format
Fig. 4.7.1 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.7.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

Search result

RST W1
SUB 34

DSCHB ¡ Format designation

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Storage address of number of data in data table
¡¡¡¡ * Data table head address
¡¡¡¡ * Search data address
¡¡¡¡ * Output address of search result

Fig. 4.7.1 (b) Format of DSCHB instruction

CAUTION
You can specify any R,E and D address for the data
table in this functional instruction.

- 254 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Table 4.7.1 Mnemonic of DSCHB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 34 DSCHB instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Format designation
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Storage address of number of data in
data table
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table head address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Search data address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Output address of search result
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Search result W1

Control conditions

(a) Reset (RST)

RST = 0: Release reset
RST = 1: Reset. W1 = "0".

(b) Activation command (ACT)

ACT = 0: Do not execute DSCHB instruction. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: Execute DSCHB instruction. If the search data is
found, table number where the data is stored will be
output. If the search data is not found, W1 becomes 1.

- 255 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format designation
Specifies data length. Specify byte length in the first digit of the
parameter.
1: 1-byte long data
2: 2-byte long data
4: 4-byte long data
(b) Storage address of number of data in data table
Specifies address in which number of data in the data table is set.
This address requires memory of number of byte according to the
format designation.
Number of data in the table is n + 1 (head number in the table is
0 and the last number is n).
(c) Data table head address
Sets head address of data table.
(d) Search data address
Address in which search data is set.
(e) Output address of search result
After searching, if search data is found, the table number where
the data is stored will be output. The searched table number is
output in this search result output address. This address requires
memory of number of byte according to the format designation.

Search result (W1)

W1 = 0: Search data found.
W1 = 1: Search data not found.

- 256 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.7.2 DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17)

This function instruction instructs data search in the data table. DSCH
searches the data table for a specified data, outputs an address storing
it counting from the beginning of the data table. If the data cannot be
found, an output is made accordingly. The value type in this
instruction is BCD.

Table internal number Data table

0

1
Search data
2
100 100

Search data result output

Fig. 4.7.2 (a)

CAUTION
You can specify any R,E and D address for the data
table in this functional instruction.

Format
Fig. 4.7.2 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.7.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT W1
SUB 17 Search result
¡¡¡¡.¡
RST
DSCH ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT
¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table (Table capacity)
¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Search data address
¡¡¡¡ Search result output address

Control condition

Fig. 4.7.2 (b) Format of DSCH instruction

- 257 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Table 4.7.2 Mnemonic of DSCH instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 17 DSCH instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Number of data of the data table
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data table heading address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Search data address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Search result output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Search result W1

Control conditions

(a) Specify data size. (BYT)

BYT = 0: Data stored in the data table, BCD two digits long.
BYT = 1: Data stored in the data table, BCD four digits long.
(b) Reset (RST)
RST = 0: Release reset
RST = 1: Enables a reset, that is, sets W1 to 0.
(c) Execution command (ACT)
ACT = 0: The DSCH instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT = 1: The DSCH is executed, and the table internal number
storing the desired data is output. If the data cannot
be found, W1 = 1.

- 258 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters

(a) Number of data of the data table

Specifies the size of the data table. If the beginning of the data
table is 0 and the end is n, n + 1 is set as the number of data of
the data table.
(b) Data table heading address
Addresses that can be used in a data table are fixed. When
preparing a data table, the addresses to be used must be
determined beforehand, specify the head address of a data table
here.
(c) Search data address
Indicates the address of the data to be searched.
(d) Search result output address
If the data being searched for is found, the internal number of the
table storing the data is output to this field. This address field is
called a search result output address field.
The search result output address field requires memory whose
size is the number of bytes conforming to the size of the data
specified by BYT.

Search result (W1)

W1 = 0: Search data found.

W1 = 1: Search data not found.

- 259 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.8 BIT OPERATION

The following types of bit operation instruction are available. Use any
of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 DIFU 57 Rising edge detection
2 DIFD 58 Falling edge detection
3 EOR 59 Exclusive OR
4 AND 60 Logical AND
5 OR 61 Logical OR
6 NOT 62 Logical NOT
7 PARI 11 Parity check
8 SFT 33 Shift register

- 260 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.1 DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57)

The DIFU instruction sets the output signal to 1 for one scanning cycle
on a rising edge of the input signal.

Format
Fig. 4.8.1 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT OUT

SUB 57
DIFU
Rising edge
¡¡¡¡
number

Fig. 4.8.1 Format of DIFU instruction

Table 4.8.1 Mnemonic of DIFU instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 57 DIFU instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Rising edge number
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ OUT OUT

Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
On a rising edge (0 → 1) of the input signal, the output signal is
set to 1.

Detection result
(a) Output signal (OUT)
The output signal level remains at 1 for one scanning cycle of the
ladder level where this functional instruction is operating.

- 261 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
30i-A
Dual check safety
1st PMC 2nd PMC (option) 3rd PMC (option)
PMC(option)
Rising edge 1 to 1000 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 to 256
number

WARNING
If the same number is used for another DIFU
instruction or a DIFD instruction (described later) in
one Ladder diagram, operation is not guaranteed.

Operation
1 2 3 4 Execution period

ACT

OUT

- 262 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.2 DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58)

The DIFD instruction set the output signal to 1 for one scanning period
on a falling edge of the input signal.

Format
Fig. 4.8.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT OUT
SUB 58
DIFD
¡¡¡¡ Falling edge
number

Fig. 4.8.2 Format of DIFD instruction

Table 4.8.2 Mnemonic of DIFD instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 58 DIFD instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Falling edge number
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ OUT OUT

Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
On a falling edge (1→0) of the input signal, the output signal is set
to 1.

Detection result
(a) Output signal (OUT)
The output signal level remains at 1 for one scanning period of the
ladder level where this functional instruction is operating.

- 263 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters

30i-A
Dual check safety
1st PMC 2nd PMC (option) 3rd PMC (option)
PMC(option)
Falling edge
1 to 1000 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 to 256
number

WARNING
If the same number is used for another DIFD
instruction or a DIFU instruction (described above) in
one ladder diagram, operation is not guaranteed.

Operation
1 2 3 4
Execution period
ACT

OUT

- 264 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.3 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59)

The EOR instruction exclusive-ORs the contents of address A with a

constant (or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address
C. The value type in this instruction is binary.

Format
Fig. 4.8.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 59
o00o Format specification
EOR ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
¡¡¡¡
Address C

Fig. 4.8.3 Format of EOR instruction

Table 4.8.3 Mnemonic of EOR instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 59 EOR instruction
3 (PRM) o00o Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address A
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address C

Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
ACT=0: The EOR instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The EOR instruction is executed.

- 265 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format
(constant or address specification).

o 0 0 o

Data length specification

Format specification 1:1 byte
0: Constant 2:2 bytes
1: Address specification 4:4 bytes

(b) Address A
Input data to be exclusive-ORed. The data that is held starting at
this address and has the data length specified in format
specification is treated as input data.

(c) Constant or address B

Input data to be exclusive-ORed with. When address
specification is selected in format specification, the data that is
held starting at this address and has the data length specified in
format specification is treated as input data.

(d) Address C
Address used to store the result of an exclusive OR operation.
The result of an exclusive OR operation is stored starting at this
address, and has the data length specified in format specification.

Operation
When address A and address B hold the following data:

Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

The result of the exclusive OR operation is as follows:

Address C 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

- 266 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.4 AND (Logical AND: SUB 60)

The AND instruction ANDs the contents of address A with a constant

(or the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The
value type in this instruction is binary.

Format
Fig. 4.8.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.4 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT

SUB 60
o00o Format specification
AND ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
¡¡¡¡
Address C

Fig. 4.8.4 Format of AND instruction

Table 4.8.4 Mnemonic of AND instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 60 AND instruction
3 (PRM) o00o Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address A
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address C

Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
ACT=0: The AND instruction is not executed.
ACT=1 : The AND instruction is executed.

- 267 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format
(constant or address specification).

o 0 0 o

Data length specification

Format specification 1: 1 byte
0: Constant 2: 2 bytes
1: Address specification 4: 4 bytes

(b) Address A
Input data to be ANDed. The data that is held starting at this
address and has the data length specified in format specification
is treated as input data.

(c) Constant or address B

Input data to be ANDed with. When address specification is
selected in format specification, the data that is held starting at
this address and has the data length specified in format
specification is treated as input data.

(d) Address C
Address used to store the result of an AND operation. The result
of an AND operation is stored starting at this address, and has the
data length specified in format specification.

Operation
When address A and address B hold the following data:

Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

The result of the AND operation is as follows:

Address C 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

- 268 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.5 OR (Logical OR: SUB 61)

The OR instruction ORs the contents of address A with a constant (or

the contents of address B), and stores the result at address C. The value
type in this instruction is binary.

Format
Fig. 4.8.5 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.5 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT

SUB 61
o00o Format specification
OR ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
¡¡¡¡
Address C

Fig. 4.8.5 Format of OR instruction

Table 4.8.5 Mnemonic of OR instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 61 OR instruction
3 (PRM) o00o Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address A
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant or address B
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address C

Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
ACT=0: The OR instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The OR instruction is executed.

- 269 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes), and an input data format
(constant or address specification).

o 0 0 o

Data length specification

Format specification 1: 1 byte
0: Constant 2: 2 bytes
1: Address specification 4: 4 bytes

(b) Address A
Input data to be ORed. The data that is held starting at this
address and has the data length specified in format specification is
treated as input data.

(c) Constant or address B

Input data to be ORed with. When address specification is
selected in format specification, the data that is held starting at
this address and has the data length specified in format
specification is treated as input data.

(d) Address C
Address used to store the result of an OR operation. The result of
an OR operation is stored starting at this address, and has the data
length specified in format specification.

Operation
When address A and address B hold the following data:

Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

Address B 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

The result of the OR operation is as follows:

Address C 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

- 270 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.6 NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62)

The NOT instruction inverts each bit of the contents of address A, and
stores the result at address B.

Format
Fig. 4.8.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.6 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT

SUB 62
000o Format specification
NOT ¡¡¡¡ Address A
¡¡¡¡ Address B

Fig. 4.8.6 Format of NOT instruction

Table 4.8.6 Mnemonic of NOT instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 62 NOT instruction
3 (PRM) 000o Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address A
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address B

Control conditions
(a) Input signal (ACT)
ACT=0: The NOT instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The NOT instruction is executed.

- 271 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specify a data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes).

0 0 0 o

Data length specification

1: 1 byte
2: 2 bytes
4: 4 bytes

(b) Address A
Input data to be inverted bit by bit. The data that is held starting at
this address and has the data length specified in format
specification is treated as input data.

(c) Address B
Address used to output the result of a NOT operation. The result
of a NOT operation is stored starting at this address, and has the
data length specified in format specification.

Operation
When address A holds the following data:

Address A 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

The result of the NOT operation is as follows:

Address B 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

- 272 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.7 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11)

Checks the parity of code signals, and outputs an error if an

abnormality is detected. Specifies either an even- or odd-parity check.
Only one-byte (eight bits) of data can be checked.

Format
Fig. 4.8.7 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.7 shows the
mnemonic format.

O.E

¡¡¡¡. ¡ Error output

SUB 11 W1
RST
PARI ¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡¡. ¡
¡¡¡¡. ¡
ACT

¡¡¡¡. ¡

Check data address

Control condition Instruction

Fig. 4.8.7 (a) Format of PARI instruction

Table 4.8.7 Mnemonic of PARI instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ O.E O.E
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST O.E RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT O.E RST ACT
4 SUB 11 PARI instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Check data address
6 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

Control conditions
(a) Specify even or odd. (O.E)
O.E=0: Even-parity check
O.E=1: Odd-parity check

- 273 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Disables reset.
RST=1: Sets error output W1 to 0. That is, when a parity error
occurs, setting RST to 1 results in resetting.

(c) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: Parity checks are not performed. W1 does not alter.
ACT=1: Executes the PARI instruction, performing a parity
check.

Error output (W1)

If the results of executing the PARI instruction is abnormal, W1=1 and
an error is posted. The W1 address can be determined arbitrarily.

Example of using the PARI instruction

Fig. 4.8.7 (b) shows odd-parity checking of a code signal entered at

address X036.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Address X036 0

6-bit code signal

Odd-parity bit

A
A
R228.0
A R228.0

R228.0
A
SUB 11
R228.0
PARI X036
ERST.M
ERR
X32.7

TF

F7.3

Fig. 4.8.7 (b) Ladder diagram for the PARI instruction

NOTE
For bits 0 to 7, bits other than those for the parity
check must be 0.

- 274 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.8.8 SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33)

This instruction shifts 2-byte (16-bit) data by a bit to the left or right.
Note that W1=1 when data "1" is shifted from the left extremity (bit 15)
in left shift or from the right extremity (bit 0) in right shift.

Format
Fig. 4.8.8 shows the ladder format and Table 4.8.8 shows the
mnemonic format.
DIR
*

CONT SUB 33
¡¡¡¡
SFT W1

RST Address of

shift data

ACT

Fig. 4.8.8 Format of SFT instruction

Table 4.8.8 Mnemonic of SFT instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR DIR
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CONT DIR CONT
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST DIR CONT RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT DIR CONT RST ACT
5 SUB 33 SFT instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Address of shift data
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Shifted-out output W1

- 275 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
(a) Shift direction specification (DIR)]
DIR=0: Left shift
DIR=1: Right shift

(b) Condition specification (CONT)

CONT=0:
On "1" bit shifts by one bit in the specified direction.
The condition of an adjacent bit (eighter right or left adjacent
bit according to the specification of shift direction DIR) is
set to the original bit position of the on "1" bit.
Also, "0" is set to bit 0 after shifting in the left direction or
set to hit 15 after shifting in the right direction.
In case of leftward shift;

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Left shift

Bit shifts leftward every bit

Shift out at bit 15

Zero is set to bit 0.

CONT=1:
Shift is the same as above, but 1s are set to shifted bits.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Left shift
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 <1> 1 <1> 0 0 1 <1> 0 0

Each bit shifts leftward. Status 1 remains unchanged

(c) Reset (RST)

The shifted out data (W1=1) is reset (W1=0).
RST=0: W1 is not reset.
RST=1: W1 is reset (W1=0).

(d) Actuation signal (ACT)

Shift processing is done when ACT=1. For shifting one bit only,
execute an instruction when ACT=1, and then, set ACT to 0
(ACT=0).

- 276 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Shift data addresses
Sets shift data addresses. These designated addresses require a
continuous 2-byte memory for shift data.
Bit numbers are represented by bit 0 to 15 as shown below. When
addresses are designated for programming, an address number is
attached every 8 bits, and the designable bit numbers are 0 to 7.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Designated address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Designated address +1

Shifted out
W1=0: "1" was not shifted out because of the shift operation.
W1=1: "1" was shifted out because of the shift operation.

- 277 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.9 CODE CONVERSION

The following types of code conversion instruction are available. Use

any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 COD 7 Code conversion
2 CODB 27 Binary code conversion
3 DCNV 14 Data conversion
4 DCNVB 31 Extended data conversion
5 DEC 4 Decoding
6 DECB 25 Binary decoding

- 278 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.9.1 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7)

Converts BCD codes into an arbitrary two- or four-digits BCD numbers.

For code conversion shown in Fig. 4.9.1 (a) the conversion input data
address, conversion table, and convert data output address must be
provided.
Set a table address, in which the data to be retrieved from the
conversion table is contained, to conversion table input data address in
a two-digits BCD number. The conversion table is entered in sequence
with the numbers to be retrieved in the two- or four-digits number. The
contents of the conversion table of the number entered in the
conversion input data address is output to the convert data output
address. As shown in Fig. 4.9.1 (a), when 3 is entered in the conversion
input data address, the contents 137 located at 3 in the conversion table
is output to the convert data output address.

Table internal address Conversion table

Conversion input 0
data address 3
1
¡¡¡¡
Specifies table internal 2
number (BCD two-digits).
3 137

4
Convert data
output address
¡¡¡¡
Data of the specified table internal address
is output to this address.
n

Fig. 4.9.1 (a) Code conversion diagram

- 279 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Format
Fig. 4.9.1 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT Error output

W1

¡¡¡¡. ¡ SUB 7
RST ¡¡¡ Size of table data
COD ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
¡¡¡¡. ¡ ¡¡¡¡ Converted data output address
ACT

¡¡¡¡. ¡

Control condition

Table address Convert data

0 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
1 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

2 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

3 ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

Fig. 4.9.1 (b) Format of COD instruction

Table 4.9.1 Mnemonic of COD instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 7 COD instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Size of table data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data output address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data at table address 0
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data at table address 1
: : : :
7+n (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Data at {n (convert data at table address) - 1}
7 + n + 1 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 280 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Specify the data size. (BYT)
BYT=0: Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD
two digits.
BYT=1: Specifies that the conversion table data is to be BCD
four digits.

(b) Error output reset (RST)

RST=0: Disable reset
RST=1: Sets error output W1 to 0 (resets).

(c) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The COD instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: Executed.

Parameters
(a) Size of table data
A conversion table data address from 00 to 99 can be specified.
Specify n+1 as the size of table when n is the last table internal
number.

(b) Conversion input data address

The conversion table address includes a table address in which
converted data is loaded. Data in the conversion table can be
retrieved by specifying a conversion table address.
One byte (BCD 2-digit) is required for this conversion input data
address.

(c) Convert data output address

The convert data output address is the address where the data
stored in the table is to be output. The convert data BCD two
digits in size, requires only a 1-byte memory at the convert data
output address.
Convert data BCD four digits in size, requires a 2-byte memory at
the convert data output address.

- 281 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Error output (W1)

If an error occurs in the conversion input address during execution of
the COD instruction, W1=1 to indicate an error.
For example, W1=1 results if a number exceeding the table size
specified in the sequence program is specified as the conversion input
address. When W1=1, it is desirable to effect an appropriate interlock,
such as having the error lamp on the machine tool operator's panel light
or stopping axis feed.

Conversion data table

The size of the conversion data table is from 00 to 99.
The conversion data can be either BCD two digits or four digits, which
is specified depends on the control conditions.

- 282 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.9.2 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27)

This instruction converts data in binary format to an optional binary

format 1-byte, 2-byte, or 4-byte data.
Conversion input data address, conversion table, and conversion data
output address are necessary for data conversion; as shown in Fig. 4.9.2
(a).
Compared to the "COD Function Instruction", this CODB function
instruction handles numerical data 1-, 2- and 4-byte length binary
format data, and the conversion table can be extended to maximum
256.

Table address Conversion table

Conversion data 0
address 2
¡¡¡¡
Specify table address here. 1
(binary format1 byte)
2 (Note 1) This table data is binary
format 2-byte data.
Conversion data 3
(Note 2) Conversion table is
output address 1250 written in the ROM
¡¡¡¡ together together with
Data stored in the specified ∼ ∼ the program, because it
table address is output to ∼ ∼ is defined in the
this address sequence program.

n
(n: max. 255)

Fig. 4.9.2 (a) Code conversion diagram

- 283 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Format
Fig. 4.9.2 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

Error output
W1
RST
SUB 27

CODB
ACT ¡ Format designation
¡¡¡ Number of conversion table data
¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
¡¡¡¡ * Conversion data output address

Fig. 4.9.2 (b) Format of CODB instruction

Table 4.9.2 Mnemonic of CODB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD.STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 27 CODB instruction
4 (PRM) ¡ Format specification
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡ Size of table data
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data output address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data at table address 0
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data at table address 1
: : : :
7+n Data at {n (convert data at table address) - 1}
7 + n + 1 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=0: Do not reset.
RST=1: Reset error output W1 (W1=0).

(b) Activate command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute CODB instruction
ACT=1: Execute CODB instruction.

- 284 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Format designation
Designates binary numerical size in the conversion table.
1: Numerical data is binary 1-byte data.
2: Numerical data is binary 2-byte data.
4: Numerical data is binary 4-byte data.

(b) Number of conversion table data

Designates size of conversion table. 256 (0 to 255) data can be
made.

(c) Conversion input data address

Data in the conversion data table can be taken out by specifying
the table number. The address specifying the table number is
called conversion input data address, and 1-byte memory is
required from the specified address.

(d) Conversion data output address

Address to output data stored in the specified table number is
called conversion data output address.
Memory of the byte length specified in the format designation is
necessary from the specified address.

Conversion data table

Size of the conversion data table is maximum 256 (from 0 to 255).

Error output (W1)

If the table number in the conversion input data address exceeds the
number of the conversion table data when executing the CODB
instruction, W1=1.

- 285 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.9.3 DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14)

Converts binary-code into BCD-code and vice versa.

Format
Fig. 4.9.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

Error output
BYT W1

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 14

CNV ¡¡¡¡.¡
DCNV

¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Input data address

RST
¡¡¡¡ Conversion result output
¡¡¡¡.¡

ACT

¡¡¡¡.¡

Control condition

Fig. 4.9.3 Format of DCNV instruction

Table 4.9.3 Mnemonic of DCNV instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address Bit No.
Instruction Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CNV BYT CNV
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT CNV RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT CNV RST ACT
5 SUB 14 DCNV instruction
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Input data address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion result output
address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ W1 error output W1

- 286 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Specify data size. (BYT)
BYT=0: Process data in length of one byte (8 bits)
BYT=1: Process data in length of two byte (16 bits)

(b) Specify the type of conversion (CNV)

CNV=0: Converts binary-code into BCD-code.
CNV=1: Converts BCD-code into binary-code.

(c) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Disables reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1. That is, setting RST to 1 when
W1=1, makes W1=0.

(d) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: Data is not converted. W1 does not alter.
ACT=1: Data is converted.
Parameters
(a) Input data address
Specify the address of the input data
(b) Output address after conversion
Specify the address output data converted into BCD or binary type

Error output (W1)

W1=0: Normal
W1=1 : Conversion error
W1=1 if the input data which should be BCD data, is
binary data, or if the data size (byte length) specified in
advance is exceeded when converting binary data into
BCD data.

- 287 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.9.4 DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31)

This instruction converts 1, 2, and 4-byte binary code into BCD code or
vice versa. To execute this instruction, you must preserve the
necessary number of bytes in the memory for the conversion result
output data.

Format
Fig. 4.9.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.4 shows the
mnemonic format.

SIN

W1

CNV
SUB 31

¡ Format specification
RST DCNVB ¡¡¡¡ * Input data address
¡¡¡¡ * Conversion result output address

ACT

Fig. 4.9.4 Format of DCNVB instruction

Table 4.9.4 Mnemonic of DCNVB instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ SIN SIN
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ CNV SIN CNV
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST SIN CNV RST
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT SIN CNV RST ACT
5 SUB 31 DCNVB instruction
6 (PRM) ¡ Size of table data
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Conversion input data
address
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Convert data output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 288 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Sign of the data to be converted (SIN)
This parameter is significant only when you are converting BCD
data into binary coded data. It gives the sign of the BCD data.
Note that though it is insignificant when you are converting binary
into BCD data, you cannot omit it.
SIN=0: Data (BCD code) to be input is positive.
SIN=1: Data (BCD code) to be input is negative.

(b) Type of conversion (CNV)

CNV=0: Convert binary data into BCD data
CNV=1: Convert BCD data into binary data.

(c) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Release reset
RST=1: Reset error output W1. In other words, set W1=0.

(d) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: Data is not converted. The value of W1 remains
unchanged.
ACT=1: Data is converted.

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specify data length (1,2, or 4 bytes).
Use the first digit of the parameter to specify byte length.
1: one byte
2: two bytes
4: four bytes

(b) Input data address

Specify the address containing the input data address.

(c) Address for the conversion result output

Specify the address to output the data converted to BCD or binary
format.

- 289 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Error output (W1)

W1=0: Correct conversion
W1=1: Abnormally
(The data to be converted is specified as BCD data but is found to be
binary data, or the specified number of bytes cannot contain (and hence
an overflow occurs) the BCD data into which a binary data is
converted.)

Operation output register (R9000)

This register is set with data on operation. If register bit 1 is on, they
signify the following.
For the positive/negative signs when binary data is converted into BCD
data, see R9000.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

Negative

Overflow
(data exceeds the number of bytes specified)

- 290 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.9.5 DEC (Decode: SUB 4)

Outputs 1 when the two-digit BCD code signal is equal to a specified

number, and 0 when not. Is used mainly to decode M or T function.
The value type in this instruction is BCD.

Format
Fig. 4.9.5 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.9.5 (a) shows the
mnemonic format.

Decoding result output

W1
ACT
SUB 4
DEC
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡.¡
Address of decode signal
¡¡¡¡ Decode instruction
¡¡¡¡ ¡¡ ¡¡
Control condition Number of digits instruction
Number of digits instruction

Fig. 4.9.5 (a) Format of DEC instruction

Table 4.9.5 (a) Mnemonic of DEC instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 DEC ¡¡¡¡ Code signal address
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode specification
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ W1, decoding result output W1

The mnemonic-format instruction name "DEC" for step number 2

above may be abbreviated as "D".

Control condition
ACT=0: Turns the decoding result output off (W1).
ACT=1: Performs decoding.
When the specified number is equal to the code signal, W1=1; when
not, W1=0.

- 291 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Code signal address
Specify the address containing two-digit BCD code signals.

(b) Decode specification

There are two paths, the number and the number of digits.

Decode specification ¡¡ ¡¡

Number of digits specification

Number specification

(i) Number:
Specify the decode number.
Must always be decoded in two digits.
(ii) Number of digits:
01: The high-order digit of two decimal digits is set to 0
and only the low-order digit is decoded.
10: The low-order digit is set to 0 and only the high-order
digit is decoded.
11: Two decimal digits are decoded.

W1 (decoding result output)

W1 is 1 when the status of the code signal at a specified address is

equal to a specified number, 0 when not. The address of W1 is
determined by designer.

W1
SUB 4 R200
DEC
R100.0 R103.1 3011
R228.1

Fig. 4.9.5 (b) Ladder diagram using the DEC instruction

Table 4.9.5 (b) Mnemonic for Fig. 4.9.5 (b)

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 RD R100 .0
2 AND R103 .1
3 DEC R200
4 (PRM) 3011
5 WRT R228 .1

- 292 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.9.6 DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25)

DECB decodes one, two, or four-byte binary code data. When one of
the specified eight consecutive numbers matches the code data, a
logical high value (value 1) is set in the output data bit which
corresponds to the specified number. When these numbers do not
match, a logical low value (value 0) is set.
Use this instruction for decoding data of the M or T function.
There are two specifications - basic specification and extended
specification - for setting the format specification parameter in the
DECB instruction. The extended specification allows 8n consecutive
values to be decoded at a time. For the details of the setting of a format
specification parameter, see the description of parameters.

Format

SUB 25 Decode result output

¡
Code ¡¡¡¡ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DECB
data ¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡¡ Decode designating
number +0
1, 2 or 4-byte
binary code data Decode designating
number +1

Decode designating
number +7
Decode designating numbers
Eight numbers, each of which is added by 0, 1, 2, . . . , and 7 to the specified
number are decoded.
When number 62 is specified, for example, eight numbers of 62 to 69 are
decoded.
If code data is 62, 0 bit of output data is turned on; if 69, 7th bit is turned on.

Fig. 4.9.6 (a) Function of DECB instruction (basic specification)

- 293 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Decode result output

SUB 25 0ooo
Code ¡¡¡¡ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
data DECB ¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡¡ Decode designating
number +0
1, 2 or 4-byte
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
binary code data

Decode designating
number +8

8n-1 8(n-1)

Decode designating
number +(8n-1)

Decode designating numbers

8n numbers, each of which is added by 0, 1, 2, . . . , and (8n-1) to the specified
number are decoded. (n is set by the format specification parameter)
When number 62 is specified, for example, 8n numbers of 62 to 62+8n-1 are
decoded.
If code data is 62, 0 bit of output data+0 is turned on; if 77, 7th bit of output
data+1 is turned on.

Fig. 4.9.6 (b) Function of DECB instruction (extended specification)

Figs. 4.9.6 (c) and (d) show the ladder formats and Tables 4.9.6 (a) and
(b) show the mnemonic formats.

ACT
SUB 25
¡ Format specification
DECB ¡¡¡¡ * Code data address
¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address

Fig. 4.9.6 (c) Format of DECB instruction (basic specification)

Table 4.9.6 (a) Mnemonic of DECB instruction (basic specification)

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 25 DECB instruction
3 (PRM) ¡ Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Code data address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address

- 294 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

ACT
SUB 25
0ooo Format specification
DECB ¡¡¡¡ * Code data address
¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address

Fig. 4.9.6 (d) Format of DECB instruction (extended specification)

Table 4.9.6 (b) Mnemonic of DECB instruction (extended specification)

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 25 DECB instruction
3 (PRM) 0ooo Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Code data address
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode designation
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Decode result output address

Control conditions
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT=0: Resets all the output data bits.
ACT=1: Decodes data.
Results of processing is set in the output data address.

- 295 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Set the size of code data to the 1st digit of the parameter.
0001: Code data is in binary format of 1 byte length
0002: Code data is in binary format of 2 byte length
0004: Code data is in binary format of 4 byte length
When setting format specification in the following extended format,
DECB can decode multiple (8 × n) bytes by 1 instruction.
0nn1: In case of decoding multiple (8 × nn) bytes and code data
is binary format of 1 byte length
0nn2: In case of decoding multiple (8 × nn) bytes and code data
is binary format of 2 byte length
0nn4: In case of decoding multiple (8 × nn) bytes and code data
is binary format of 4 byte length
The nn is the numerical value from 02 to 99. When setting 00 or
01, it works for decoding 8 numbers.

Format specification (extended specification) :

0 n n X

The byte length setting of code data

1: 1 byte length
2: 2 byte length
4: 4 byte length

The multiple decoding number setting

00-01:
It decodes 8 continuous numbers.
The decode result output address needs a memory of 1 byte length.
02-99:
It decodes multiple (8 nn) continuous numbers.
The decode result output address needs a memory of nn bytes length.

(b) Code data address

Specifies the numbers to be decoded.

(c) Number specification decode designation

Specifies the numbers to be decoded.

(d) Decode result address

Specifies an address where the decoded result shall be output.
A one-byte area is necessary in the memory for the output.
When executing this instruction in extended specification, the
area of setting by the format specification for the nn bytes is
necessary.

- 296 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.10 OPERATION INSTRUCTION

The following types of operation instruction are available. Use any of

these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 ADDB 36 Binary addition
2 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction
3 MULB 38 Binary multiplication
4 DIVB 39 Binary division
5 ADD 19 BCD addition
6 SUB 20 BCD subtraction
7 MUL 21 BCD multiplication
8 DIV 22 BCD division
9 NUMEB 40 Definition of binary constants
10 NUME 23 Definition of BCD constants

- 297 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.1 ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36)

This instruction performs binary addition between 1-, 2-, and 4-byte
data. In the operation result register (R9000), operating data is set
besides the numerical data representing the operation results. The
required number of bytes is necessary to store each augend, the added,
and the operation output data.

Format
Fig. 4.10.1 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

Error output

RST W1
SUB 36

ADDB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Augend address
¡¡¡¡ * Addend data (address)
¡¡¡¡ * Result output address

Fig. 4.10.1 Format of ADDB instruction

Table 4.10.1 Mnemonic of ADDB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 36 ADDB instruction
4 (PRM) o00o Format specification
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Augend address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Addend data (address)
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Result output address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 298 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=0: Release reset
RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0.

(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute ADDB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute ADDB.

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the
addend (constant or address).

0 0

Data length specification

1: 1 byte length data
2: 2 bytes length data
4: 4 bytes length data

Format specification
0: Constant data
1: Address data

(b) Augend address

Address containing the augend.

(c) Addend data (address)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the addend.

(d) Result output address

Specifies the address to contain the result of operation.

Error output (W1)

W1=0: Operation correct
W1=1: Operation incorrect
W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result of addition exceeds the
specified data length.

- 299 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Operation output register (R9000)

This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they
signify the following operation data:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

Zero

Negative
Overflow

- 300 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.10.2 SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37)

This instruction subtracts one data from another, both data being in the
binary format of 1, 2 or 4 bytes.
In the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides
the numerical data representing the operation. A required number of
bytes is necessary to store the subtrahend, minuend, and the result
(difference).

Format
Fig. 4.10.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

Error output

RST W1
SUB 37

SUBB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Menuend address
¡¡¡¡ * Minuend data (address)
¡¡¡¡ * Result output address

Fig. 4.10.2 Format of SUBB instruction

Table 4.10.2 Mnemonic of SUBB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 37 SUBB instruction
4 (PRM) o00o Format specification
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Menuend address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Minuend data (address)
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Result output address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 301 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=0: Release reset
RST=1: Resets error output W1. (Set W1 to 0.)

(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute SUBB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute SUBB.

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the
subtrahend (constant or address).

0 0

Data length specification

1: 1 byte length data
2: 2 bytes length data
4: 4 bytes length data
Format specification
0: Constant data
1: Address data

(b) Minuend address

Address containing the minuend.

(c) Minuend data (address)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the minuend.

(d) Result output address

Specifies the address to contain the result of operation.

Error output (W1)

W1=0: Operation correct
W1=1: Operation incorrect
W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result of subtraction exceeds the
specified data length.

- 302 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Operation output register (R9000)

This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they
signify the following operation data:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

Zero

Negative
Overflow

- 303 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.3 MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38)

This instruction multiplies 1-, 2-, and 4-byte binary data items. In the
operation result register (R9000), operation data is set besides the
numerical data representing the operation.
A required number of bytes is necessary to store multiplicand,
multiplier, and the result (product).

Format
Fig. 4.10.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

Error output

RST W1
SUB 38

MULB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Multiplicand address
¡¡¡¡ * Multiplier data (address)
¡¡¡¡ * Result output address

Fig. 4.10.3 Format of MULB instruction

Table 4.10.3 Mnemonic of MULB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 38 MULB instruction
4 (PRM) o00o Format specification
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplicand address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplier data (address)
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Result output address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 304 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=0: Release reset
RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0.

(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute MULB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute MULB.

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the
multiplier (constant or address).

0 0

Data length specification

1: 1 byte length data
2: 2 bytes length data
4: 4 bytes length data
Format specification
0: Constant data
1: Address data

(b) Multiplicand address

Address containing the multiplicand.

(c) Multiplier data (address or constant)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the multiplier.

(d) Result output address

Specifies the address to contain the result of operation.

Error output (W1)

W1=0: Operation correct
W1=1: Operation incorrect
W1 goes on (W1=1) if the result of multiplication exceeds
the specified data length.

- 305 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Operation output register (R9000)

This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they
signify the following operation data:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

Zero

Negative
Overflow

- 306 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.10.4 DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39)

This instruction divides binary data items 1, 2, and 4 byte in length. In

the operation result register (R9000), operation data is set and
remainder is set to R9002 and following addresses.
A required number of bytes is necessary to store the dividend, divisor,
and the result (quotient).

Format
Fig. 4.10.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.4 shows the
mnemonic format.

Error output

RST W1
SUB 39

DIVB o00o Format specification

ACT ¡¡¡¡ * Dividend address
¡¡¡¡ * Divisor data (address)
¡¡¡¡ * Result output address

Fig. 4.10.4 Format of DIVB instruction

Table 4.10.4 Mnemonic of DIVB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 39 DIVB instruction
4 (PRM) o00o Format specification
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Dividend address
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Divisor data (address)
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Result output address
8 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 307 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
(a) Reset (RST)
RST=0: Release reset
RST=1: Resets error output W1. In other words, makes W1=0.

(b) Command (ACT)

ACT=0: Do not execute DIVB. W1 does not change now.
ACT=1: Execute DIVB.

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length (1, 2, and 4 bytes) and the format for the
divisor (constant or address).

0 0

Data length specification

1: 1 byte length data
2: 2 bytes length data
Format specification 4: 4 bytes length data
0: Constant data
1: Address data

(b) Dividend address

Address containing the dividend

(c) Divisor data (address)

Specification in (a) determines the format of the divisor.

(d) Result output address

Specified the address to contain the result of operation.

Error output (W1)

W1=0: Operation correct
W1=1: Operation incorrect
W1 goes on (W1=1) if the divisor is 0.

- 308 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Operation output register (R9000)

This register is set with data on operation. If register bit is on, they
signify the following operation data:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000

Zero

Negative

Overflow

Remainder output address

Depending on its length, the remainder is stored in one or more of

registers R9002 to R9005.

- 309 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.5 ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19)

Adds BCD two- or four-digit data.

Format
Fig. 4.10.5 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.5 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT W1
Error output

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 19
RST
ADD ¡¡¡¡.¡

¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of addend (Constant or address)

ACT ¡¡¡¡ Summand address
¡¡¡¡ Addend
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Sum output address

Control conditions

Fig. 4.10.5 Format of ADD instruction

Table 4.10.5 Mnemonic of ADD instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 19 ADD instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Addend format
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Summand address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Addend (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Sum output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 310 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long.
BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long.

(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Release reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0.

(c) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The ADD instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The ADD instruction is executed.

Parameters
(a) Data format of addend
0: Specifies addend with a constant.
1: Specifies addend with an address.

(b) Summand address

Set the address storing the summand.

(c) Addend (address)

Addressing of the addend depends on above (a).

(d) Sum output address

Set the address to which the sum is to be output.

Error output
W1=0: Normal operation
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1 is set to 1 to indicate an error, e.g. if
the result of the addition exceeds the data size specified for
control condition (a) described above.

- 311 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.6 SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20)

Subtracts BCD two- or four-digit data.

Format
Fig. 4.10.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.6 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT W1
Error output

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 20
RST
SUB ¡¡¡¡.¡
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of subtrahend
ACT ¡¡¡¡ Minuend address
¡¡¡¡ Subtrahend
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Difference output address

Control condition

Fig. 4.10.6 Format of SUB instruction

Table 4.10.6 Mnemonic of SUB instruction

Mnemonic format Memory status of control condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 20 SUB instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Data format of subtrahend
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Minuend address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Subtrahend (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Difference output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 312 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Specification of the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT=0: Data BCD two digits long
BYT=1: Data BCD four digits long

(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Release reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0.

(c) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The SUB instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The SUB instruction is executed.

Parameters
(a) Data format of subtrahend
0: Specifies subtrahend with a constant.
1: Specifies subtrahend with an address.

(b) Minuend address

Set the address storing the minuend.

(c) Subtrahend (address)

Addressing of the subtrahend depends on above (a).

(d) Difference output address

Sets the address to which the difference is output.

Error output
W1=0: Normal operation
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1 is set 1 to indicate an error if the
difference is negative.

- 313 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.7 MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21)

Multiplies BCD two- or four-digit data. The product must also be BCD
two- or four-digit data.

Format
Fig. 4.10.7 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.7 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT W1
Error output

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 21
RST
MUL ¡¡¡¡.¡

¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Data format of multiplier (constant or address)

ACT ¡¡¡¡ Multiplicand address
¡¡¡¡ Multiplier
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Product output address

Control conditions

Fig. 4.10.7 Format of MUL instruction

Table 4.10.7 Mnemonic of MUL instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 21 MUL instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Data format of multiplier
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplicand address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Multiplier (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Product output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 314 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long.
BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long.

(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Releases reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0.

(c) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The MUL instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The MUL instruction is executed.

Parameters
(a) Data format of multiplier
0: Specifies multiplier with a constant.
1: Specifies multiplier with an address.

(b) Multiplicand address

Sets the address storing the multiplicand.

(c) Multiplier (address)

Addressing of the multiplier depends on above (a).

(d) Product output address

Set the address to which the product is output.

Error output
W1=0: Normal operation
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1=1 is set to indicate an error if the
product exceeds the specified size.

- 315 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.8 DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22)

Divides BCD two- or four-digit data. Remainders are discarded.

Format
Fig. 4.10.8 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.8 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT W1
Error output

¡¡¡¡.¡ SUB 22
RST
DIV ¡¡¡¡.¡

¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡ Divisor data format designation (constant or address)

ACT ¡¡¡¡ Dividend address
¡¡¡¡ Divisor (address)
¡¡¡¡.¡ ¡¡¡¡ Quotient output address

Control conditions

Fig. 4.10.8 Format of DIV instruction

Table 4.10.8 Mnemonic of DIV instruction

Memory status of control
Mnemonic format
condition
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST BYT RST
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT RST ACT
4 SUB 22 DIV instruction
5 (PRM) ¡ Divisor data format
designation
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Dividend address
7 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Divider (address)
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Quotient output address
9 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Error output W1

- 316 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of data. (BYT)
BYT=0: Data is BCD two digits long.
BYT=1: Data is BCD four digits long.

(b) Reset (RST)

RST=0: Releases reset.
RST=1: Resets error output W1, that is, sets W1 to 0.

(c) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The DIV instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: The DIV instruction is executed.

Parameters
(a) Divisor data format designation
0: Specifies divisor data by constant.
1: Specifies divisor data by address.

(b) Dividend address

Sets the address storing the dividend.

(c) Divisor (address)

Addressing of the divisor depends on above (a).

(d) Quotient output address

Sets the address to which the quotient is output.

Error output
W1=0: Normal operation
W1=1: Abnormal operation. W1=1 is set to indicate an error if the
divider is 0.

- 317 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.10.9 NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40)

This instruction defines 1, 2, or 4-bytes long binary constant. Data

entered in decimal during programming is converted into binary data
during program execution. The binary data is stored in the specified
memory address(es).
There are two specifications - basic specification and extended
specification - for setting the format specification parameter in the
NUMEB instruction. The extended specification allows all the set
constants to be defined simultaneously in an array having n elements.
This extended specification is effective when initializing a large
memory area with value. For the details of the setting of a format
specification parameter, see the description of parameters.

Format
Figs. 4.10.9 (a) and (b) show the ladder formats and Tables 4.10.9 (a)
and (b) show the mnemonic formats.

ACT
SUB 40
NUMEB ¡ Format specification
¡¡¡¡ Constant
¡¡¡¡ Constant output address

Fig. 4.10.9 (a) Format of NUMEB instruction (basic specification)

Table 4.10.9 (a) Mnemonic of NUMEB instruction (basic specification)

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 40 NUMEB instruction
3 (PRM) ¡ Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant output address

- 318 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

ACT
SUB 40
0ooo Format specification
NUMEB
¡¡¡¡ Constant
¡¡¡¡ Constant output address

Fig. 4.10.9 (b) Format of NUMEB instruction (extended specification)

Table 4.10.9 (b) Mnemonic of NUMEB instruction (extended specification)

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 40 NUMEB instruction
3 (PRM) 0ooo Format specification
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant output address

Control conditions
(a) Command (ACT)
ACT= 0: Do not execute NUMEB.
ACT=1 : Execute NUMEB.

- 319 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Format specification
Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes).
Use the first parameter digit to specify byte length:
0001: Binary data of 1 byte length
0002: Binary data of 2 byte length
0004: Binary data of 4 byte length

When setting format specification in the following extended

format, NUMEB can define all the set constants simultaneously in
an array having nn elements.
Specify data length (1, 2, or 4) to the 1st digit as above-mentioned.
Specify the number of the array in which is a constant to the 2nd
and 3rd digit is defines.
Specify 0 to the 4th digit.
0nn1: In case of defining multiple (nn) data by 1 byte length
0nn2: In case of defining multiple (nn) data by 2 byte length
0nn4: In case of defining multiple (nn) data by 4 byte length

The n is the numerical value from 02 to 99. When setting 00 or 01,

it works as the basic specification that works for one data.

Format specification (extended specification):

0 n n x

The byte length setting of constant

1: 1 byte length
2: 2 byte length
4: 4 byte length

Number of data in the array

00-01 :
It defines constant at 1 memory.
02-99 :
It defines constants at multiple (nn) memory.

(b) Constant
Defined constants in decimal format. Set a constant data within
the effective range for the byte length which is set in above (a).

(c) Constant output address

Specifies the address of the area for output of the binary data. The
memory of the number of bytes which is set in above (a) is
necessary.
When setting format specification in the extended format, it is
necessary to reserve memory of (byte length) × (number of array
elements which define constant) which was set in above (a).

- 320 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.10.10 NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23)

Defines constants, when required. In this case, constants are defined

with this instructions. The value type in this instruction is BCD.

Format
Fig. 4.10.10 shows the ladder format and Table 4.10.10 shows the
mnemonic format.

BYT
SUB 23
NUME ¡¡¡¡ Constant
¡¡¡¡.¡
ACT ¡¡¡¡ Constant output
address
¡¡¡¡.¡

Instruction
Control condition

Fig. 4.10.10 Format of NUME instruction

Table 4.10.10 Mnemonic of NUME instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT BYT
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT BYT ACT
3 SUB 23 NUME instruction
4 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Constant output address

Control conditions
(a) Specify the number of digits of a constant. (BYT)
BYT=0: Constant is BCD two digits long.
BYT=1: Constant is BCD four digits long.

(b) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The NUME instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The NUME instruction is executed.

- 321 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Constant
Sets the constant as the number of digits specified for control
condition (a).

(b) Constant output address

Sets the address to which the constant defined in parameter (a) is
output.

- 322 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS

The functions of the CNC can be used by means of the functional

instructions of the PMC system. The following types of instruction are
available. Use any of these instructions as appropriate for your
purpose.

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 DISPB 41 Message display
2 EXIN 42 External data input
3 WINDR 51 Reading of CNC window data
4 WINDW 52 Writing of CNC window data
5 AXCTL 53 PMC axis control

- 323 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.11.1 DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41)

This instruction displays messages on the CNC screen. You can also
specify the message number to generate an alarm in the CNC.
You can program up to 2000 messages. You must use the special
message addresses in your program to simplify use of the messages.
The following are the features of this function.

NOTE
To use this instruction requires that the external data
input option or external message option be set on the
CNC side.

(a) In the program, specify 0 in the parameter and set ACT to 1. See
Fig. 4.11.1 (a).
If you set any bit of the message display request memory
(addresses A) to "1" when ACT = 1, the instruction displays the
message data defined in the message data table corresponding to
that bit. While the message is displayed, the bit of the message
display status memory corresponding to that message remains to
be "1".
Even if multiple messages are requested simultaneously, the
instruction does not necessarily display all the requested
messages. The number of messages that can be displayed
simultaneously is determined by the specifications of the CNC
screen. For example, if the CNC is designed to display up to four
messages on its screen at a time, a fifth message cannot be
displayed unless any of the four currently displayed messages is
cleared. This way, you can display the sixth and subsequent
messages as you clear the currently displayed messages one by
one.

- 324 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Message display request memory Message data table

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A000.0 (Message data corresponding to

A0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 address A000.0)
A1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A000.1 (Message data corresponding to
A2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address A000.1)
|
| ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
| ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
A249 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A249.7 (Message data corresponding to

address A249.7)

Message display status memory

NC message screen
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
xxxx:(Message of A000.0)
A9000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
A9001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 yyyy:(Message of A000.1)
A9002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 zzzz:(Message of A249.7)
|
| ∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼∼
|

A9249 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 [ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

Fig. 4.11.1 (a) Message display request memory, message display status memory, and message data table

NOTE
When ACT = 0, no message display processing is
performed at all. Make sure that ACT is always set to
"1" and code the program so that the message
display can be enabled or disabled by setting the
data in the message display request memory.

(i) Message display request memory

The message display request memory consists bits at A addresses
on each PMC model. One bit corresponds to one type of message
data.
If you want to display a message on the CNC screen, set the
corresponding display request memory 1. Set 0 to erase the
message of CNC screen.

- 325 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(ii) Message display status memory

This memory locates at the address A9000 to A9249 and has 2000
bits. Each bit corresponds to a message. While displaying a
message in CNC screen, the corresponding bit is set to 1. The
ladder can not write on this memory.

(iii) Message data table

This table stores messages corresponding to the message display
request bits. The table is stored in the EPROM together with the
sequence program. Message data table numbers correspond to the
message display request memory addresses.
The message data table capacity is prepared by the maximum
capacity of a message, or, 255 characters (255 bytes). Produce a
message data within this capacity.
A character prepared in CNC screen key consists of one byte, and
4 bytes are necessary for a message number (consisting of 4
characters) in the next item. A character not covered by the CNC
screen keys requires two bytes (a half-width kana character) or
four bytes (a kanji character or other full-width character). For
details, see the column "Defining characters not found in the CNC
screen" described later.

(iv) Message number

There are two specifications - the same specification as that for
the previous PMC models (standard specification) and extended
specification added for FS30i-A PMC. When the number of paths
to be controlled is three or less, the standard specification can be
applied to set message numbers for FS30i-A PMC. When four or
more paths are to be controlled, however, message numbers must
be set based on the extended specification.

- 326 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

• Standard specification (applicable when the number of paths

to be controlled is three or less)
This message number consisting of 4 digits must always be
defined at the start of each message data. Using this four-
digit number, set the type and number of the message and the
CNC screen on which the message is to be displayed. The
CNC screen is as specified below by this message number.

Message
CNC screen Display contents
number
1000 to Alarm screen Alarm message
1999 (on path 1) • Path 1 is placed in the alarm state.
2000 to
Operator Operator message
2099(*Note)
message
2100 to
screen Operator message (with no message number)
2999(*Note)
Alarm message
• Path 2 is placed in the alarm state.
5000 to Alarm screen
• The displayed message number is a
5999 (on path 2)
specified number from which 4000 is
subtracted.
Alarm message
• Path 3 is placed in the alarm state.
7000 to Alarm screen
• The displayed message number is a
7999 (on path 3)
specified number from which 6000 is
subtracted.

NOTE
Normally, the number of the operator message with
the message number is 100 (2000 to 2099) and the
number of it without the message number is 900
(2100 to 2999). By setting into the CNC parameter
No. 6310 “The number of the operator message with
the message number”, you can change the number
of it with the message number.
(Example)
400 is set into the CNC parameter No.6310
- 2000 to 2399 displaying with the number
- 2400 to 2999 displaying without the number

- 327 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

• Extended specification
Set an eight-digit or nine-digit alphanumeric character string
at the start of each set of message data to indicate the type
and number of the message and the CNC screen on which the
message is to be displayed.
The format is as follows:
Alarm message
AL1+000=
Operator message
OP1+000=
Explanation:
AL 1 + 000 =
<1> <2> <3>
<1>: The first two characters indicate whether the
message is an alarm message or operator message.
<2>: Represents a path number. In the case of an alarm
message, specify a path number. In the case of an
operator message, specify the top path number in a
machine group number. (Note)
<3>: This value represents a message number. In the case
of an operator message, it indicates whether the
message has a message number or not.

NOTE
1 The path number specified with alarm message and
operator message is the interface path number in
PMC side.
2 For the path number for the operator message,
Specify the top path number. If you specify other
path number except the top, the operator message is
not displayed.

- 328 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

The following table shows the message numbers and the corresponding
CNC screens.

Message
CNC screen Display contents
number
AL1+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL1+999= (Path 1) • Path 1 is placed in the alarm state.
AL2+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL2+999= (Path 2) • Path 2 is placed in the alarm state.
AL3+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL3+999= (Path 3) • Path 3 is placed in the alarm state.
AL4+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL4+999= (Path 4) • Path 4 is placed in the alarm state.
AL5+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL5+999= (Path 5) • Path 5 is placed in the alarm state.
AL6+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL6+999= (Path 6) • Path 6 is placed in the alarm state.
AL7+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL7+999= (Path 7) • Path 7 is placed in the alarm state.
AL8+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL8+999= (Path 8) • Path 8 is placed in the alarm state.
AL9+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL9+999= (Path 9) • Path 9 is placed in the alarm state.
AL10+000= to Alarm screen Alarm message
AL10+999= (Path 10) • Path 10 is placed in the alarm state.
OP1+000= to
Operator message Operator message
OP1+099=
screen
OP1+100= to Operator message
(Machine group 1)
OP1+999= (with no message number)
OP2+000= to
Operator message Operator message
OP2+099=
screen
OP2+100= to Operator message
(Machine group 2)
OP2+999= (with no message number)
OP3+000= to
Operator message Operator message
OP3+099=
screen
OP3+100= to Operator message
(Machine group 3)
OP3+999= (with no message number)

NOTE
The message number differs between an operator
message with a message number and that with no
message number. Note this difference when
displaying operator messages.

(b) You need not use numerical codes for message data input. Instead,
when programming, directly key in the characters making up the
messages (from the CNC screen keyboard). For the characters
that CNC screen does not provide for, you must enter these
characters by numerical data with special symbols "@". For
details, see the column "Defining characters not found in the CNC
screen" described later.

- 329 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(c) If you write the message data items in the ROM after
programming, you cannot change them any more (they will
become fixed data items). The only exception is numerical values
you want to use as variables. You can display these values,
existing in memory at the time when the message display starts, by
defining their memory addresses in the message data. Note,
however, that their values in memory cannot be displayed in real
time.
(d) A message is displayed on the NC alarm message/operator
message screen.
When using the DISPB instruction, you must satisfy the following
conditions:
To use DISPB, the optional External Data Input function or
External Message Display is necessary for NC.

Format
Fig. 4.11.1(b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.1(a) shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 41
DISPB 0 (Not used)

Fig. 4.11.1(b) Format of DISPB instruction

Table 4.11.1(a) Mnemonic of DISPB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 41 DISPB instruction
3 (PRM) 0 (Not used)

Control conditions
ACT=0: Do not display messages on the CNC screen.
ACT=1: Display the messages on the CNC screen.

- 330 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameter
This parameter is not used.
Enter "0" as the input value. (NOTE)

NOTE
Thanks to the compatibility with the former models,
the instruction runs normally if the entered value is in
the range between 1 and 2000.

Numerical data display

To change the numerical data contained within the messages, enter in
the messages the number of digits making up the data and the memory
address to contain the data. To differentiate between the numerical
data from the other message data, write it within [ ] in the message.
Since the brackets, [ ], are used to contain numerical data, they are not
themselves treated as symbols to be included in the messages.

(a) Numerical data format

(i) Signed

[Ibid, ¡¡¡¡]

Address where the numerical data is stored

Set binary data in the specified address.

Set the "bid" data after the letter "I":

b: Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)

i: Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d: Number of digits in the decimal part (0 to 8)

(ii) Unsigned

[Ubid, ¡¡¡¡]
Address where the numerical data is stored
Set binary data in the specified address.

Set the "bid" data after the letter "U".

b: Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)
i: Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d: Number of digits in the decimal part (0 to 8)

- 331 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

NOTE
1 Sum of integer part digits and fractional part digits
must be within 8.
2 Blank is displayed for digits exceeding 8 digits.
3 Do not use any space between the brackets, [ ].

(b) Example
The following message includes 3 digits tool number at the
spindle and the offset data (¡.¡¡) for this tool. And these data
are contained in memory address of 2bytes:
SPINDLE TOOL NO. = [I230, oooo]
OFFSET DATA = [I212, ∆∆∆∆]

- 332 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Defining characters not found in the CNC screen

Message characters not covered by the CNC screen keys (kanji and
half-width kana characters) can be input as follows:

(a) Half-width kana characters

(i) Data format
Numerical code enclosed by @ and @
(ii) Input method
Enter the numerical codes corresponding to the characters to
be input, by referring to the character code table (Table
4.11.1(b)). Each character requires two bytes.
Characters covered by the CNC screen keys can also be input
in this way.
(iii) Example

NOTE
Spaces are used between each numerical code in
example to understand easily, but do not use them
actually.

(b) Kanji (full-width) characters

(i) Data format
Numerical code enclosed by @02 and 01@
(ii) Input method
Enter the numerical codes corresponding to the characters to
be input, by referring to the kanji, hiragana, and special code
table in Appendix P. Each character requires four bytes.
(iii) Example

- 333 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

CAUTION
1 To define @, enter @40...@, where 40 is the code
corresponding to @40 . . . . . @
Code for @
2 To renew the message line displayed on the CNC
screen, input as:@ 0A @ at the end of the data.
3 When using numerical codes, @ code occupies 1
byte, and space code occupies 2 bytes. (Space code
= 20, 2 and 0 occupies 1 byte each).
4 The following control codes are used: 02: 2-byte
code (kanji and hiragana characters) 01: 1-byte code
(alphanumeric and half-width kana characters) Do
not specify 02 or 01 between @02 and 01@, as
follows. The characters may not be correctly
displayed. @02 ... 02 ... 01@ @02 ... 01 ... 01@
5 Spaces are used between each numerical code in
example to understand easily, but do not use them
actually.

Table 4.11.1(b) Character code table

*1) Minus, *2) Under bar, *3) Long bar *4) Dakuten *5) Han-dakuten

Notes when this functional instruction is used in subroutine

See Subsection 1.4.4.3 for details.

- 334 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Foreign language display

(a) General
In the message data areas corresponding to contiguous message
display request memory locations, message data can be displayed
in any of several languages.
The language in which a message is displayed is selected by
shifting the message display request bit according to the address
bit shift amount set the parameter in setting screen.
A0.0 Language 1 When A0.0 is turned on after setting the
A0.1 Language 2 message display request bit shift amount to 2,
A0.2 Language 3 the message display request bit is shifted by 2
A0.3 Language 4 bits to display language 3.
A0.4 Language 5
The parameters set on the setting screen are listed below. See
Subsection 2.4.1 and Section 9.5 for details.
• Message shift value
Message display request bit shift amount
• Message shift start address
Start bit address of the message display request bit area to be
shifted

(b) Examples
Example 1:
Message data in any of four languages is set starting at A0.0
in the order of Japanese, English, Italian, German, Japanese
and so on. The Italian message data is displayed.
Set the parameters as follows:
Message shift value : 2
Message shift start address : A0.0
(Message shift value = 0:Japanese/1:English/2:Italian/
3:German)
Manipulate A0.0, A0.4, A1.0, and A1.4 with the ladder.

Message table
A0.0 Japanese 1
When A0.0 is turned on, Italian 1 is displayed.
A0.1 English 1
(The message data is shifted by 2 bits).
A0.2 Italian 1
A0.3 German 1
A0.4 Japanese 2
A0.5 English 2 When A0.4 is turned on, Italian 2 is displayed.
A0.6 Italian 2 (The message data is shifted by 2 bits).
A0.7 German 2
: :
Am.n :

- 335 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Example 2:.
As common alarm messages, English message data is
displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are
set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian,
German and so on, and German message data is displayed.
Set the parameters as follows:
Message shift value : 3
Message shift start address : A10.0
(Message shift value = 0:Japanese/1:English/
2:Italian/3:German)
Manipulate A10.0, A10.4, A11.0, A11.4, and so forth with
the ladder.
When any of A0.0 to A9.7 is turned on, the message
corresponding to the bit is displayed.

Message table

A0.0 English A (ALARM)

A0.1 English B (ALARM) When A0.1 is turned on, English
B is displayed.
A0.2 English C (ALARM)
∼ ∼
A10.0 Japanese 1 (OPE) When A10.0 is turned on,
A10.1 English 1 (OPE) German 1 is displayed. (The
A10.2 Italian 1 (OPE) message data is shifted by 3
bits).
A10.3 German 1 (OPE)
A10.4 Japanese 2 (OPE)
A10.5 English 2 (OPE) When A10.4 is turned on,
German 2 is displayed. (The
A10.6 Italian 2 (OPE) message data is shifted by 3
A10.7 German 2 (OPE) bits).
: :
: :
A m.n :

- 336 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Example 3:
As common alarm messages, English message data is
displayed with A0.0 through A9.7. Operator messages are
set starting at A10.0 in the order of Japanese, English, Italian,
German and so on, with 40 successive messages assigned to
each language. For these messages, German message data is
displayed.
Set the parameters as follows:
Message shift value : 120 (40 × 3)
Message shift start address : A10.0
(Message shift value = 0:Japanese/40:English/
80:Italian/120:German)
Manipulate A10.0 through A14.7 with the ladder.
When any of A0.0 to A9.7 is turned on, the message
corresponding to the bit is displayed.

Message table

A0.0 English A (ALARM)

When A0.1 is turned on, English
A0.1 English B (ALARM)
B is displayed.
A0.2 English C (ALARM)
∼ ∼
A10.0 Japanese 1 (OPE)
When A10.0 is turned on,
A10.1 Japanese 2 (OPE)
∼ ∼
German 1 is displayed.
When A10.1 is turned on,
A15.0 English 1 (OPE) German 2 is displayed.
(The message data is shifted
A15.1 English 2 (OPE)
∼ ∼ by 120 bits).

A20.0 Italian 1 (OPE)

∼ A20.1 Italian 2 (OPE)

∼
A25.0 German 1 (OPE)
A25.1 German 2 (OPE)
: :
Am.n :

- 337 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(c) Notes
The same message number should be assigned to a message in
each language that has the same meaning.

Message table

A0.0 1000 English A (ALARM)

∼ A0.1 1001 English B (ALARM) ∼
A10.0 1000 Japanese 1 (OPE)
A10.1 1001 Japanese 2 (OPE)

- 338 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.11.2 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42)

This instruction enables the use of the external data input functions
(options) of the CNC. It controls the "external data input signals" to be
exchanged between CNC and PMC and automatically executes the
CNC-PMC handshake sequence. The use of this instruction facilitates
the execution of the external data input functions.

NOTE
When using this instruction, do not directly write the
"external data input signals" to be exchanged
between CNC and PMC. Writing these signals
directly causes an adverse effect on the handshake
sequence, potentially disabling the external data
input functions or causing them to malfunction.

You can use the EXIN instruction only when optional external data
input function is provided with NC.
Four-byte control data as described below is required for external data
input function (option).
In addition to the basic specification, the extended specification is also
supported that needs six bytes of control data. With this setting, the
extended operation can use ED16 to ED31 signals (for program
number O8 digits etc.). To use the extended specification, it is
necessary to set to CNC parameter 6300#7 (EEXIN)=1.

CNC parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 EEXIN
[Data format] Bit type
EEXIN EXIN function of PMC
0: basic specification
1: extended specification

NOTE
1 To use program number O8 digits, the option with
program number O8 digits and NC parameter
6300#7 (EEXIN)=1 are necessary.
2 The change of NC parameter 6300#7 requires CNC
re-boot.

- 339 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Format
Fig. 4.11.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
W1
SUB 42

EXIN
¡¡¡¡ Control data
address

Fig. 4.11.2 Format of EXIN instruction

Table 4.11.2 Mnemonic of EXIN instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 42 EXIN instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Control data address
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Transmission completion W1

Control conditions
ACT=0: Do not process external data input/output.
ACT=1: Process external data input/output.
ACT is to be maintained '1' till the end of external data input/output.
After external data input, reset ACT (W1 = 1).

- 340 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameter
(a) Control data
The control data needs 4 continuous bytes from the specification
address. The path is specified to the 1st byte. The addresses G0
to G2 of the interface from PMC to NC are specified by after 3
bytes. For 2nd path, the addresses G1000 to G1002 are specified.
For 3rd path, the addresses G2000 to G2002 are specified. (Be
sure to set the strobe signal (ESTB) to ON.)
In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits
etc.), a control data is extended. In this case, the control data
address needs 6 continuous bytes from the specified address. The
path is specified in the 1st byte. The addresses G0 to G2 and
G210 to G211 of the interface from PMC to NC are specified in
later 5 bytes. For 2nd path, the addresses G1000 to G1002 and
G1210 to G1211 are specified. For 3rd path, the addresses G2000
to G2002 and G2210 to G2211 are specified.

Extended specification
Basic specification
(program number O8 digits etc.)

CTL+0 CTL+0
HEAD.NO. HEAD.NO.
+1 +1
ED0 to ED7 ED0 to ED7
+2 +2
ED8 to ED15 ED8 to ED15
+3 +3
EA0 to EA6,ESTB ED16 to ED23
+4 +4
ED24 to ED31
+5
EA0 to EA6,ESTB
+6

[For single path control]

CTL+0 : 0
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G0 to G2

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G0 to G1
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G210 to G211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G2

- 341 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

[For multi path control]

(1) 1st path
CTL+0 : 0 or 1
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G0 to G2

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G0 to G1
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G210 to G211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G2

(2) 2nd path

CTL+0 : 2
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G1000 to G1002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G1000 to G1001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G1210 to G1211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G1002

(3) 3rd path

CTL+0 : 3
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G2000 to G2002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G2000 to G2001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G2210 to G2211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G2002

(4) 4th path

CTL+0 : 4
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G3000 to G3002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G3000 to G3001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G3210 to G3211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G3002

- 342 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(5) 5th path

CTL+0 : 5
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G4000 to G4002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G4000 to G4001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G4210 to G4211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G4002

(6) 6th path

CTL+0 : 6
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G5000 to G5002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G5000 to G5001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G5210 to G5211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G5002
(7) 7th path
CTL+0 : 7
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G6000 to G6002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G6000 to G6001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G6210 to G6211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G6002

(8) 8th path

CTL+0 : 8
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G7000 to G7002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G7000 to G7001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G7210 to G7211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G7002

- 343 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(9) 9th path

CTL+0 : 9
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G8000 to G8002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G8000 to G8001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G8210 to G8211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G8002

(10) 10th path

CTL+0 : 10
CTL+1 to CTL+3 : Data to be specified for G9000 to G9002

In case of the extended specification (program number O8 digits

etc.), it sets CTL+1 to CTL+5 as follows.
CTL+1 to CTL+2 : Data to be specified for G9000 to G9001
CTL+3 to CTL+4 : Data to be specified for G9210 to G9211
CTL+5 : Data to be specified for G9002

NOTE
Refer to the NC connecting manual for detailed data
to be specified concerning external data input.

- 344 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

End of transfer (W1)

This indicates end of transfer of external data. This transfer end
condition shows the end of a series of external data input sequence.
This functional instruction executes a series of transfer sequence, and
finally sets ESTB = 0 in the PMC → NC interface. As a result, W1 is
set to 1 (W1 = 1) after confirming that EREND = 0.
When W1 = 1, transfer of data is over. Reset ACT now.

CAUTION
1 The EXIN command cannot input multiple external
data items at the same time. Be sure to issue the
next EXIN command (ACT = 1) after external data
transfer ends (W1 = 1).
2 Be sure to specify an interlock when the external
data input function is used by commands other than
the function command EXIN.
3 When an external program number search, one of
the external data input functions, is executed, the
end of data transfer (W1 = 1) means that the search
command has been accepted. Note that this does
not mean the completion of the program search. To
confirm the completion of the program search, check
the search completion signal (ESEND = 1) after the
data transfer ends (W1 = 1).

Operation output register

If any of the following errors occurs during external data input, the bit
in the operation output register is set. In this case, external data transfer
ends (W1 = 1).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9000

EXIN error

(Description of errors)
• When the EXIN command (ACT = 1) is started, the strobe
signal (ESTB) or EREND signal is already on. The external
data may be input by commands other than the function
command EXIN.

Notes when this functional instruction is used in subroutine

See Subsection 1.4.4.3 for details.

- 345 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.11.3 WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51)

This function reads various data items via the window between the
PMC and the CNC.
The "WINDR" is classified into two types. One type completes reading
a data during one scan time. Another type completes reading a data
during a few scan time. The former is called the function of a high-
speed response and the latter is called the function of a low-speed
response.

Format
Fig. 4.11.3 shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT W1

SUB 51
WINDR ¡¡¡¡ Control data
address

Fig. 4.11.3 Format of WINDR instruction

Table 4.11.3 Mnemonic of WINDR instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 51 WINDR instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Control data address
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Read completion W1

Control condition
ACT=0: The WINDR function is not executed.
ACT=1: The WINDR function is executed. Using the function of a
high-speed response, it is possible to read the data
continuously by always keeping ACT on. However, using the
function of a low-speed response, as soon as reading a data is
completed (W1=1), reset "ACT" once (ACT=0).

- 346 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameter
(a) Control data address
The PMC byte address is used to specify the area where control
data is stored.

Control data
CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence
program before executing the
+2 Completion code "WINDR" or "WINDW".

+4 Data length

+6 Data number

+8 Data attribute

+10 * Only the size of the read data is

Read data
∼ ∼ necessary for the data area below to
"CTL+10" usually.

+n

See Chapter 5.

Reading completion (W1)

W1=0: "W1" is usually reset. The "W1=0" indicates that the
"WINDR" is not executed or the "WINDR" being executed
now.
W1=1: "W1" is set when the reading a data is completed by the
reading command (ACT=1). If the function of a low-speed
response is used, as soon as reading a data is completed
(W1=1), reset "ACT" (ACT=0).

Operation output register

If an error occurs during execution of the "WINDR" or "WINDW", the
bit in the operation output register is set. At the same time, the reading
completion is set (W1=1). Details of the error are output to the
completion code (CTL+2) in the control data area. See Chapter 5.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9000

WINDR error

- 347 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Notes when this functional instruction is used in subroutine

When you use the function of a low-speed response, there are a few
limitation. See Subsection 1.4.4.3. When you use the function of a
high-speed response, there is no limitation.

- 348 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.11.4 WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52)

This function writes various data items via the window between the
PMC and the CNC.

Format
Fig. 4.11.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.4 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT W1

SUB 52
¡¡¡¡ Control data
WINDW address

Fig. 4.11.4 Format of WINDW instruction

Table 4.11.4 Mnemonic of WINDW instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 52 WINDW instruction
3 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Control data address
4 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Write completion W1

Control condition
ACT=0: The WINDW function is not executed.
ACT=1: The WINDW function is executed. As soon as writing a data
is completed (W1=1), reset "ACT" once (ACT=0).

Parameter
(a) Control data address
The PMC byte address is used to specify the area where control
data is stored.

- 349 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control data
CTL+0 Function code * Set the control data area by sequence
program before executing the
+2 Completion code "WINDR" or "WINDW".

+4 Data length

+6 Data number

+8 Data attribute

+10 Writing data

∼ ∼
+n

See Chapter 5.

Writing completion (W1)

W1=0: "W1" is usually reset. The "W1=0" indicates that the
"WINDW" is not executed or the "WINDW" being executed
now.
W1=1: "W1" is set when the writing a data is completed by the
writing command (ACT=1). As soon as writing a data is
completed (W1=1), reset "ACT" (ACT=0).

Operation output register

If an error occurs during execution of the "WINDR" or "WINDW", the
bit in the operation output register is set. At the same time, the writing
completion is set (W1=1). Details of the error are output to the
completion code (CTL+2) in the control data area. See Chapter 5.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9000

WINDW error

Notes when this functional instruction is used in subroutine

When you use the function of a low-speed response, there are a few
limitation. See Subsection 1.4.4.3. When you use the function of a
high-speed response, there is no limitation.

- 350 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.11.5 AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53)

NOTE
To use this function requires that the PMC axis
control option be set on the CNC side.

Function
This function simplifies the handshake of DI/DO signal for the axis
control by PMC.

Format
Fig. 4.11.5 shows the ladder format and Table 4.11.5 shows the
mnemonic format.

RST W1

SUB 53
¡¡¡¡ Group No. of DI/DO signal
ACT AXCTL ¡¡¡¡ Axis control data address

Fig. 4.11.5 Format of AXCTL instruction

Table 4.11.5 Mnemonic of AXCTL instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RST RST
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RST ACT
3 SUB 53 AXCTL instruction
5 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Group No. of DI/DO signal
6 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Axis control data address
7 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Processing completion W1

- 351 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control condition
ACT=0: The AXCTL function is not executed.
If RST is 1, PMC axis control instruction reset processing is
performed.
ACT=1: The AXCTL function is executed.
ACT is to be maintained '1' till the end of AXCTL processing.
And reset ACT immediately after the processing is complete
(W1 = 1) or when the CNC enters the alarm state.
RST=0: Release reset.
RST=1: Set the reset signal (ECLRx) to 1 and W1 becomes 0. All the
buffered commands are invalidated and the command being
executed is stopped.
If the CNC enters the alarm state, reset the PMC axis control
instruction by setting ACT to 0.

CAUTION
1 Usually, set both ACT and RST to 0. Set ACT or
RST to 1 only when executing the instruction. Note
that, while ACT or RST is set to 1, you cannot update
the ladder program after editing it.
2 If you make any change to the ladder program while
RST is set to 1, you may be unable to continue to
execute the AXCTL instruction when re-executing
the ladder program. When changing the ladder
program, set both ACT and RST to 0.
3 When RST and ACT become 1 at the same time,
RST is prior to ACT.

- 352 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Parameters
(a) Group number of DI/DO signal
Specify the DI/DO signal group by the number.

Signal
Set value group DI address DO address
number
1 1 G142 to G149, G150.5 F130 to F132, F142
2 2 G154 to G161, G162.5 F133 to F135, F145
3 3 G166 to G173, G174.5 F136 to F138, F148
4 4 G178 to G185, G186.5 F139 to F141, F151
1001 5 G1142 to G1149, G1150.5 F1130 to F1132, F1142
1002 6 G1154 to G1161, G1162.5 F1133 to F1135, F1145
1003 7 G1166 to G1173, G1174.5 F1136 to F1138, F1148
1004 8 G1178 to G1185, G1186.5 F1139 to F1141, F1151
2001 9 G2142 to G2149, G2150.5 F2130 to F2132, F2142
2002 10 G2154 to G2161, G2162.5 F2133 to F2135, F2145
2003 11 G2166 to G2173, G2174.5 F2136 to F2138, F2148
2004 12 G2178 to G2185, G2186.5 F2139 to F2141, F2151
3001 13 G3142 to G3149, G3150.5 F3130 to F3132, F3142
3002 14 G3154 to G3161, G3162.5 F3133 to F3135, F3145
3003 15 G3166 to G3173, G3174.5 F3136 to F3138, F3148
3004 16 G3178 to G3185, G3186.5 F3139 to F3141, F3151
4001 17 G4142 to G4149, G4150.5 F4130 to F4132, F4142
4002 18 G4154 to G4161, G4162.5 F4133 to F4135, F4145
4003 19 G4166 to G4173, G4174.5 F4136 to F4138, F4148
4004 20 G4178 to G4185, G4186.5 F4139 to F4141, F4151
5001 21 G5142 to G5149, G5150.5 F5130 to F5132, F5142
5002 22 G5154 to G5161, G5162.5 F5133 to F5135, F5145
5003 23 G5166 to G5173, G5174.5 F5136 to F5138, F5148
5004 24 G5178 to G5185, G5186.5 F5139 to F5141, F5151
6001 25 G6142 to G6149, G6150.5 F6130 to F6132, F6142
6002 26 G6154 to G6161, G6162.5 F6133 to F6135, F6145
6003 27 G6166 to G6173, G6174.5 F6136 to F6138, F6148
6004 28 G6178 to G6185, G6186.5 F6139 to F6141, F6151
7001 29 G7142 to G7149, G7150.5 F7130 to F7132, F7142
7002 30 G7154 to G7161, G7162.5 F7133 to F7135, F7145
7003 31 G7166 to G7173, G7174.5 F7136 to F7138, F7148
7004 32 G7178 to G7185, G7186.5 F7139 to F7141, F7151
8001 33 G8142 to G8149, G8150.5 F8130 to F8132, F8142
8002 34 G8154 to G8161, G8162.5 F8133 to F8135, F8145
8003 35 G8166 to G8173, G8174.5 F8136 to F8138, F8148
8004 36 G8178 to G8185, G8186.5 F8139 to F8141, F8151
9001 37 G9142 to G9149, G9150.5 F9130 to F9132, F9142
9002 38 G9154 to G9161, G9162.5 F9133 to F9135, F9145
9003 39 G9166 to G9173, G9174.5 F9136 to F9138, F9148
9004 40 G9178 to G9185, G9186.5 F9139 to F9141, F9151

- 353 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

(b) Axis control data address

Select the addresses of the locations that contain PMC axis
control data.

+0 Not used Specify 0.

1 Control command (EC0x to EC6x)

2
Command data 1 (EIF0x to EIF15x)

4 Command data 2 (EID0x to EID31x)

6
(x=A/B/C/D)
7

- 354 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

The following functions are available.

Operation Control Command data 1 Command data 2

Rapid traverse 00H Feedrate Total travel
(Note 1) amount
Cutting feed (feed per min.) 01H Feedrate Total travel
(Note 2) amount
Cutting feed 02H Feedrate per Total travel
(feed per revolution) revolution amount
Skip (feed per min.) 03H Feedrate Total travel
amount
Dwell 04H Not used Dwell time
Reference pos. return 05H Feedrate Not used
(Note 1)
Continuous feed (Note 3) 06H Feedrate Feed direction
(Note 4)
1st ref. pos. return 07H Feedrate Not used
2nd ref. pos. return 08H (Note 1) Not used
3rd ref. pos. return 09H Not used
4th ref. pos. return 0AH Not used
External pulse 0BH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization
(Position coder) (Note 3)
External pulse 0DH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization (1st manual
pulse generator) (Note 3)
External pulse 0EH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization (2nd manual
pulse generator) (Note 3)
External pulse 0FH Pulse weighting Not used
synchronization (3rd manual
pulse generator) (Note 3)
Speed command (Note 5) 10H Feedrate Not used
Torque control 11H Maximum Torque data
feedrate
Auxiliary function 1 12H Not used Auxiliary
function code
Auxiliary function 2 14H Not used Auxiliary
function code
Auxiliary function 3 15H Not used Auxiliary
function code
Machine coordinate system 20H Rapid traverse Machine
selection rate (Note 1) coordinate
position
Cutting feedrate (sec/block) 21H Cutting feed time Total travel
amount
Simultaneous start mode off 40H Not used Not used
Simultaneous start mode on 41H Simultaneous start group

- 355 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

CAUTION
1 The rapid traverse rate is effective when parameter
RPD (No. 8002#0) is set to 1.
2 When you specify 0 for feedrate, CNC does not
work. Please release this state by RST = 1.
3 When you end a continuous feed or external pulse
synchronization, set RST to 1. And, continuous feed
can't be used with buffering inhibits signal (EMBUFx)
= 1. You must set the signal to 0.
4 Specify the direction by most significant bit of
command data 2.
5 Command control axis must be specified to rotary
axis by setting parameter ROTx (No. 1006#0) to 0.
6 For details such as the range of command data,
please refer to the NC connecting manual.

CAUTION
The above table is not up-to-date. For the latest
information, refer to the descriptions about PMC axis
control in the "CNC Connection Manual (Functions)".

Example 1) In case of cutting feed (feed per min.)

+0 0H Not used (Specify 0).

Command code for cutting feed.

1 01H
(feed per min.)

2 Feedrate unit : mm/min.

4 Total travel amount

5 unit : 0.001mm

6
(x=A/B/C/D)
7

- 356 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Example 2) In case of machine coordinate positioning.

+0 0H Not used (Specify 0).

Command code for machine coordinate

1 20H selection.

2 0
or In case of CNC PRM8002#0 = 0 not used.
Feedrate = 1 Feedrate.
3

Position in machine
4
coordinate system
(Absolute)
5

CAUTION
It is necessary to set the CNC parameters relating to
the axis movement.

End of command (W1)

W1=0: It is 0 usually. W1=1 indicates that AXCTL instruction is
completed.
Specify ACT=0 immediately after processing is completed.
(W1=1).
W1=1: It will become 1 when the command of the axis control by
PMC is buffered on CNC (when EMBUFx=0) or when axis
movement is completed (when EMBUFx=1).

- 357 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Operation output register (R9000)

When error occurs by processing the axis control by PMC, the bit of the
operation output register will be set. At the same time, processing is
over (W1=1).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9000

Group number of DI/DO signal

specification error

NOTE
1 W1 becomes 1 regardless of the state of ACT.
2 It is not related to the state of the alarm signal
(EIALx).

- 358 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Remarks
(1) The following signals cannot be operated from this function.
Please operate by LADDER.
• Axis control stop signal
ESTPx (G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5)
• Servo-off signal
ESOFx (G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4)
• Block stop signal
ESBKx (G142.3, G154.3, G166.3, G178.3)
• Block stop inhibit signal
EMSBKx (G143.7, G155.7, G167.7, G179.7)
• Controlled axis selection signal
EAX1 - EAX8 (G136.0 to 7)
• Override signal
*FV0E - *FV7E (G151.0 to 7)
• Override cancel signal
OVCE (G150.5)
• Rapid traverse override signal
ROV2E, ROV1E (G150.1,0)
• Dry run signal
DRNE (G150.7)
• Manual rapid traverse selection signal
RTE (G150.6)
• Skip signal
SKIP/ESKIP (X4.7,6)
• Buffering inhibit signal
EMBUFx (G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2)
(x=A/B/C/D)

WARNING
Movement cannot be sured when controlled axis
selection signal (EAXx) is changed in the state of
ACT=1.

(2) Buffering inhibit signal (EMBUFx)

0: The commands are buffered on the CNC.
Even if one command is being executed, the CNC accepts the
next command as long as there is vacancy in the buffer on
CNC.
W1 will become 1 when the command of the axis control by
PMC is buffered on CNC.
1: Prohibits the buffering on CNC.
W1 will become 1 when the movement of the instructed axis
control by PMC is completed.

- 359 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.12 PROGRAM CONTROL

The following types of program control instruction are available. Use

any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 COM 9 Common line control
2 COME 29 Common line control end
3 JMP 10 Jump
4 JMPE 30 Jump end
5 JMPB 68 Label jump 1
6 JMPC 73 Label jump 2
7 LBL 69 Label
8 CALL 65 Conditional subprogram call
9 CALLU 66 Unconditional subprogram call
10 SP 71 Subprogram
11 SPE 72 End of a subprogram
12 END1 1 End of a first level program
13 END2 2 End of a second level program
14 END3 48 End of a third level program
15 END 64 End of a ladder program
16 NOP 70 No operation

- 360 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.1 COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9)

The coils in a region up to the common line control end instruction

(COME) are controlled.
Set 0 for the number of coils, and specify the range to be controlled
using the common line control end instruction.
If the common line control end instruction is not specified, the "COM
FUNCTION MISSING" error results.

ACT
SUB 9 0
COM

Range in
which the
COM
instruction is
effective

SUB 29
COME

Fig. 4.12.1 (a) Function of COM instruction

Format
Fig. 4.12.1 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 9 0
COM

Fig. 4.12.1 (b) Format of COM instruction

Table 4.12.1 Mnemonic of COM instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 9 COM instruction
3 (PRM) 0 Specify 0.

- 361 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
ACT=0: The coils within the region specified are unconditionally
turned off (set to 0).
ACT=1: The program operates in the same way as when COM is not
used.

Parameter
(a) Specify 0. (Range specification only)

CAUTION
1 Operation of the COM instruction
Suppose a ladder diagram that includes the COM
instruction, as shown below.
ACT
SUB 9 0
COM

ON OUT1

OFF OUT2
¡

SUB 29
COME

For the "OUTx" coils, the COM instruction makes the

above ladder diagram similar to the ladder
description shown below.
ON ACT OUT1

OFF ACT OUT2

¡

A functional instruction in a range specified by

COM executes processing, regardless of COM
ACT. However, if COM ACT=0, the coil of the
execution result becomes 0.
2 Another COM instruction cannot be specified in the
range by the COM instruction.
3 If COM ACT=0, the coil of a WRT.NOT instruction in
a range specified by COM becomes 1
unconditionally as described in 1 above.

- 362 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Caution
Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE
instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the
COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to
operate normally after the jump.

JMP instruction
COM instruction

×
Prohibited
JMP instruction
COM instruction

COME instruction
JMPE instruction ×
Prohibited

COME instruction

JMPE instruction

- 363 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.12.2 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29)

This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the

common line control instruction (COM).
This instruction cannot be used alone. It must he used together with the
COM instruction.

Format
Fig. 4.12.2 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

SUB 29
COME

Fig. 4.12.2 Format of COME instruction

Table 4.12.2 Mnemonic of COME instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 29 COME instruction

- 364 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.3 JMP (Jump: SUB 10)

The JMP instruction causes a departure from the normal sequence to

executing instructions. When a JMP instruction is specified,
processing jumps to a jump end instruction (JMPE) without executing
the logical instructions (including functional instructions) in the range
delimited by a jump end instruction (JMPE). (See Fig. 4.12.3 (a).)
Specify a range to be skipped using the jump end instruction.
When the jump end instruction is not specified, the message JUMP
FUNCTION MISSING is displayed.

ACT
SUB 10 0
JMP

Valid range
of the JMP
instruction

SUB 30
JMPE

Fig. 4.12.3 (a) Function of JMP instruction

- 365 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Format
Fig. 4.12.3 (b) shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.3 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 10 0
JMP

Fig. 4.12.3 (b) Format of JMP instruction

Table 4.12.3 Mnemonic of JMP instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 10 JMP instruction
3 (PRM) 0 Specify 0.

Control conditions
ACT=1: The logical instructions (including functional instructions) in
the specified range are skipped; program execution proceeds
to the next step.
ACT=0: The same operation as when JMP is not used is performed.

Parameters
(a) Specify 0. (Range specification only)

NOTE
JMP instruction operation
When ACT = 1, processing jumps to a jump end
instruction (JMPE); the logical instructions (including
functional instructions) in the specified jump range
are not executed. This instruction can reduce the
Ladder execution period (scan time).

- 366 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Caution
Do not create a program in which a combination of JMP and JMPE
instructions is used to cause a jump to and from a sequence between the
COM and COME instructions; the ladder sequence may not be able to
operate normally after the jump.

JMP instruction
COM instruction

×
Prohibited
JMP instruction
COM instruction

COME instruction
JMPE instruction ×
Prohibited

COME instruction
JMPE instruction

- 367 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.12.4 JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30)

This instruction indicates the division in the region specification of the

jump instruction (JMP).
It cannot be used alone. It must be used together with the JMP
instruction.

Format
Fig. 4.12.4 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.4 shows the
mnemonic format.

SUB 30
JMPE

Fig. 4.12.4 Format of JMPE instruction

Table 4.12.4 Mnemonic of JMPE instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 30 JMPE instruction

- 368 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.5 JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68)

The JMPB functional instruction transfers control to a Ladder

immediately after the label set in a Ladder program. The jump
instruction can transfer control freely before and after the instruction
within the program unit (main program or subprogram) in which the
instruction is coded. (See the description of the LBL functional
instruction, which is be explained later.)
As compared with the conventional JMP functional instruction, JMPB
has the following additional functions:
• More than one jump instruction can be coded for the same label.
• Jump instructions can be nested.

Ladder program

Program unit Program unit

LBL AA
LBL AA

JMPB BB

JMPB AA
JMPB AA

JMPB AA LBL BB

Format
Fig. 4.12.5 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.5 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 68
JMPB L¡¡¡¡ Specification
of the jump
destination
label

Fig. 4.12.5 Format of JMPB instruction

Table 4.12.5 Mnemonic of JMPB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 68 JMPB instruction
3 (PRM) L¡¡¡¡ Specification of the jump
destination label

- 369 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
ACT=0: The next instruction after the JMPB instruction is executed.
ACT=1: Control is transferred to the Ladder immediately after the
specified label.

Parameters
(a) Label specification
Specifies the label of the jump destination. The label number
must be specified in the L address form. A value from L1 to
L9999 can be specified.

CAUTION
1 For the specifications of this instruction, see the
description of functional instruction JMP.
2 When this instruction is used to jump back to a
previous instruction, care must be taken not to cause
an infinite loop.

- 370 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.6 JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73)

The JMPC functional instruction returns control from a subprogram to

the main program. Be sure to code the destination label in the main
program. The specifications of this JMPC functional instruction are
the same as those of the JMPB functional instruction, except that
JMPC always returns control to the main program.
• More than one jump instruction can be coded for the same label.

Ladder program
Main program Main program

LBL AA
LBL AA

LBL BB

Subprogram Subprogram

JMPC AA JMPC AA

JMPC AA JMPC BB

Format
Fig. 4.12.6 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.6 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 73
JMPC L¡¡¡¡ Specification
of the jump
destination
label

Fig. 4.12.6 Format of JMPC instruction

Table 4.12.6 Mnemonic of JMPC instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 73 JMPC instruction
3 (PRM) L¡¡¡¡ Specification of the jump
destination label

- 371 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Control conditions
ACT=0: The instruction after the JMPC instruction is executed.
ACT=1: Control is transferred to the Ladder after the specified label.

Parameters
(a) Label specification
Specifies the label of the jump destination. The label number
must be specified in the L address form. A number from L1 to
L9999 can be specified.

CAUTION
1 For the specifications of this instruction, see the
description of functional instruction JMP.
2 When this instruction is used to jump back to a
previous instruction, care must be taken not to cause
an infinite loop.

- 372 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.7 LBL (Label: SUB 69)

The LBL functional instruction specifies a label in a Ladder program.

It specifies the jump destination for the JMPB and JMPC functional
instructions. (See the explanation of the JMPB and JMPC functional
instructions.)

Ladder program

LBL AA
LBL AA

JMPB BB

JMPB AA
JMPC AA

JMPC AA LBL BB

Format
Fig. 4.12.7 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.7 shows the
mnemonic format.

SUB 69
LBL Label
L¡¡¡¡
specification

Fig. 4.12.7 Format of LBL instruction

Table 4.12.7 Mnemonic of LBL instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 69 LBL instruction
2 (PRM) L¡¡¡¡ Label specification

- 373 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Label specification
Specifies the jump destination for the JMPB and JMPC functional
instructions. The label number must be specified in the L address
form. A label number from L1 to L9999 can be specified. A label
number can be used more than once as long as it is used in a
different program unit (main program, subprogram).

NOTE
For the use of this instruction, see the description of
functional instruction JMP.

- 374 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.8 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65)

The CALL functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a

subprogram number is specified in CALL, a jump occurs to the
subprogram if a condition is satisfied.

Format
Fig. 4.12.8 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.8 shows the
mnemonic format.

ACT
SUB 65
CALL P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number

Fig. 4.12.8 Format of CALL instruction

Table 4.12.8 Mnemonic of CALL instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT ACT
2 SUB 65 CALL instruction
3 (PRM) P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number

Control conditions
(a) Input signal
ACT=0: The CALL instruction is not executed.
ACT=1: The CALL instruction is executed.

- 375 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Parameters
(a) Subprogram number
Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be called.
The subprogram number must be specified in the P address form.
Example: To call subprogram 1

ACT
SUB 65 P1
CALL

CAUTION
Be careful when using the CALL instruction with the
COM, COME, JMP, or JMPE functional instruction.
For details, see Subsection 1.4.4.

- 376 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.9 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66)

The CALLU functional instruction calls a subprogram. When a

subprogram number is specified, a jump occurs to the subprogram.

Format
Fig. 4.12.9 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.9 shows the
mnemonic format.

SUB 66
CALLU P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number

Fig. 4.12.9 Format of CALLU instruction

Table 4.12.9 Mnemonic of CALLU instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 66 CALLU instruction
2 (PRM) P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number

Parameters
(a) Subprogram number
Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be called.
The subprogram number must be specified in the P address form.
Example: To call subprogram 1

SUB 66 P1
CALLU

- 377 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.12.10 SP (Subprogram: SUB 71)

The SP functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. A

subprogram number is specified as a subprogram name. SP is used
with the SPE functional instruction (mentioned later) to specify the
subprogram range.

Format
Fig. 4.12.10 shows the ladder format and Table 4.12.10 shows the
mnemonic format.

SUB 71
SP P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number

Fig. 4.12.10 Format of SP instruction

Table 4.12.10 Mnemonic of SP instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 71 SP instruction
2 (PRM) P¡¡¡¡ Subprogram number
Parameters
(a) Subprogram number
Specifies the subprogram number of a subprogram to be coded
following this instruction. The subprogram number must be
specified in the P address form.

30i-A
Dual check safety
1st PMC 2nd PMC (option) 3rd PMC (option)
PMC(option)
P1 to P5000 P1 to P512 P1 to P512 P1 to P512

The specified subprogram number must be unique within the

sequence program.
Example: When the subprogram number is set to 1

SUB 71 P1
SP

- 378 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.11 SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72)

The SPE functional instruction is used to create a subprogram. SPE is

used with the SP functional instruction. It specifies the range of a
subprogram. When this functional instruction has been executed,
control is returned to the functional instruction that called the
subprogram.

SUB 72
SPE

Fig. 4.12.11 Format of SPE instruction

Table 4.12.11 Mnemonic of SPE instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 72 SPE instruction

- 379 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.12.12 END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1)

Must be specifies once in a sequence program, either at the end of the

1st level sequence, or at the beginning of the 2nd level sequence when
there is no 1st level sequence.

SUB 1
END1

Fig. 4.12.12 Format of END1 instruction

Table 4.12.12 Mnemonic of END1 instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 1 END1 instruction

4.12.13 END2 (2nd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 2)

Specify at the end of the 2nd level sequence.

SUB2
END2

Fig. 4.12.13 Format of END2 instruction

Table 4.12.13 Mnemonic of END2 instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 2 END2 instruction

- 380 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.12.14 END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48)

Specify this command at the end of the 3rd level sequence program, i.e.
it indicates the end of the sequence program. If there is no 3rd level
sequence program, this instruction need not be specified.

SUB 48
END3

Fig. 4.12.14 Format of END3 instruction

Table 4.12.14 Mnemonic of END3 instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 48 END3 instruction

4.12.15 END (End of a Ladder Program: SUB 64)

The END functional instruction designates the end of a ladder program.
END must be placed at the end of the ladder program.

SUB 64
END

Fig. 4.12.15 Format of END instruction

Table 4.12.15 Mnemonic of END instruction

Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks
number No.
1 SUB 64 END instruction

4.12.16 NOP (No Operation: SUB 70)

During creation of a ladder program using the programmer, if the
program is compiled with specifying the setting with which a net
comment or form feed code is used and the point of the net comment is
output, position information of the net comment or form feed code is
output as the NOP instruction. This instruction performs no operation
during execution of the ladder.

- 381 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.13 ROTATION CONTROL

The following types of rotation control instruction are available. Use

any of these instructions as appropriate for your purpose.

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
1 ROT 6 Rotation control
2 ROTB 26 Binary rotation control

- 382 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.13.1 ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6)

Controls rotors, such as the tool post, ATC, rotary table, etc., and is
used for the following functions.
(a) Selection of the rotation direction via the shorter path
(b) Calculation of the number of steps between the current position
and the goal position
(c) Calculation of the position one position before the goal or of the
number of steps up to one position before the goal

Format
Fig. 4.13.1 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.13.1 shows the
mnemonic format.

RN0

¡¡¡¡. ¡
BYT

¡¡¡¡. ¡
DIR Rotating direction
W1 output
SUB 6
¡¡¡¡. ¡ ROT
POS ¡¡¡¡ Rotor indexing number
¡¡¡¡ Current position address ¡¡¡¡. ¡
¡¡¡¡ Goal position address
¡¡¡¡. ¡ ¡¡¡¡ Operation result output address
INC

¡¡¡¡. ¡
ACT

¡¡¡¡. ¡

Control condition
Instruction

Fig. 4.13.1 (a) Format of ROT instruction

- 383 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Table 4.13.1 Mnemonic of ROT instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST5 ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RN0 RN0
2 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ BYT RN0 BYT
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR RN0 BYT DIR
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ POS RN0 BYT DIR POS
5 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ INC RN0 BYT DIR POS INC
6 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RN0 BYT DIR POS INC ACT
7 SUB 6 ROT
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Rotor indexing
number
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Current position
address
10 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Goal position
address
11 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Operation result
output address
12 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Output of rotation W1
direction

Control conditions
(a) Specify the starting number of the rotor. (RN)
RN0=0: Begins the number of the position of the rotor with 0.
RN0=1: Begins the number of the position of the rotor with 1.

(b) Specify the number of digits of the process data (position data).
(BYT)
BYT=0: BCD two digits
BYT=1: BCD four digits

(c) Select the rotation direction via the shorter path or not. (DIR)
DIR=0: No direction is selected. The direction of rotation is
only forward.
DIR=1: Selected. See rotating direction output (W1) described
below for details on the rotation direction.

(d) Specify the operating conditions. (POS)

POS=0: Calculates the goal position.
POS=1: Calculates the position one position before the goal
position.

- 384 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

(e) Specify the position or the number of steps. (INC)

INC=0: Calculates the number of the position. If the position
one position before the goal position is to be calculated,
specify INC=0 and POS=1
INC=1: Calculates the number of steps. If the difference
between the current position and the goal position is to
be calculated, specify INC=1 and POS=0.

(f) Execution command (ACT)

ACT=0: The ROT instruction is not executed. W1 does not
change.
ACT=1: Executed. Normally, set ACT=0. If the operation
results are required, set ACT=1.

Parameters
(a) Rotor indexing number
Specify the rotor indexing number.

(b) Current position address

Specify the address storing the current position.

(c) Goal position address

Specify the address storing the goal position (or command value),
for example the address storing the NC output T code.

(d) Operation result output address

Calculate the number of steps for the rotor to rotate, the number of
steps up to the position one position before, or the position before
the goal. When the calculating result is to be used, always check
that ACT=1.

- 385 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Rotating direction output (W1)

The direction of rotation for control of rotation via the shorter path is
output to W1. When W1=0, the direction is forward (FOR) when 1,
reverse (REV). The definition of FOR and REV is shown in Fig. 4.13.1
(b). If the number given to the rotor is ascending, the rotation is FOR;
if descending, REV. The address of W1 can be determined arbitrarily.
When, however, the result of W1 is to be used, always check that
ACT=1.

An example of a 12-position rotor

(a) (b)

1 1
12 2 2 12

11 3
3 11
FOR REV REV FOR

10 4 4 10

9 5 5 9

8 6 6 8
7 7

Indexing fixed position Indexing fixed position

Fig. 4.13.1 (b) Rotation direction

- 386 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.13.2 ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26)

This instruction is used to control rotating elements including the tool

post, ATC (Automatic Tool Changer), rotary table, etc. In the ROT
command a parameter indicating the number of rotating element
indexing positions is a fixed data in programming. For ROTB,
however, you can specify an address for the number of rotating element
index positions, allowing change even after programming. The data
handled are all in the binary format. Otherwise, ROTB is coded in the
same way as ROT.

Format
Fig. 4.13.2 (a) shows the ladder format and Table 4.13.2 shows the
mnemonic format.

RN0

DIR

W1
POS
SUB 26
ROTB ¡ Format specification
¡¡¡¡ * Rotating element indexed position address
INC
¡¡¡¡ * Current position address
¡¡¡¡ * Target position address
¡¡¡¡ * Arithmetic result output address
ACT

Fig. 4.13.2 (a) Format of ROTB instruction

- 387 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

Table 4.13.2 Mnemonic of ROTB instruction

Mnemonic format Status of operation result
Step Address
Instruction Bit No. Remarks ST4 ST3 ST2 ST1 ST0
number No.
1 RD ¡¡¡¡ .¡ RN0 RN0
3 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ DIR RN0 DIR
4 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ POS RN0 BYT POS
5 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ INC RN0 BYT DIR INC
6 RD. STK ¡¡¡¡ .¡ ACT RN0 BYT DIR POS ACT
7 SUB 26 ROTB
8 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Rotating element indexed
position address
9 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Current position address
10 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Target position address
11 (PRM) ¡¡¡¡ Arithmetic result output
address
12 WRT ¡¡¡¡ .¡ Output of rotation direction W1

Control conditions
The control conditions do not differ basically from those for ROT
command. However, BYT has been eliminated from ROTB (it forms
part of the ROTB parameters).
For the reset, see ROT.

Parameters
(a) Format
Specifies data length (1, 2, or 4 bytes). Use the first digit of the
parameter to specify the number of bytes.
1: 1 byte
2: 2 bytes
4: 4 bytes
All numerical data (number of indexed positions for the rotating
elements, current address, etc.) are in the binary format.
Therefore, they require the memory space specified by data
length.

(b) Rotating element indexed position address

Specifies the address containing the number of rotary element
positions to be indexed.

(c) Other parameters

For the functions and use of the other parameters, see the ROT
instruction.

- 388 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

Output for rotational direction (W1)

See the ROT instruction.

Example of using the ROTB instruction

Fig. 4.13.2 (b) illustrates a ladder diagram for a 12-position rotor to be

controlled for rotation via the shorter path and for deceleration at the
position one position before the goal.
• The goal position is specified with NC 32B of binary code
(address F26 to F29).
• The current position is entered with the binary code signal
(address X41) from the machine tool.
• The result of calculating the position one position before the goal
is output to address R230 (work area).
• Operation starts with the output TF (address F7.3) from the NC.
• The binary compare instruction (CMPB) is used to detect the
deceleration and stop positions.

- 389 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

A
A Logic 1
R0228.0 R0228.0
A

R0228.0
A
CR-
CCW Shorter path or
R0228.0 SUB 26 4 Reference data format not
A ROTB D0000 Rotor indexing number R0228.1
X0041 Current position address
F0026 Goal position address
R0228.0 R0230 Calculation result output address
A

R0228.0
A

R0228.0
TF CW-M CCW-M

F0007.3 Y0005.6 Y0005.7

TF
SUB 32
1004 Reference data format
COMPB
F0007.3 R0230 Reference data
X0041 Comparison data address
TF Deceleration
TDEC position
detection
R9000.0 F0007.3 R0228.2
TDEC TF Deceleration
DEC-M
command
R0228.2 F0007.3 Y0005.5
TCOMPB DEC-M

R0228.3 Y0005.5
TF
SUB 32
1004 Reference data format
COMPB
F0007.3 F0026 Reference data
X0041 Comparison data address
TF Goal position
TCO (stop position)
MPB
detection
R9000.0 F0007.3
R0228.3
TF CR-CCW TCOMPB Forward
CW-M rotation
F0007.3 R0228.1 R0228.3 command
Y0005.6
TF CR-CCW TCOMPB Reverse
CCW-M rotation
command
F0007.3 R0228.1 R0228.3 Y0005.7

Fig. 4.13.2 (b) Example of a ladder diagram for the ROTB instruction

- 390 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4.14 INVALID INSTRUCTIONS

The instructions listed below are invalid for Series 30i-A PMC.
If a ladder program used for another model is run on FS30i-A PMC,
these instructions are not executed. They cause no error but are treated
as NOP instructions (which perform no operation when the ladder
program is executed).

Instruction Sub
Processing
name number
SPCNT 46 Main axis control
DISP 49 Message display
MMCWR 98 Reading of MMC window data
MMCWW 99 Writing of MMC window data
PSGNL 50 Position signal output
PSGN2 63 Position signal output 2
FNC90 90 Auxiliary functional instruction 1
FNC91 91 Auxiliary functional instruction 2
FNC92 92 Auxiliary functional instruction 3
FNC93 93 Auxiliary functional instruction 4
FNC94 94 Auxiliary functional instruction 5
FNC95 95 Auxiliary functional instruction 6
FNC96 96 Auxiliary functional instruction 7
FNC97 97 Auxiliary functional instruction 8

- 391 -
4.LADDER LANGUAGE B-63983EN/01

4.15 NOTE ON PROGRAMMING

Some functional instructions may cause the ladder program to take a

long time to stop or make it unable to stop, if their ACT or RST
condition remains on for no apparent reason. If the ladder program
does not stop, all operations aimed at changing the ladder program will
take longer to end or will never end.
To avoid such problems, when you code a ladder program using
functional instructions, you need to design the ladder structure based
on a thorough understanding of the control conditions of the individual
instructions you use.
Listed below are typical cases in which the ladder program will not
stop.
• A low-speed window function is used for a WINDR or
WINDW functional instruction, and its ACT condition
remains on.
• In an EXIN or AXCTL instruction, not only the ACT
condition but also the RST condition remain on.
• The jump destination label is present before a JMPB
instruction.
• In a JMPC instruction, the jump destination label points to
the same JMPC instruction.
If the ladder program takes long to stop or does not stop for any of these
reasons, the following operations will be affected.
1. Stopping the ladder program using a soft key on the screen
2. Reading a new ladder program from a memory card or other
medium, by using the data input and output screen
3 Updating the ladder program with changes made using the
ladder diagram edit screen

If any of the above phenomena occurs, the functional instruction

causing the problem needs to be fixed. Check the functional
instructions mentioned above to see whether there is any ACT or RST
condition remaining on, and correct the ladder program according to
the following procedure.
1. Put the machine in safe condition and turn off the power of
the NC.
2. Turn on the power of the NC while holding down the "CAN"
and "Z" keys simultaneously, to restart the NC with the
ladder program halted.
3. In the ladder diagram edit screen, redesign the logic
associated with the problematic functional instruction.
When done, set the ACT or RST condition to off. If the same
operation is repeating because of an inadequate JMPB or
JMPC instruction, review the jump condition and, if
necessary, change the ladder structure.

- 392 -
B-63983EN/01 4.LADDER LANGUAGE

4. Write the resulting logic to flash ROM using the I/O screen.
5. Run the ladder program.
If the ladder program does not stop or cannot be changed even after you
make the correction, there may be other functional instructions that
have the same condition settings. Check for other functional
instructions having the same condition settings, besides the one you
have corrected, and repeat the above procedure to correct them all.

- 393 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5 WINDOW FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the functions that can be executed with the
WINDR (SUB 51) and WINDW (SUB 52) functional instructions, as
well as the formats and other details of the control data to be set for
executing these functions.

- 394 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.1 FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA

Input and output control data has the following structure.

Top address +0
Function code

2
Completion code

4 These data set as input data are remain

Data length
(Byte length of data area) unchanged in the output data.

6
Data number

8
Data attribute

10
Data area * Data length
Depends on the function.
≈ ≈

(1) In the explanation of the window functions below, minuses (-) in

the data structure fields indicate that input data need not be set in
these fields or that output data in these fields is not significant.
(2) All data is in binary unless otherwise specified.
(3) All data block lengths and data lengths are indicated in bytes.
(4) Output data is valid only when window processing terminates
normally.
(5) Output data always includes one of the following completion
codes. Note, however, that all of the completion codes listed are
not always provided for each function.

Completion code Meaning

0 Normal termination
1 Error (invalid function code)
2 Error (invalid data block length)
3 Error (invalid data number)
4 Error (invalid data attribute)
5 Error (invalid data)
6 Error (necessary option missing)
7 Error (write-protected)

- 395 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.2 LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED RESPONSE

There are two types of window function - one executed at high speed
and the other executed at low speed.

Number of scans to be executed until the window

TYPE
instruction is completed
TWO SCAN TIMES OR MORE (Depends on the CNC
LOW
processing priority and operation status.)
HIGH 1 SCAN TIME

When using the low-speed response window function, set ACT to 0

immediately after the data transfer end data (W1) is set to 1 for the
window instruction. For details, see "CAUTION" below.

CAUTION
The window instruction of a low-speed response is
controlled exclusively with the other window
instructions of low-speed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written
continuously, it is necessary to clear ACT of the
functional instruction to 0 once when the completion
information (W1) become 1.
It does not work about ACT=1 of the other window
instructions of low-speed response such as W1=1
and ACT=1 of the window instruction of a low-speed
response.
The window instruction of a high-speed response is
not exclusively controlled like a low-speed response.
Therefore, when the data is read or written
continuously, yow need not make ACT=0.

- 396 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.2.1 Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response Window

Instruction

If a low-speed response window instruction is programmed to keep its

ACT condition to on for no apparent reason, it may result in the ladder
program taking a long time to stop or not being able to stop at all. If
the ladder program does not stop, all operations aimed at changing the
ladder program will take longer to end or will never end.
To avoid such problems, when you code a ladder program using
functional instructions, you need to design the ladder structure based
on a thorough understanding of the control conditions of the
individual instructions you use.

If the ladder program takes long to stop or does not stop for any of
these reasons, the following operations will be affected.

1. Stopping the ladder program using a soft key on the screen

2. Reading a new ladder program from a memory card or other
medium, by using the DATA I/O screen
3. Updating the ladder program with changes made using the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

If any of the above phenomena occurs, the functional instruction

causing the problem needs to be fixed. For information about how to
fix the problem, see Section 4.15.

- 397 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.3 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS

Function group order

Function
Group Description Response R/W
code
CNC information 1 Reading CNC system information 0 High-speed R
(Section 5.4) 2 Reading a tool offset 13 High-speed R
3 Write a tool offset 14 Low-speed W
4 Reading a workpiece origin offset value 15 High-speed R
5 Writing a workpiece origin offset value 16 Low-speed W
6 Reading a parameter 17, 154 High-speed R
7 Writing a parameter 18 Low-speed W
8 Reading a real type parameter 321 High-speed R
9 Writing a real type parameter 323 Low-speed W
10 Reading setting data 19, 155 High-speed R
11 Writing setting data 20 Low-speed W
12 Reading the current program number 24 High-speed R
13 Reading the current sequence number 25 High-speed R
14 Reading CNC status information 76 High-speed R
15 Reading the current program number (8-digit program 90 High-speed R
numbers)
16 Entering data on the program check screen 150 Low-speed W
17 Reading clock data (date and time) 151 High-speed R
Axis information 1 Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes 26 High-speed R
(Section 5.5) 2 Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of 27 High-speed R
controlled axes
3 Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of 28 High-speed R
controlled axes
4 Reading a skip position (stop coordinates of skip 29 High-speed R
operation (G31)) of controlled axes
5 Reading the servo delay for controlled axes 30 High-speed R
6 Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on 31 High-speed R
controlled axes
7 Reading the actual spindle speed 50 High-speed R
8 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis 74 High-speed R
9 Reading the remaining travel 75 High-speed R
10 Reading actual spindle speeds 138 High-speed R
11 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor 152 Low-speed W
12 Presetting the relative coordinate 249 Low-speed W

- 398 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

*1 Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read
functions specifiable with the WINDR function command.
Function codes that have W in the R/W column are window write
functions specifiable with the WINDW function command.
*2 Functions that show "High-speed" in their Response field allow
data to be read or written immediately upon request. By contrast,
functions that show "Low-speed" in their Response field need to
request the CNC to read or write data and to receive a response
before allowing the data to be read or written.

CAUTION
To read or write data for the second path during two-
path control, add 1000 to the function code value
when entering the function code.
To read or write data for the third path during three-
path control, add 2000 to the function code value
when entering the function code.
Similarly, to read or write data for the fourth to 10th
paths, add 3000 to 9000 to the function code values,
respectively, when entering the function codes.

- 399 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

Function code order

Function
Description Response R/W
code
0 Reading CNC system information High-speed R
13 Reading a tool offset High-speed R
14 Writing a tool offset Low-speed W
15 Reading a workpiece origin offset value High-speed R
16 Writing a workpiece origin offset value Low-speed W
17 Reading a parameter High-speed R
18 Writing a parameter Low-speed W
19 Reading setting data High-speed R
20 Writing setting data Low-speed W
24 Reading the current program number High-speed R
25 Reading the current sequence number High-speed R
26 Reading the actual velocity of controlled axes High-speed R
27 Reading the absolute position (absolute coordinates) of controlled axes High-speed R
28 Reading the machine position (machine coordinates) of controlled axes High-speed R
29 Reading a skip position (stop coordinates of skip operation (G31)) of controlled High-speed R
axes
30 Reading the servo delay for controlled axes High-speed R
31 Reading the acceleration/deceleration delay on controlled axes High-speed R
50 Reading the actual spindle speed High-speed R
59 Reading value of the P-code macro variable High-speed R
74 Reading the relative position on a controlled axis High-speed R
75 Reading the remaining travel High-speed R
76 Reading CNC status information High-speed R
90 Reading the current program number (8-digit program numbers) High-speed R
138 Reading actual spindle speeds High-speed R
150 Entering data on the program check screen Low-speed W
151 Reading clock data (date and time) High-speed R
152 Entering torque limit data for the digital servo motor Low-speed W
154 Reading a parameter High-speed R
155 Reading setting data High-speed R
249 Presetting the relative coordinate Low-speed W
321 Reading a real type parameter High-speed R
323 Writing a real type parameter Low-speed W

- 400 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

*1 Function codes that have R in the R/W column are window read
functions specifiable with the WINDR function command.
Function codes that have W in the R/W column are window write
functions specifiable with the WINDW function command.
*2 Functions that show "High-speed" in their Response field allow
data to be read or written immediately upon request. By contrast,
functions that show "Low-speed" in their Response field need to
request the CNC to read or write data and to receive a response
before allowing the data to be read or written.

CAUTION
To read or write data for the second path during two-
path control, add 1000 to the function code value
when entering the function code.
To read or write data for the third path during three-
path control, add 2000 to the function code value
when entering the function code.
Similarly, to read or write data for the fourth to 10th
paths, add 3000 to 9000 to the function code values,
respectively, when entering the function codes.

- 401 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.4 CNC INFORMATION

5.4.1 Reading CNC System Information (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The system information specific to the CNC can be read including the
CNC type (e.g., series name like 30), the distinction between the
machining center system (M) and the lathe system (T) for each CNC
path, the ROM series and edition of the CNC system software, and the
number of axes to be controlled for each CNC path.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
0

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8
(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: CNC system information has been read normally.

- 402 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
0

2
(Completion code)
0
(Always terminates normally.)

4
(Data length)
14

6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
−
Value

10 ASCII characters
CNC series name (2 bytes) (30)

12 ASCII characters
Machine type M/T (2 bytes)
(M, T)

14 ROM series of CNC system software ASCII characters

(4 bytes) (B 0 0 0 1, . . . )

18 ROM version of CNC system ASCII characters

software (4 bytes) (0 0 0 1, 0 0 0 2, . . . )

22 Number of axes to be controlled for ASCII characters

the specified CNC path (2 bytes) ( 2, 3, 4, . . . )

NOTE
Data is stored from the upper digit in each lower byte.

- 403 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.4.2 Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response)

[Description]
A tool offset value recorded in the CNC can be read.
Wear offset data, geometry offset data, cutter compensation data, and
tool length offset data can be read as a tool offset.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
13

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type)

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

(a) Offset types (for machining centers)

Cutter Tool length • If the type of tool offset need
not be specified, enter 0.
Wear 0 2
Figure 1 3

(b) Offset types (for lathes)

X axis Z axis Tool tip R Virtual tool tip Y axis
Wear 0 2 4 6 8
Figure 1 3 5 7 9

- 404 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Completion codes]
0: The tool offset has been read normally.
3: The offset number specified for reading is invalid. (This
completion code is returned when the specified offset number data
is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.)
4: There are mistakes in the data attribute that specifies the type of the
offset to be read.
6: For the offset number specified for reading, an additional tool
offset number option is required, but it is missing.
Also, the tool function option is not added that is necessary for the
type of the option specified for reading.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
13

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L (Normally set to 4)
(L: Byte length of offset value)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type) Value

Tool offset value Signed binary (A negative value is

10 represented in 2's complement.)
Upper 3 bytes are always "0" for
virtual tool tip.

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 405 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.4.3 Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The tool offset value can be directly written into the CNC.
Wear offset data, geometry offset data, cutter compensation data, and
tool length offset data can be written as a tool offset.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
14

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not to be set)

4
(Data length)
4

6
(Data number)
N
(N = offset number)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = offset type) Value
10 Signed binary (A negative value is
Tool offset value
represented in 2's complement.)
Upper 3 bytes are always "0" for
virtual tool tip.

(a) Offset types (for machining centers)

Cutter Tool length • If the type of tool offset need
Wear 0 2 not be specified, enter 0.

Figure 1 3

(b) Offset types (for lathes)

X axis Z axis Tool tip R Virtual tool tip Y axis
Wear 0 2 4 6 8
Figure 1 3 5 7 9

- 406 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

Input data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

[Completion codes]
0: The tool offset has been written normally.
2: The data byte length for the tool offset specified for writing is
invalid.
3: The offset number specified for writing is invalid. (This
completion code is returned when the specified offset number data
is not from 1 to the maximum number of offsets.)
4: There are mistakes in the data attribute that specifies the type of the
offset to be written.
6: For the offset number specified for writing, the additional tool
offset number option is required, but it is missing.
Also, the tool function option is not added that is necessary for the
type of the offset specified for writing.

- 407 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
14

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(Input data) Value
10
Signed binary (A negative value is
Tool offset value: Input data represented in 2's complement.)

- 408 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.4 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (High-speed

Response)

[Description]
The workpiece origin offset recorded in the CNC can be read.
A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the
first axis to the 32nd axis) in the CNC. Either the workpiece origin
offset for a specific axis can be read, or the workpiece origin offsets
for all axes can be read at one time. If the additional axis option is not
provided, however, the workpiece origin offset for the additional axis
cannot be read.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
15

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length) N = 0: External workpiece origin offset
− N = 1: G54
(Need not be set) · ·
· ·
N = 6: G59
6 With "addition of workpiece coordinate system pair"
(Data number)
N = 7: G54.1 P1
N · ·
(N = offset group number) · ·
N = 306: G54.1 P300
8
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: Workpiece origin offset number of a specific
(M = axis number) axis. n is the axis number.
10 M = −1: Read for all axes
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

- 409 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Completion codes]
0: The workpiece origin offset has been read normally.
3: The specified offset number is invalid.
4: The specified axis number is invalid.
6: There is no workpiece coordinate shift option added.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
15

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4 L = 4: The workpiece origin offset value for a
(Data length)
L specific axis is read.
(L: Byte length of the workpiece
origin offset value) L = 4*n: Workpiece origin offsets for all axes
are read.
6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value
10
Signed binary number (A negative value
Workpiece origin offset value is represented in 2's complement.)

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 410 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.5 Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value (Low-speed

Response)

[Description]
Data can be written directly as a workpiece origin offset value in the
CNC.
A workpiece origin offset is provided for each controlled axis (the
first axis to the 32nd axis) in the CNC. Either the workpiece origin
offset value for a specific axis can be written, or the workpiece origin
offset values for all axes can be written at one time. If the additional
axis option is not provided, however, the workpiece origin offset value
for the additional axis cannot be written.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code) L = 4: Workpiece origin offset value for a specific
16 axis is written.
L = 4*n:
Workpiece origin offset values for all axes
2 are written.
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set) N = 0: External workpiece origin offset
N = 1: G54
4 · ·
(Data length)
L · ·
(L: Byte length of the workpiece N = 6: G59
origin offset value) With the option of adding Workpiece coordinate systems
N = 7: G54.1P1
6 · ·
(Data number) · ·
N N = 306: G54.1P300
(N = Offset group number)
M = 1 to n: Workpiece origin offset number of a specific
8 axis. n is the axis number.
(Data attribute) M = −1: Write for all
M
(M = Axis number) Value

10 Signed binary (A negative value is

Workpiece origin offset value represented in 2's complement.)

- 411 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

Input data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

[Completion codes]
0: The workpiece origin offset has been written normally.
2: The specified data length is invalid.
3: The offset number is invalid.
4: The specified axis number is invalid.
6: There is no workpiece coordinate shift option added.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
16

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L: Input data)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value

Workpiece origin offset value: Signed binary number (A negative

10 value is represented in 2's
Input data
complement.)

- 412 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.6 Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The integer type parameter data of the CNC is read by directly
accessing the CNC.
There are four types of the integer parameters in the CNC: Bit
parameters having a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters
holding 1-byte data, word parameters holding 2-byte data, and double
word parameters holding 4-byte data. Therefore, the length of the
read data varies according to the parameter number specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be read in bit units. The eight bits
(one byte) for a parameter number must be read at a time.
For axis parameters, data for a specific axis can be read, or data for all
axes can be read at a time.
For details of parameter data, refer to the Operator's manual of the
CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
17 or 154

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = parameter number)

8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: A specific axis
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: All axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

- 413 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been read normally.
3: The parameter number specified for reading is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor
a value 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
6: The necessary option is not added.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
17 or 154

2 (Completion code) When no axis or one axis is specified

? L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
(See the explanation of L = 2: Word parameter
the completion codes.) L = 4: Double word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n) When all axes are specified
L = 1*n: Bit or byte parameter
6 L = 2*n: Word parameter
(Data number) L = 4*n: Double word parameter
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value

10 Parameter data Parameter-dependent form

CAUTION
Macro executor parameters 9000 to 9011 cannot be
read.

- 414 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.7 Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
Data can be written in an integer parameter in the CNC.
There are four types of the integer parameters in the CNC: Bit
parameters having a definite meaning for each bit, byte parameters
holding 1-byte data, word parameters holding 2-byte data, and double
word parameters holding 4-byte data. Therefore, the length of the
written data varies according to the parameter specified.
Note that bit parameters cannot be written in bit units. The eight bits
(one byte) for the parameter number must be written at a time. This
means that when a bit needs to be written, the whole data for the
corresponding parameter number shall be read first, modify the target
bit in the read data, then the data shall be rewritten.
For axis parameters, data for a specific axis can be read, or data for all
axes can be read at a time.
For details of parameter data, refer to the Operator's manual of the
CNC.
Some parameters cause a P/S alarm 000 when data is written. (The
power must be turned off before continuing operation.)

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
18

2 When no axis or one axis is specified

(Completion code) L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
− L = 2: Word parameter
(Need not be set) L = 4: Double word parameter

4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n) When all axes are specified
L = 1*n: Bit or byte parameter
6 L = 2*n: Word parameter
(Data number) L = 4*n: Double word parameter
N
(N = parameter number)

8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute) M = 1 to n: A specific axis
M M = −1: All axes
(M = Axis number)

Value

10 Parameter data Parameter-dependent form

- 415 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been written normally.
2: The data byte length of the parameter specified for writing is
invalid.
3: The parameter number specified for writing is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor
a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
6: The necessary option is not added.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
18

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L = Input data)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value

10 Parameter data: Input data Parameter-dependent form

CAUTION
Parameters may not become effective immediately
depending on the parameter numbers.

- 416 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.8 Reading a Real Type Parameter (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The real type parameter data of the CNC is read by directly accessing
the CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
321

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)
6
(Data number)
8 N
(N = parameter number)
10
(Data attribute) M=0 : No axis
M
(M = axis number) M = 1 to n : Specify an axis.
12 M = -1 : All axes
(Decimal point position)

14
(Data area)
−
16 (Need not be set)

18

NOTE
The function of this function code cannot read integer
type or bit type parameters. To read an integer type
or bit type parameter, use the function having
function code 17 or 154.

[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been read normally.
3: The specified parameter number is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid; namely, a value other than
0,-1 or outside the range from 1 to n (where n is the number of
controlled axes) is specified.
6: The necessary option is not added.

- 417 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
321

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the above explanation of the
completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
6

6
(Data number)
N
8
(N = input data)

10
(Data attribute)
M
(M = input data)
12
(Decimal point position)

(Input data)

14 Parameter data

16 4 bytes

18

The read parameter value is processed as follows.

Example)

(Read parameter value) = (CNC's value) × 10 (specified decimal point position)

Decimal point
Parameter value CNC's value
position
1 0
12 1
123 1.234 2
1234 3
12340 4

- 418 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.9 Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
Data can be written to a real type parameter data of the CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
323

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
6

6
(Data number)
8 N
(N = parameter number)
10
(Data attribute) M=0 : No axis
M
(M = axis number) M = 1 to n : Specify an axis.

12 M = -1 : All axes
(Decimal point position)

14
Parameter data
16

18

NOTE
The function of this function code cannot write integer
type or bit type parameters. To write an integer type
or bit type parameter, use the function having
function code 18.

[Completion codes]
0: Parameter data has been written normally.
2: The data length of the parameter specified for writing is invalid.
3: The parameter number specified for writing is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid; namely, a value other than
0, -1 or outside the range from 1 to n (where n is the number of
controlled axes) is specified.
6: The necessary option is not added.

- 419 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
323

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the above explanation of the
completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
6

6
(Data number)
N
8 (N = input data)

10
(Data attribute)
M
(M = input data)
12
Decimal point position

(Input data)

14 Parameter data
4 bytes
16 (Input data)

18

The parameter value to be written is processed as follows.

Example)

(Value to be set to the CNC) = (parameter variable)/10 (specified decimal point position)

Parameter Decimal point

CNC's value
variable position
1234.000 0
123.400 1
12.340 1234 2
1.234 3
0.1234 4

CAUTION
Parameters may not become effective immediately
depending on the parameter numbers.

- 420 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.10 Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The data set in the CNC is read by directly accessing the CNC.
There are four types of setting data in the CNC: Bit setting data
having a definite meaning for each bit, byte setting data stored in
bytes, word setting data stored in 2-byte units, and double-word
setting data stored in 4-byte units. Therefore, the length of the read
data varies according to the setting data specified.
Note that bit setting data cannot be read in bit units. The eight bits
(one byte) for the setting data number must be read at a time.
For axis parameters, data for a specific axis can be read, or data for all
axes can be read at a time.
For details of setting data, refer to the Operator's manual of the CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
19 or 155

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Parameter number)

8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: A specific axis
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: All axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

- 421 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Completion codes]
0: Setting data has been read normally.
3: The setting number specified for reading is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor
a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
19 or 155

2 (Completion code) When no axis or one axis is specified

? L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
(See the explanation of L = 2: Word parameter
the completion codes.) L = 4: Double word parameter
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n) When all axes are specified
L = 1*n: Bit or byte parameter
6 L = 2*n: Word parameter
(Data number) L = 4*n: Double word parameter
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value
10
Setting data Parameter-dependent form

- 422 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.11 Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
Data can be written as setting data in the CNC.
For details of setting data, refer to the Operator's manual of the CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
20

2 When no axis or one axis is specified

(Completion code) L = 1: Bit or byte parameter
− L = 2: Word parameter
(Need not be set.) L = 4: Double word parameter

4
(Data length)
L
(L = 1, 2, 4, 1*n, 2*n, 4*n) When all axes are specified
L = 1*n: Bit or byte parameter
6 L = 2*n: Word parameter
(Data number) L = 4*n: Double word parameter
N
(N = Setting data number)

8 M = 0: No axis
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: A specific axis
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: All axes

Value

10 Setting data Setting data-dependent form

[Completion codes]
0: Setting data has been written normally.
2: The byte length of the setting data specified for writing is invalid.
3: The setting data number specified for writing is invalid.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid because it is neither 0, -1, nor
a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
5: Data exceeding the allowable range was specified as setting data to
be written. For example, when data outside the range from 0 to 3
is specified as the setting data to be written for I/O data, this
completion code is returned.

- 423 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
20

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(N = Input data)

6
(Data number)
N
(N = Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M = Input data) Value

10 Setting data: Input data Setting data-dependent form

- 424 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.12 Reading the Current Program Number (High-speed

Response)

[Description]
The program number of a machining program being executed or
selected on the CNC can be read.
When a subprogram is executed on the CNC, the program number of
the main program can also be read. Note that the program number that
can be read is the first program number (first loop main program).
This function accepts only 4-digit program numbers. When the
specification supports 8-digit program numbers, specify function code
90 to read 8-digit program numbers.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
24

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

(Data number)
0

(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

42

[Completion codes]
0: The program number of the currently executing program was read
successfully.
5: The program number exceeds 4-digit. (Use function code 90.)

- 425 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
24

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above.)

4
(Data length)
4

6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
−
Value

10 Current program number: ON Unsigned binary, 2 bytes long

12 Program number of main program:

OMN

(a) Current program number (ON)

The program number of the program being executed is set.
(b) Program number of main program (OMN)
When the currently executing program is a subprogram, the
program number of its main program (first loop main program)
is set. When the currently executing program is not a
subprogram, 0 is set.

- 426 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.13 Reading the Current Sequence Number (High-speed

Response)

[Description]
The sequence number of a machining program being executed on the
CNC can be read. If sequence numbers are not assigned to all blocks
of the machining program, the sequence number of the most recently
executed block is read.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
25

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8
(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The current sequence number has been read normally.

- 427 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
25

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L Note that the data length must be set to 4 bytes
(L = 4) even though the current program number is 2
bytes long (the sequence number is indicated by 5
6 digits).
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
−
Value

10
Current sequence number Unsigned binary

- 428 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.14 Reading CNC Status Information (High-speed Response)

[Description]
Status information (status indication on the screen) can be read from
the CNC.
The types of status information that can be read are as follows.
(1) Indication of which mode is selected, automatic or manual
(2) Status of automatic operation
(3) Status of movement along the axis and dwelling
(4) Status of M, S, T, and B functions
(5) Statuses of emergency stop and the reset signal
(6) Alarm status
(7) Status of program edit

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0

(Function code)
76

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8
(Data attribute)
0

10

(Data area)
≈ − ≈
(Need not be set)

42

[Completion codes]
0: CNC status information has been read normally.

- 429 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
76

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4

(Data length)
14

6
(Data number)
−
(Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
−
(Input data)
Value
10
Indication of which mode is currently 0 : MDI
selected, automatic or manual (2 1 : MEMory
bytes) 2 : **** (Other states)
3 : EDIT
4 : HaNDle
5 : JOG
6 : Teach in JOG
7 : Teach in HND
8 : INC. feed
9 : REFerence
10 : ReMoTe

12
Status of automatic operation (2 0 : **** (Reset states)
bytes) 1 : STOP
2 : HOLD
3 : STaRT

14 Status of movement along the axis 0 : *** (Other states)

or dwelling (2 bytes) 1 : MoTioN
2 : DWell

16 Status of M, S, T, and B functions 0 : *** (Other states)

(2 bytes) 1 : FIN

18 Status of emergency stop (2 bytes) 0 : (Releases the emergency stop state)

1 : − −EMerGency − −
2 : − RESET −
(The reset signal is on.)

20 Alarm status (2 bytes) 0 : *** (Other states)

1 : ALarM
2 : BATtery low
22
Status of program edit (2 bytes) 0 : ******* (Non editing)
1 : EDIT
2 : SeaRCH
3 : OUTPUT
4 : INPUT
5 : COMPARE
6 : LabelSKip
7 : OFST
8 : WSFT
9 : ReSTaRt

- 430 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.15 Reading the Current Program Number (8-digit Program

Numbers) (High-speed Response)

[Description]
This function reads CNC program numbers extended to 8 digits from
the usual 4 digits.
Basically, this function is the same as function code 24 excluding the
different data length of function code 90.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
90

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

(Data number)
0

(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

18

[Completion codes]
0: The program number of the currently executing program has been
read normally.

- 431 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
90

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of the
completion codes, above.)
4
(Data length)
8

6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
−
Value
10
Number of the program currently Unsigned binary format, 4-byte length
being executed
ON
14
Program number of the main
program
ON
18

(a) Number of the program currently being executed (ON)

The program number of the program currently being executed is set.
(b) Program number of the main program (OFF)
If the program currently being executed is a subprogram, the program
number of its main program is set.
If the program currently being executed is not a subprogram, 0 is set.

- 432 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.16 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen (Low-speed

Response)

[Description]
On the program check screen of the CNC, data can be entered for the
spindle tool No. (HD.T) and the next tool No. (NX.T).
This function is effective only when bit 2 of parameter 3108 is 1.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
150

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

(Data length)
4

6 N = 0 : Spindle tool No. (8 digits)

(Data number)
N
(N = 0, 1)
N = 1 : Next tool No. (8 digits)
8

(Data attribute)
0 Value
10
Data for the spindle tool No. Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
or data for the next tool No.
(4 bytes)

[Completion codes]
0: Data has been entered on the program check screen normally.
2: The data length in bytes is invalid.
3: The data No. is invalid.

- 433 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
150

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
4
(Input data)

6 N = 0 : Spindle tool No.

(Data number)
N
(Input data)
N = 1 : Next tool No.
8
(Data attribute)
−
(Input data) Value
10
Data for the spindle tool No. Unsigned binary
(4 bytes)
or data for the next tool No.
(4 bytes)

- 434 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.4.17 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time) (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The current date (year, month, day) and time (hours, minutes,
seconds) can be read from the clock built into the CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
151

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6 N = −1: Reads current date and time.

(Data number)
N N = 0: Reads current date.
(N = 0, 1)
N = 1: Reads current time.
8

(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

[Completion codes]
0: Data of the clock built into the CNC has been read normally.
3: A value other than 0, 1, and -1 was specified for the data No.

- 435 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
151

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
6/12

6
(Data number)
N
(Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
−
(Input data) Value
10
Current date (year) or time (hours) Unsigned binary

12 Current date (month) or time

(minutes)
14 Current date (day) or time (seconds)

When both the current date and current time are specified to be read by entering [−1] for the data No.
−
(Input data)
Value
10
Current date (year) Unsigned binary
12
Current date (month)
14
Current date (day)
16
Current time (hours)
18
Current time (minutes)
20
Current time (seconds)

[Example] September 10th, 1990 [Example] 23:59:59

(hours:minutes:seconds)
Data area Data area
1990 23
+2 +2
9 59
+4 +4
10 59

- 436 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.5 AXIS INFORMATION

5.5.1 Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes (High-speed

Response)

[Description]
The actual velocity of a movement on CNC-controlled axes can be
read. Note that the read speed is the composite velocity for the
controlled axes. When movement involves only the basic three axes,
the X, Y, and Z axes, the composite velocity equals the actual velocity.
When movement, however, involves the fourth axis, such as a rotation
axis or a parallel axis, as well as some of the basic three axes, the
composite velocity for all the relevant axes does not equal the actual
velocity.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
26

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8
(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The actual velocity for the controlled axes has been read normally.

- 437 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
26

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4)

6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
−
Value

10 Actual velocity for controlled axes Unsigned binary

<Data increments>
• Input in mm
1 mm/min.
• Input in inches
0.01 inch/min.

- 438 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.5.2 Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) of

Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The absolute coordinates of the CNC-controlled axes for movement
can be read. The absolute coordinates indicate those after cutter
compensation or tool length compensation.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
27

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Absolute coordinate of a specific

(Data attribute) axis. n is the axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: Coordinates of all axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The absolute coordinates of the controlled axes have been read
normally.
4: Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1
nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled
axes.

- 439 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
27

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value

10 Absolute coordinate of the controlled Signed binary

axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)

When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value

10 Absolute coordinate of the first axis Signed binary

(4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Absolute coordinate of the second
axis (4 bytes)

18 Absolute coordinate of the third

axis (4 bytes)

22 Absolute coordinate of the fourth

axis (4 bytes)

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 440 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

5.5.3 Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) of

Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The machine coordinates of CNC-controlled axes for movement can
be read. The read value equals the machine coordinate indicated on
the current position display screen displayed in the CNC. (This screen
can be displayed by pressing the function key POS.)

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
28

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Machine coordinate of a specific

(Data attribute) axis. n is the axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: Coordinates of all axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

CAUTION
When an inch machine is used in metric input, or
when a millimeter machine is used in inch input, the
machine position that is read with bit 0 of parameter
No. 3104 set to 1 differs from the value indicated by
the CNC. In this case, therefore, the value read
through the ladder must be calculated (converted).

- 441 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Completion codes]
0: The machine coordinates of the controlled axes have been read
normally.
4: Data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is neither -1
nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of the
controlled axes.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
28

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value

10 Machine coordinate of the controlled Signed binary

axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)

When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value

10 Machine coordinate of the first axis Signed binary

(4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Machine coordinate of the second
axis (4 bytes)

18 Machine coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)

22 Machine coordinate of the fourth

axis (4 bytes)

- 442 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 443 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.4 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip Operation

(G31)) of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)

[Description]
When a block of the skip operation (G31) is executed by the CNC and
the skip signal goes on to stop the machine, the absolute coordinates
of the stop position on the axes of movement can be read.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
29

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Skip coordinate on a specific axis. n

(Data attribute) is the axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: Coordinates on all axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The coordinates of the skip stop position for the controlled axes
have been read normally.
4: Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
-1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled
axes.

- 444 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
29

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value

10 Skip coordinate of the controlled axis Signed binary

specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)

When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value

10 Skip coordinate of the first axis Signed binary

(4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Skip coordinate of the second axis
(4 bytes)

18 Skip coordinate of the third axis

(4 bytes)

22 Skip coordinate of the fourth axis

(4 bytes)

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 445 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.5 Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes (High-speed

Response)

[Description]
The servo delay, which is the difference between the specified
coordinates of CNC-controlled axes and the actual servo position, can
be read.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
30

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Servo delay for a specific axis.

(Data attribute) n is the maximum axis number.
M
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: Servo delay for all axes
10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The servo delay for the controlled axes have been read normally.
4: The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is
neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater than the number
of controlled axes.

- 446 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
30

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value

10 Servo delay for the controlled axis Signed binary

specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)

When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value

10 Servo delay for the first axis (4 bytes) Signed binary

(A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Servo delay for the second axis
(4 bytes)

18 Servo delay for the third axis (4 bytes)

22 Servo delay for the fourth axis

(4 bytes)

- 447 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.6 Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on Controlled

Axes (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The acceleration/deceleration delay, which is the difference between
the coordinates of controlled axes programmed in the CNC and the
position after acceleration/deceleration is performed, can be read.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
31

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Acceleration/deceleration delay for a

(Data attribute) specific axis. n is the maximum axis
M number.
(M = Axis number)
M = −1: Acceleration/deceleration delay for
10 all axes
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The acceleration/deceleration delay for the control axis has been
read normally.
4: The data specified as the data attribute is invalid because it is
neither -1 nor a value from 1 to n (n is the number of axes).
Alternatively, the specified axis number is greater than the number
of controlled axes.

- 448 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
31

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4 (Data length)
L
(L = 4*n, n is the number of
axes specified.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value

10 Acceleration/deceleration delay for the Signed binary

controlled axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)

When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value

10 Acceleration/deceleration delay for Signed binary

the first axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14 Acceleration/deceleration delay for the
second axis (4 bytes)

18 Acceleration/deceleration delay for the

third axis (4 bytes)

22 Acceleration/deceleration delay for the

fourth axis (4 bytes)

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 449 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.7 Reading the Actual Spindle Speed (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The actual speed of the spindle can be read from the CNC.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0

(Function code)
50

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

(Data number)
0

(Data attribute)
0

10
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The actual speed of the spindle has been read normally.

- 450 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
50

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4

(Data length)
4

6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
− Value
10
Actual spindle speed Unsigned binary
<Data unit>
min−1

- 451 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.8 Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis (High-

speed Response)

[Description]
The relative coordinates of the machine moving along an axis
controlled by the CNC can be read.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0

(Function code)
74

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Reads the relative coordinates of

(Data attribute)
M each axis. n is an axis No.
(M: Axis number)
M = −1: Reads the relative coordinates of all
10 axes.
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The relative coordinates on the controlled axis have been read
normally.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than
−1 and 1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis
No. was greater than the number of controlled axes.

- 452 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
74

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n. n is the number of
specified axes.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Relative coordinates on the Signed binary
specified controlled axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value
10
Relative coordinates on the first Signed binary
axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
14 2's complement.)
Relative coordinates on the second
axis (4 bytes)
18
Relative coordinates on the third
(4 bytes)
22
Relative coordinates on the fourth
axis (4 bytes)

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

Double values can be read for a machining center system or when

radius specification is used for the relevant axis of a lathe system.

- 453 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.9 Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response)

[Description]
The remaining travel of the machine along an axis controlled by the
CNC can be read. The read value equals the remaining travel
indicated on the current position display screen on the CNC. (This
screen can be called by pressing the function button POS.)

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0

(Function code)
75

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

6
(Data number)
0

8 M = 1 to n: Reads the remaining travel along

(Data attribute)
M each axis. n is an axis No.
(M: Axis number)
M = −1: Reads the remaining travel along all
10 axes.
(Data area)
−
(Need not be set)

≈ ≈

42

[Completion codes]
0: The remaining travel along the controlled axis has been read
normally.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than
−1 and 1 to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis
No. was greater than the number of controlled axes.

- 454 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
75

2 (Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4*n. n is the number of
specified axes.)
6
(Data number)
−

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)
Value
10
Remaining travel along the Signed binary
specified controlled axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)

When the number of controlled axes is 4

Value
10
Remaining travel along the first Signed binary
axis (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement.)
14
Remaining travel along the second
axis (4 bytes)
18
Remaining travel along the third
axis (4 bytes)
22
Remaining travel along the fourth
axis (4 bytes)

Output data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.005 0.0005 0.00005 0.000005 0.0000005
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.0005 0.00005 0.000005 0.0000005 0.00000005
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

- 455 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.10 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds (High-speed Response)

(1) Actual spindle speed

[Description]
This function reads the actual speed of the No.1 to No.8 serial spindles.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
138

+2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
0

+8 M = 1 to n: Read spindles on each axis.

(Data attribute) (n is the spindle number.)
M −1: Read spindles on No.1 and No.2 axes
(M = Spindle number)
−2: Read spindles on No.1 to No.3 axes
+10 −3: Read spindles on No.1 to No.4 axes
(Data area) −4: Read spindles on No.1 to No.5 axes
− −5: Read spindles on No.1 to No.6 axes
(Need not be set) −6: Read spindles on No.1 to No.7 axes
−7: Read spindles on No.1 to No.8 axes

[Completion codes]
0: The actual spindle speed was read successfully.
4: The spindle speed in 'Data Attribute' has wrong values, that is , a
value outside of the range -1 to -(n - 1) or 1 to n (n: number of
spindles).

- 456 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
138

+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above.)
+4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4 × n)
+6

(Data number)
−
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Actual speed of specified spindle Signed binary
<Data unit>
min−1
+14

Or, 4 controlled axes:

Value
+10
Actual speed of No.1 spindle Signed binary
<Data unit>
min−1
+14
Actual speed of No.2 spindle

+18
Actual speed of No.3 spindle

+22
Actual speed of No.4 spindle

+26

- 457 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

(2) Position coder-less actual spindle speed

[Description]
This function reads the actual spindle speed (position coder-less actual
spindle speed) obtained by calculating the spindle motor speed of the
No.1 to No.4 serial spindles.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
138

+2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

+4
(Data length)
−
(Need not be set)

+6
(Data number)
0

+8
(Data attribute) M = 11 to (10 + n): Read spindles on each axis.
M (n is the spindle number.)
(M = Spindle number + 10) −11: Read spindles on No.1 and No.2 axes
−12: Read spindles on No.1 to No.3 axes
+10 −13: Read spindles on No.1 to No.4 axes
(Data area)
−14: Read spindles on No.1 to No.5 axes
−
(Need not be set) −15: Read spindles on No.1 to No.6 axes
−16: Read spindles on No.1 to No.7 axes
+12 −17: Read spindles on No.1 to No.8 axes

[Completion codes]
0: The actual spindle speed was read successfully.
4: The spindle speed in 'Data Attribute' has wrong values, that is , a
value outside of the range -11 to -(9 + 1) or 11 to (10 + n) (n:
number of spindles).

- 458 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
138

+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above.)
+4
(Data length)
L
(L = 4 × n)
+6

(Data number)
−
+8
(Data attribute)
M
(Entered data)
Value
+10
Position coder-less actual spindle Signed binary
speed <Data unit>
min−1
+14

Or, 4 controlled axes:

Value
+10
Position coder-less actual No.1 Signed binary
spindle speed <Data unit>
min−1
+14
Position coder-less actual No.2
spindle speed
+18
Position coder-less actual No.3
spindle speed
+22
Position coder-less actual No.4
spindle speed
+26

- 459 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.11 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo Motor (Low-
speed Response)

[Description]
Torque limit values for the digital servo motor can be entered.

[Input data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
152

2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set)

(Data length)
2

6
(Data number)
0

8
(Data attribute)
M M = 1 to n: Axis No.
(M: 1 to n)

Value
10 Torque limit data Unsigned binary
(1 byte) <Unit: %>
The high-order byte is always set to Values from 0 to 255 correspond to
0. 0% to 100%.

CAUTION
Calculate the torque limit data assuming that the
short-time rated value is 100%.
Example: To specify a torque limit of 50%, enter 128.

[Completion codes]
0: Torque limit data has been entered normally.
4: The specified data attribute is invalid. That is, a value other than 1
to n (number of axes) was specified, or the specified axis No. was
greater than the number of controlled axes.

- 460 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
152

2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation of
the completion codes.)
4
(Data length)
2
(Input data)

6
(Data number)
−
(Input data)

8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data) Value
10
Torque limit data (1 byte): Input data Unsigned binary
The high-order byte is always set to <Unit: %>
0. Values from 0 to 255 correspond to
0% to 100%.

- 461 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

5.5.12 Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed Response)

[Description]
The preset data is set to the relative coordinate controlled by CNC. If
0 is set as preset data it becomes to origin.
But it is impossible to write the value of preset data to the transferring
axis. In the case of the preset of relative coordinate of all axes is
executed by using this function, if only one axis is transferring, the
preset of relative coordinate cannot be executed, neither.

[Input data structure]

Case of writing data on each axis.

Top address + 0
(Function code)
249

+2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set.)

+4
(Data length)
4

+6
(Data number)
0
Value
+8
M=1 to n: Write data on each (n
(Data attribute) is the axis number)
M
(M: Axis number)
+10
Value of relative coordinate for the Signed binary
controlled axis specified (4 bytes) (A negative value is represented in
2's complement)

+12

- 462 -
B-63983EN/01 5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS

Input data unit

Input Increment system
system IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Machining center mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001

system inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Radius mm, deg 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
specification
Diameter 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Lathe specification
system Radius inch 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification
Diameter 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
specification

Case of writing data on all axes (controlled axes are 4).

Top address + 0
(Function code)
249

+2
(Completion code)
−
(Need not be set.)

+4
(Data length)
16

+6
(Data number)
0
Value
+8
−1 must be set
(Data attribute)
M
(M = −1)
+10
Signed binary
Value of relative coordinate for the (A negative value is represented in
first axis (4 bytes) 2's complement)

+14
Value of relative coordinate for the
second axis (4 bytes)

+18
Value of relative coordinate for
the third axis (4 bytes)

+22
Value of relative coordinate for the
fourth axis (4 bytes)

- 463 -
5.WINDOW FUNCTIONS B-63983EN/01

[Completion codes]
0: Success to set the value of relative coordinate.
4: Data specified for the data attribute is invalid because it is neither
−1 nor a value from 1 to n(n is the number of axes). Alternatively,
the specified axis number is greater than the number of controlled
axes.
5: Relative coordinate is out of range.

[Output data structure]

Top address + 0
(Function code)
249

+2
(Completion code)
?
(See the explanation above)

+4
(Data length)
L
(Same as input data)
+6
(Data number)
0
(Same as input data)

+8
(Data attribute)
M
(M: Input data)

+10
Value of relative coordinate
(4*n bytes)

- 464 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

6 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

The basic configuration of the PMC screen is described below.

NC program number

Screen title
Ladder PMC alarm
execution status

NC status indication
[+]
Soft key page
Key entry line turning key

Message display line

Return key

POS PROG OFFSET

STTING
Function keys
SYSTEM MESSAGE GRAPH

• Screen title: Displays the name of a specific

submenu of the PMC.
• Ladder execution status: Displays the execution status of the
ladder program.
• PMC alarm: Indicates whether any PMC alarm is
occurring.
• NC program number: Displays the number of the currently
selected NC program.
• Key entry line: Line for entering a numerical value or
character key string.
• Message display line: Displays an error or warning message.

- 465 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

• NC status indication: Displays the NC mode, the execution

status of the NC program, the currently
selected NC path number.
• Return key: Used to switch from the PMC operation
menu to a specific PMC submenu or
from a specific PMC submenu to the
main menu of the PMC.
• Soft key page turning key: Used to turn soft key pages.

About the PMC screen

When you click the "SYSTEM" function key and then turn the soft
key page by clicking the [+] soft key, the main menu of the PMC is
displayed.
The PMC main menu offers the following three types of submenus,
which are respectively used for specific purposes.
• PMC maintenance
• PMC ladder
• PMC configuration

Each of these PMC submenus is explained below.

(1) PMC maintenance menu

This menu displays the screens related to the maintenance of the
PMC, such as those for PMC signal status monitoring and traces
and for PMC data display and editing.

(2) PMC ladder menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the ladder program.

(3) PMC configuration menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the data other than the ladder constituting the sequence
program, as well as the screen for setting the PMC functions.

- 466 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

6.1 OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT KEY

ORGANIZATION

6.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens

SYSTEM

PMC main menu

PMC maintenance submenu
PMC MAINTE STATUS Signal status screen (See Section 7.1.)

< I/O LINK I/O link connection status screen (See Section 7.5.)

PMC ALARM PMC alarm screen (See Section 7.2.)

I/O Data I/O screen (See Section 7.4.)

TIMER PMC parameter (timer) screen (See Subsection 7.3.1.)

COUNTR PMC parameter (counter) screen (See Subsection 7.3.2.)

PMC parameter (keep relay) (See Subsection 7.3.3.)

KEEP RELAY screen

DATA PMC parameter (data table) screen (See Subsection 7.3.4.)

TRACE Signal trace screen (See Subsection 7.6.1.)

Signal trace (parameter setting) (See Subsection 7.6.2.)

TRACE SETING
screen

PMC ladder submenu

PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen (See Section 8.1.)

Ladder display/editing screen (See Sections 8.2 to 8.5.)

< LADDER

PMC configuration submenu

PMC CONFIG TITLE Title display/editing screen (See Section 9.1.)

Configuration parameter screen (See Section 9.9.)

< CONFIG PARAM

Setting screens (general, message shift, (See Section 9.5.)

SETING I/O link assignment data selection,
override)
PMC STATUS PMC status screen (multi-PMC switch) (See Section 9.6.)

SYSTEM PARAM
System parameter display/editing (See Section 9.8.)
screen

MODULE I/O module display/editing screen (See Section 9.4.)

Symbol and comment display/editing (See Section 9.2.)

SYMBOL screen

MESAGE Message display/editing screen (See Section 9.3.)

Online monitoring parameter setting (See Section 9.7.)

ONLINE
screen

- 467 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

6.1.2 Basic Screen Operations

Use the operation soft keys to operate the individual screens.
To switch to the operation soft keys, do the following:
• Click the [(OPRT)] soft key, which is one of the PMC submenu
soft key.
• Enter a numerical value or character string.

To switch from the operation soft keys to a specific PMC submenu or

to the PMC main menu, click the [<] soft key.

No operation soft keys are displayed when the screen requires no

operation. In that case, the [(OPRT)] soft key is not displayed, either.
On the other hand, a screen that involves multiple different functions
consists of two or more layers of operation soft keys.
In that case, to return from the operation soft keys of one layer to
those of the previous layer, click the [EXIT] soft key.

A transition diagram for the PMC main menu soft keys, PMC
submenu soft keys, and operation soft keys is shown below.

PMC main menu soft keys

<

PMC submenu soft keys

< (OPRT)

Operation soft keys (1st layer)

EXIT
The number of
operation soft key
Operation soft keys (2nd layer) layers differs for
each screen.

EXIT

Operation soft keys (3rd layer)

Fig. 6.1.2 Transition diagram for the PMC soft keys

- 468 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

Example) Ladder display/editing screen

Operate the ladder display/editing screen by switching three layers of
operation soft keys - ladder display operation soft keys (1st layer),
ladder editing operation soft keys (2nd layer), and ladder net editing
operation soft keys (3rd layer).

PMC main menu

PMC ladder submenu

Ladder display operation soft keys

(1st layer)

Ladder editing operation soft keys

(2nd layer)

Ladder net editing operation soft keys

(3rd layer)

- 469 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

6.2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR SCREENS

Several PMC screens can be protected from unauthorized attempts to
display data or operate the screen, based on preset conditions. This
section describes such display and operation conditions.

6.2.1 Programmer Protection Function

CAUTION
This section contains important information for
developers of application system controlled by PMC.
Improperly implemented application system may
increase possibility of defects in its safety. Careful
examinations and considerations on using and
implementing with the functions explained especially
in this section are strongly required.

PMC system provides various embedded programmer functions such

as edit, diagnosis and debugging which help the programming and
debugging of sequence program. To use these functions which may
even disable safety mechanism realized by sequence program, it is
required that the operator of these functions should be an expert who
fully understands the sequence program and the operation of PMC. It
is also strongly recommended to the developer of machine that these
functions should be protected from careless use by ordinary operators
after the machine is shipped into the field. Furthermore, if these
functions partly need to be used in the field for any purpose such as
the maintenance or adjustment, the developer of the machine should
implement any means to enable these functions after forcing the
machine in safe mode or should let the operator know and strictly
follow proper procedure to ensure the safety.
The setting parameters described in this section are provided for the
developer of machine to be able to properly program the sequence or
control the parameters for necessary conditions on which the operator
is allowed to use PMC programmer functions safely by eliminating
careless operation which may cause "stopping the ladder", "changing
sequence program" or "changing important setting data".
These parameters can be set on the setting screen or in some system
keep relays (K900 to 999).

- 470 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1)

If you set "PROGRAMMER ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the
following functions as a supervisor mode.
• Ladder editing screen
• Title data editing screen
• Symbol/comment data editing screen
• Message data editing screen
• I/O unit address setting screen
• Clear of PMC parameter
• Start/stop of ladder
• Forcing function
• Override function*1
• Setting of multi-language message display function
• Data I/O screen
• System parameter screen
• Parameter setting screen for online monitor
• Setting screen for the I/O link assignment data selection function
• Setting screen for keep relay K900 or after
• Configuration parameter screen
• Sequence program input and output
• PMC parameter input and output
• Saving of a sequence program to flash ROM

NOTE
The override function also requires the setting of
"OVERRIDE ENABLE" in the setting parameters.

CAUTION
Set this setting to "NO"(0) before shipment of the
machine. If this setting is left as "YES"(1), the
operator may stop execution of the ladder program
by mistake. If you want to protect this setting, please
make a sequence that always writes 0 in this bit by
your ladder. Or please control the machine to force
to translate into safety state by sequence program
using the way described in Section 4.15 when the
ladder stops.

- 471 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0)

If you set "HIDE PMC PROGRAM" to "YES", it disables the
following functions which have the sequence program display.

• Ladder monitor screen

• Ladder editing screen
• Title data editing screen
• Symbol/comment data editing screen
• Message data editing screen
• I/O unit address setting screen
• Clear of PMC parameter
• System parameter screen
• Output of sequence program

NOTE
Even if this parameter is set to "YES", these functions
do not be hidden except for Ladder monitor/editing
screen if "PROGRAMMER ENABLE" is set to "YES".

- 472 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

EDIT ENABLE (K901.6)

If you set "EDIT ENABLE" to "YES", it enables the following
functions which can edit the program.
• Ladder editing screen*1
• Title data editing screen*1
• Symbol/comment data editing screen*1*2
• Message data editing screen*1*2
• I/O unit address setting screen*1*2
• Clear of PMC parameter*1*2
• Setting of multi-language message display function
• System parameter screen*1
• Setting screen for keep relay K900 or after
• Configuration parameter screen
• Sequence program input*2
• Saving of a sequence program to flash ROM

NOTE
1 Even if this parameter is set to "YES", these functions
which have program display are invalid if "HIDE PMC
PROGRAM" is set to "YES".
2 These screens with stop of ladder program require
below setting "ALLOW PMC STOP".

CAUTION
Set this setting to "NO"(0) before shipment of the
machine if you want to prohibit operator form editing
the program. If you want to protect this setting,
please make a sequence that always writes 0 in this
bit by your ladder.

- 473 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2)

If you set "ALLOW PMC STOP" to "YES", it enables the following
functions which require stop/start of ladder program. *1

• Symbol/comment data editing screen*2

• Message data editing screen*2
• I/O unit address setting screen*2
• Clear of PMC parameter*2
• Start/stop of ladder
• System parameter screen*2
• Input of sequence program*2

NOTE
1 Even if this parameter is set to "YES", these functions
which have program display are invalid if "HIDE PMC
PROGRAM" is set to "YES".
2 These editing screens require above setting "EDIT
ENABLE".

CAUTION
Set this setting to "NO"(0) before shipment of the
machine. If this setting is left as "YES"(1), the
operator may stop execution of the ladder program
by mistake. If you want to protect this setting, please
make a sequence that always writes 0 in this bit by
your ladder. Or please control the machine to force
to translate into safety state by sequence program
using the way described in Section 4.15 when the
ladder stops.

RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4)

If you set "RAM WRITE ENABLE" to "YES", it enables both the
forcing function and the override function.

NOTE
The override function also requires the setting of
"OVERRIDE ENABLE" in the setting parameters.

- 474 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (K900.7)

If you set "DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN" to "NO", the data table
control screen is not displayed.

IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1)

If you set "IO GROUP SELECTION " to "SHOW", the setting screen
for the selectable I/O link assignment function is enabled.

HIDE PMC PARAM (K902.6)

If you set "HIDE PMC PARAM" to "YES", functions that are related
to the PMC parameters are protected, as follows:
• The timer, counter, keep relay, and data screens cannot be
displayed.
• The PMC I/O screen cannot output the PMC parameters.

CAUTION
To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O
screen requires a special operation. For information
about how to enable the input of the PMC
parameters, see "Output from the data I/O screen" in
Subsection 6.2.2.

WARNING
If the sequence program is stopped while the
machine is operating, the machine may cause
unexpected operation. Before stopping the sequence
program, make sure that there is no one near the
machine and that the tool will not collide with the
workpiece or machine. Operating the machine in any
inappropriate fashion can result in the death of or
serious injury to the user. The tool, workpiece,
and/or machine can also be damaged.

- 475 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7)

If you set "PROTECT PMC PARAM" to "YES", functions that are
related to the PMC parameters are protected, as follows:
• The change of the PMC parameters from the timer, counter, keep
relay, and data screens is disabled.
• The input of the PMC parameters from the PMC I/O screen is
disabled.

CAUTION
1 To change the PMC parameters on an individual
screen requires a special operation. For information
about how to enable the input of the PMC
parameters, see "Input from the PMC parameter
screen" in Subsection 6.2.2.
2 To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O
screen requires a special operation. For information
about how to enable the input of the PMC
parameters, see "Output from the data I/O screen" in
Subsection 6.2.2.

WARNING
If the sequence program is stopped while the
machine is operating, the machine may cause
unexpected operation. Before stopping the sequence
program, make sure that there is no one near the
machine and that the tool will not collide with the
workpiece or machine. Operating the machine in any
inappropriate fashion can result in the death of or
serious injury to the user. The tool, workpiece,
and/or machine can also be damaged.

- 476 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

Example for setting parameters

(1) If you want to prohibit completely operator from accessing the
sequence program;
• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO"
• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "YES"
• EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "NO"
• ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "NO"

(2) If you want to allow operator only monitoring the sequence

program;
• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO"
• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "NO"
• EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "NO"
• ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "NO"

NOTE
Please use the password function of sequence
program for particular operator. Please refer to
FANUC LADDER-III operator's manual B-66234EN
"10.3".

(3) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the

sequence program;
• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO"
• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "NO"
• EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "YES"
• ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "NO"

NOTE
Please use the password function of sequence
program for particular operator. Please refer to
FANUC LADDER-III operator's manual B-66234EN
"5.4".

- 477 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

(4) If you want to allow operator monitoring and editing the

sequence program which requires stop of ladder;
• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO"
• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "NO"
• EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "YES"
• ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "YES"

NOTE
Please use the password function of sequence
program for particular operator. Please refer to
FANUC LADDER-III operator's manual B-66234EN
"10.3".

WARNING
If a sequence program is stopped while the machine
is operating, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Before stopping the sequence program, make sure
that nobody is near the machine and that the tool
cannot interfere with the work-piece or machine.
Incorrect operation of the machine presents an
extreme risk of death or serious injury to the user.
Damage the tool, work-piece, and/or the machine is
also likely.

(5) The case that operator who familiar with the machine and the
ladder sequence operate all the PMC programmer functions;
• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "YES"
• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "NO"

WARNING
If a sequence program is stopped while the machine
is operating, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Before stopping the sequence program, make sure
that nobody is near the machine and that the tool
cannot interfere with the work-piece or machine.
Incorrect operation of the machine presents an
extreme risk of death or serious injury to the user.
Damage the tool, work-piece, and/or the machine is
also likely.

- 478 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

(6) If you want to prohibit the editing and input/output of the ladder
and allow the input/output of the PMC parameters:
• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1) "NO"
• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0) "YES"
• EDIT ENABLE (K901.6) "NO"
• ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2) "NO"
• HIDE PMC PARAM (K902.6) "NO"
• PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7) "NO"

NOTE
1 To input the PMC parameters, place the NC in the
emergency stop state and set the PWE parameter,
which is one of the NC parameters, to 1.
2 To output the PMC parameters, set the EDIT mode.

- 479 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

6.2.2 PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions

Input from the PMC parameter screen

Usually, no data can be entered for PMC parameters because they are
protected. The following two methods can be used to make it possible
to enter data for them.

(1) If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (usually, this

method should be used when the machine is operating.)
(a) Place the NC in MDI mode or bring it to an emergency stop.
(b) Set "PWE" on the NC setting screen to 1 (see the following
table).
(c) Alternatively, set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1
(only if counters or data tables are involved).
(d) The parameters are released from protection; so data can be
entered for them (see the following table).
PWE KEY4
Timer ¡
Counter ¡ ¡
Keep relay ¡
Data table ¡ ¡
(e) After entering data for the parameters, return "PWE" or the
KEY4 signal to the previous state.

(2) If the sequence program can be stopped (STOP state), for

example, while it is being debugged
(a) Stop the sequence program.
(b) The parameter protection is released; so data can be entered
for them.
WARNING
If a sequence program is stopped while the machine
is operating, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Before stopping the sequence program, make sure
that nobody is near the machine and that the tool
cannot interfere with the workpiece or machine.
Incorrect operation of the machine presents an
extreme risk of death or serious injury to the user.
Damage the tool, workpiece, and/or the machine is
also likely.

NOTE
These operations may be protected by the
programmer protection function. For details of the
programmer protection function, see "PROTECT
PMC PARAM" in Subsection 6.2.1.

An attempt to enter data for protected parameters causes the error

message "WRITE PROTECT" to be displayed.

- 480 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

Input from the data I/O screen

To enter the PMC parameters from the data I/O screen requires the
operation described below. The following two methods can be used to
enable the input of the PMC parameters.

(1) If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (Under normal

circumstances, this method should be used when the machine is
operating.)
(a) Place the NC in the emergency stop state.
(b) Set "PWE" on the NC setting screen to "1".
(c) The protection of the parameters is canceled, making it
possible to enter them.
(d) After entering the PMC parameters, reset "PWE" to its
original state.

(2) If the sequence program is being debugged and can be stopped

(STOP state)
(a) Place the sequence program in the stop state.
(b) The protection of the parameters is canceled, making it
possible to enter them.

NOTE
These operations may be protected by the
programmer protection function. For details of the
programmer protection function, see "PROTECT
PMC PARAM" in Subsection 6.2.1.

- 481 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

Output from the data I/O screen

To output the PMC parameters from the data I/O screen requires the
operation described below. The following two methods can be used to
enable the output of the PMC parameters.

(1) If the sequence program is running (RUN state) (Under normal

circumstances, this method should be used when the machine is
operating.)
(a) Place the NC in the EDIT mode.
(b) The protection of the parameters is canceled, making it
possible to enter them.

(2) If the sequence program is being debugged and can be stopped

(STOP state)
(a) Place the sequence program in the stop state.
(b) The protection of the parameters is canceled, making it
possible to enter them.

NOTE
These operations may be protected by the
programmer protection function. For details of the
programmer protection function, see "PROTECT
PMC PARAM" in Subsection 6.2.1.

- 482 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

6.2.3 Password Function

The password function provides protection against unauthorized
attempts to display or edit the content of the ladder program. When
the password function is in use, the ladder program cannot be
displayed or edited without entering the "password" that is preset with
an offline programmer such as FANUC LADDER-III.

(1) Types of password

There are two types of password.
One is the "display permission password" that is intended to
protect the read function.
The other is the "edit permission password" that is intended to
protect both the read and write functions.

(2) Specifiable characters

For a character string to be specified as a password, it needs to
meet the following conditions:
• 16 characters or less in length
• Alphabetic letters (uppercase only) and/or numbers

(3) Screens to be protected

The following screens are protected through the use of the
password:
• Ladder display screen
• Ladder editing screen
• Program list display screen
• Program list editing screen

(4) Display of the protection status

The protection status of the program can be checked using the
program list display screen or program list editing screen. For
details, see (2) in Section 8.1.

(5) Cancellation of the password

When you attempt to switch to a password-protected screen, you
are asked to enter the password. In this process, you can cancel
the password by entering the "password character string" and
then clicking the input key.

NOTE
1 Once you cancel the password, you will not be asked
to enter the password until you either shut down the
system and turn on its power again or replace the
ladder program using the I/O or other function.
2 The sequence program that lets you turn on the
power by pressing "X" and "O" simultaneously can be
cleared, regardless of whether the password is set or
not.

- 483 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

(6) Partial protection function

If you set a password beginning with the "#" sign as the edit
permission password, sub programs P1500 and later can be
displayed and edited regardless of the password protection.

Protected/
Program type
not protected
Level 1 Protected
Main programs Level 2 Protected
Level 3 Protected
P1 to P1499 Protected
Sub programs
P1500 to P5000 Not protected

NOTE
This function can be used only for the first PMC.

- 484 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

Switching of the password-protected screens

PMC main menu When the message appears

When the message appears prompting you to enter the
prompting you to enter the [PMC LADDER] password for displaying data,
password for displaying data, enter the display permission
enter the display permission password or edit permission
password or edit permission PMC ladder menu password (*1).
password (*1).
[<]
[LIST]
[LADDER]
[LIST]
Ladder display screen Program list
display screen

[ZOOM]
[EXIT] [EDIT]
When the message appears prompting you
to enter the password for displaying data,
Ladder editing enter the display permission password or
screen edit permission password (*1) (*2).

When the message appears prompting

you to enter the password for editing data,
enter the edit permission password.

NOTE
1 When only the display permission password is set,
both the display and editing functions are protected.
When only the edit permission password is set, the
editing function is protected.
When both the display permission password and edit
permission password are set, both the display and
editing functions are protected. In that case, you can
cancel the protection of the display and editing
functions by using the edit permission password.
2 Enter the password when you want to display the
content of a program protected by the partial
protection function by using the [ZOOM] soft key.

- 485 -
6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN B-63983EN/01

6.3 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY

In the case of a multi-PMC system, when you select a specific PMC
on the PMC status screen, each of the PMC screens listed below
displays the information regarding that selected PMC.
By default, the PMC screens display the information regarding the
first PMC. For details of the PMC status screen, see Section 9.6.

1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC Dual check safety

PMC

l Signal status screen

l I/O link connection status screen
l PMC parameter screen
l Program list screen
l Ladder display/editing screen
l Title display/editing screen
l Setting screen The PMC status screen lets you switch
l System parameter display/editing screen the PMC to be displayed or manipulated
l I/O module display/editing screen on each screen. In this figure, the third
l Symbol and comment display/editing screen PMC is selected.
l Message display/editing screen

An indication of the currently selected PMC is displayed at the upper

left corner of each PMC screen.

The currently selected PMC

- 486 -
B-63983EN/01 6.OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

The screens listed below display the information regarding all the
PMCs on the same screen space, regardless of the switching of the
PMC.

Screens intended to display or manipulate all the PMCs

l PMC alarm screen

l Data I/O screen
l Signal trace screen
l Parameter setting screen for online monitoring

For details, see the sections describing the operation of the individual
screens.

NOTE
Although the signal trace screen allows you to trace
the signals of the first, second, and third PMCs
simultaneously, it cannot trace the signal of the dual
check safety PMC.

- 487 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE

SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])
The PMC maintenance menu displays the screens related to PMC
maintenance including PMC signal status monitoring, trace, and PMC
data display/editing.
In order to move to the PMC maintenance menu, press the SYSTEM
key then select the [PMC MAINTE] soft key as shown below.
SYSTEM

PMC main menu

PMC maintenance submenu

PMC MAINTE STATUS SIGNAL STATUS screen

< I/O LINK I/O LINK MONITOR screen

PMC ALARM ALARM MESSAGE screen

I/O DATA I/O screen

TIMER PMC PARAM (TIMER) screen

COUNTR PMC PARAM (COUNTER) screen

KEEP RELAY PMC PARAM (KEEP RELAY) screen

DATA PMC PARAM (DATA TABLE) screen

TRACE SIGNAL TRACE screen

TRACE SETING SIGNAL TRACE (PARAMETER SETTING) screen

- 488 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.1 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS ([STATUS] SCREEN)

The SIGNAL STATUS screen displays the data at all addresses

specified in the program. The data of each address consists of a bit
pattern (0s and/or 1s) and a hexadecimal or decimal number at the
rightmost position on a byte-by-byte basis.

Signal status display area

Additional information line

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment are
displayed.

Address Symbol Comment

Table contents
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• 0 to 7: Data at each bit position
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
• DEC: Display of each byte in decimal

- 489 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Operation procedure
(1) Press the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears.
(2) Key in an address whose data to be displayed, then press the
[SEARCH] soft key.
(3) The data starting at the input address is displayed as a bit pattern.
(4) To display the data at another address, press the cursor keys,
page keys, or [SEARCH] soft key.
(5) To modify the status of a signal, switch to the forced I/O screen
by pressing the [FORCE] soft key.

NOTE
The [FORCE] soft key is displayed and usable
when the forced I/O function is enabled. For
details, see Section 6.2.

(6) On the forced I/O screen, an overridden X signal or Y signal is

prefixed by a greater-than sign (>) to indicate the setting of
override.

- 490 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Soft keys on the Signal Status screen

Address search Switching to the forced I/O screen PMC path switching

Switching to display in decimal

Switching to display in hexadecimal

Fig. 7.1.1 (a) Soft keys on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

Operations using soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address
Searches for a byte address or bit address.
(2) [DEC] Switching to display in decimal
Displays the data of each byte in decimal.
This soft key is enabled only when hexadecimal display is
selected.

(3) [HEX] Switching to display in hexadecimal

Displays the data of each byte in hexadecimal.
This soft key is enabled only when decimal display is selected.

(4) [FORCE] Switching to the forced I/O screen

Switches the screen display to the forced I/O screen.
(5) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.

- 491 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.1.1 Forced I/O Function

The forced I/O function enables a value to be input forcibly for the
signal at an arbitrary PMC address.
With this function, for example, a sequence program can be debugged
without using an I/O device by forced input to X, and the signal
routing on the I/O device can be checked efficiently without using a
sequence program by forced output to Y.
Two input modes are available: the forced I/O mode and the override
mode. Choose from the two modes for each application.

(1) Forced I/O mode

This mode is applicable to all PMC addresses.
Note, however, that a signal modified by forced I/O is over-
written by a sequence program or input scanning, so that the
result of modification by forced I/O is lost.

Machine
I/O address
Overwrite
X,Y
Overwrite

Ladder Overwrite G,F,R,T,K,C,D,E

Example 1: Forced I/O is performed for R0 in the following ladder

program:

X0.0
MOVE 1111

1111

K0

R0

<1> The initial signal status is as follows:

X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00H
<2> FFh is forcibly input to R0.
X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = FFH
<3> When X0.0 is turned on, the R0 assumes the result of output by
the sequence program.
X0.0 = on, K0 = 55H, R0 = 55H

- 492 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Example 2: Forced I/O is performed for X0 in a configuration where

the I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected to X0 via the I/O
Link.

A value input from the I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0

cyclically. So, even if the value of X0 is modified forcibly during a
period, X0 is overwritten in the next cycle by the value input from the
I/O Unit-MODEL A.

1. Input from the machine

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

X0 = FFh X0 = FFh

2. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h. X0 = 00h

3. Input from the machine in the next cycle

The value set by forced modification is

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC overwritten by the value input from the
machine.

X0 = FFh X0 = FFh

A value may be cyclically transferred even to an unallocated address.

So, the forced I/O function for X in the forced I/O mode must be used
when a sequence program is debugged with no I/O device connected
or allocated.
When an I/O device is connected, use the override mode, described
below, to debug a sequence program.

- 493 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(2) Override mode

The state that disables a sequence program and machine signal
from overwriting a value modified by forced I/O is referred to as
override. In the override mode, override can be set for arbitrary
X and Y signals. To X and Y addresses and other addresses for
which override is not set, forced I/O is applied.

Example: Forced I/O is performed for X0 in a configuration

where the I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected to X0
via the I/O link.

1. Input from the machine

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh

2. Override is set for X0.

I/O Unit-MODEL A × NC
Transfer from the I/O Unit-MODEL
A is disabled.

X0 = FFh
X0 = FFh

3. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.

I/O Unit-MODEL A × NC

X0 = FFh X0 = 00h

In this way, the forced I/O function for X in the override mode can
also be used to debug a sequence program when an I/O device is
connected. If the override state is set for an Y address, a value after
modification by forced I/O is output to the I/O device.

- 494 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

CAUTION
1 In the override mode, the I/O signal update period
matches the first level of the ladder. With the I/O
Link, which is usually updated at intervals of 2
msec, the timing of I/O signals delays. So, note
that a sequence that depends on the timing of I/O
signals can change operation.
2 Note that when the override mode is enabled, the
period of the second level can slightly increase.
3 Even if override is set for an Y address, the coil
on/off value on the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER
screen indicates the result of operation of a ladder
before modification by forced I/O. A value after
modification by the forced I/O function is output to
the I/O device. So, note that the on/off indication on
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER screen does not
match a value output to the I/O device.

Example: Forced input is performed for Y0.0 with

the following ladder in a configuration where the I/O
Unit-MODEL A is connected to Y0 via the I/O Link:

In the state before override is set, the on/off

indication on the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER
screen matches a value output to the I/O Unit-
MODEL A as shown below.
X0.0 Y0.0

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

(off) (off)
Y0.0 = off
Ladder diagram indication

If 1 is forcibly input after override is set for Y0.0, the

value after modification by forced I/O is output to
the I/O Unit-MODEL A as shown below.
X0.0 Y0.0

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC
(off) (off)
Y0.0 = on
Ladder diagram indication

WARNING
When modifying a signal with the forced I/O
function, pay special attention. If the forced I/O
function is used inadequately, the machine can
move in an unexpected way. When there is a
person near the machine, do not use this function.
- 495 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.1.2 Forced I/O Screen

On the forced I/O screen, the value of an arbitrary signal can be

modified forcibly.
The forced I/O screen can be used in one of two input modes: the
forced I/O mode and the override mode. To move to the forced I/O
screen, press the [FORCE] soft key on the SIGNAL STATUS screen.
On the forced I/O screen, the following operations can be performed:
• Signal search [SEARCH]
• Switching to display/input in decimal [DEC]
• Switching to display/input in hexadecimal [HEX]
• Transition to the SIGNAL STATUS screen [EXIT]
• Signal on [ON]
• Signal off [OFF]
• Override setting [OVRIDE SET]
• Override cancellation [OVRIDE RESET]
• Complete override cancellation [INIT]

Input mode

Signal status display area

Additional information
line

Key input line Message display line

In the input mode display area to the right of the title, "OVERRIDE"
is displayed only when the forced I/O mode is set to the override
mode.
The signal status display area indicates the signal status of each
address. The status shown below is indicated for X and Y signal bits
for which override is set.

- 496 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(1) X signal
(Input signal from the I/O device) → (Input signal to the ladder)
The hexadecimal or decimal display field on the rightmost
position of the screen displays the value of the input signal to the
ladder on the right side.

(2) Y signal
(Output signal from the ladder)→(Output signal to the I/O
device)
The hexadecimal or decimal display field on the rightmost
position of the screen displays the value of the output signal from
the ladder on the left side.

The message display line at the bottom of the screen displays an error
message as required.

Soft keys on the forced I/O screen

Forced I/O

Address search Signal on Signal off

Switching to decimal input Switching to the signal status display screen

Switching to hexadecimal input

Override
Switching to the signal status Override setting
display screen

Address search Signal on Override cancellation

Switching to decimal input Signal off Complete override

cancellation

Switching to hexadecimal input

Fig. 7.1.2 (a) Soft keys on the forced I/O screen

- 497 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address
Searches for a byte address or bit address.
(2) [DEC] Switching to decimal input
Displays and inputs the data of each byte in decimal.
This soft key is enabled only when display/input in hexadecimal
is selected.
(3) [HEX] Switching to hexadecimal input
Displays and inputs the data of each byte in hexadecimal.
This soft key is enabled only when display/input in decimal is
selected.
(4) [EXIT] Switching to the signal status display screen
Quits the forced I/O function.
(5) [ON] Signal on
Turns on the signal on which the cursor is placed. Depending on
the cursor position, bit operation or byte operation can be
performed.
(6) [OFF] Signal off
Turns off the signal on which the cursor is placed. Depending on
the cursor position, bit operation or byte operation can be
performed.
(7) [OVRIDE SET] Override setting
Sets the override state for the X or Y address on which the cursor
is placed. Depending on the cursor position, bit operation or byte
operation can be performed.
This soft key is valid only in the override mode.
(8) [OVRIDE RESET] Override cancellation
Cancels the override state set for the X or Y address on which the
cursor is placed. Depending on the cursor position, bit operation
or byte operation can be performed.
This soft key is valid only in the override mode.
(9) [INIT] Complete override cancellation
Cancels all override settings for X and Y addresses.
This soft key is valid only in the override mode.

Screen operations using other keys

(1) Input key
The input key is used to modify the signal status.
(a) Bit-by-bit setting
• Input 1 then press the input key to turn on the signal.
• Input 0 then press the input key to turn off the signal.
• Press the input key to toggle between the on and off
statuses of the signal.

- 498 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(b) Byte-by-byte setting

In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits
then press the input key. (When an input value is shorter
than eight digits, the value is input from bit 0.)
Example: When 100 is input, this value is input as follows:
Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal or decimal
display field, hexadecimal input or decimal input is enabled
on a byte-by-byte basis.
(c) Successive data input
Data items can be input successively in a column. The
cursor moves to the last input data item.
• As the data delimiter, ";" (EOB) is used.
Example: "1;0;1;" + Input key
• With ;=, the value of the immediately preceding data
item is input.
Example: "1;=;=;0;=" + Input key inputs 1,1,1,0,0.
• With ;;, data items can be input, skipping an address.
Example: "1;;1" + Input key inputs no data for the
second item.
• With "R;input-value;count", the same value can be input
as many times as a specified count.
Example: "R;1;200" + Input key inputs two hundred 1s
in a column.
(2) Cursor keys
With the cursor keys, select a signal to be modified.
If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is
placed at bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a
byte cursor.
If you press the cursor key for moving right when the cursor is
placed on the hexadecimal or decimal display field of an
arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a byte cursor for the next
one entire byte.
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal or decimal display
field or the cursor is a byte cursor, the one-byte signal data of the
address can be modified.
(3) Page keys
The page keys can be used to select a page to be displayed.

Operation of the return key

On the forced I/O screen, the operation of the return key is disabled.
Use the [EXIT] soft key to cancel the forced I/O mode and return to
the Signal Status screen.

- 499 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.2 CHECKING PMC ALARMS ([PMC ALARM] SCREEN)

On this screen, an alarm message output from the PMC is displayed.

To move to the PMC alarm screen, press the [PMC ALARM] soft key.

Page display

Alarm message display area

In the alarm message display area, an alarm message output from the
PMC is displayed. When many alarm messages are output to two or
more pages, the page keys can be used to switch from one page to
another.
In the page display area to the right of the title, the number of the page
currently displaying messages is indicated.

For information about messages displayed, see Section 10.1.

- 500 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.3 SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC PARAMETERS

PMC parameters (timer, counter, keep relay, and data table) can be set
and displayed on each screen. Moreover, data items can be input
successively. The cursor moves to the last data item successively
input.

Method of input
(1) As the data delimiter, ";" (EOB) is used.
Example: "100;200;300;" + Input key
(2) With ;=, the value of the immediately preceding data item is
input.
Example: "100;=;=;200;=" + Input key inputs 100,100,100,200,
200.
(3) With ;;, data items can be input, skipping an address.
Example: "100;;100" + Input key inputs no data for the second
item.
(4) With "R;input-value;count", the same value can be input as many
times as a specified count.
Example: "R;100;200" + Input key inputs two hundred 100s in a
column.

- 501 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.3.1 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)

This screen is used to set and display timer values for functional
instruction variable timers (TMR:SUB 3). This screen can be used in
one of two modes: the simple display mode and the comment display
mode. To move to the TIMER screen, press the [TIMER] soft key.

Page display

Key input line

Message
display line
Additional information
line

Simple display mode

Comment display
area

Comment display mode

- 502 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Table contents
• NO.: Timer number specified for a functional instruction
timer.
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• PRESET: Timer setting value
• ACC: Timer accuracy
• COMMENT: T address comment

In the PRESET column, timer setting values are displayed. When the
timer accuracy is 8, 48, 1, 10, or 100 ms, only a numeric value is
displayed. When the timer accuracy is the second or minute, a time
value is displayed using H, M, and S with the separator "_" used to
delimit one unit from another as follows:
aaH_bbM_ccS

In the ACC column, timer accuracy values are displayed. The table
below indicates the time setting values and notation of each accuracy
value.

Timer No. Accuracy Minimum time Maximum time

notation setting setting
1 to 8 48 (initial value) 48 ms 1572.8 seconds
9 to 250 8 (initial value) 8 ms 262.1 seconds
1 to 250 1 1 ms 32.7 seconds
1 to 250 10 10 ms 327.7 seconds
1 to 250 100 100 ms 54.6 minutes
1 to 250 S 1 second 546 minutes
1 to 250 M 1 minute 546 hours

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.

Soft keys on the TIMER screen

Switching the display mode T address search PMC path switching

Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting

Setting accuracy to 100 ms

Setting accuracy to 1 second

Setting accuracy to 10 ms Setting accuracy to an initial value

Setting accuracy to 1 ms Setting accuracy to 1 minute

Fig. 7.3.1 Soft keys on the TIMER screen

- 503 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SWITCH] Switching the display mode
Switches the display mode.
(2) [ACCRCY] Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting
Switches to the soft keys for timer accuracy setting.
(3) [SEARCH] T address search
Searches for an input T address or timer number.
(4) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.
(5) [1MS] Setting accuracy to 1 ms
Sets timer accuracy to 1 ms.
(6) [10MS] Setting accuracy to 10 ms
Sets timer accuracy to 10 ms.
(7) [100MS] Setting accuracy to 100 ms
Sets timer accuracy to 100 ms.
(8) [1SEC] Setting accuracy to 1 second
Sets timer accuracy to 1 second.
(9) [1MIN] Setting accuracy to 1 mimute
Sets timer accuracy to 1 mimute.
(10) [INIT] Setting accuracy to an initial value
Sets the timer accuracy of the timer number on which the cursor
is placed to an initial value (8 ms or 48 ms).

Data input using the input key

When timer accuracy is set to 1 second or 1 minute, the unit is the
second if S is specified at the end of an input value; the unit is the
minute if M is specified; the unit is the hour if H is specified.

Example: "10000S" + Input key for an address with timer accuracy

set to 1 second:
The result is 2H_46M_40S.

- 504 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.3.2 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen)

This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum
counter values for functional instruction counters (SUB 5). This
screen can be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and
the comment display mode. To move to the COUNTER screen, press
the [COUNTR] soft key.

Page display

Key input line Message display line

Additional information line

Simple display mode

Comment display
area

Comment display mode

- 505 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Table contents
• NO.: Counter number specified for a functional
instruction counter
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value
is specified by a counter instruction)
• CURRENT: Current counter value
• COMMENT: Comment on the C address of a setting value

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
If the cursor is placed on a PRESET value, the symbol and comment
of the address of the PRESET value are displayed. If the cursor is
placed on a CURRENT value, the symbol and comment of the address
of the CURRENT value are displayed.

Counter types and maximum values

Counter type PRESET maximum value CURRENT maximum value
BINARY 32767 32767
BCD 9999 9999

Soft keys on the COUNTER screen

Display mode switching C address search PMC path switching

Fig. 7.3.2 Soft keys on the COUNTER screen

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SWITCH] Display mode switching
Switches the display mode.
(2) [SEARCH] C address search
Searches for an input C address or counter number.
(3) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.

- 506 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.3.3 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)

This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays. To
move to the KEEP RELAY screen, press the [KEEP RELAY] soft key.

Page display

Key input line Message display line

Additional information line

Contents of the table

• ADDRESS: Address refered by sequence Program
• 0 to 7: Contents of each bit
• HEX: Value of the byte data in hexadecimal notation

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment are
displayed.
Since Keep Relay is nonvolatile memory, the contents are not lost
even if you turn off the power.
The Keep Relay area for Series 30i-A consists of parts as follows.
30i-A
First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual check
(option) (option) safety PMC
User area K0–K99 K0–K19 K0–K19 K0–K19
Area for management software K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999

- 507 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

For details of the area for the PMC management software, see
Subsection 2.2.11.
CAUTION
If the area for the PMC management software is
protected by the programmer protection function,
the area is not displayed on the KEEP RELAY
screen. For details, see Section 6.2.

Screen operations

Soft keys on the KEEP RELAY screen

K address search PMC path switching

Fig. 7.3.3 Soft keys on the KEEP RELAY screen

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SEARCH] K address search
Searches for an input K address.
(2) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.

Data input using the input key

The input key is used to modify the signal status.
(1) Bit-by-bit setting
• Input 1 then press the input key to turn on the signal.
• Input 0 then press the input key to turn off the signal.
(2) Byte-by-byte setting
In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits then
press the input key. (When an input value is shorter than eight
digits, the value is input from bit 0.)
Example: When 100 is input, this value is input as follows:
Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal display field, hexa-
decimal input is enabled on a byte-by-byte basis.

- 508 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Cursor keys
With the cursor keys, select a signal to be modified.
If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is placed at
bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a byte cursor.
If you press the cursor key for moving right when the cursor is placed
on the hexadecimal display field of an arbitrary address, the cursor
changes to a byte cursor for the next one entire byte.
When the cursor is on the hexadecimal display field or the cursor is a
byte cursor, the one-byte signal data of the address can be modified.

CAUTION
1 Do not use the special use area, because the relays
in this area are reserved for PMC system software
use, and they affect behavior of the PMC software.
Set "0" to any relays that are not mentioned below,
to prevent unexpected behavior of PMC.
2 Be sure to set the reserved portion of the area for
the PMC management software to 0.

- 509 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.3.4 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)

There are two data table types (data table control data table and data
table). To move to the data screen, press the [DATA] soft key.

(1) DATA TABLE CONTROL screen ([List] screen)

Pressing the [DATA] soft key displays the DATA TABLE
CONTROL screen for data table management. This screen can
be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and the
comment display mode.
Display of the
number of groups

Page display

Key input line

Message display line
Additional information line

Simple display mode

Comment
display area

Comment display mode

- 510 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Table contents
• GROUP TABLE COUNT: Number of data items in the data table
• NO.: Group number
• ADDRESS: Data table start address
• PARAMETER: Data table control parameter
• TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes, 3
= bit)
• DATA: Number of data items in each data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the start D address of each group

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on the PARAMETER, TYPE, or DATA
column, the current setting is displayed.

The ADDRESS column displays the start address of a data table.

Multiple groups may share an address. When the [SYMBOL] soft key
is pressed, the symbol of the start address is displayed.

NOTE
The data table control parameters have the following meanings:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0: Binary format
1: BCD format (Bits 2 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Without input protection
1: With input protection
0: Binary or BCD format (Bit 0 is valid.)
1: Hexadecimal format (Bits 0 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Signed (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
1: Unsigned (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)

NOTE
1 When data table control data is protected by the
programmer protection function, the data table
control data screen is not displayed. For details,
see Section 6.2.
2 When PMC parameters are output using the I/O
screen (see Section 7.4), only the data of an
address D area set in the data table control data is
output from the data table screen. The data of an
address D area not set in the data table control data
is not output.

- 511 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen

Display mode switching Data table control data initialization

Switching to the zoom screen Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting

Input of the number Symbol display Switching to the soft keys for data size
of groups switching setting

Group number search Address display PMC path switching

switching

Soft keys for parameter setting

Setting for signed decimal Setting for hexadecimal

Setting for unsigned Setting for BCD Protection state modification

decimal

Soft keys for data size setting

Setting for byte Setting for bit

Setting for word Setting for double word

Fig. 7.3.4 (a) Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SWITCH] Display mode switching
Switches the display mode.
(2) [ZOOM] Switching to the zoom screen
Switches the screen display to the DATA TABLE screen.
(3) [G.CONT] Input of the number of groups
By pressing this soft key after inputting the number of
groups, the number of groups on the data table can be set.
(4) [NO.SRH] Group number search
By pressing this soft key after inputting a group number, the
cursor can be moved to the specified group.
(5) [SYMBOL] Symbol display switching
Displays the symbol of the start address of a data table in
the ADDRESS column.
This soft key is valid only for address display.

- 512 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(6) [ADRESS] Address display switching

Displays the start address of a data table in the ADDRESS
column.
This soft key is valid for symbol display.
(7) [INIT] Data table control data initialization
Initializes the setting of data table control data.
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE DATA
1 D0000 00000000 0 10000 (NOTE)

NOTE
1 When data table control data is initialized, the entire
data area is set as a single table. The start address
is the start address of the D addresses. The control
parameters are set as follows: signed binary format,
without input protection, one-byte data size, and the
number of data items set to the total number of
bytes in the entire D address area.
2 The initial number of data items for the first PMC is
10000. For the second PMC, third PMC, and the
PMC for dual check safety, the initial number of
data items is 3000.
(8) [PARAM] Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting
Switches to the soft keys for setting the parameters of data
table control data.
(9) [TYPE] Switching to the soft keys for data setting
Switches to the soft keys for data size setting.
(10) [SWITCH PMC] PMC path switching
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.
(11) [SGNDEC] Setting for signed decimal
Sets signed decimal for the parameters of data table control
data.
(12) [USDEC] Setting for unsigned decimal
Sets unsigned decimal for the parameters of data table
control data.
(13) [BCD] Setting for BCD
Sets BCD for the parameters of data table control data.
(14) [HEX] Setting for hexadecimal
Sets hexadecimal for the parameters of data table control
data.
(15) [PROTECT] Protection state modification
Modifies the protection state of the parameters of data table
control data.
(16) [BYTE] Setting for byte
Sets the data size to one byte.
(17) [WORD] Setting for word
Sets the data size to two bytes.

- 513 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(18) [DWORD] Setting for double word

Sets the data size to four bytes.
(19) [BIT] Setting for bit
Sets the data size to one bit.
When the data size is one bit, the unit for the number of data
items is one byte.

- 514 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(2) DATA TABLE screen ([ZOOM] screen)

If the data table control data is specified, clicking the [ZOOM]
soft key on the data table control data screen displays the data
table setting screen. This screen can be used in one of three
modes: the simple display mode, the comment display mode,
and the bit display mode.
Group
information line

Page display

Key input line Message display line

Additional information line

Simple display mode

Comment display area

Comment display mode

- 515 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Bit display mode

Table contents
• NO.
• ADDRESS: Address used by the sequence program
• DATA: Data value of data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the D address
• 0 to 7: Data of each bit
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal

The group information line at the top of the screen displays a group
number, group start address, settings, and comment on the start
address.

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
In the bit display mode, a bit symbol and comment, or a byte symbol
and comment are displayed, depending on the cursor position.

Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen

Display mode switching Address search

Switching to the list screen Group number search

Fig. 7.3.4 (b) Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen

- 516 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [SWITCH] Display mode switching
Switches the mode between the simple display mode and
comment display mode when the data size is one byte, two bytes,
or four bytes. When the data size is one bit, this soft key
switches the mode between the simple display mode and bit
display mode.
(2) [LIST] Switching to the list screen
Clicking this soft key switches to the data table control data
screen.
(3) [G-SRCH] Group number search
After the entry of a group number for a data table to be searched
in another group, clicking this key moves the cursor to the
beginning of that group.
(4) [SEARCH] Address search
After the entry of an address, clicking this key moves the cursor
to the specified address within the currently selected group. In
the bit display mode, this soft key searches for a byte address or
bit address.

Screen operations in the bit display mode

In the bit display mode, the method of operation described below is
used.
(1) Input key
The input key is used to modify the signal status.
(a) Bit-by-bit setting
• Input 1 then press the input key to turn on the signal.
• Input 0 then press the input key to turn off the signal.
(b) Byte-by-byte setting
In the case of the byte cursor, input up to eight binary digits
then press the input key. (When an input value is shorter
than eight digits, the value is input from bit 0.)
Example: When 100 is input, this value is input as follows:
Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal display field,
hexadecimal input is enabled on a byte-by-byte basis.
(2) Cursor keys
With the cursor keys, select a signal to be modified.
If you press the cursor key for moving left when the cursor is
placed at bit 7 of an arbitrary address, the cursor changes to a
byte cursor.
If you press the cursor key for moving right when the cursor is
placed on the hexadecimal display field of an arbitrary address,
the cursor changes to a byte cursor for the next one entire byte.
When the cursor is placed on the hexadecimal display field, or
the cursor is a byte cursor, the one-byte signal data of the address
can be modified.

- 517 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER I/O ([I/O]

SCREEN)

To move to the I/O screen, press the [I/O] soft key.

On this screen, sequence programs and PMC parameters can be

written to the specified device, read from the device, and compared.
The query selection cursor, which moves vertically from one question
to another, is displayed, as is the option selection cursor, which moves
horizontally from one option to another.

The following types of devices can be used for input/output. The

desired device type can be selected by positioning the query selection
cursor to "DEVICE" and moving the option selection cursor to that
type.

• MEMORY CARD: Data can be output to and input from a

memory card.
• FLASH ROM: Data can be output to and input from flash
ROM.
• FLOPPY: Data can be output to and input from handy
files or floppy cassettes.
• OTHERS: Data can be output to and input from other
general-purpose RS-232C input/output
devices.

The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected.

For details, see Section 7.4.4.

- 518 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

In STATUS in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of

execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read,
and comparison, the size of the data already transferred is indicated as
the execution (intermediate) result.
The following gives a display example shown when PMC parameters
are written to a memory card:

Soft keys on the I/O screen

Execution Switching to the port setting screen

Switching to the list screen

Cancellation

Fig. 7.4 Soft keys on the I/O screen

Operations using the soft keys

(1) [EXEC] Execution
Executes a processing item selected for FUNCTION.
During execution, the [CANCEL] soft key is displayed.

- 519 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(2) [LIST] Switching to the list screen

Switches the screen display to the file list screen.
This soft key is valid only when MEMORY CARD or FLOPPY
is selected for DEVICE.
(3) [PORT SETING] Switching to the port setting screen
Switches the screen display to the Port setting screen.
This soft key is valid only when FLOPPY or OTHERS is
selected for DEVICE.
(4) [CANCEL] Cancellation
Cancels execution. Upon normal termination, the display of this
soft key disappears.

NOTE
For the description of the error messages on the I/O
screen, see Section 10.1.

- 520 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.1 Writing to the Memory Card

A memory card used to input/output sequence programs with the I/O

screen can directly transfer data to and from the programmer device
(FANUC LADDER-III).

The table below indicates the memory cards supported by Series 30i-
A and their usable functions.
Each card must comply with TYPE1 or TYPE2 of PCMCIA (Personal
Computer Memory Card International Association) 2.0 or later, or
must comply with TYPE1 or TYPE2 of JEIDA (Japan Electronic
Industry Development Association) 4.0 or later. The format complies
with the FAT file system of MS-DOS.
¡: Supported
×: Not supported
Flash memory card
SRAM card Supported Unsupported ATA card
card card
Read of a file ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡
Format of a card ¡ ¡ × ¡
Write of a file ¡ ¡ × ¡
Delete of a file ¡ × × ¡
List of a file ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡

• Writing to the flash memory card

The supported type of flash memory card is:
• Series 2 flash memory card of Intel (or equivalent)
A file can be written to a card formatted in the MS-DOS format.
However, the following restrictions are imposed:
• Existing files cannot be replaced.
• Cards formatted by the flash file system cannot be used.
(Even the read function and directory display function cannot
be used.)
• The data of a flash memory card written to in the built-in slot
of a personal computer may not be read.

No data can be written to the last 128K bytes of a card. This

means that the usable card size is (card size - 128K bytes).
For details, see Fig. 7.4.1.

- 521 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Before a write

File-A

File-B

File-C

Added
File-D
128K bytes

After a write

File-A

File-B

File-C

File-D

128K bytes

Fig. 7.4.1

If an attempt is made to write File-D in Fig. 7.4.1, an error occurs.

Actually, the data of File-D is written to the shaded portion ( ), but
the data cannot be read, and the directory cannot be displayed.
Moreover, no additional files can be written to this memory card.

NOTE
Recommendable devices that can handle a flash
memory card formatted and written to by the
FANUC system are unavailable from manufacturers
other than FANUC. Moreover, recommendable
devices that can format and write to a card to allow
read operation by the FANUC system are
unavailable from manufacturers other than FANUC.
This is because the demand for flash memory cards
in the card market is so low that compatible models
are disappearing.
When using flash memory cards, understand the
situations mentioned above and fully take
compatibility into consideration.

- 522 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.2 Setting the Communication Port ([PORT SETING] Screen)

When FLOPPY or OTHERS is selected for DEVICE on the I/O

screen, the [PORT SETING] soft key is displayed. When you press
this soft key, the screen display changes to the port setting screen.
The screen below is a sample screen displayed when FLOPPY is
selected for DEVICE.

This screen allows the setting of the communication data required for
communication using the RS-232C. Communication data can be set
for each of the two types of devices independently of the other.
Selected device type is displayed to "DEVICE" menu on screen.

Explanation of each question

• CHANNEL
Check that an RS-232C cable is connected to the main board of
the control unit. Directly enter the number corresponding to the
connected connector.
1.......... JD36A
2.......... JD36B
• BAUD RATE
1200: Sets the baud rate to "1200".
2400: Sets the baud rate to "2400".
4800: Sets the baud rate to "4800".
9600: Sets the baud rate to "9600".
19200: Sets the baud rate to "19200".
• STOP BIT
1 BIT: Sets the number of stop bits to "1".
2 BITS: Sets the number of stop bits to "2".

- 523 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

• WRITE CODE
"WRITE CODE" is displayed when "OTHERS" is selected for
"DEVICE".
ASCII: Sets the output code to "ASCII".
ISO: Sets the output code to "ISO".

NOTE
Parity is always "NONE".

Soft keys on the port setting screen

Setting initialization Switching to the I/O screen

Fig. 7.4.2 Soft keys on the port setting screen

Explanation of soft keys

(1) [INIT] Setting initialization
Sets all the parameters to their initial values.
The table below indicates the initial value of each setting item.
Initial values
DEVICE DEVICE = FLOPPY DEVICE = OTHERS
CHANNEL 1 1
BAUD RATE 4800 4800
STOP BIT 2 BITS 2 BITS
WRITE CODE (NONE) ISO

(2) [I/O] Switching to the I/O screen

Terminates the setting of the communication parameters and
switches the screen display to the I/O screen.

Operation of the return key

On the port setting screen, the operation of the return key is disabled.
Use the [I/O] soft key to terminate the setting of the communication
parameters and return to the I/O screen.

- 524 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.3 Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen)

When MEMORY CARD or FLOPPY is selected for DEVICE on the

I/O screen, the [LIST] soft key is displayed. When you press this soft
key, the screen display changes to the file list screen. The screen
below is a sample screen displayed when MEMORY CARD is
selected for DEVICE.

If MEMORY CARD is selected for DEVICE, and a memory card

holding files is inserted into the slot, the contents of the memory card
are displayed. If FLOPPY is selected for DEVICE, the contents of a
Floppy Cassette or Handy File are displayed.

NOTE
Up to 128 files can be displayed on this screen.
When 129 or more files are saved, the 129th and
subsequent files are ignored.

- 525 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

When a file is selected on this screen, the screen display can be

returned to the I/O screen. To select a file, place the cursor at the
name of the file, then press either the [SELECT] soft key or the
INPUT key. After the key entry, the screen display switches to the
I/O screen automatically. In this case, the cursor is positioned at
READ on the FUNCTION menu, and the number and name of the file
selected on the list screen are indicated in the FILE NO. and FILE
NAME fields, respectively. A display example is shown below.

To return the screen display to the I/O screen without selecting a file,
press the I/O soft key. Even if the memory card, Floppy Cassette, or
Handy File is exchanged while the file list screen is being displayed,
the display data is not automatically updated. In this case, press the
[REFRSH] soft key. The contents of the new memory card
are then displayed.

- 526 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Soft keys on the file list screen

File selection Switching to the I/O screen

List updating

Fig. 7.4.3 Soft keys on the file list screen

Explanation of soft keys

(1) [SELECT] File selection
Selects a file, and returns the screen display to the I/O screen.
(2) [REFRSH] List updating
Redisplays the file list screen.
(3) [I/O] Switching to the I/O screen
Switches the screen display to the I/O screen without selecting a
file.

Operation of the return key

On the file list screen, the operation of the return key is disabled.
Use the [I/O] soft key to return to the I/O screen without selecting a
file.

- 527 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.4 Setting an I/O Target PMC

The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected

on the I/O screen.

Specification of a PMC in the item of PMC

Select PMC with the query selection cursor then select an I/O target
PMC by moving the option selection cursor.

NOTE
The PMC query may not be displayed, depending
on the setting of each query. For details, see the
description of each operation procedure.

Nonexistent PMCs are not displayed as options.

Example: When PMC2 does not exist
PMC = PMC1 / PMC3 / PMC DCS

When only PMC1 exists, the indication below is provided, so that no

selection operation is required. In this case, the query selection cursor
does not move to PMC.
PMC = PMC1

- 528 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

Specification of a PMC when a sequence program is read

When the data of the I/O screen is read, the type of data is
automatically identified. The procedure for reading a sequence
program for Series 30i-A is described below.

Soft keys for reading a sequence program

(1) Reading a sequence program including PMC information

(a) After setting a device on the I/O screen, select READ for
FUNCTION, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
(b) The following message is displayed:
"READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM (PMCx)"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for a program for dual
check safety.)
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation.
(d) Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

(2) Reading a sequence program for the conventional model

(a) After setting a device on the I/O screen, select READ for
FUNCTION, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
(b) The following message is displayed, and the read operation
is terminated abnormally:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

- 529 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Specification of a PMC when PMC parameters are read

When the data of the I/O screen is read, the type of data is
automatically identified. The procedure for reading PMC parameters
for Series 30i-A is described below.

Soft keys for reading PMC parameters

When PMC parameters including PMC information are read

When PMC parameters for the conventional model are read with the multi-PMC system

(1) Reading PMC parameters including PMC information

(a) After setting a device, select READ for FUNCTION, then
execute.
(b) The following message is displayed:
"READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for parameters for dual
check safety.)
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation.
(d) Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

(2) Reading PMC parameters for the conventional model

(a) After setting a device, select READ for FUNCTION, then
execute.
(b) The following message is displayed:
"READING PMC PARAMETER"
(c) Select a read source PMC with the corresponding soft key.
(d) Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop processing.

NOTE
1 When only the first PMC exists, only the step for
reading PMC parameters including PMC
information needs to be executed.
2 For a nonexistent PMC, no soft key is displayed.

- 530 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.5 Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card

A sequence program can be output from a PMC to the memory card.

To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then enter a
desired file name.
Enter a file name not longer than eight characters with a three-
character extension in the MS-DOS format. When no file name
is entered, the following file name is automatically set:

Output target PMC File name

PMC1 PMC1_LAD.000
PMC2 PMC2_LAD.000
PMC3 PMC3_LAD.000
Dual check safety PMCS_LAD.000

If a file with the same file name already exists, the extension
number is incremented for output.
Example: PMC1_LAD.001

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the sequence program.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the pertinent
table in Subsection 7.4.1.

NOTE
For writing to the flash memory card, see "Writing to
the flash memory card" in Subsection 7.4.1.
- 531 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.6 Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card

A sequence program can be input from the memory card to a PMC.

To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:
Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION READ

(2) Specify an input target sequence program by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in an
input target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME field
displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the input target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
input target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMCx"
<Caution> Take special care reading a sequence program
or PMC parameters.
* When an inadequate file is read, the machine can make
an unexpected movement.

- 532 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

* When a sequence program is read during operation, the

program being executed is automatically stopped.
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for a program for dual
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of the sequence program is continued, the ladder
program being executed is automatically stopped.

NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be read. If a sequence program for the
conventional model is read, the read operation is
terminated abnormally with the following message:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

WARNING
1 If a ladder program is read while another ladder
program is being executed, the ladder program
being executed is automatically stopped. Take
special care when stopping a ladder program. If a
ladder program is stopped at an inadequate timing
or in an inadequate machine state, the machine can
make an unexpected movement. Moreover, when
a ladder program is stopped, the safety feature and
monitoring based on the ladder program do not
function. Before stopping a ladder program, make
sure that the machine state is normal and that there
is no person near the machine.
2 When an attempt is made to stop the ladder
program being executed, the stop processing may
continue endlessly, depending on the ladder
operation. In such a case, modify the ladder
program according to Section 4.15.

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the pertinent
table in Subsection 7.4.1.

- 533 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.7 Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card Files

A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and

memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described
below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION COMPARE

(2) Specify a sequence program to be compared, by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in a
compare target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the compare target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
compare target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 534 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program

comparison.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be compared. If a sequence program for
the conventional model is compared, the compare
operation is terminated abnormally with the
following message:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the pertinent
table in Subsection 7.4.1.

- 535 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.8 Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM

Sequence programs can be saved from a PMC to the flash ROM. To

use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to save sequence programs.

When writing to the flash ROM is performed, the processing
cannot be stopped.

NOTE
When programs are written, flash ROM initialization
may consume some time. During initialization,
"INITIALIZING FLASH ROM." is displayed in the
STATUS display field.

- 536 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.9 Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM

Sequence programs can be inputted from the flash ROM to a PMC.

To use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Input target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION READ

For the setting of an input target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to input sequence programs.

When reading from the flash ROM is performed, the processing
cannot be stopped.
If the reading of sequence programs is continued, the ladder
program being executed is automatically stopped.

WARNING
1 If a ladder program is read while another ladder
program is being executed, the ladder program
being executed is automatically stopped. Take
special care when stopping a ladder program. If a
ladder program is stopped at an inadequate timing
or in an inadequate machine state, the machine can
make an unexpected movement. Moreover, when
a ladder program is stopped, the safety feature and
monitoring based on the ladder program do not
function. Before stopping a ladder program, make
sure that the machine state is normal and that there
is no person near the machine.
2 When an attempt is made to stop the ladder
program being executed, the stop processing may
continue endlessly, depending on the ladder
operation. In such a case, modify the ladder
program according to Section 4.15.

- 537 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.10 Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files

A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and

flash ROM. To use this function, perform the operation described
below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Compare target PMC)
DEVICE FLASH ROM
FUNCTION COMPARE

For the setting of a compare target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program

comparison.
When a sequence program camparison with the flash ROM is
performed, the processing cannot be stopped.

- 538 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.11 Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY

A sequence program can be output from a PMC to a Floppy Cassette

or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform
the operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen,
see Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the
port setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the
port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

This operation can be performed only when the operation condition

allows sequence program output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:
Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then enter a
desired file name.
For output to a FLOPPY in the DOS format, enter a file name not
longer than eight characters with an extension not longer than
three characters in the MS-DOS format. For output to a
FLOPPY in the FANUC format, enter a file name not longer than
seventeen characters. When no file name is entered, the
following file name is automatically set:

Output target PMC File name

PMC1 PMC1_LAD.000
PMC2 PMC2_LAD.000
PMC3 PMC3_LAD.000
Dual check safety PMCS_LAD.000
If a file with the same file name already exists, the extension
number is incremented for output.
Example: PMC1_LAD.001

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the sequence program.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

- 539 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.12 Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY

A sequence program can be input to a PMC from a Floppy Cassette or

Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see
Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the port
setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port
setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION READ

(2) Specify an input target sequence program by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in an
input target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME field
displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the input target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
input target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 540 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMCx"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for a program for dual
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of the sequence program is continued, the ladder
program being executed is automatically stopped.

NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be read. If a sequence program for the
conventional model is read, the read operation is
terminated abnormally with the following message:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

WARNING
1 If a ladder program is read while another ladder
program is being executed, the ladder program
being executed is automatically stopped. Take
special care when stopping a ladder program. If a
ladder program is stopped at an inadequate timing
or in an inadequate machine state, the machine can
make an unexpected movement. Moreover, when
a ladder program is stopped, the safety feature and
monitoring based on the ladder program do not
function. Before stopping a ladder program, make
sure that the machine state is normal and that there
is no person near the machine.
2 When an attempt is made to stop the ladder
program being executed, the stop processing may
continue endlessly, depending on the ladder
operation. In such a case, modify the ladder
program according to Section 4.15.

- 541 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.13 Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files

A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and

Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this
function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4. To set the communication
parameters, display the port setting screen by pressing the [PORT
SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION COMPARE

(2) Specify a sequence program to be compared, by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in a
compare target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the compare target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
compare target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 542 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program

comparison.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be compared. If a sequence program for
the conventional model is compared, the compare
operation is terminated abnormally with the
following message:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

- 543 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.14 Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)

Sequence programs can be output from a PMC to another type of

device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see
Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the port
setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port
setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output sequence programs.

Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

- 544 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.15 Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)

Sequence programs can be input to a PMC from another type of

device connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see
Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the port
setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port
setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows sequence program input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION READ

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of a file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING SEQUENCE PROGRAM PMCx"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for a program for dual
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of sequence programs is continued, the ladder
program being executed is automatically stopped.

NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be read. If a sequence program for the
conventional model is read, the read operation is
terminated abnormally with the following message:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

- 545 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

WARNING
1 If a ladder program is read while another ladder
program is being executed, the ladder program
being executed is automatically stopped. Take
special care when stopping a ladder program. If a
ladder program is stopped at an inadequate timing
or in an inadequate machine state, the machine can
make an unexpected movement. Moreover, when
a ladder program is stopped, the safety feature and
monitoring based on the ladder program do not
function. Before stopping a ladder program, make
sure that the machine state is normal and that there
is no person near the machine.
2 When an attempt is made to stop the ladder
program being executed, the stop processing may
continue endlessly, depending on the ladder
operation. In such a case, modify the ladder
program according to Section 4.15.

- 546 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.16 Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)

A sequence program comparison can be made between the PMC and

another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function,
perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O
screen, see Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display
the port setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For
the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows sequence program
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION COMPARE

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a sequence program

comparison.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
1 When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"
2 Sequence programs for the conventional model
cannot be compared. If a sequence program for
the conventional model is compared, the compare
operation is terminated abnormally with the
following message:
"LADDER TYPE UNMATCH"

- 547 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.17 Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card

PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to the memory card. To

use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows PMC parameter output.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA PARAMETER

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then enter a
desired file name.
Enter a file name not longer than eight characters with a three-
character extension in the MS-DOS format. When no file name
is entered, the following file name is automatically set:

Output target PMC File name

PMC1 PMC1_PRM.000
PMC2 PMC2_PRM.000
PMC3 PMC3_PRM.000
Dual check safety PMCS_PRM.000

If a file with the same file name already exists, the extension
number is incremented for output.
Example: PMC1_PRM.001

- 548 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output PMC parameters.

Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the pertinent
table in Subsection 7.4.1.

NOTE
For writing to the flash memory card, see "Writing to
the flash memory card" in Subsection 7.4.1.

- 549 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.18 Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card

PMC parameters can be input from the memory card to a PMC. To

use this function, perform the operation described below on the I/O
screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows PMC parameter input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION READ

(2) Specify input target PMC parameters by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in an
input target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME field
displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the input target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
input target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 550 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for parameters for dual
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. When PMC
parameters for the conventional model are to be read with the
multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft key
operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of PMC parameters is continued, the PMC
parameters are rewritten even when a ladder program is being
executed.

NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"

WARNING
When PMC parameters are read, a modified
parameter can exercise an unexpected influence on
ladder operation. Before reading PMC parameters,
make sure that the parameters to be read do not
affect ladder operation.

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the pertinent
table in Subsection 7.4.1.

- 551 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.19 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files

A PMC parameter comparison can be made between the PMC and

memory card. To use this function, perform the operation described
below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows PMC parameter
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION COMPARE

(2) Specify PMC parameters to be compared, by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in a
compare target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the compare target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
compare target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 552 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a PMC parameter

comparison.
When PMC parameters for the conventional model are to be read
with the multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft
key operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press
the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the

pertinent table in Subsection 7.4.1.

- 553 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.20 Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY

PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to a Floppy Cassette or

Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see
Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the port
setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port
setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows PMC parameter output.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA PARAMETER

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then enter a
desired file name.
For output to a FLOPPY in the DOS format, enter a file name not
longer than eight characters with an extension not longer than
three characters in the MS-DOS format. For output to a
FLOPPY in the FANUC format, enter a file name not longer than
seventeen characters. When no file name is entered, the
following file name is automatically set:

Output target PMC File name

PMC1 PMC1_PRM.000
PMC2 PMC2_PRM.000
PMC3 PMC3_PRM.000
Dual check safety PMCS_PRM.000

If a file with the same file name already exists, the extension
number is incremented for output.
Example: PMC1_PRM.001

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output the PMC parameters.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

- 554 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.21 Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY

PMC parameters can be input to a PMC from a Floppy Cassette or

Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the
operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see
Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the port
setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port
setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows PMC parameter input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION READ

(2) Specify input target PMC parameters by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in an
input target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME field
displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the input target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
input target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 555 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of the file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for parameters for dual
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. When PMC
parameters for the conventional model are to be read with the
multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft key
operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of PMC parameters is continued, the PMC
parameters are rewritten even when a ladder program is being
executed.

NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"

WARNING
When PMC parameters are read, a modified
parameter can exercise an unexpected influence on
ladder operation. Before reading PMC parameters,
make sure that the parameters to be read do not
affect ladder operation.

- 556 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.22 Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files

A PMC parameter comparison can be made between the PMC and

Floppy Cassette or Handy File connected via RS-232C. To use this
function, perform the operation described below on the I/O screen.
For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4. To set the communication
parameters, display the port setting screen by pressing the [PORT
SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows PMC parameter
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION COMPARE

(2) Specify PMC parameters to be compared, by performing the

following operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in a
compare target file number. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the compare target file name.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the
compare target file.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

- 557 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a PMC parameter

comparison.
When PMC parameters for the conventional model are to be read
with the multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft
key operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press
the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"

- 558 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.23 Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)

PMC parameters can be output from a PMC to another type of device

connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation
described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.
To set the communication parameters, display the port setting screen
by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen,
see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows PMC parameter output.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
PMC (Output target PMC)
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION WRITE
KIND OF DATA PARAMETER

For the setting of an output target PMC, see Subsection 7.4.4.

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to output PMC parameters.

Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

- 559 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.24 Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)

PMC parameters can be input to a PMC from another type of device

connected via RS-232C. To use this function, perform the operation
described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.
To set the communication parameters, display the port setting screen
by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For the port setting screen,
see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
This operation can be performed only when the
operation condition allows PMC parameter input.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION READ

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key.

Before the reading of a file is started, the following message is
displayed to check if read processing may be executed:
"READING PMC PARAMETER (PMCx)"
(As PMCx, the PMC number embedded in the data is
displayed. "PMC DCS" is displayed for parameters for dual
check safety.)
Press the [EXEC] soft key to continue the operation. When PMC
parameters for the conventional model are to be read with the
multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft key
operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press the
[CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.
If the reading of PMC parameters is continued, the PMC
parameters are rewritten even when a ladder program is being
executed.

NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the read operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"

- 560 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

WARNING
When PMC parameters are read, a modified
parameter can exercise an unexpected influence on
ladder operation. Before reading PMC parameters,
make sure that the parameters to be read do not
affect ladder operation.

- 561 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.4.25 Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other Devices

(via the RS-232C Port)

A PMC parameter comparison can be made between the PMC and

another type of device connected via RS-232C. To use this function,
perform the operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O
screen, see Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display
the port setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For
the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

NOTE
Compare operation can be performed only when
the operation condition allows PMC parameter
output. For details, see Section 6.2.

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE OTHERS
FUNCTION COMPARE

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to execute a PMC parameter

comparison.
When PMC parameters for the conventional model are to be read
with the multi-PMC system, select a read source PMC with soft
key operation. For PMC selection, see Subsection 7.4.4. Press
the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
When the format of a specified file cannot be
recognized, the compare operation is terminated
abnormally with the following message:
"UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT"

- 562 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.26 Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory Card

A file on a memory card can be deleted, or a memory card can be

formatted. To use this function, perform the operation described
below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen, see Section 7.4.

Deleting memory card files

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION DELETE

(2) Specify a file to be deleted, by performing the following

operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in the
number of a file to be deleted. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the name of the file to be deleted.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the file
to be deleted.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete the file.

Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
No files can be deleted from a flash memory card.

- 563 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Formatting a memory card

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE MEMORY CARD
FUNCTION FORMAT

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to format the memory card.
Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
When the formatting of a memory card is executed
with FORMAT selected, all data of the memory card
is lost. Be careful when formatting a memory card.

For the memory cards supported by Series 30i-A, see the pertinent
table in Subsection 7.4.1.

NOTE
For writing to the flash memory card, see "Writing to
the flash memory card" in Subsection 7.4.1.

- 564 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.4.27 Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files

A specified file or all files on a Floppy Cassette or Handy File

connected via RS-232C can be deleted. To use this function, perform
the operation described below on the I/O screen. For the I/O screen,
see Section 7.4. To set the communication parameters, display the
port setting screen by pressing the [PORT SETING] soft key. For
details of the port setting screen, see Subsection 7.4.2.

Deleting a specified file on the FLOPPY

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION DELETE

(2) Specify a file to be deleted, by performing the following

operations:
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NO., then key in the
number of a file to be deleted. At this time, the FILE NAME
field displays the file name corresponding to the entered file
number.
• Move the query selection cursor to FILE NAME, then key in
the name of the file to be deleted.
• Switch the screen display to the list screen, then select the file
to be deleted.
For the list screen, see Subsection 7.4.3.

NOTE
If a value is set in the FILE NO. field, and a file
name not corresponding to the file number is
entered in the FILE NAME field when FILE NO. and
FILE NAME are displayed at the same time, the
value set in the FILE NO. field is erased, and the
setting in the FILE NAME field becomes valid.

(3) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete the file.

Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

- 565 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Deleting all files on the FLOPPY

(1) On the I/O screen, make the following settings with the query
selection cursor and option selection cursor:

Query Setting
DEVICE FLOPPY
FUNCTION DELETE ALL

(2) Press the [EXEC] soft key to delete all files.

Press the [CANCEL] soft key to stop the operation.

NOTE
The following Floppy Cassette does not support the
operation of FORMAT:
FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER A13B-0131-B001

- 566 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.5 DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS ([I/O LINK]

SCREEN)

I/O LINK MONITOR screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O
Units that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number.
To switch the screen display to the I/O LINK MONITOR screen,
press the [I/O LINK] soft key.

Channel number
I/O Unit type

Group number I/O Unit ID code

Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
CONNECTION UNIT 80 Connection Unit
OPERATOR PANEL 82 Connection Unit for Operators
Panel
I/O-B3 83 I/O B3
IO UNIT-MODEL A 84 I/O Unit-MODEL A
86
87
PLC SERIES 90-30 45 PLC SERIES 90-30
POWER MATE / I/O LINK BETA 4A Power Mate or I/O Link Beta
SERIES 0 50 Series 0
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG1) 53 Machine Operators Panel
Interface
LINK CONNECTION UNIT 96 I/O Link Connecting Unit
I/O UNIT-MODEL B 9E I/O Unit-MODEL B
R-J MATE 61 R-J Mate
CONNECTOR PANEL MODULE A9 I/O module for connector panel
OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator's panel
- 567 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Operator Interface(with MPG)
LOADER I/O AF I/O Board for Loader
FRC DIF B0 DIF Board for ROBOCUT
FRC MIF B1 MIF Board for ROBOCUT
I/O CARD B2 I/O board
ROBOSHOT I/O CARD A B3 I/O for ROBOSHOT
LOADER I/O (MATRIX) B4 I/O Board for Loader(Matrix)
PROCESS I/O FA B5 Process I/O for robot controller
PROCESS IO 89 Process I/O for robot controller
I/O LINK ADAPTER 8B I/O Link adapter
ROBOT CONTROLLER 52 Controller for robot
GE Fanuc PLC 54 GE Fanuc PLC
OPERATOR PANEL 95 I/O for Series 0
LASER OSCILLATOR 97 Laser Oscillator
FIXED I/O TYPE A 98 I/O for Robot Type A
FIXED I/O TYPE B 99 I/O for Robot Type B
AS-I CONVERTER 77 AS-i Converter
OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module(for Operator Panel
48/32)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL A A8 I/O Module(for Machine Operator
Panel of 0 Type)
CONNECTION UNIT C1 (MPG) A8 Connection Unit C1(with MPG)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module (for Machine Operator
Panel)
I/O MODULE WITH LCD A8 LCD display embedded I/O
UNKNOWN UNIT - Unknown I/O Unit

CAUTION
1 IDs other than those for the I/O units listed in Table
7.5 represent undefined units.
2 I/O Units not for Series 30i -A are written in Table
7.5.

Soft keys

Displays connection status of the Displays connection status of

previous channel the next channel

- 568 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.6 TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL STATUS

After setting a signal sampling condition on the trace parameter

setting screen, PMC signal transitions can be traced on the SIGNAL
TRACE screen by executing the trace function.
To switch the screen display to the SIGNAL TRACE screen, press the
[TRACE] soft key.
To switch the screen display to the trace parameter setting screen,
press the [TRACE SETING] soft key.

With the multi-PMC system, the signals of all PMCs can be traced
simultaneously.

- 569 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.6.1 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen)

SIGNAL TRACE screen (initial screen)

Before trace operation can be executed, the trace parameters must be

set. Press the [TRACE SETING] soft key to switch the screen display
to the trace parameter setting screen.
By setting the PMC setting screen, the trace function can be
automatically started after the power is turned on. In this case as well,
the trace parameters must be set beforehand.

NOTE
For the setting to automatically start the trace
function after the power is turned on, see
Subsection 7.6.5.

- 570 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.6.2 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen)

On the trace parameter setting screen, a sampling condition can be set.

The screen consists of two pages. Use the page keys to switch
between the pages.

Trace parameter setting screen (first page)

(a) SAMPLING/ MODE

Determines the sampling mode.
• TIME CYCLE: Samples at every specified cycle
time.
• SIGNAL TRANSITION: Monitors the signal at a set cycle
and samples when the signal
makes a transition.
(b) SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION
The resolution of sampling is inputted. The default value is the
minimum sampling resolution (msec), which varies depending on
the CNC.
Setting range: Minimum sampling resolution to 1000 (msec)
An input value is rounded off to a multiple of the minimum
sampling resolution (msec) which is closest to but not greater
than the input value.
(c) SAMPLING/ TIME
This parameter is displayed when "TIME CYCLE" is set on
"SAMPLING/ MODE". The execution time of trace is inputted.
The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the number of
specified signal address changes the range of the value that is
able to input. The range is displayed on the right side.

- 571 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(d) SAMPLING/ FRAME

This parameter is displayed when "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is
set on SAMPLING/ MODE". The number of sampling is
inputted. The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the
number of specified signal addresses changes the range of the
value that is able to input. The range is displayed on the right
side.
(e) STOP CONDITION
Determines the condition to stop the trace.
• NONE: Does not stop the tracing automatically.
• BUFFER FULL: Stops the tracing when the buffer becomes
full.
• TRIGGER: Stops the tracing by trigger.
(f) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
stop trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.

NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 1.5.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keybord, use “;” or “/”.

(g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE

When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace
is stopped.
• RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up of the trigger signal.
• FALLING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
• BOTH EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up or falling down of the trigger signal.

- 572 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION

When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or
number which specifies the position where specified trigger
condition is on. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal before the trigger condition, you should set a big value
in this parameter. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal after the trigger condition, you should set a small value
in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 seconds and trigger
position is set as "10%".

Trigger position

← 1 sec →← 9 sec →

(i) SAMPLING CONDITION

When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
this parameter is enabled.
Determine the sampling condition.
• TRIGGER: Samples the status of specified signals
when the specified sampling condition is
on.
• ANY CHANGE: Samples the status of specified signals
when the signals change.
(j) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
sampling trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.

NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 1.5.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keybord, use “;” or “/”.

- 573 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

(k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE

When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the
condition of specified trigger.
• RISING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
• FALLING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
falling down of the trigger signal.
• BOTH EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger
signal.
• ON: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is on.
• OFF: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is off.

- 574 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

In page 2 of the PARAMETER SETTING screen, you can set the

addresses or symbols that should be sampled.

Trace parameter setting screen (second page)

a) Setting addresses
In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address can be
inputted.
Moreover, when you input byte address, all bits of the address
(bits 0 to 7) are set automatically. Maximum 32 points of signal
address can be inputted.
With the multi-PMC system, an address can be set for a desired
PMC by specifying its PMC number.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.
When no PMC number is specified, the specification of the
currently selected PMC is assumed. In this case, "PMC number"
+ ":" is automatically prefixed to a specified address.
When only one PMC is used as in the standard PMC system, no
PMC number needs to be specified.

- 575 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 1.5.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keybord, use “;” or “/”.
3 The signals of the PMC for dual check safety
cannot be traced.
4 Increasing the number of the signal address
changes the capacity of "SAMPLING/ TIME" or
"SAMPLING/ FRAME" in page 1. If the capacity is
changed, the following warning message is
displayed. (The "n" on the message means the
maximum value that is able to input.)
a) In case of "TIME CYCLE" mode
"SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC."
b) In case of "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode
"SAMPLING FRAME IS REDUCED TO n."

b) Soft keys
Soft keys on the setting screen of sampling address are as follows
• DELETE: Clears the value of the edit box on the
cursor.
• SYMBOL/ Changes the address display to the symbol
ADDRESS: display. However, display of the address
that is not defined the symbol does not
change. This soft key also changes to
"ADDRESS". The following soft keys are
displayed.
• MOVE UP: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal above one line.
• MOVE DOWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal below one line.
• DELETE ALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box.

c) Trigger setting
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE" and
"ANY CHANGE" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", it can
be set whether to use the setting address as the signals that should
trigger the sampling in the setting signals. As for the signal
address where the trigger was set, "ü" is displayed right. Soft
keys on the Trigger setting screen are as follows:
• TRGON: Sets the Trigger on.
• TRGOFF: Sets the Trigger off.
The default setting is trigger on for all signals.

- 576 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.6.3 Execution of Trace

After the trace parameters are set, a trace operation can be started by
pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key and the [RUN] soft key on the
SIGNAL TRACE screen. The following is the screen examples of the
trace execution by "TIME CYCLE" mode and "SIGNAL
TRANSITION" mode.

Execution of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)

Execution of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

- 577 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the

trace.
When the stop conditions that is set in parameter setting screen is
satisfied the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the
execution. In "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode, graphic display is not
refreshed until any signal for sampling trigger changes.

- 578 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.6.4 Operation after Execution of Trace

When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The

followings are the screen examples of trace by "TIME CYCLE" and
"SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode.

Result of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)

Result of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

- 579 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the

original point (0 point). The position of the cursor is displayed in
"CURSOR POSITION" in the upper of the screen. The cursor can
move horizontally with the <←> or <→> key. After the execution,
following operation is enabled.
a) Scroll of screen
- Cursor up/down key and Page up/down key
Enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal
- Cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>] soft key and [<< PREV] soft
key
Enables the horizontal scroll of the graph.
b) Automatic calculation of the selected range
Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and
displays the mark cursor.
If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position cursor, the
current position cursor has priority of display. The "MARK
POSITION" that shows the position of the mark cursor and
"RANGE" that shows the range between the mark cursor and the
current position cursor are displayed in the upper of screen.
Moving the current position cursor changes these values. Pushing
[MARK] again releases the select range mode.

Result of trace screen (Mark cursor display)

- 580 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

c) Zoom in/Zoom out of waveform

Pushing [ZOOM IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart.
Pushing [ZOOM OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart.
Pushing these soft keys also change the scale value of the
graduation on the graph. When trace is just finished, the default
zooming level was the most magnified level. In [ZOOM OUT]
mode, "X" is displayed as following screen example when the
transitions of signal cannot be expressed accurately enough. The
limitation of [ZOOM OUT] displays all of result of the trace in
one page.

Result of trace screen (Zoom out display)

d) Exchange of sampling signal

Pushing [MOVE UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by
the signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MOVE
DOWN] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal
cursor for the signal one line below. The result of the operation is
cancelled by the execution of trace or putting the power off.
When you would like to preserve the order of displayed signals
against the executing or powering off, please change the order on
"SAMPLING ADDRESS" screen.

- 581 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

7.6.5 Automatic Start of Trace Setting

Trace execution is automatically started after power-on by setting a

PMC setting data.

• TRACE START = MANUAL/AUTO

NOTE
For details of the method of setting PMC setting
data, see Section 9.5.

- 582 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

7.6.6 Trace Result Output

If trace result data is present when a trace operation has been executed,
the data can be output to the memory card. Output trace result data
can be input to application software such as spreadsheet software run
on the personal computer. For the method of input, refer to the
relevant manual of application software.

(1) Operation
Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The soft key display changes to
[EXEC] and [CANCEL]. Press the [EXEC] soft key to start
output. Upon completion of output, the soft key display returns
to the initial status on the signal trace result screen.

(2) File name

The name of an output file is PMCTRACE.000. If a file with the
same name exists on the memory card, the extension is
incremented to PMCTRACE.001, PMCTRACE.002, and so on
(up to PMCTRACE.999).

(3) Output format

Trace result data is output in the text format. Character string
data items such as item names and setting names are enclosed in
quotation marks (').
Output data is divided into four major blocks: a header, data of
the first parameter setting page, data of the second parameter
setting page, and trace result data.

(a) Header
At the start of data, an identifier representing the type of
data and edition information are output.
Identifier: ('PMC TRACE DATA')
Edition information: ('Edition', 1)

(b) Data of the first parameter setting page

identifier, , ,
setting-number, setting-item-name, setting, setting-character-string
setting-number, setting-item-name, setting, setting-character-string
setting-number, setting-item-name, setting, setting-character-string
setting-number, setting-item-name, setting, setting-character-string
:
:

• identifier Character string data

The character string 'Setting' is output.

- 583 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

• setting-number Numeric data

The numbers (starting with 1) assigned to setting items
in ascending order are output.

• setting-item-name Character string data

The character string of each setting item is output.

• setting Numeric data

A value that is originally numeric, such as a resolution
value, is directly output. Numbers (starting with 1) are
assigned from left to right to options from which a
choice is to be made, such as TIME CYCLE/SIGNAL
TRANSITION, and the number assigned to a selected
option is output.

• setting-character-string Character string data

For a setting that is numeric data, its unit, if used, is
output.
For an option that is converted to a number in the item of
"setting" mentioned above, the original character string
data is output. In other cases, a blank is output in this
column.

Table of data of the first parameter setting page

Item Setting Setting item name Setting Setting character string
number
1 'TIME CYCLE'
Sampling mode 1 'Sampling mode'
2 'SIGNAL TRANSITION'
Sampling resolution 2 'Sampling resolution' Numeric value 'MSEC'
Sampling time 'Sampling time'
3 Numeric value 'SEC'
Sampling frame 'Sampling frame'
1 'NONE'
Stop condition 4 'Stop condition' 2 'BUFFER FULL'
3 'TRIGGER'
Stop trigger address 5 'Stop trigger address' Address Symbol
1 'RISING EDGE'
Stop trigger mode 6 'Stop trigger mode' 2 'FALLING EDGE'
3 'BOTH EDGE'
Stop position 7 'Stop trigger position' Numeric value %
1 'TRIGGER'
Sampling condition 8 'Sampling condition'
2 'ANY CHANGE'
Sampling trigger address 9 'Sampling trigger address' Address Symbol
1 'RISING EDGE'
Sampling trigger mode 10 'Sampling trigger mode' 2 'FALLING EDGE'
3 'BOTH EDGE'

- 584 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

NOTE
1 For a setting item that is invalidated in combination
with another setting, only a setting number and
setting item name are output, with a blank output in
the setting column and the setting character string
column. (However, commas are not omitted.)
2 For an item name that changes according to the
setting of another item, the item name displayed
according to the setting is displayed. (Example:
Sampling time/Sampling frame dependent on the
selection of a Sampling mode option)
3 For a sampling stop trigger address and sampling
trigger address, an address is output in the setting
column, and a symbol is output in the setting
character string column. When no symbol is set, an
address is output in the setting character string
column as well.
4 For a sampling stop trigger position, (successful
trigger position/sampling frame count) is output
after "%". (This is because a frame position is
internally held, so that an error can occur at the
time of conversion to a percentage value.)

(c) Data of the second parameter setting page

identifier-1, data-1, data-2, data-3, . . . . .
identifier-2, data-1, data-2, data-3, . . . . .
identifier-3, data-1, data-2, data-3, . . . . .
identifier-4, data-1, data-2, data-3, . . . . .

• identifier Character string data

'Address': Sampling address
'Symbol': Symbol defined for a sampling address
'Comment': Comment defined for a sampling address
'Check': Indicates whether a check is made to see if
each signal is used to trigger sampling when
SAMPLING CONDITION = ANY
CHANGE.
• data
'Address': Address character string
'Symbol': Symbol character string
'Comment': Comment character string
'Check': With check = 1/without check = 0

- 585 -
7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) B-63983EN/01

NOTE
1 Data is not output beyond set sampling addresses.
This means that no blank is output in the item of
'Address'.
2 For an address for which no symbol or no comment
is set, no data is output, but a blank is output in the
column. Commas are not omitted but are output for
up to set sampling addresses.

(d) Trace result data

identifier, sampling-address-1, sampling-address-2, . . . . .
frame-count, data-1, data-2, data-3. . . . .
:
:
:

• identifier Character string data

The character string 'Data' is output.
• frame-count Numeric value
The position where the frame count is 0 is a position
where triggering is performed successfully. If triggering
is unsuccessful, the frame count is 0 at the point where
sampling stopped.
• data Numeric data
The value 0 or 1 is output.
It is assumed that data is output until an EOF (end of
file) appears. Information such as data size is not set.

- 586 -
B-63983EN/01 7.PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])

(4) Example of trace result output (For view comfort, tab settings are
made in several places. In actual data output, however, no tab
settings are made.)

‘PMC TRACE DATA’

‘Edition’, 1

‘Setting’, , ,
1,‘Sampling mode’, 2, ‘SIGNAL TRANSITION’
2,‘Sampling resolution’, 8, ‘MSEC’
3,‘Sampling time’, 2000,
4,‘Stop condition’, 3, ‘TRIGGER’
5,‘Stop trigger address’, ‘X10.0’, ‘SYMBOL1’
6,‘Stop trigger mode’, 1, ‘RISING EDGE’
NOTE 7,‘Stop trigger position’, 50(1250/2500), ‘%’
8,‘Sampling condition’, 1, ‘TRIGGER’
9,‘Sampling trigger address’,‘X10.1’, ‘SYMBOL2’
10,‘Sampling trigger mode’, 3, ‘BOTH EDGE’

‘Address’,‘R0000.0’, ‘R0000.1’, ‘R0000.2’, ‘R0000.3’, ‘R0000.4’, ‘R0000.5’,

‘R0000.6’, ‘R0000.7’, ‘R0001.0’, R0002.0’
‘Symbol’, ‘ZRN_M’ , , , ‘*SPA1’ , ‘*SPA2’, ‘MX-RD’,‘RSTN’, ‘RSTMA’,
‘MO1X’, ‘MO2X’
‘Comment’, ‘ZRN MODE’, ’TIME CNT.AUX1(MEM)’ , , , , ‘READ
STROBE’, ‘NORMAL RESET PB’, ‘INIT_M&RSTM (RST->MACRO)’,
‘OPTIONAL STOP1’,’OPTIONAL STOP2’
‘Check’, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1

‘Data’,‘R0000.0’, ‘R0000.1’, ‘R0000.2’, ‘R0000.3’, ‘R0000.4’, ‘R0000.5’,

‘R0000.6’, ‘R0000.7’, ‘R0001.0’, ‘R0002.0’
-6, 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
-5, 0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1
-4, 1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0
-3, 0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1
-2, 0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1,0,0
-1, 1,1,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1
0, 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
1, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
2, 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
3, 0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1
4, 1,1,1,1,1,0,0,0,0,0

NOTE
With the multi-PMC system, this data is output in
the format: "PMC number" + ":" + "address".
Example: '2:R0000.0'

- 587 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND

EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])
The PMC LADDER menu contains the screens related to PMC
Ladder diagrams, such as the program list screen and the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
You can switch to the PMC LADDER menu by operating on the
"SYSTEM" key and then the [PMC LADDER] soft key.

SYSTEM

PMC main menu

PMC LADDER menu
PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen

LADDER LADDER DIAGRAM

< MONITOR/EDITOR screen

Clicking the [LADDER] soft key causes the sequence program to be

dynamically displayed, allowing you to monitor operation. The editor
screen allows you to make changes to relay and functional instructions
in the sequence program to change the operation of the sequence
program.
The ladder diagram display/editor functions consist of the following
screens:
(1) Ladder diagram display screen (LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen)
Displays ladder diagrams to monitor the current states of relays,
coils, and so on.
(2) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Displays only a selected ladder net to monitor the current states
of relays, coils, and so on.
(3) LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a ladder diagram in units of nets.
(4) NET EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a single net in a ladder diagram.
(5) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Allows you to select the subprogram to be displayed on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.

- 588 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(6) PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen

Allows you to edit a ladder program in units of subprograms.
Also allows you to select the subprogram to be edited on the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

The following screens can be called from the LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen:
(7) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER
screen
Allows you to view the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.
(8) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR
screen
Allows you to edit the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.

NOTE
You can protect these screens by using the
programmer protection function. For details, see
Section 6.2.

You can change between screens as shown in the figure below.

PMC main menu

[<] [PMC LADDER]

PMC LADDER menu
[<] [<]
[LADDER] [LIST]

[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
MONITOR screen VIEWER screen
[LIST]
Display function
(monitor)
[SWITCH] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[EXIT] [EDIT]

COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
Edit function EDITOR screen EDITOR screen
[LIST]

[EXIT] [CREATE NET] [ZOOM]

NET EDITOR screen

Fig. 8 Changes between screens

- 589 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

NOTE
The [EDIT] soft key on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen is displayed so that it is available if
the programmer protection function is enabled. For
details, see Section 6.2. While the online monitor
function is enabled, you cannot move to the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. (To stop the online
monitor function, change the settings of "RS-232C"
and "HIGH SPEED" to "NOT USE".

- 590 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.1 DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST ([LIST] SCREEN)

The PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen shows program information

such as the program size.

SP area

Size area

Ladder preview display area

Program number area

Key input line Message display line

(1) Screen structures

(a) A program list is displayed on the left side of the screen; on
the right side, the ladder diagram of the program currently
indicated by the cursor on the program list is displayed.
(b) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
be displayed depending on the situation.
(c) The program list displays up to 18 programs at a time in the
list display area.

- 591 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(2) Area of program list

(a) In the "SP area", the protect information for subprograms is
displayed, so are their program types.
(Key): Ladder program, cannot be viewed,
cannot be edited
(Magnifying glass): Ladder program, can be viewed,
cannot be edited
(Pencil): Ladder program, can be viewed,
can be edited
(b) Program name is displayed in the "PROG NO." field for
each program.
There are three kinds of program names.
COLLECT: It means the collective program.
GLOBAL: It means the whole program.
LEVELn (n = 1, 2, 3): It means the Ladder level 1, 2 and 3.
Pm (m = subprogram number):
It means subprogram.
By changing the "ADDRESS NOTATION" item on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Setting screen to
"SYMBOL", you can display symbols.
(c) The program size is displayed in the "SIZE" field for each
program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown
in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte
with "K".
Ex.) The case that program size is not over 1024 byte.
1023 bytes: "1023" is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024 byte.
20000 bytes: "19K" is shown.
(Sizes are rounded off to whole
numbers before being displayed.)

- 592 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(3) Operation with Soft-keys

Soft key of PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

Switch PMC paths
Search for program

Display the contents

of program

(a) [ZOOM] Display the contents of program

Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. If you
press [ZOOM] soft key without strings, the program under
the cursor is displayed at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
If you entered program name (See (a) in (2) for detail) or
symbol before pressing [ZOOM] soft key, the program
according to the preceding string is searched and the
program is displayed at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
But, when the selected program is protected to monitor, you
have to unlock the protection.
(b) [SEARCH] Search for program
Searches the program. If you entered program name (See (a)
in (2) for detail) or symbol and press [SEARCH] soft key,
the program according to the preceding string is searched,
the cursor points the program.
(c) [SWITCH PMC] Switch PMC paths
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.

(4) Other operations

(a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can move cursor by all cursor move keys and Page
change keys.
(b) INPUT key
You can operate same as [ZOOM] soft key.

- 593 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(5) Note of searching operations

(a) When program is searched by program name, the strings
that show each program are as follows.
GLOBAL: "0"(Zero) or "G"
LEVEL1, 2, 3: "L" + Number Ex.) "L1", "L01", etc
Pn: Number or "P" + Number
Ex.) "1", "P1", "P01"
(b) Search function by [SEARCH] soft key tries to suppose the
given word as an item to be searched in following order.
1. The string for GLOBAL or LEVEL: "0"(Zero), "G",
"L" + Number
The number for subprogram: Number
2. Symbol
3. The string for subprogram: "P" + Number

(6) Ladder preview

The subprogram indicated by the cursor in the program list is
displayed in the ladder display area on the right of the screen.
If you wish to operate on the ladder diagram, you must switch to
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen by using the
[ZOOM] soft key from the program list.

- 594 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.1.1 Setting the Program List Screen

(1) Program list screen setting

To make settings on the program list screen, use the [SCREEN
SETING] soft key on the ladder screen.
Page 2 of the ladder setting screen contains the settings of the
program list screen.

(2) Setting items

• FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE
Frame net means functional instruction END1, 2 and 3 on
LEVEL1, 2, 3, and functional instruction SP and SPE on
subprogram.
It determines whether the frame net in the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screen are displayed or not, when you
selected the program and press [ZOOM] soft key in the
PROGRAM LIST VIEWER/EDITOR screen.
SHOW (default)
The frame net is displayed in the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screen.
HIDE
The frame net is not displayed in the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screen.

- 595 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.2 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS ([LADDER] SCREEN)

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen shows the on/off status of

contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter
of functional instructions.
From the PMC LADDER menu, you can switch to the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen by using the [LADDER] soft key.
You can use following operation at this screen, including "Forced I/O
function (Forcing mode)", by which you can force the relay or the
address parameters of functional instructions to a new status or value.
• Switch subprogram to show [LIST]
• Search for address or others [SEARCH MENU]
• Show data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
• Go to COLLECTIVE MONITOR Screen [SWITCH]
• Forced I/O function (Forcing mode) "number" + INPUT key

Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram

Area for LADDER Diagram

Additional information line

Key input line

Message line

(1) Screen structures

(a) Title information (REMARKS) of the LADDER Program,
the current subprogram, and the current position
information of the Diagram displayed in this screen, are
displayed above the LADDER Diagram.
When you select a subprogram to be displayed, range for
search function is indicated at right of the top line as
"LOCAL" or "GLOBAL". In case of "LOCAL", the range
for search function is restricted within the current
subprogram. In case of "GLOBAL", on the other hand,
search function searches whole of LADDER program, and
switch current subprogram automatically according to the
result of searching.

- 596 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(b) In the additional information line near the bottom of the

screen, the following information of the address under the
cursor when the cursor is shown.
• Net number of the net with the cursor
• Address and its symbol and comment information
• Current value
(c) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
be displayed depending on the situation.
(d) In the area for LADDER diagrams, 8 × 8, 8 × 6, 8 × 4, 6 × 8,
6 × 6, and 6 × 4 relays can be displayed (horizontally and
vertically). For details, see Subsection 8.2.2.
(e) The gage indicating the current display position in relation
to the whole Ladder program is displayed at the right end of
the screen.

(2) LADDER diagram

(a) Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as
"Continuous Net" using continuous marks (">A1>"). Same
continuous marks mean they are connected with each other.

(3) Monitor
(a) Contacts and coils are displayed in different colors
according to the status of the signal. The status of power
flow is not displayed.
(b) Usually, the parameters of functional instructions are
monitored and displayed. You can suppress the monitor
and display by an appropriate setting. For details, see
Subsection 8.2.2.

- 597 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(4) Displaying Symbols and Comments

(a) Usually, addresses are displayed above contacts and coils.
For an address with a symbol assigned, you can change the
setting so that the symbol is displayed instead of the address.
You can add colors to addresses. For details, see
Subsection 8.2.2.
(b) If the address of a contact has a comment attached, the
comment is displayed below the contact. You can change
its display mode by changing the setting. You can add
colors to comments. For details, see Subsection 8.2.2.
(c) If the address used with coil has a comment string assigned,
the comment strings will be displayed at the right margin
beside the coil. You can use this margin area to display an
additional relay instead of the comment string by setting: at
this setting, one more relay can be displayed in each
diagram line. You can add colors to comments. For details,
see Subsection 8.2.2.

- 598 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.2.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen

Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen Switch PMC paths

LADDER Diagram Editor Switch to COLLECTIVE Screen Settings

Program List
MONITOR screen

Display Data Table

Exit

Search soft keys Search Write Coil Search previous Search next

Jump to Search Functional Pick up a Ladder

Top/Bottom Search Address or Net Instruction Diagram net Switch range

(1) Operation with Soft-keys

(a) [LIST] Go to PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Goes to PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen to choose
subprogram to be displayed at LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen.
(b) [SEARCH MENU] Search & Jump
Change soft keys to "Search soft keys". Use “EXIT” soft
key to return to the "Main soft keys".
"Search soft keys" consists of followings:
• [TOP BOTTOM] Jump to Top/Bottom
Jumps to the top of LADDER Program. If the top is
displayed already, then jump to the bottom.

- 599 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

• [SEARCH] Search Address/Net

Searches the PMC address or the net according to the
preceding string. You can specify both of bit address and
byte address.
When digits are entered, the digits are supposed to be a
net number and the screen will jump to the net of the net
number.
When a string other than digits is entered, the string is
examined as a symbol for some PMC address at first. If
the string matches a symbol, then the address that the
symbol means will be searched for.
If no symbol matches the string, then the string is
examined as PMC address at next. If the string indicates
correct PMC address, then the address will be searched
for.
When cursor is hidden, the net that has the specified net
number or contains the specified address will be shown at
the top of the screen. When cursor is shown, the cursor
moves to the relay or the parameter to show the found
address directly.
• [W-SRCH] Search Write Coil
Searches for the write coils with the address that entered
string means. Any contacts with the address are ignored.
• [FUNC SEARCH] Search Functional Instruction
Searches for the functional instructions by its SUB
number or its mnemonic name such as "TMR" or
"END2".
• [PICKUP] Pick up a ladder net and load it into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Picks up the ladder net to monitor and loads it into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
• [PREV] Search previous
Repeats to search the same thing backward (upward).
• [NEXT] Search next
Repeats to search the same thing forward (downward).
• [GLOBAL]/[LOCAL] Change range
Changes the range for searching between GLOBAL and
LOCAL; GLOBAL means whole of program, and
LOCAL means within the displaying subprogram.
Current range for searching is indicated at right of the
information line at top of screen.
• [EXIT] Exit from the search function
Exits from a search process and returns you to the main
soft key display.

- 600 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(c) [DATA TABLE] Go to FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION

DATA TABLE VIEWER screen
Goes to FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen to examine contents of Data Table of
functional instructions such as COD (SUB 7) and CODB
(SUB 27), which have Data Table in themselves. This soft
key appears only when the cursor is on a functional
instruction that has Data Table.
(d) [EDIT] Go to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. This soft
key appears only when Programmer function is enabled.
And activating Online Monitor function disables this soft
key.
If the ladder program is password-protected, you are asked
to enter a password. Enter the password required to edit the
program.
(e) [SWITCH] Switch to COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Switches to COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
(f) [SWITCH PMC] Switch PMC paths
Switches PMC paths.
This soft key is effective to multi-PMC systems only.
(g) [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. You can change various settings for
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen at the screen.
Use "EXIT" soft key to return to LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. See Subsection 8.2.2 for the detail.

- 601 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(2) Other operations

(a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
With cursor hidden, you can move diagram in the screen by
up/down Cursor move keys and Page change keys.

Function of Cursor keys when cursor is hidden

↑
PAGE
Move screen
← →
Search backward

PAGE ↓ Search forward

With cursor displayed, you can move the cursor by all

cursor move keys and Page change keys. When cursor is
placed on some relay or some address parameter of a
functional instruction, the information about the address
under cursor is displayed at "Additional Information Line".
(b) "number" + INPUT key
When cursor is shown, you can force the value of the
address under cursor by entering new value as "number" +
INPUT key. In this screen, Forced I/O function is limited
only to Forcing mode. This Forced I/O function asks you to
confirm your intention before it takes effect. Once it is
confirmed that you actually want to change value by this
function, you can change the value of the same relay or
parameter without further confirmation. However, after you
move cursor or you operate other functions, you will be
asked when you use the Forced I/O function again.

- 602 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

WARNING
1 You have to pay special attention to use Forced I/O
function to change status of signals. Inappropriate
use of Forced I/O function may cause unexpected
reaction of machine. You have to make it sure that
nobody is near the machine when you use this
function.
2 As you use Forcing mode of Forced I/O function to
change status of signal, however, the signal may
look proof against Forced I/O function, because
LADDER program or I/O device writes into the
signal repeatedly. In this case, even if the signal
looks unchanged, actual signal may be changed in
very short moment. You should be careful for the
reaction of machine to such signal changes.

NOTE
1 If the forced I/O function is protected by the
programmer protection function, pressing the INPUT
key has no effect. For details of protection
conditions, and the like, see Section 6.2.
2 Parameters of timer functional instructions, TMR,
TMRB, and TMRC, which have special monitor
formats, are not supported by Forced I/O function.
For details, see the description of functional
instructions of special monitor format in Subsection
8.2.3.

(3) Notes for Search function

(a) The string followed by [SEARCH] is treated as symbol first.
In case that the symbol "D0" is assigned to the bit address
"R0.0", the operation "D0" + [SEARCH] will search the bit
address "R0.0", instead of byte address "D0".
(b) To search the symbol that consists of only digit characters,
which will usually be treated as net number, you can use
leading space to specify explicitly the string is symbol. For
example, while "123" + [SEARCH] will search the 123rd
net from top of the LADDER, "_123" + [SEARCH] ("_" is
space) will search address with symbol "123".
(c) When the range for searching is GLOBAL, and the target is
found in other than displaying subprogram, the screen will
automatically switch to the subprogram to which the found
target belongs. Searching GLOBAL net number that
current subprogram does not contain, for example, the
subprogram that contains the net of the net number will
appear in the screen, displaying the net.

- 603 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(4) Shortcuts
(a) When cursor is hidden, left/right cursor move keys without
string act just like [PREV]/[NEXT] soft keys.
(b) String followed by [SEARCH MENU] soft key in
"PMCLAD Main soft keys" starts searching directly.
(c) [SEARCH] soft key in the search soft keys without string
searches the address or the functional instruction under
cursor forward. If cursor is hidden, or cursor is placed
neither on a relay nor on a functional instruction, this
operation just repeats the last successful search forward, just
like [NEXT] soft key.
(d) [W-SRCH] soft key without string searches forward a write
coil of the same address with relay under cursor. If cursor
is hidden, or cursor is not placed on a relay, this operation
will search a write coil of the bit address that is searched at
last successful search. If the last search was not made with
bit address, the last entered string for searching is used to
determine what bit address is to be searched for a write coil.
(e) [FUNC SEARCH] soft key without string searches forward
the same functional instruction with one under cursor. If
cursor is hidden, or cursor is not placed on a functional
instruction, this operation will search a functional
instruction that is searched at last successful search. If the
last search was not made for functional instruction, the last
entered string for searching is used to determine what
functional instruction is to be searched.
(f) [LIST] soft key following string that indicates subprogram,
switches subprogram on LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen. Examples for strings to specify subprogram are
following:
"L1" Level 1
"P10", "10" Subprogram "P10"
"0"(zero), "G" Whole of LADDER program (Global)

- 604 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.2.2 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM

MONITOR Screen

(1) Display screen

The LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen is partially
displayed on the screen.
The relays displayed here will change real-time by changing the
setting.

(2) Setting items

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING) screen contains
the setting items below:
• ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the
LADDER Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols,
or the addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols.
Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses
themselves.
ADDRESS
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves
even if they have a symbol.

- 605 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

• FUNCTION STYLE
Change the shape of functional instructions. There are three
options as below. You have to choose other than
"COMPACT" to show the current values of address
parameters of functional instructions.
COMPACT (default)
Occupies least space in diagram. Monitors of current values
of address parameters are omitted.
WIDE
Extends the box horizontally to reserve spaces for the
monitors of current values of address parameters. The box
becomes wider than COMPACT.
TALL
Extends the box vertically to reserve spaces for the monitors
of current values of address parameters. The box becomes
taller than COMPACT.

Display styles of functional instructions

The displays of current values of address parameters change

their format according to each parameter. See Subsection
8.2.3 for detail.
When you place the cursor on an address parameter, its
current value is displayed in the "Additional Information
Line" in both formats of binary decimal, and BCD (or
hexadecimal binary).

- 606 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

• SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT

Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as
below. When you display relay comment, less ladder
diagram nets are shown.
NONE (default)
Relay comments are not displayed.
1 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in one line. Up to 8
characters can be displayed. Characters after 8th character
will not be displayed.
2 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in two lines. Up to 16
characters can be displayed.

Display styles of relay comment

NONE

1 LINE

2 LINE

• SHOW COMMENT OF COIL

Determines whether to show coil comments.
YES (default)
Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for
display of coil comments.
NO
Right margin is used to extend diagram by one more relay,
instead of showing coil comment. The screen position bar
is also displayed at the right edge of the screen in this option.

Show Coil comment setting

YES NO

- 607 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

• SHOW CURSOR
Determines whether to show cursor.
YES
Cursor is displayed. Cursor move keys will move the
cursor. When the cursor is placed on bit or byte addresses,
the information of the address is displayed at "Additional
Information Line". When you search something with the
cursor displayed, the cursor goes directly where it is found.
This option is recommended for search operation with
LADDER program that contains many large nets.
NO (default)
Cursor is not displayed. Up/down cursor move keys will
scroll the contents of screen directly. When you search
something with the cursor hidden, the net, which contains it,
will appear at the top of the screen.
• SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER
Determines whether a net number is counted as "LOCAL"
starting from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as
"GLOBAL" starting from the top of whole program. This
setting also affects the expression of net number at searching
nets by number.
LOCAL
Net number starts from 1 at top of current subprogram. Net
number is defined only within current subprogram. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format "displaying range/nets in subprogram NET".
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net
number is defined identically at whole of program. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format "displaying range/subprogram range NET".

Definition of net number

LOCAL GLOBAL

Current Current
Subprogram Subprogram

- 608 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

• WRAP SEARCH ENABLED

Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top
to continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of
LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will
also continue to search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.

YES Wrap search

?????? NO

Not found

[PREV] [NEXT] [PREV] [NEXT]

Not found

- 609 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

• DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING

Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays,
and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram
can be changed in the colors and the shapes.
BOLD DIAGRAM
Sets thickness of diagram lines. This setting also affects
shapes of relays.
YES (default)
Diagram is drawn with thick lines. Relays are drawn in
more distinct shapes. You have to choose this option to
make following "VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL" setting
effective.
NO
Diagram is drawn with thin lines. Relays are drawn in
smaller shapes.

Bold Diagram setting

VARIABLE RELAY SYMBOL

Determines whether to change the shapes of relays according
to their on/off status, or to fix their shapes. This setting is
effective only when the setting "BOLD DIAGRAM" is set to
"YES".
YES
Shapes of relays change according to their on/off status.
This option is effective only when the setting "BOLD
DIAGRAM" is set to "YES". If it is set to "NO", shapes of
relays will not change regardless of this setting.
NO (default)
Shapes of relays will not change.

Change of relay shapes at on/off status

- 610 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

ADDRESS COLOR
Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No.
15) are available. Foreground color should be different from
background one.
DIAGRAM COLOR
General color and its background color for LADDER Diagram.
You can specify these colors by entering color number, or by
using right and left cursor move keys to change the color
number. You can use 16 numbers from 0 to 15; however,
some different number may correspond to the same color.
You can not specify the same number to the foreground and
the background colors.
ACTIVE RELAY COLOR
Color setting for the active relay. When a contact allows
power flow, and when a coil receives power, they are active
and are displayed with this color setting. When contacts and
coils are not active, they are displayed with "general color".
You can specify these colors in the same manner as color
setting of DIAGRAM COLOR, etc.
PARAMETER COLOR
Color setting for the monitor of functional instruction
parameters. They are displayed when functional instructions
are displayed in the shape other than "COMPACT". You can
specify these colors in the same manner as color setting of
DIAGRAM COLOR, etc.
COMMENT COLOR
Colors for the relay comment are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number, or by moving right and left
cursor. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No. 15) are available.
Foreground color should be different from background one.

(3) Soft keys

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING) screen has the
soft keys of options and following:
• [INIT] Initialize all settings
All settings will be initialized to the default values.
• [EXIT] Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen
Ends the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR (SETTING)
screen and switches to LADDER DIAGRAM MONIITOR
screen.

- 611 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.2.3 Display Format for Parameters

The following table shows all monitor formats for each parameter of
each functional instruction.

NOTE
1 "Variable" in "Monitor format" field means that this
parameter changes its size according to the other
parameter. See the descriptions for each functional
instruction for detail.
2 Functional instruction with "*" mark has Data table.

No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format
1 END1 − − 18 XMOV 1 constant
2 END2 − − 2 4-digits BCD
3 TMR 1 special 3 4-digits BCD
4 DEC 1 2-digits BCD 4 4-digits BCD
2 constant 19 ADD 1 constant
5 CTR 1 special 2 4-digits BCD
6 ROT 1 constant 3 4-digits BCD
2 4-digits BCD 4 4-digits BCD
3 4-digits BCD 20 SUB 1 constant
4 4-digits BCD 2 4-digits BCD
7 COD * 1 constant 3 4-digits BCD
2 2-digits BCD 4 4-digits BCD
3 4-digits BCD 21 MUL 1 constant
8 MOVE 1 constant 2 4-digits BCD
2 constant 3 4-digits BCD
3 2-digits HEX 4 4-digits BCD
4 2-digits HEX 22 DIV 1 constant
9 COM 1 constant 2 4-digits BCD
10 JMP 1 constant 3 4-digits BCD
11 PARI 1 1-byte binary 4 4-digits BCD
14 DCNV 1 no monitor 23 NUME 1 constant
2 no monitor 2 4-digits BCD
15 COMP 1 constant 24 TMRB 1 special
2 4-digits BCD 2 constant
3 4-digits BCD 25 DECB 1 constant
16 COIN 1 constant 2 variable binary
2 4-digits BCD 3 constant
3 4-digits BCD 4 2-digits HEX
17 DSCH 1 constant 26 ROTB 1 constant
2 4-digits BCD 2 variable binary
3 4-digits BCD 3 variable binary
4 4-digits BCD 4 variable binary
5 variable binary

- 612 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format
27 CODB 1 constant 39 DIVB 1 constant
2 constant 2 variable binary
3 1-byte binary 3 constant or
4 variable binary variable binary
28 MOVOR 1 2-digits HEX 4 variable binary
2 2-digits HEX 40 NUMEB 1 constant
3 2-digits HEX 2 constant
29 COME − − 3 variable binary
30 JMPE − − 41 DISPB 1 constant
31 DCNVB 1 constant 42 EXIN 1 8-digits HEX
2 no monitor 43 MOVB 1 1-byte binary
3 no monitor 2 1-byte binary
32 COMPB 1 constant 44 MOVW 1 2-bytes binary
2 constant or 2 2-bytes binary
variable binary 45 MOVN 1 constant
3 variable binary 2 4-bytes binary
33 SFT 1 4-digits HEX 3 4-bytes binary
34 DSCHB 1 constant 47 MOVD 1 4-bytes binary
2 variable binary 2 4-bytes binary
3 variable binary 48 END3 − −
4 variable binary 51 WINDR 1 2-bytes binary
5 variable binary 52 WINDW 1 2-bytes binary
35 XMOVB 1 constant 53 AXCTL 1 constant
2 variable binary 2 8-digits HEX
3 variable binary 54 TMRC 1 constant
4 variable binary 2 special
5 variable binary 3 special
36 ADDB 1 constant 55 CTRC 1 2-bytes binary
2 variable binary 2 2-bytes binary
3 constant or 56 CTRB 1 constant
variable binary 2 special
4 variable binary 57 DIFU 1 constant
37 SUBB 1 constant 58 DIFD 1 constant
2 variable binary 59 EOR 1 constant
3 constant or 2 variable HEX
variable binary 3 constant or
4 variable binary variable HEX
38 MULB 1 constant 4 variable HEX
2 variable binary 60 AND 1 constant
3 constant or 2 variable HEX
variable binary 3 constant or
4 variable binary variable HEX
4 variable HEX

- 613 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

No. Name Parameter Monitor format No. Name Parameter Monitor format
61 OR 1 constant 65 CALL 1 no monitor
2 variable HEX 66 CALLU 1 no monitor
3 constant or 68 JMPB 1 no monitor
variable HEX
4 variable HEX 69 LBL 1 no monitor
62 NOT 1 constant 70 NOP 1 constant
2 variable HEX 71 SP 1 no monitor
3 variable HEX 72 SPE − −
64 END − − 73 JMPC 1 no monitor

- 614 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

• Functional instructions of special monitor format

Displays instructions in the following format:

Functional instructions Functional instruction
vertical display horizontal display
Timer number = Current value Timer number
Preset value Current value
Preset value
The monitor display format of the preset values and the
current values varies depending on the timer precision, as
given in the table below. For details of timer precision, see
TMR Subsection 7.3.1.
Precision Resolution Display format
0 8 ms/48ms by second
1 1 ms by second
2 10 ms by second
3 100 ms by second
4 1 second HH:MM:SS
5 1 minute HH:MM:SS

Displays current value by seconds (HH:MM:SS if 1 minute or

TMRB
more) (preset value is displayed by milliseconds)
The 2nd parameter shows preset value, and the 3rd
parameter shows current value as their monitor displays.
These two monitor displays changes their format according
to the 1st parameter as below:
1st parameter Resolution Display format
0 8 ms by second
1 48 ms by second
TMRC
2 1 second HH:MM:SS
3 10 seconds HH:MM:SS
4 1 minute HH:MM:SS
5 1 ms by second
6 10 ms by second
7 100 ms by second

Displays in "Current/Preset" format by binary or BCD

CTR
according to the counter type setting in LADDER Program.
CTRB Monitors and displays preset values in binary mode.
CTRC Monitors and displays preset values in binary mode.

- 615 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.2.4 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER Screen

FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen

shows the contents of following data table that belongs to some
functional instructions.
• Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
• Functional Instruction CODB (SUB27)
To reach this screen, at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen,
press [DATA TABLE] soft key that is displayed when the cursor is on
the following functional instructions which have a data table.
Following operations are available at this screen.
• Search for data table number. [SEARCH NUMBER]
• Search for data value. [SEARCH VALUE]
• Change the displaying data digits. [BCD2], [BCD4]
(These soft keys can be operated only at FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen of functional
instruction COD.)
• Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM [EXIT]
MONITOR screen.

FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER screen of functional

instruction COD

(1) Screen structures

(a) The functional instruction name, the number of data table,
data length and data types are displayed above the Data
Table.
(b) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
be displayed depending on the situation.

- 616 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(c) In case of functional instruction COD, the data of 6 lines

and 14 columns can be displayed in the area for Data table.
In case of functional instruction CODB, the data of 4 lines
and 14 columns can be displayed in the area for Data table.

(2) Operations

Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of functional instruction COD

Display BCD4 digits

Search for data Search for
Exit
table number data value Display BCD2 digits

Soft keys of Functional Instruction Data Table Viewer screen of functional instruction CODB

Search for data Search for

Exit
table number data value

(a) [SEARCH NUMBER] Search for data table number

Searches the data table number which you specified.
Then the cursor is displayed on the data of the target
number.
And the cursor is disappeared when you operate something.
(b) [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value
Searches the data value which you specified.
Then the cursor is displayed on the target data.
And the cursor is disappeared when you operate something.
(c) [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits
Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This
operation only switches the display data type. So it does
never edit the data on memory.
(d) [BCD4] Display BCD4 digits
Changes the display data type to 4 digits of BCD. This
operation only switches the display data type. So it does
never edit the data on memory.
(e) [EXIT] Exit View
Ends the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen and switches to LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen.
(f) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
You can scroll screen by right/left cursor move keys and
Page change keys.

- 617 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(g) Operation of the return key

On the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen, the return key has no effect.
After you have finished editing data, and want to return to
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.

- 618 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS

At LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen you can edit LADDER

program to change its behavior.
To switch LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, press [EDIT] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
Following operations are available at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen.

• Delete by net [DELETE]

• Move by net [CUT] & [PASTE]
• Copy by net [COPY] & [PASTE]
• Change address of contacts and coils
"bit address" + INPUT key
• Change parameters of functional instructions
"number" or "byte address"
+ INPUT key
• Add new net [CREATE NET]
• Change construction of net [ZOOM]
• Make changes effective [UPDATE]
• Abandon changes [RESTRE]
• Cancel edit [CANCEL EDIT]

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

- 619 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

CAUTION
1 You can edit ladder programs regardless of whether
they are active or not. To execute a ladder program
with the results of editing being reflected, you must
update the ladder program. To do this, click the
[UPDATE] soft key, or update the program when
exiting from the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. For details of the method of protecting
editing, see Section 7.3.
2 After you have edited a sequence program, the
results of editing will be lost if the power is turned off
without first writing the edited sequence program to
flash ROM.
Write the sequence program to flash ROM on the
I/O screen. If you set "WRITE TO F-ROM(EDIT)" to
"YES" on the general functions' setting parameter
screen, a confirmation message will be displayed,
prompting you to ask whether to write a sequence
program to flash ROM after the end of editing. For
details of this setting, see Section 9.5.

(1) Screen structures

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, except that no monitor displays of relays and
parameters of functional instructions are displayed.
(b) At right side of LADDER Diagram area, a position bar is
always displayed, which indicates screen position within
current subprogram: in LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, this position bar is exclusively displayed with
comments of write coil. Sometimes, this position bar hides
a part of write coil comments.

(2) LADDER Diagram

(a) Style of LADDER Diagram is basically same with
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, except that
functional instructions are drawn always in "COMPACT"
format that has no monitor displays.
(b) Cursor is shown always. And the net, which will be an
object of following editing operations, is emphasized in
screen.

- 620 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.1 Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen

Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen

Program List
Select net Copy net
Change to Search soft keys

Edit new net Delete net Cut net Paste net

Automatic input
Add net
Make changes
effective Exit
Change address Setting screen Cancel edit

Abandon changes Run/stop LADDER

Display address
map display
screen

Fig. 8.3.1 Soft keys of LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

(1) Operation with Soft keys

(a) [LIST] Go to PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
Goes to PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen to choose which
subprogram to be edited at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. The PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen can also
edit subprograms.
(b) [SEARCH MENU] Search & Jump
Change soft keys to "Search soft keys". Use "EXIT" soft
key to return to the "Main soft keys".
"Search soft keys" are quite same with ones of LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(c) [ZOOM] Change construction of net
Goes to NET EDITOR screen to modify structure of the
selected net.
(d) [CREATE NET] Add new net
Create and add new net to cursor position. Pressing this soft
key reaches NET EDITOR screen, so that new net is
constructed.
(e) [AUTO] Automatic input of unused address/parameter
number
Executes the function for automatically inputting an unused
address or parameter number. For details of these functions,
see Sections 8.7 and 8.8.

- 621 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(f) [SELECT] Select multiple nets

Used to specify multiple nets before performing an editing
operation such as [DELETE], [CUT], and [COPY]. Click
the [SELECT] soft key to select the start point of the range
to be selected, then use the cursor movement keys or the
search function to specify the end point of the selected
range. After you have selected nets, edit them by pressing
the appropriate editing soft key. While the multiple nets are
being selected, the information on the selected range is
displayed on the additional information line.
(g) [DELETE] Delete net
Deletes selected nets. The nets deleted by [DELETE] soft
key are lost. If you [DELETE] wrong nets, you have to
abandon the all modifications you have made, and restore
LADDER program to the original one before editing
operation by using the [RESTRE] soft key.
(h) [CUT] Cut nets
Cuts selected nets. The cut nets are preserved in Paste
Buffer, and disappear from diagram. The contents of Paste
Buffer before [CUT] operation are lost.
[CUT] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to move nets.
The Paste Buffer can contain approx. 8000 steps maximum,
and [CUT] may fail to cut nets of over 8000 steps.
(i) [COPY] Copy nets
Copy selected nets into Paste Buffer. No change on
diagram will be made. The contents of Paste Buffer before
[COPY] operation are lost.
[COPY] and [PASTE] soft keys are used to copy nets.
(j) [PASTE] Paste nets
Pastes nets at cursor position, which were stored into Paste
Buffer by [CUT] or [COPY] soft key.
Pressing [PASTE] soft key while selecting nets using
[SELECT] soft key, alters the selected nets with the nets in
Paste Buffer.
The contents of Paste Buffer will remain until turning NC
power off.
(k) [CHANGE ADRS] Change addresses
Switches to the mode in which the address alteration
function is enabled.
(l) [ADDRES MAP] Display the address map display screen
Displays the address map display screen to view references
of addresses in use.
(m) [UPDATE] Make changes effective
Reflects the results of the editing operations executed thus
far in the ladder program under execution. If it succeeds to
update running LADDER, edited LADDER starts to run.

- 622 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program
in wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, it may cause unexpected
reaction of the machine. You have to make it sure
that modifications you make on LADDER program is
appropriate, machine is in proper status, and nobody
is near the machine, when you update LADDER
program.

(n) [RESTRE] Abandon changes

Abandons all changes, and restores LADDER program to
the one at entering LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen,
or last updated one using [UPDATE] soft key. This soft
key is useful when you make wrong modifications and hard
to recover from them.
(o) [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings
Goes to setting screen for LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. You can change various settings for LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen at the screen. Use "EXIT" soft
key to return to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
(p) [RUN]/[STOP] Run and stop LADDER program
Controls LADDER program execution. [RUN] soft key
makes LADDER run, and [STOP] soft key makes
LADDER stop. If changes are reflected normally, the
LADDER program as edited will be executed at that point.

WARNING
You have to pay special attention to run/stop
LADDER program. Running/stopping LADDER
program in a wrong timing, or with machine in
improper status, may cause unexpected reaction of
machine. You have to make it sure that machine is in
proper status, and nobody is near the machine when
you run/stop LADDER program.

(q) [CANCEL EDIT] Abandon editing

Abandons all changes, and restores LADDER program to
the one at entering LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen,
or last updated one using [UPDATE] soft key. Switches to
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.

- 623 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(r) [EXIT] Exit Editor

Updates running LADDER program to edited LADDER
program, so that the all modifications will take effects, and
exits the editor screen. Pressing function keys such as the
SYSTEM key while editing a ladder diagram does not allow
you to move to another screen, unless you have finished
editing.

WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program
in wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, may cause unexpected
reaction of the machine.
You have to make it sure that modifications you make
on LADDER program is appropriate, machine is in
proper status, and nobody is near the machine, when
you update LADDER program.

(2) Other operations

(a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on
screen. When cursor is placed on some relay or some
address parameter of a functional instruction, the
information about the address under cursor is displayed at
"Additional Information Line".
(b) "bit address" + INPUT key
Changes bit address of relay under cursor.
(c) "number" or "byte address" + INPUT key
Changes parameter of functional instructions under cursor.
But, there are some parameters that can not change by this
operation. If you see a message that means that this
parameter can not be changed, use NET EDITOR screen to
change the parameter.
(3) Shortcuts
(a) Same shortcut search operations with LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen are available. For their
detail, see descriptions about shortcut operations of
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(b) Same shortcut operations using [LIST] soft key with
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen are available.
(4) Operation of the return key
On the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the return key
has no effect.
After you have finished editing ladder data, and want to return to
the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, use the [EXIT]
soft key.

- 624 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.2 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen

Fig. 8.3.2 LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen

(1) Display screen

The LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is partially displayed
on the screen.
The relays displayed here will change real-time by changing the
setting.

(2) Setting items

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen contains the
setting items below:
• ADDRESS NOTATION
Determines whether the bit and byte addresses in the
LADDER Diagram are displayed as corresponding symbols,
or the addresses themselves.
SYMBOL (default)
Addresses that have a symbol are displayed by the symbols.
Addresses without symbols are displayed by the addresses
themselves.
ADDRESS
All addresses are displayed as the addresses themselves
even if they have a symbol.

- 625 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

• SHOW COMMENT OF CONTACT

Set the style of relay comment. These are three options as
below. When you display relay comment, less ladder diagram
nets are shown.
NONE (default)
Relay comments are not displayed.
1 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in one line. Up to 8
characters can be displayed. Characters after 8th character
will not be displayed.
2 LINE
Relay comments are displayed in two lines. Up to 16
characters can be displayed.

Display styles of relay comment

NONE

1 LINE

2 LINE

• SHOW COMMENT OF COIL

Determines whether to show coil comments. Unlike the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, the gage indicating
the current display position is displayed at the right end of the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, regardless of this
setting.
YES (default)
Right margin of 2 lines of 15 characters is reserved for
display of coil comments.
NO
Right margin is used to extend diagram by one more relay,
instead of showing coil comment.

Show Coil comment setting

YES NO

- 626 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

• SUBPROGRAM NET NUMBER

Determines whether a net number is counted as "LOCAL"
starting from the top of current subprogram, or is counted as
"GLOBAL" starting from the top of whole program. This
setting also affects the expression of net number at searching
nets by number.
LOCAL
Net number starts from 1 at top of current subprogram. Net
number is defined only within current subprogram. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format "displaying range / nets in subprogram NET".
GLOBAL (default)
Net number starts from 1 at top of Level 1 program. Net
number is defined identically at whole of program. The net
number information at upper right of the screen is displayed
in the format "displaying range / subprogram range NET".

Definition of net number

LOCAL GLOBAL

Current Current
Subprogram Subprogram

- 627 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

• WRAP SEARCH ENABLED

Allows search process to wrap from top/bottom to bottom/top
to continue to search.
YES (default)
Downward search will continue to search from top of
LADDER when reaches to bottom. Upward search will
also continue to search from bottom when reaches to top.
NO
Search process will fail when reached top or bottom, and
displays an error message at Message Line.

Wrap search
YES NO

Not found

[PREV] [NEXT] [PREV] [NEXT]

Not found

• FORCE POSTPROCESS AFTER EDIT

Allows you to specify whether to always perform the
postprocessing necessary to operate a ladder program or
perform it only if the ladder program has been changed.
YES (default)
Postprocessing is always performed when you exit from the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. The
postprocessing checks the contents of the ladder diagram.
This means that merely by entering the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen and then exiting from it, the
contents of the ladder diagram is checked again.
NO
Postprocessing is performed only if the ladder program has
been changed. No postprocessing will be performed when
you enter the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen and
then exiting from it. This means that you can exit from the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen even if the ladder
program contains an error.

- 628 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

Page 3 of the setting screen

• DIAGRAM APPEARANCE SETTING

Changes the appearance of LADDER diagram. Lines, relays,
and functional instructions that constitute LADDER diagram
can be changed in the colors and the shapes. You can set
colors by entering their numbers. You can set 16 colors from
0 to 15. (Different numbers may correspond to the same
color.) You cannot set the same color number for the display
and background colors of the same portion.
BOLD DIAGRAM
Sets thickness of diagram lines. This setting also affects
shapes of relays.
YES (default)
Diagram is drawn with thick lines. Relays are drawn in
more distinct shapes.
NO
Diagram is drawn with thin lines. Relays are drawn in
smaller shapes.

Bold Diagram setting

YES

NO

- 629 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

ADDRESS COLOR
Colors for the relay address are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No.
15) are available. Foreground color should be different from
background one.
DIAGRAM COLOR
General color and its background color for LADDER Diagram.
SELECTED NET COLOR
Color setting for a selected net. The net subject to the editing
operation will be displayed in this color.
PROTECTED NET COLOR
Color setting for a net protected from an editing operation.
The protected net will not be selected as an object of editing.
When a subprogram is displayed, those nets that contain the
following functional instructions are protected so that they
cannot be deleted or entered.
END1 END3 SP
END2 END SPE
COMMENT COLOR
Colors for the relay comment are set. You can specify these
colors by entering color number. 16 colors (from No. 0 to No.
15) are available. Foreground color should be different from
background one.

(3) Soft keys

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen has the soft
keys of options and following:
• [INIT] Initialize all settings
All settings will be initialized to the default values.
• [EXIT] Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Ends the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR (SETTING) screen
and switches to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

- 630 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.3 NET EDITOR Screen

At NET EDITOR screen, you can create new net, and modify existing
net.

• Changing existing nets

If you move a net with the [ZOOM] soft key, you will enter a mode
(Modify mode) in which you can add changes to the net currently
indicated by the cursor.
• Adding a new net
When [CREATE NET] soft key is used, this screen is in "New
mode" to create new net from nothing.

Following operations are available at this screen:

• Place new contacts and coils "bit address" + [ ], [ ],
etc.
• Change type of contacts and coils [ ], [ ], etc.
• Place new functional instructions [FUNC]
• Change type of functional instructions [FUNC]
• Erase contacts, coils, and functional instructions [ ]
• Draw/erase connecting lines [ ], [ ], [ ]
• Edit data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
• Insert line/column [INSERT LINE], [INSERT COLUMN],
[APPEND COLUMN]
• Change address of contacts and coils "bit address" + INPUT key
• Change parameters of functional instructions "number" or "byte
address" + INPUT key
• Abandon modifications [CANCEL EDIT]
• Restore the net to the state it was before editing [RESTRE]

- 631 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

Fig. 8.3.3 (a) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen

(1) Screen structures
(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen, except that only one net is in this screen, and that
position bar at right edge of screen does not appear at this
screen.
(b) Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as
"NEW MODE" or "MODFY MODE". When [ZOOM] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to
reach NET EDITOR screen, the screen is in Modify mode,
and when [CREATE NET] soft key is used, it is in New
mode.
(c) Current net number is displayed at right of the top line. The
net number is same with the net number in previous
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
(d) NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for
a wider net according to its width, while LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen folds nets wider
than screen width. When net width is expanded over screen
width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction.
The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024 elements,
but actually available area may be little less for internal use
according to the internal condition: "element" means the
space that is occupied by single relay.

- 632 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(2) Operation with Soft-keys

Soft keys of Net Editor screen

Horizontal Automatic
A contact Normal coil connection Delete input

B contact Inverted coil Functional Left vertical Right vertical

instructions connection connection

Set coil Data table Edit next net Insert column Cancel edit

Reset coil Abandon changes Insert line Add column Exit

Fig. 8.3.3 (b) Soft keys of NET EDITOR screen

(a) [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ S ], [ R ]
Place relays (contacts and coils), or change type of existing
relays.
When one of these relay soft keys is pressed at cursor on
blank place, new relay of the soft key is placed under the
cursor. When the soft key follows a string that means a bit
address, the bit address is assigned to the newly placed relay.
If no bit address is given, last entered bit address is
automatically used for the new relay. If no bit address has
been entered yet, the new relay will have no address
assigned to it. Contacts can be placed at other than
rightmost column, and coils can be placed at rightmost
column only.
Moving cursor onto an existing relay, pressing a relay soft
key of different type changes the type of relay under the
cursor. But, changing coil to contact, and changing contact
to coil are forbidden.

Sample of contacts and coils

- 633 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(b) [FUNC] Enter and change functional instruction

Places functional instruction, or changes type of existing
functional instruction.
When [FUNC] soft key is pressed at cursor on blank place,
new functional instruction will be placed under the cursor:
list of available functional instructions is displayed, then
choose type of functional instruction to be entered. When
[FUNC] soft key follows a string that means number or
name of a functional instruction, the specified functional
instruction is entered directly, without the list screen.
Moving cursor onto an existing functional instruction,
pressing [FUNC] soft key changes the type of functional
instruction under the cursor.

(c) [ ] Draw horizontal connection

Draws horizontal connection line. Or alters an existing
relay to horizontal line.

(d) [ ] Erase relays and functional instructions

Erases relays and functional instructions under cursor.

(e) [ ], [ ] Draw and erase vertical connection

Draw vertical connection line upward from right or left
edge of relay or horizontal line under cursor. Or erase
existing vertical lines.
If the relay or line under the cursor has no vertical line
upward, these soft keys have solid arrows, and indicate that
pressing them means drawing lines. On the other hand, if a
vertical line already exists under the cursor, arrows in these
soft keys become pale ([ ], [ ]), and indicate
that pressing them means erasing lines.

Drawing and erasing vertical connection line

- 634 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(f) [AUTO] Automatic input of unused address/parameter

number
Executes the function for automatically inputting an unused
address or parameter number. For details of these functions,
see Sections 8.7 and 8.8.

(g) [DATA TABLE] Edit data table

Reaches FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen to edit data table of functional instruction
under cursor. This soft key appears only when cursor is on
a functional instruction that has data table with it.
For detail of editing operation of data table, see descriptions
of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen.

(h) [RESTRE] Restore net

Restores the currently edited net to the state it was before
the start of editing. If you called the NET EDITOR screen
with the [CREATE NET] soft key from the LADDER
DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the net will be restored to the
state in which it contains nothing; if you called the NET
EDITOR screen with the [ZOOM] soft key, the net will be
restored to the state it was before the changes.

- 635 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(i) [NEXT NET] Go to next net

Finishes editing current net, and goes to next net.
If [ZOOM] soft key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen is used to reach NET EDITOR screen, [NEXT NET]
will finish modifying current net, and the next net will be an
object of further editing operation.

Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in modifying an existing net

Net 1 Net 1
Net 2 Editing Net 2a Editing
Net 3 Net 2a Net 3 Net 3a
Net 4 Net 4
: :
: :

If [CREATE NET] soft key at LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen is used to reach NET EDITOR screen,
[NEXT NET] will finish creating current net, insert it into
the LADDER program, and start with blank to create
another new net to be inserted next to the current net.

Action of [NEXT NET] soft key in adding a new net

Net 1 Net 1
Net 2 Editing Net 2a Editing
Net 3 Net A Net A Net B
Net 4 Net 3
: Net 4
:
:

- 636 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(j) [INSERT LINE] Insert line

Inserts one blank line at cursor position. Diagram elements
at or below vertical cursor position will be shifted
downward by one line. Inserting line at middle of
functional instruction box will expand the box vertically to
make a space between the input conditions.

Action of inserting line

(k) [INSERT COLUMN] Insert column before cursor

Inserts one blank column at cursor position. Diagram
elements at or on right of horizontal cursor position will be
shifted to right by one column. And if there is no room to
shift the elements, a new column is added and the Diagram
area will be expanded to right.

Action of inserting column

- 637 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(l) [APPEND COLUMN] Insert column after cursor

Inserts one blank column at right of cursor position.
Diagram elements on right of horizontal cursor position will
be shifted to right by one column. And if necessary, net
will be expanded to right.

Action of appending column

(m) [CANCEL EDIT] Abandon changes

Restores the currently edited net to the state it was before
the start of editing and moves you to the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. If [CREATE NET] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to
reach NET EDITOR screen, it will be back to blank net, and
if [ZOOM] soft key is used, it will be back to the old net
before modifications in this screen.

(n) [EXIT] Exit editor screen

Analyzes current editing net, and store it into LADDER
program.
If some error is found in the net, it still remains NET
EDITOR screen, and an error message will be displayed.
According to a kind of error, cursor may indicate where the
error is detected.

- 638 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(3) Other operations

(a) Cursor move keys, Page change keys
Cursor move keys and Page change keys move cursor on
screen.
NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for
a wider net according to its width, while LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen folds nets wider
than screen width. When net width is expanded over screen
width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction. The net of maximum size occupies
area of 1024 elements, but actually available area may be
little less for internal use according to the internal condition:
"element" means the space that is occupied by single relay.
(b) "bit address" + INPUT key
Changes bit address of relay under cursor.
(c) "number" / "byte address" + INPUT key
Changes parameter of functional instructions under cursor.

(4) Operation of the return key

On the LADDER NET EDITOR screen, the return key has no
effect.
After you have finished editing ladder net data, and want to
return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.

- 639 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.3.4 Structure of Valid Net

Valid net must have following structure:

Convergence point

Output
Input section section

Structure of valid net

"Input section" consists of contacts and functional instruction, and the

result of operations of input section is led to "Convergence point".
After the convergence point, there is "Output section" that consists of
coils only. The "Convergence point" is the nearest point to right
power line, where all connections join with each other to gather into
single connection.

Sample of valid net

Convergence Output
Input section point section

Input section contains at least one relay or functional instruction,

however, output section may contain nothing.

Example of net with no output section

Valid net is also restricted in following rules:

• Only one functional instruction is available for a net.
• Functional instruction can be placed only at last (rightmost) of input
section.
• Only coils can be contained in output section.

- 640 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen

Pressing [FUNC] soft key at NET EDITOR screen reaches

FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST screen at which you choose a
functional instruction to be entered from list of all available functional
instructions.

Fig. 8.3.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST screen

Operations at this screen are below:

(1) Operation with soft keys

(a) [SELECT] Select a functional instruction
Selects a functional instruction. The functional instruction
is entered into the editing net.
(b) [SORT NUMBER], [SORT NAME] Rearrange functional
instructions list
Rearrange functional instructions list in two ways. [SORT
NUMBER] soft key arranges the list in numerical order
with their identifying numbers, on the other hand, [SORT
NAME] soft key arranges it in alphabetical order with their
names.
(c) [CANCEL] Quit selecting
Quits selecting functional instruction, and return to NET
EDITOR screen.

- 641 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(2) Other operations

(a) Cursor move keys
Cursor move keys move cursor on screen. According to the
cursor position, the functional instruction to be selected
changes.
(b) INPUT key
Act just like [SELECT] soft key.

(3) Shortcuts
(a) [SELECT] soft key and INPUT key following number or
name of a functional instruction will select the specified
functional instruction directly, instead of the one under
cursor.
(b) When [FUNC] soft key in NET EDITOR screen is pressed
following a string that means number or name of a
functional instruction, the specified functional instruction is
entered directly, without displaying FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION LIST screen.

- 642 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen

At FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen,

you can edit the contents of data table that belongs to some functional
instructions.
To reach this screen, at NET EDITOR screen, press [DATA TABLE]
soft key that is displayed when the cursor is on the following
functional instructions which have a data table.
• Functional Instruction COD (SUB7)
• Functional Instruction CODB (SUB27)
Following edit operations are available at this screen.
• Change the data table value "number" + INPUT key
• Change the data length [BYTE], [WORD], [DWORD]
(These soft keys can be operated only at FUNCTIONAL
INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen of Functional
Instruction CODB.)
• Change the number of data [COUNT]
• Initialize all of data [INIT]
• Switch to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen [EXIT]

Fig. 8.3.6 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen

(1) Screen structures

It is same with FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
VIEWER screen.

(2) Display data

The cursor is shown always. You can edit the data that is pointed
by the cursor.

- 643 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.3.7 Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE

EDITOR Screen

Soft keys of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen

of functional instruction COD

Soft keys of FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR screen

of functional instruction CODB

(1) [SEARCH NUMBER] Search for data table number

Searches the data table number which you specified.
(2) [SEARCH VALUE] Search for data value
Searches the data value which you specified.
(3) [BCD2] Display BCD2 digits
Changes the display data type to 2 digits of BCD. This operation
only switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data
on memory.
(4) [BCD4] Display BCD4 digits
Changes the display data type to 4 digits of BCD. This operation
only switches the display data type. So it does never edit the data
on memory.

NOTE
In the functional instruction COD (SUB7), the data
type of the data table can dynamically be changed
either BCD2 or BCD4 by "BYT" which is one of input
condition. So the data type of the data table is
decided when the functional instruction COD is
executed. Decide the display data digit according to
the status of "BYT" by pressing either [BCD2] soft
key or [BCD4] soft key. After turning the power on,
the default displaying data type is BCD4 digits. But if
you change data type by pressing [BCD2] soft key or
[BCD4] soft key, the data type is kept until you
change again.
The data table of functional instruction COD is stored
in the memory as BCD4 digits type. If you change
the data type from BCD4 digits to BCD2 digits, the
data is displayed without higher 2-digits. But the data
of higher 2-digits is kept in the memory. So you
return the data type from BCD2 digits to BCD4 digits,
the former BCD4 digits is recovered. The input range
of the data obeys the current data type.

- 644 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(5) [BYTE] Change to the BYTE length

Changes data length to 1 byte. If overflowed data is found, the
cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and
press [BYTE] soft key again.
(6) [WORD] Change to the 2 BYTE length
Changes data length to 2 byte. If overflowed data is found, the
cursor points it, and this operation aborts. Then, correct it and
press [WORD] soft key again.
(7) [DWORD] Change to the 4 BYTE length
Changes data length to 4 byte.

NOTE
On functional instruction CODB, the data type is
decided by the first parameter of it. So, if you change
data type, the first parameter is changed too.
When you added functional instruction CODB to
ladder program, the default data type is BYTE.

(8) [COUNT] Change the number of data

Changes the number of data. If you expanded the number of data,
"0" is set to expanded data as default.

NOTE
In case of functional instruction COD, the number of
data is decided by the first parameter of it. In case of
functional instruction CODB, the number of data is
decided by the second parameter of it. If you change
the number of data, these parameters are changed
too.

(9) [INIT] Initialize all of data

Initializes all of data to "0". The number of data is not changed.
(10) [EXIT] Exit Editor
Ends the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen and switches to NET EDITOR screen.
(11) Cursor move keys, page change keys
You can move the cursor by all cursor move keys and page
change keys.
(12) Operation of the return key
On the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR screen, the return key has no effect.
After you have finished editing ladder net data, and want to
return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.

- 645 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(13) "number" + INPUT key

Changes the data that is pointed by the cursor.
The input range of the data obeys the data length and the display
data type.
Ex.) The case of functional instruction COD and displaying
BCD2 digits
The available data range: 0 to 99
Ex.) The case of functional instruction CODB and length of 2
BYTE
The available data range: -32768 to 32767
And you can input multiple numbers by the following methods.
(a) ";"(EOB) is used for separating data.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing "100;200;300;"
(b) ";=" is used for inputting the same value as preceding data.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing "100;=;=;200;=",
and it becomes "100,100,100,200,200".
(c) ";;" is used for skipping an input address.
(Ex.) Press the INPUT key after typing "100;;100". The
second data is not inputted.

- 646 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen

At PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen you can create new program

and delete a program in addition to the function of PROGRAM LIST
VIEWER screen. To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Following operations are
available at PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen. For more detail of
these operations, see the descriptions of each key to operate.
• Create new program [NEW]
• Delete a program [DELETE]

Fig. 8.3.8 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen

On the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen, a preview of the editor

screen for the ladder program currently positioned by the cursor on the
program list is displayed on the right of the screen.

(1) Operations using the soft keys

Soft keys of Program List Editor screen

Display the contents of program Add new program

Search for program Delete a program

Soft keys of PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen

(a) [ZOOM] Display the contents of program

Goes to LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

- 647 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(b) [SEARCH] Search for program

Searches for a program. Pressing [SEARCH] soft key after
entering a program name or symbol name searches for
program corresponding to the input character string and
moves the cursor to the program.
(c) [NEW] Create new program
If you entered program name or symbol and press [NEW]
soft key, the program will be checked its existence. If such
program is not found, new program will be created. The
created program is inserted automatically into the program
list and the cursor points it. The following ladder nets are
created automatically according to the type of created
program by this operation.
LEVEL1: Functional instruction END1
LEVEL2: Functional instruction END2
LEVEL3: Functional instruction END3
Subprogram: Functional instruction SP, SPE
If the status of protection of the program is enabled to edit,
this operation is available.
(d) [DELETE] Delete a program
Deletes a program. If you entered no strings and press
[DELETE] soft key, the program under the cursor is deleted.
If you entered program name or symbol and press
[DELETE] soft key, the program will be checked its
existence, and will be deleted if such program is found.
But, GLOBAL, LEVEL1 and LEVEL2 should always exist
on program list. If you delete these programs, the contents
of program are abandoned. But these programs do not
disappear on program list.
If the status of protection of the program is enabled to edit,
this operation is available.

- 648 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.3.9 Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen

Fig. 8.3.9 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR (SETTING) screen

(1) Program list screen setting

To set the program list screen, use the [SCREEN SETING] soft
key on the Ladder screen.
Page 2 of the ladder setting screen, contains the setting items for
the program list screen.

• FRAME NET IN SUBPROGRAM MODE

Frame nets refer to function instructions END1, END2, END3
at LEVEL1, LEVEL2, and LEVEL3 and function instructions
SP and SPE in subprograms. When you display the contents
of a program with the [ZOOM] key from the PROGRAM
LIST VIEWER/EDITOR screens, specify whether or not to
display these frame nets.
SHOW (default)
Displays frame nets on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
HIDE
Hides frame nets from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR/EDITOR screens.

- 649 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.4 SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE NECESSARY

LADDER NET ([SWITCH] SCREEN])

8.4.1 Collective Monitor Function

The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen allows you to specify the

ladder net containing the coils to be monitored, so that you can
monitor only the necessary ladder net.
The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen can be called in either of the
following ways:

(1) Calling from the PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

On the program list screen, move the cursor to the "COLLECT"
program position, then click the [ZOOM] soft key.

Fig. 8.4.1 (a) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

- 650 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(2) Calling from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

On the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click the
[SWITCH] soft key.

Fig. 8.4.1 (b) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

- 651 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.4.2 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function

The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is such as that shown below.

At first, it does not display any ladder diagram. Ladder nets will be
added to this screen as they are selected with coil search and pickup
operations. Up to 128 nets can be added to the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. If an attempt is made to add more, the most
recently added 128 nets will be displayed.

Fig. 8.4.2 (a) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen (initial screen)

(1) Operations using the soft keys

Soft keys of Collective Monitor screen

Initialization of COLLECTIVE
Program List Jump to the ladder diagram net MONITOR screen

Pick up a ladder Switches to LADDER Delete a net Screen setting

diagram net DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

Fig. 8.4.2 (b) Soft keys of COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

(a) [LIST] Calling PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen.

Calls PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen. On PROGRAM
LIST VIEWER screen, you can switch subprograms to be
displayed on LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.

- 652 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(b) [PICKUP] Picking up ladder nets.

Picks up ladder nets with coil which you want to monitor,
on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
(c) [JUMP] Jump to a ladder net.
On LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, search the
ladder net at a cursor position on COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen and jumps to the ladder net.
(d) [SWITCH] Switches to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen.
Switches to LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(e) [DELETE] Quits to display a ladder diagram net on the
screen. (1 net)
Quits to display a ladder diagram net (only 1 net) which is
picked up on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen. This soft
key appears by setting "SHOW CURSOR" to "YES" on the
setting screen.
(f) [DELETE ALL] Erases to display a ladder diagram net on
the screen. (all nets)
Erases to display ladder diagram nets (all net) which is
picked up on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen.
(g) [SCREEN SETING] Screen settings.
Calling the setting screen for COLLECTIVE MONITOR
screen. You can change each settings of a ladder diagram
display. Return to COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen when
press the [EXIT] soft key.

(2) Specifying the ladder diagram to monitor

The operation for picking up ladder nets which you want to
monitor on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is as follows.
(a) Specification of ladder nets on COLLECTIVE MONITOR
screen
• Specify the address by key input
Pick up a ladder net by keying in the address used by a
coil.
• Indication from a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen
Indicate a relay on an already picked up ladder net, with
the cursor, to pick up the net that uses the relay address
for the coil.
(b) Specifying a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen
Specify a net from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen to pick it and load it into the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.

- 653 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(3) Picking up a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

You can pick up a ladder net from the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) Address specification
(i) Enter the address to monitor (for example, R10.1).
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen.
(b) Specification of an address from a ladder net on the screen
(i) Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net that uses
the address you want to monitor.
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen, and the cursor moves to the specified coil
position.

Fig. 8.4.2 (c) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

- 654 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(4) Picking up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM

MONITOR screen
You can pick up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) From the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click
the [SEARCH] soft key to display the soft keys for search.
(b) Move the cursor to the ladder net to pick up.
(c) Click the [PICKUP] soft key to pick up and load the net
specified in (b) at the beginning of the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.
(d) For the ladder net picked up and loaded into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen, the "•" mark is
displayed at the left end of the net.

Fig. 8.4.2 (d) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen (search soft keys)

- 655 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.5 ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION

You can alter the address used in a ladder program with another
address.
To perform address change, click the [CHANGE ADRS] soft key to
switch to address change mode.

- 656 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.5.1 Screen Structures

LADDER diagram display area

Address input line Message display line Key input line

(1) Key input line

Area in which data is displayed as it is keyed in.
(2) Message display line
Area in which confirmation and error messages are displayed.
(3) Address input line
Enter the address used in the ladder program in the "OLD
ADDRESS" field and a new address into the "NEW ADDRESS"
field.
You can enter either PMC addresses or symbols as addresses.

- 657 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.5.2 Operating on the Screen

(1) Entering an address

You can enter an address by entering a "character string" and
pressing the [INPUT] key.

• Address specification using a wildcard

You can use a wildcard (*) in the bit portion of a bit address.
Example: X100.*, which represents X100.0 to X100.7

The following input examples result in errors (invalid input).

(a) Use of a wildcard in a symbol
Example: ALWYS*
(b) Use of a wildcard in a portion other than the bit portion of a
bit address
Example: X10*.0, X10*.*
(c) Use of a wildcard in a byte address
Example: X10*

(2) Operation with soft keys

Address alteration function soft keys

Search in the backward direction

Alter to the address specified in the NEW ADDRESS field
Acquire the address
Alter to the address specified in the NEW ADDRESS field at once
indicated by the cursor

Switch the cursor position Check the address to use Exit from the address alteration function

Move a symbol Search in the forward direction Specify the area subject to search and alteration

Address alteration function soft keys

(a) [ALTER] Alter to the address specified in the NEW

ADDRESS field
Alters the address indicated by the cursor in the ladder
diagram display area to the address specified in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field.
This soft key is not displayed if the cursor in the ladder
diagram does not indicate an address that can be altered.

- 658 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

(b) [ALTER ALL] Alter to the address specified in the NEW

ADDRESS field at once
Alters all instances of the address specified in the "OLD
ADDRESS" field to the address specified in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field at once. If a whole program is selected,
alteration will take place globally. If a local program is
selected, alteration will take place locally.
The following messages are displayed at the start and end of
alteration.

(Confirmation message before alteration)

DO YOU ALTER ALL OLD ADDRESS IN GLOBAL?
(At the end of alteration)
ADDRESSES WERE ALTERED INTO "XXXXX" IN
THE GLOBAL.

(c) [<=>] Switch the cursor position

Switches the cursor position between "OLD ADDRESS"
and "NEW ADDRESS" alternately.

(d) [MOVE SYMBOL] Move a symbol

Deletes the symbol of the address in the "OLD ADDRESS"
field and redefines it for the address in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field.
The following messages are displayed at the start and end of
alteration.

(Confirmation message before alteration)

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO MOVE THE
SYMBOL?
(At the end of alteration)
THE SYMBOL WAS MOVED.

(e) [USE CHECK] Check the address to use

Checks to see if the address specified in the "NEW
ADDRESS" field is in use by searching for the address
through the ladder diagram.

(f) [PREV] Search in the backward direction

Searches for the address specified in the "OLD ADDRESS"
field through the ladder diagram in the backward direction.

(g) [NEXT] Search in the forward direction

Searches for the address specified in the "OLD ADDRESS"
field through the ladder diagram in the forward direction.

- 659 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

(h) [GLOBAL/LOCAL] Specify the area subject to search and

alteration
Used to specify either the entire program (global) or the
subprogram (local) as the area subject to search and
alteration in the ladder diagram.
This soft key is displayed when a local program is selected
in the program list screen.

(i) [PICKUP ADRS] Acquire the address indicated by the

cursor
Used to pick up and load the address indicated by the cursor
in the ladder diagram into the "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" field.

(j) [EXIT] Exits from the address alternation function

Exits from the address alteration function and returns you to
the ladder edit functions.
To use the address alteration function again, press the
[CHANGE ADRS] key while the ladder edit functions are
displayed.

- 660 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.6 FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE

You can switch the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen to the

address map display screen where you can view a list of addresses in
use.
The address map display screen displays 24-byte bit map starting at
any address.
Those "addresses not referenced in ladder diagrams that have
symbols/comments defined" are also displayed.

- 661 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.6.1 Address Map Display Screen

Clicking the [ADDRESS MAP] soft key on the ladder editor screen
causes that screen to switch to the address map display screen.

(1) Address representation

By representing each bit as described below, the status of PMC
addresses in use are indicated.
Blank: Address bit not in use
*: Address bit in use (When a byte is used, an asterisk (*) is
displayed to the left of the address representation.)
*R100 • • • • • • • •: R100 is byte reference.
R101 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗: R101.0 to R101.7 are bit reference,
respectively.
*R102 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗: Either byte or bit reference
S: Bit not referenced in the ladder diagram but that has a
symbol/comment defined.

(2) Additional display line

Any symbol/comment of the address at the cursor position is
displayed in the additional display line.

- 662 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.6.2 Operating on the Screen

(1) Operation with soft keys

(a) [SEARCH] Search for an address

Searches for the specified address and displays it as the start
address of the address map display.
(b) [SEARCH UNUSED] Search for unused address
Displays an address map centering on the unused address
with the smallest number found from the specified address
(if not specified, the address at which the cursor is currently
located) and containing the preceding and succeeding 12
bytes, 24 bytes in total.

NOTE
1 Parameters of functional instructions are handled as
addresses in use with a length of one byte,
regardless of the data length of the parameters.
2 The range of the addresses to be searched for is
determined by the specified address.
Example: When R100.0 is specified, R100.0 to
R7999.7 are searched for.
3 The following addresses are not subject to unused
address search:
X/Y1000 to X/Y1127, R9000 to R9499, T0 to T499,
T9000 to T9499, C0 to C399, C5000 to C5199,
K900 to K999, A9000 to A9249, P1 to P5000, and
L1 to L9999

(c) [JUMP]
Moves you to the net in which the bit address at the cursor
position is in use. At this time, the soft keys will be those of
a search menu, allowing lap search with a single round,
regardless of the ladder screen settings.
(d) [EXIT]
Switches the screen to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. At this time, the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen displays the ladder net that it displayed before the
switch to this screen.

(2) Other operations with keys

You can use the page switch keys to switch between pages.
You cannot scroll with the cursor movement keys.

- 663 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

8.7 FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT UNSUSED

ADDRESSES

This function automatically inputs unused R, D, and E addresses

during ladder editing.

Specifying an unused start address

Enter any R, D, or E address and click the [AUTO] soft key.

The system searches for an unused bit through a list of addresses in
the ascending order, starting at that address, inputs the unused address
of the unused bit and places that address at the top of the list of unused
addresses. If you repeat this operation, the unused start address will
be updated. This address is not displayed on the screen. Upon the
completion of editing, the stored unused start address is abandoned.

Automatic input of R, D, or E address

After you have specified an unused start address, entering a single

address character "R", "D", or "E" and clicking the [AUTO] soft key
causes an unused bit address subsequent to the specified unused
address to be automatically input.
For the R address, a simpler operation is available: Merely clicking
the [AUTO] soft key enables automatic input.
If you perform this operation without specifying an unused start
address, the system searches for unused bit, starting at the first address
of the specified address type.
If an address used by a functional instruction parameter before a
search for an unused address is found, the following message will be
displayed and the search for an unused bit will be stopped to avoid the
simultaneous uses of the address.

NO FREE ADDRESS IS FOUND BEFORE Xxxxx.

NOTE
This operation is available to bit addresses only.
You cannot automatically input byte addresses.

- 664 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.8 AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED PARAMETER

NUMBERS

This function automatically inputs the unused numbers for the

parameters of functional instructions during ladder editing.

Operation

This function is applicable to the first parameters of the following

functional instructions.
SUB3 (TMR)
SUB5 (CTR)
SUB24 (TMRB)
SUB57 (DIFU)
SUB58 (DIFD)

Moving the cursor to one of these parameters and clicking the

[AUTO] soft key causes an unused parameter number to be input.

NOTE
Special specifications apply to SUB3 (TMR) and
SUB5 (CTR). For details, see "Automatic input of the
TMR parameter of a functional instruction" and
"Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional
instruction", described later.

If you perform this operation with a parameter number already input,

an unused parameter number subsequent to that number will be set.
If an attempt is made to perform this operation on a function
instruction to which this operation is not applicable, the following
error message will be displayed.

CANNOT PERFORM "AUTO" ON THE INSTRUCTION.

If no unused numbers for parameters are found, the following error

message will be displayed.

NO UNUSED PARAMETER NUMBER.

- 665 -
8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]) B-63983EN/01

Automatic input of the TMR parameter of a functional instruction

When inputting the TMR parameter, you must consider precision.

(1) Range of parameter numbers subject to this automatic input

Timer numbers with their precision default setting being 8 ms
(timer number 9 and subsequent numbers) are assumed to be
subject to this automatic input.

(2) Display of setting and precision of an input timer number

The setting and precision of an input timer number are displayed
in the additional display line in the following format:

TMR-number xx: setting xxxxxxxxxx precision xxMS

Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional instruction

(1) Display of the setting and current value of an input counter

number
The setting and precision of an input counter number are
displayed in the additional display line in the following format:

CTR-number xx: setting xxxxxxxxxx current-value

xxxxxxx

- 666 -
B-63983EN/01 8.LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])

8.9 DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS

This function automatically detects double coils when you edit WRT
coils with ladder editing operations.

Time to check

When you edit WRT coils, this function always detects double coils.
When the check makes a hit, the following message is displayed:

Xxxxx.x IS USED IN NET xxxxx AS COIL.

WRT coil editing refers to the following:

• Creation of a new WRT coil and change of a coil to a WRT
coil
• Creation of a new WRT.NOT coil and change of a coil to a
WRT.NOT coil
• Creation of a new SET/RST coil and change of a coil to a
SET/RST coil

Objects of the check

Only WRT coils are the objects of this check.

Thus, the following are not the object of this check:
• Output parameters of functional instructions

- 667 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING

SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])
The PMC configuration menu is used to display screens related to
PMC configuration data that change the target PMC, and display and
edit PMC data.
You can move to the PMC configuration menu by pressing the
[SYSTEM] key, then the [PMC CONFIG] soft key.

SYSTEM

PMC main menu PMC submenu

PMC configuration menu
PMC CONFIG TITLE Title display/edit screens

< CONFIG PARAM Configuration parameter screens

Setting screens (for general functions, multi-
SETING language message function, selectable I/O Link
assignment function, and override mode)
PMC STATUS PMC status screen

SYSTEM PARAM System parameter display/edit screens

MODULE I/O module display/edit screens

SYMBOL Symbol and comment display/edit screens

MESAGE Message display/edit screens

ONLINE Online monitor parameter setting screen

- 668 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.1 DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA ([TITLE]

SCREENS)

9.1.1 Displaying Title Data

On the TITLE DATA screen, you can check the title data items and
some ladder information items. To switch to the TITLE DATA screen,
press the [TITLE] soft key.
On the TITLE DATA screen, you can perform the following
operations:
• Moving to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen [EDIT]

Title data display area

PMC basic software type and

sequence program PMC type

PMC basic software series and edition

Amount of memory occupied by each set of sequence data

Key input line

Message display line
Current, maximum, and minimum
execution time of the ladder program

The title data corresponds to the title of a sequence program. It

consists of the following ten items:
• Machine tool builder name (32 characters)
• Machine name (32 characters)
• NC/PMC type (32 characters)
• Program number (sequence program number) (4 characters)
• Edition (2 characters)
• Program drawing number (sequence program drawing number)
(32 characters)
• Creation date (sequence program creation date) (16 characters)
• Creator name (sequence program creator name) (32 characters)
• ROM writer operator name (32 characters)
• Comment (32 characters)

- 669 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

In addition, the following data is displayed:

• PMC basic software series and edition
• Amount of memory occupied by each set of sequence data
• PMC basic software type and sequence program PMC type
• Current, maximum, and minimum execution time of the ladder
program

Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Title Data screen

Switch to the editor screen

Fig. 9.1.1 Soft keys on the TITLE DATA screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [EDIT] Switch to the editor screen
Switches to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen.

CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen. For
details, see Section 6.2.

- 670 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.1.2 Editing Title Data

On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, you can edit title data items.
To switch to the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft
key on the TITLE DATA screen.
On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, you can perform the following
operations:
• Changing the input mode [INPUT MODE]
• Deleting title data [DELETE]
• Moving to the TITLE DATA screen [EXIT]

Input mode

Title data edit area

Key input line

Message display line

Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Title Data Editor screen

Change the input mode Move to the PMC Title Data screen

Delete title data

Fig. 9.1.2 Soft keys on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen

- 671 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [INPUT MODE] Change the input mode
Pressing [INPUT MODE] changes the input mode. The
selection cycles in the following order. In the insert mode,
"INSERT" appears on the screen; in the replace mode,
"ALTER" appears.

Full-string Insert Replace

input mode mode

• Full-string input
The entire string at the cursor is selected and replaced
with an input string.
• Insert mode
Input characters are inserted at the cursor. Pressing the
INPUT key with inputting no characters inserts one space.
• Replace mode
Input characters replace characters at and after the cursor.
Pressing the INPUT key with inputting no characters
replaces the character at the cursor with a space.

(b) [DELETE] Delete characters

Deletes selected characters.

(c) [EXIT] Switch to the TITLE DATA screen

Terminates editing of title data and moves to the TITLE
DATA screen.

(2) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor keys to select characters to be edited.

(3) RETURN key operation

On the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen, the return key operation
is disabled.
To terminate title editing and return to the TITLE DATA screen,
use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 672 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.2 DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT

DATA ([SYMBOL] SCREENS)

9.2.1 Displaying Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen, you can

check symbol and comment data items defined for each address byte
or bit used by a ladder program.

Symbol and comment display area Scroll bar

Total amount of memory occupied

by symbol and comment data
Amount of memory Amount of memory occupied
occupied by symbol data by comment data

Message display line Key input line

ADDRESS: Displays the byte or bit addresses for

which a symbol or comment is
registered.
SYMBOL: Displays the symbol for each address
(16 characters).
COMMENT: Displays the comment for the address
(30 characters).
Scroll bar: Indicates the position of the current
displayed data.
Amount of occupied memory: The amounts of memory occupied by
symbol data and of that occupied by
comment data, and total amount of
memory occupied by symbol and
comment data are displayed under the
symbol and comment display.

- 673 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operations

Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen

Switch to the editor screen Search for data

Fig. 9.2.1 Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [EDIT] Switch to the editor screen
Moves to the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR
screen.
(b) [SEARCH] Search for data
Searches for the address corresponding to the input string or
an address for which symbol or comment data containing
the input string is defined and displays it on the screen.
Both bit and byte addresses can be searched for.

(2) Screen operations using other keys

Cursor keys: Move the cursor.
Page keys: Scroll the screen up or down one page.

CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR
screen.
For details, see Section 6.2.

- 674 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.2.2 Editing Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, you can

define a symbol for a desired address byte or bit and add a comment.
You can also change already defined symbol and comment data.

Amount of unused memory for

symbol and comment data

Amount of unused memory:

The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment data
is displayed under the symbol and comment display.

- 675 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operations
Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen

Register a new entry Delete all data

Terminate editing

Delete data Search for data

Change data or register changed data as a new entry

Fig. 9.2.2 Soft keys on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [ZOOM] Change data or register changed data as a new
entry
Switches to the screen for changing data of the entry at the
cursor or registering the changed data as a new entry.
(b) [NEW ENTRY] Register a new entry
Switches to the screen for registering a new entry.
(c) [DELETE] Delete data
Deletes symbol and comment data at the cursor.
(d) [DELETE ALL] Delete all data
Deletes all symbol and comment data.
(e) [SEARCH] Search for data
Searches for the address corresponding to the input string or
an address for which symbol or comment data containing
the input string is defined and displays it on the screen.
Both bit and byte addresses can be searched for.
(f) [EXIT] Terminate editing
Switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER
screen.

- 676 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(2) Editing a set of symbol and comment data at a time

An address, symbol, and comment are input at a time.
Enter a symbol and comment following an address with
delimiting them by non-alphanumeric characters as shown below
and press the INPUT key. Symbol or comment data can be
omitted.
address/symbol/comment/ INPUT key ("/" is a non-
alphanumeric character.)

Example 1: Inputs an address, symbol, and comment. A slash

“/” is used as a delimiter.
G0.4/*EMG/EMERGENCYSW/INPUT key

Example 2: Omits a comment. A slash “/” is used as a delimiter.

G0.4/*EMG// INPUT key
G0.4/*EMG/ INPUT key
G0.4/*EMG INPUT key

To update symbol or comment data for an existing address, move

the cursor to the target address and enter symbol or comment
data with omitting the address.

Example 3: Omits an address and inputs symbol and comment

data. A slash “/” is used as a delimiter.
/*EMG/EMERGENCYSW/INPUT key

In this case, when symbol or comment data is omitted, the

displayed data is not changed.

(3) Screen operations using other keys

Cursor keys: Move the cursor.
Page keys: Scroll the screen up or down one page.

(4) RETURN key operation

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, the
return key operation is disabled.
To terminate editing of symbol and comment data and return to
the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen, use the
[EXIT] soft key.

- 677 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.2.3 Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, pressing

the [ZOOM] soft key displays the following screen. At the bottom of
the screen, the area for editing a symbol and comment data entry
appears. You can define a symbol for a desired address byte or bit
and add a comment. You can also change already defined symbol and
comment data.
For a registered data entry, you can edit the address, symbol, and
comment in character units.

Area for editing a symbol

and comment data entry

Amount of unused memory for

symbol and comment data

Key input line Message display line

Amount of unused memory:

The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment
data is displayed.
Area for editing a symbol and comment data entry:
Enter an address, symbol data, and comment data.

- 678 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Screen operations

Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen

Replace an entry Delete characters

Change the input mode New entry Cancel edits

Fig. 9.2.3 Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [INPUT MODE] Change the input mode
Pressing [INPUT MODE] changes the input mode. The
selection cycles in the following order. In the insert mode,
"INSERT" appears on the screen; in the replace mode,
"ALTER" appears.

Full-string Insert Replace

input mode mode

• Full-string input
The entire string at the cursor is selected and replaced
with an input string.
• Insert mode
Input characters are inserted at the cursor. Pressing the
INPUT key with inputting no characters inserts one space.
• Replace mode
Input characters replace characters at and after the cursor.
Pressing the INPUT key with inputting no characters
replaces the character at the cursor with a space.
(b) [ALTER] Replace an entry
Replaces the target entry with edit data. When the data in
the address field is updated and the address is a new one,
the original data corresponding to the old address is deleted
and the edit data is registered as a new entry. If an address
to be registered as a new one is already registered, a
confirmation message appears, which asks you if you are
sure to overwrite the old data.

- 679 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(c) [ADD LINE] New entry

Registers input data as a new entry. If the address of the
new entry is already registered, a confirmation message
appears, which asks you if you are sure to overwrite the old
data.
(d) [DELETE] Delete characters
Performs either of the following deletions:
• In the full-string input mode
Deletes the string at the cursor.
• In the insert or replace mode
Deletes one character at the cursor.
(e) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits
Cancels edits and switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen. The data is not updated.

(2) RETURN key operation

On the symbol & comment data entry editor screen, the return
key operation is disabled. To terminate editing of a symbol and
comment data entry and return to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 680 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.2.4 Registering New Symbol and Comment Data

On the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen, pressing

the [NEW ENTRY] soft key displays the following screen. At the
bottom of the screen, the area for editing a symbol and comment data
entry appears. You can register new entry data.

Area for editing a symbol

and comment data entry

Amount of unused memory for

symbol and comment data

Key input line

Message display line

Amount of unused memory:

The amount of unused memory for editing symbol and comment
data is displayed.
Area for editing a symbol and comment data entry:
Enter an address, symbol data, and comment data.

- 681 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operations

Symbol & comment data entry editor screen

Delete characters

Change the input mode New entry Cancel edits

Fig. 9.2.4 Soft keys on the symbol & comment data entry editor screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [INPUT MODE] Change the input mode
Pressing [INPUT MODE] changes the input mode. The
selection cycles in the following order. In the insert mode,
"INSERT" appears on the screen; in the replace mode,
"ALTER" appears.

Full-string Insert Replace

input mode mode

• Full-string input
The entire string at the cursor is selected and replaced
with an input string.
• Insert mode
Input characters are inserted at the cursor. Pressing the
INPUT key with inputting no characters inserts one space.
• Replace mode
Input characters replace characters at and after the cursor.
Pressing the INPUT key with inputting no characters
replaces the character at the cursor with a space.
(b) [ADD LINE] Register new entry data
Registers input data as a new entry. If the address of the
new entry is already registered, a confirmation message
appears, which asks you if you are sure to overwrite the old
data.
(c) [DELETE] Delete entry data
Performs either of the following deletions:
• In the full-string input mode
Deletes the string at the cursor.
• In the insert or replace mode
Deletes one character at the cursor.

- 682 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(d) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits

Cancels edits and switches to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen. The data is not updated.
(2) Screen operation using other keys
Cursor keys: Move the cursor.
(3) RETURN key operation
On the symbol & comment data entry editor screen, the return
key operation is disabled. To terminate editing of a symbol and
comment data entry and return to the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 683 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.3 DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA ([MESAGE]

SCREENS)

9.3.1 Displaying Message Data

On the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, you can check each

external message data item output to the NC screen by functional
instruction DISPB.
To display the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, press the
[MESAGE] soft key. On the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen,
you can perform the following operations:
• Moving to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen [EDIT]
• Searching for message data [SEARCH]
• Displaying double-byte characters [DOUBLE CHAR]

Simple message data display area

Detailed message data display

Key input line Message display line

Description of items in the table

• ADDRESS: Message address
• MON: Current status of the message requests (A addresses)
• NO.: Message number
• MESSAGE: Message data

- 684 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Screen configuration
(1) On the screen, message addresses, message requesting monitors,
message numbers, and message data are displayed from left to
right. A message requesting monitor indicates the status of the
signal (A addresses) of the message address. In the simple
message data display area, the first line of data is displayed.
(2) In the detailed message data display at the bottom of the screen,
message data at the cursor is all displayed.
(3) On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error
message appears when issued.

Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Message Data Viewer screen

Switch to the editor screen Display double-byte characters

Search for message data

Fig. 9.3.1 Soft keys on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [SEARCH] Search for message data
Searches for the address for which message data containing
an address, message number, or string corresponding to the
input string is set and displays the message data on the
screen.
When a byte address is searched for, a bit 0 address is found.
Example)
When A2 is searched for, the cursor moves to A2.0.

(b) [EDIT] Switch to the editor screen

Moves to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen.

NOTE
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen. For
details, see Section 6.2.

- 685 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(c) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters

Displays a character code enclosed by at signs (@) with the
corresponding character actually displayed.
Example)

To terminate double-character display, press the [EXIT] soft

key.

(2) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor and page keys to change the message data in the
detailed message data display.

- 686 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.3.2 Editing Message Data

On the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, you can edit message data
items.
To move to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT]
soft key on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. On the
MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, you can perform the following
operations:
• Moving to the message data entry editor screen [ZOOM]
• Searching for message data [SEARCH]
• Displaying double-byte characters [DOUBLE CHAR]
• Moving to the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen [EXIT]
• Selecting multiple entries [SELECT]
• Deleting an entry [DELETE]
• Moving an entry [CUT] and [PASTE]
• Copying an entry [COPY] and [PASTE]
• Deleting all entries [DELETE ALL]

Message data edit area

Detailed message data display

Key input line Message display line

Screen configuration
(1) On the screen, message addresses, message numbers, and
message data are displayed from left to right. In the message
data edit area, the first line of data is displayed.
(2) In the detailed message data display at the bottom of the screen,
message data at the cursor is all displayed.
(3) On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error
message appears when issued.

- 687 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operations
Soft keys on the PMC Message Data Editor screen

Delete an entry

Search for message data Switch to the display screen

Cut an entry

Display Copy an entry

Display the entry editor screen double-byte

Paste an entry
Select multiple entries

Delete all entries

Fig. 9.3.2 Soft keys on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [ZOOM] Switch to the entry editor screen
Moves to the entry editor screen for message data to edit
entry data at the cursor.
(b) [SEARCH] Search for message data
Searches for an address, message number, or message data
string. The operation method conforms to that for
[SEARCH] on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen.
For details, see "Screen operations" for the MESSAGE
DATA VIEWER screen.
(c) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters
Displays a character code enclosed by at signs (@) with the
corresponding character actually displayed.
The operation method conforms to that for [DOUBLE
CHAR] on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. For
details, see "Screen operations" for the MESSAGE DATA
VIEWER screen.
(d) [EXIT] Switch to the display screen
Terminates editing of message data and moves to the
MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen.

- 688 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(e) [SELECT] Select multiple entries

Use this key to specify multiple entries to be edited with a
soft key such as [DELETE]. Pressing this soft key puts the
screen into the mode for selecting multiple entries starting
from the entry being edited at that time. Move the cursor
and use the search function so that the entries to be edited
are selected. After the entries to be edited are selected, edit
them by pressing each edit soft key. When you want to
delete, move, or copy multiple entries, use this soft key to
select multiple entries.
(f) [DELETE] Delete an entry
Deletes a selected entry.
(g) [CUT] Cut an entry
Cuts a selected entry. The cut data is transferred to the
pasting buffer and deleted from message data. The contents
of the pasting buffer before the data is transferred are erased.
When you want to move data from an entry to another, use
this soft key together with the [PASTE] soft key.
(h) [COPY] Copy an entry
Transfers a selected entry to the pasting buffer. The
message data is not changed. The contents of the pasting
buffer before the data is transferred are erased. When you
want to copy data in an entry to another, use this soft key
together with the [PASTE] soft key.
(i) [PASTE] Paste an entry
Replaces data at the cursor with the entry transferred to the
pasting buffer by the [CUT] or [COPY] soft key. When the
contents of the pasting buffer are pasted by pressing the
[PASTE] soft key, they are not erased. The contents of the
pasting buffer are retained until the power to the NC is
turned off.
(j) [DELETE ALL] Delete all entries
Deletes all message data.

- 689 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(2) Editing message data for an entry at a time

Message data for an entry is input at a time.
(a) Standard specification
Enter a message string following a message number with
delimiting them by a semicolon (;) as shown below and
press the INPUT key.
message-number;message-string
Example: 2001; ABCDEFG INPUT key

(b) Extended specification

Enter a message string following a message number in the
extended specification format as shown below and press the
INPUT key.
message-number;message-string
Example: AL1+000= ABCDEFG INPUT key
OP1+999= ABCDEFG INPUT key
NOTE
For details of the extended specification of message
number, see the description of Extended specification
in Subsection 4.11.1.(iv)

(3) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor and page keys to change the message data in the
detailed message data display.

(4) RETURN key operation

On the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, the return key
operation is disabled. To terminate editing of message data and
return to the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen, use the [EXIT]
soft key.

- 690 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.3.3 Editing Desired Message Data

On the message data entry editor screen, you can edit desired message
data. To move to the message data entry editor screen, press the
[ZOOM] soft key on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen. On the
message data entry editor screen, you can perform the following
operations:
• Changing the input mode [INPUT MODE]
• Changing data to be edited [<=>]
• Inserting an at sign (@) [@]
• Displaying double-byte characters [DOUBLE CHAR]
• Moving to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen [EXIT]
• Selecting a string [SELECT]
• Deleting a string [DELETE]
• Moving a string [CUT] and [PASTE]
• Copying a string [COPY] and [PASTE]
• Canceling edits [CANCEL EDIT]

Input mode

Simple message data display area

Message number edit area Area for editing a message data string

Key input line Message display line

Screen configuration
(1) On the screen, message addresses, message numbers, and
message data are displayed from left to right. In the simple
message data display area, the first line of data is displayed.
(2) The message number edit area and area for editing a message
data string at the bottom of the screen are used to edit the
message number and data.
(3) On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error
message appears when issued.

- 691 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operations
Soft keys on the message data entry editor screen

Display double-byte characters Copy characters

Change the input mode Select characters Paste characters

Change data to be edited Switch to the editor screen Cut characters

Delete characters
Input an at sign (@)

Cancel edits

Fig. 9.3.3 Soft keys on the message data entry editor screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [INPUT MODE] Change the input mode
Pressing [INPUT MODE] changes the input mode. The
selection cycles in the following order. In the insert mode,
"INSERT" appears on the screen; in the replace mode,
"ALTER" appears.

Full-string Insert Replace

input mode mode

• Full-string input
The entire string at the cursor is selected and replaced
with an input string.
• Insert mode
Input characters are inserted at the cursor. Pressing the
INPUT key with inputting no characters inserts one space.
• Replace mode
Input characters replace characters at and after the cursor.
Pressing the INPUT key with inputting no characters
replaces the character at the cursor with a space.
(b) [<=>] Change data to be edited
Use this soft key to move the cursor between the message
number edit area and area for editing a message string. You
can check the cursor position to know which data is
currently being edited.

- 692 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(c) [@] Input an at sign (@)

To display a kana, kanji, or special character, the character
code of the character is enclosed by at signs (@). To
simplify the input of an at sign (@), this soft key adds an at
sign (@) to the string in the key input line. This soft key is
enabled when the input mode is insert or replace. In the
full-string input mode, this soft key is not displayed.
(d) [DOUBLE CHAR] Display double-byte characters
Displays a character code enclosed by at signs (@) with the
corresponding character actually displayed.
The operation method conforms to that for [DOUBLE
CHAR] on the MESSAGE DATA VIEWER screen. For
details, see "Screen operations" for the MESSAGE DATA
VIEWER screen.
(e) [EXIT] Switch to the editor screen
Terminates entry editing of message data and moves to the
MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen.
(f) [SELECT] Select characters
Use this key to specify multiple characters to be edited with
a soft key such as [DELETE]. Pressing this soft key puts
the screen into the mode for selecting multiple characters
starting from the character being edited at that time. Move
the cursor so that the characters to be edited are selected.
After the characters to be edited are selected, operate each
edit soft key or enter characters. This soft key is enabled
when the input mode is insert or replace. In the full-string
input mode, this soft key is not displayed.
(g) [DELETE] Delete characters
Deletes selected characters.
(h) [CUT] Cut characters
Cuts selected characters. The cut characters are transferred
to the pasting buffer and deleted from message data. The
contents of the pasting buffer before the characters are
transferred are erased. When you want to move characters,
use this soft key together with the [PASTE] soft key.
(i) [COPY] Copy characters
Transfers selected characters to the pasting buffer. The
message data is not changed. The contents of the pasting
buffer before the characters are transferred are erased.
When you want to copy characters, use this soft key
together with the [PASTE] soft key.

- 693 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(j) [PASTE] Paste characters

Inserts the characters transferred to the pasting buffer by the
[CUT] or [COPY] soft key at the cursor in the insert input
mode or replaces the data at the cursor with the characters
in other input modes. When the contents of the pasting
buffer are pasted by pressing the [PASTE] soft key, they are
not erased. The contents of the pasting buffer are retained
until the power to the NC is turned off.
(k) [CANCEL EDIT] Cancel edits
Cancels edits made on this screen.

(2) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor keys to change the character to be edited.

(3) RETURN key operation

On the message data entry editor screen, the return key operation
is disabled. To terminate entry editing of message data and
return to the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen, use the [EXIT]
soft key.

NOTE
1 For details of the input format for kanji and other
special character strings, see Subsection 4.11.1.
2 For details of the extended specification of message
number, see the description of Extended specification
in Subsection 4.11.1.(iv)

- 694 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.4 DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE ALLOCATION

DATA ([MODULE] SCREENS)

9.4.1 Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data

The I/O MODULE VIEWER screen displays data of allocation of I/O

modules to X and Y addresses.
Check that I/O modules are allocated correctly.
To switch to the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen, press the
[MODULE] soft key.
Channel number

Key input line

Message display line

Address Group Base Slot Allocation name

- 695 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operations

Soft keys on the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen

Switch to the allocation editor screen Change the channel

Fig. 9.4.1 Soft keys on the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [EDIT] Switch to the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen
(b) [PRV.CH] Display I/O module allocation data for the
previous channel
(c) [NXT.CH] Display I/O module allocation data for the next
channel

- 696 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.4.2 Editing I/O Module Allocation Data

On the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, you can edit data of allocation
of I/O modules to X and Y addresses.
To switch to the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, press the [EDIT] soft
key on the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen.

Channel number

Key input line

Message display line

Address Group Base Slot Allocation name

Screen operations

Soft keys in I/O MODULE EDITOR screen

Delete allocation at cursor position Delete all allocation Terminate editing

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [DELETE] Delete allocation data
Deletes allocation data at the cursor.

- 697 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(b) [DELETE ALL] Delete all allocation data

When this soft key is pressed, the following confirmation
message appears:
"DO YOU DELETE ALL ALLOCATION DATA?"
The [YES] and [NO] soft keys appear. Press [NO] to cancel
deletion or [YES] to execute deletion.
(c) [EXIT] Switch to the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen

(2) Allocation of I/O Units to X and Y addresses

(a) Set the cursor at address to which you will allocate new I/O
Unit.
(b) Type "Group. Base. Slot. I/O-module-name" and press
INPUT key.
Ex) In case you allocate "Group = 1, Base = 0, Slot = 5,
Name = ID16C" to X08, set the cursor at X08 and
1.0.5.ID16C + INPUT key

(a) Set the cursor at X08

(b) 1.0.5.ID16C + INPUT key

NOTE
As to the allocation name of I/O Unit, see Tables 3.2
(a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.

- 698 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(c) The I/O Unit is allocated to address of the cursor position

for the I/O Unit size.
In case of above example (b), I/O Unit is allocated at X08
and X09 like as follows.

(c) I/O Unit is allocated at X08 and X09

NOTE
1 To make the allocation effective, after storing the
Ladder program in the flash ROM, turn the power to
the CNC and all slave I/O devices off, then on again.
2 The Ladder program is not stopped automatically
when you open I/O MODULE VIEWER screen or
EDITOR screen.

(3) Delete allocation

(a) Set the cursor at allocation of which you will delete and
press soft key [DELETE].
(b) The allocation is deleted.
(4) Delete all allocation
(a) Press soft key [DELETE ALL].
(b) "DO YOU DELETE ALL ALLOCATION DATA?" is
displayed.
(c) Press soft key [YES].
(d) Allocation of X and Y are all deleted.
(5) RETURN key operation
On the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen, the return key operation
is disabled. To terminate editing of allocation data and return to
the I/O MODULE VIEWER screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 699 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.5 DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS ([SETING]

SCREENS)

There are following setting parameter screens.

• PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen
• PMC SETTING (MESSGE SHIFT) screen
• PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen
• PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen
Use the [NEXT] and [PREV] soft keys to switch from a setting screen
to another as shown in the figure below.

NOTE
You can also use the keep relay screen (for K900
and after) to set these setting parameters.

Setting screen of multi-language display function, selectable I/O link

assignment function and OVERRIDE mode of the forced input/output
function and System Keep Relay screen can be protected by
programmer protection function.

PMC main menu

[PARAM] [KEEPRL]

[SETING]
Keep Relay
[<] (K0-K99)
PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen
Page Down The screen protection

The screen protection [NEXT]

[PREV] Keep Relay
(K900-K919)
PMC SETTING (MESSAGE SHIFT)
screen

The screen protection [NEXT]

[PREV] [PREV]

PMC SETTING (WARN PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen

SELECTABLE I/O) screen EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION
[YES]
The screen protection [NEXT]
[PREV]
[NEXT]
PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen

- 700 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(1) PMC SETTING GENERAL screen

On the PMC SETTING (GENERAL) screen, set parameters that
specify the use condition of each PMC function.

Use the [↑] and [↓] keys to move the item cursor.
Use the [←] and [→] keys to move the setting cursor and set the
parameter.
Use the page keys to switch to another page.

(a) TRACE START (K906.5)

MANUAL: Executes the trace function by operating the
corresponding soft key on the trace screen.
AUTO: Automatically executes the trace function after
power-on.

(b) EDIT ENABLE(EDIT) (K901.6)

NO: Prevents editing of the sequence program.
YES: Allows editing of the sequence program.

NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(c) WRITE TO F-ROM (EDIT) (K902.0)

NO: Does not write to flash ROM automatically after
editing of sequence program.
YES: Writes to flash ROM automatically after editing of
sequence program.

- 701 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(d) RAM WRITE ENABLE (K900.4)

NO: Prevents forcing function.
YES: Allows forcing function.

NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(e) DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (K900.7)

YES: Displays PMC parameter data table control screen.
NO: Does not displays PMC parameter data table control
screen.

(f) HIDE PMC PARAM (K902.6)

NO: Allows PMC parameter display.
YES: Prevents PMC parameter display.

NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(g) PROTECT PMC PARAM (K902.7)

NO: Allows PMC parameter editing.
YES: Prevents PMC parameter editing.

(h) HIDE PMC PROGRAM (K900.0)

NO: Allows sequence program display.
YES: Prevents sequence program display.

NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(i) IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1)

HIDE: The PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen
is not displayed.
SHOW: The PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen
is displayed.

(j) LADDER START (K900.2)

AUTO: Executes the sequence program automatically
after the power turns on.
MANUAL: Executes the sequence program by [RUN] soft-
key.

- 702 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(k) ALLOW PMC STOP (K902.2)

NO: Prevents run/stop operation of the sequence program.
YES: Allows run/stop operation of the sequence program.

NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(l) PROGRAMMER ENABLE (K900.1)

NO: Disables embedded programmer.
YES: Enables embedded programmer.

NOTE
This setting effects some PMC functions.
For details, see Section 6.2.

(2) PMC SETTING (MESSAGE SHIFT) screen

On the PMC SETTING (MESSAGE SHIFT) screen, set the
parameters for the multi-language display function by functional
instruction DISPB.

NOTE
For details of the display condition for this screen,
see Section 6.2.

- 703 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(a) MESSAGE SHIFT VALUE (K918, K919)

Enter the amount by which the message display request bit
is to be shifted.
The valid data range is between 0 and 1999. The initial
value is 0.
After entering a value, press the INPUT key to set the value.
The input data is also retained after power-off.

(b) MESSAGE SHIFT START ADDRESS (K916, K917)

Enter the start bit address of the area for the message
display request bit to be shifted.
The specified address must be within the A address area.
The initial value is A0.0.
The input data is also retained after power-off.

NOTE
Data set for "MESSAGE SHIFT START ADDRESS"
is valid only when the value set for "MESSAGE
SHIFT VALUE" is other than 0.

(3) Setting screens for the selectable I/O link assignment function

(a) PMC SETTING (WARN SELECTABLE I/O) screen

This caution screen is displayed for the operator's attention
when the operator is switching to the PMC SETTING
(SELECTABLE I/O) screen.

- 704 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Read the displayed caution carefully.

When you are sure to set parameters after reading the
caution, press the [YES] soft key.
This soft key switches to the PMC SETTING
(SELECTABLE I/O) screen.

NOTE
For details of the display condition for this screen,
see Section 6.2.

WARNING
If you modify this setting parameter without care, the
I/O assignment data may not match I/O devices and
turning on the power may result in unexpected
malfunctions of machine. So, it is required that the
operator of this function should be an expert who fully
understands the sequence program and the
operation of PMC. It is also strongly recommended
to the developer of machine that this setting screen
should be protected from careless use by ordinary
operators after the machine is shipped into the field.

(b) PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O) screen

You can set the group of optional I/O device that is
connected with each machines.

- 705 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

The maximum number of I/O Link channels per PMC is 4.

You can set as many sets of these parameters as the number
of available I/O Link channels.
To switch to another page, use the page keys.

Example)
When the number of I/O Link channels is 3, you cannot set
channel 4.

EFFECTIVE GROUP SELECTION

(channel 1: K920 and K921, channel 2: K922 and K923,
channel 3: K924 and K925, channel 4: K926 and K927)
You can select effective I/O group in I/O link assignment
data.
1: I/O group is effective.
0: I/O group is no effective.
The "*" mark means that the group is set as the basic part
by the parameter "BASIC GROUP COUNT" on the
SYSTEM PARAMETER screen. The value can not be set
into this parts.

(4) PMC SETTING (OVERRIDE) screen

On this screen, specify whether to enable the override function.

NOTE
For details of the display condition for this screen,
see Section 6.2.

- 706 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

OVERRIDE ENABLE (K906.0)

YES: Enables the override function.
NO: Disables the override function.

NOTE
The change to this parameter setting is made
effective at the next power-on. After changing the
setting of this parameter, be sure to turn the power
off, then on again.

(5) Operations using the soft keys

Soft keys common to the setting parameter screens

Move to the next setting screen

Move to the previous setting screen

Soft keys on the PMC SETTING (WARN SELECTABLE I/O)

screen

Move to the PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O)

(a) [PREV] Switch to the previous page

(b) [NEXT] Switch to the next page
(c) [YES] Switch to the PMC SETTING (SELECTABLE I/O)
screen

- 707 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.6 DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND CHANGING

THE TARGET PMC ([PMC STATUS] SCREENS)

On the PMC STATUS screen, you can display the status of each
existing PMC and change the target PMC for display and operation on
each screen. To switch to the PMC STATUS screen, press the [PMC
STATUS] soft key.

Title information
Ladder execution time

Ladder execution performance monitor

Program number and edition

Alarm mark

This screen displays the status of up to three PMCs and dual check
safety.
The status display for each PMC shows title information (comment),
ladder execution performance monitor, current execution time of the
ladder program, sequence program number and edition corresponding
to the title data, and alarm mark.

The ladder execution performance monitor shows the progress of the

execution of the level-1 and level-2 sequence sections of the ladder
program on the monitor bar. The progress of the execution of the
level-1 sequence section of the ladder program is displayed with a
numeric value next to the monitor bar. When the ladder program is
stopped, the monitor bar is not displayed.
The alarm mark is displayed only when an alarm is issued on the PMC.
Nothing is displayed when no alarm is issued.

On this screen, you can start and stop a ladder program.

- 708 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Soft keys on the PMC STATUS screen

Change the PMC Start and stop a ladder program

Fig. 9.6 Soft keys on the PMC STATUS screen

Operation using the soft key

(1) [SWITCH PMC] Change the PMC
Changes the target PMC for display and operation on each screen.
You can check the position of the cursor displayed at the title
information of each PMC to know the current target PMC.

(2) [RUN]/[STOP] Start and stop a ladder program

For details of these operations, see Subsection 9.6.1.

CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [RUN]/[STOP] soft key appears and is available.
For details, see Section 6.2.

- 709 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.6.1 Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs

On the title display screen, you can start or stop a sequence program.

(1) Starting a sequence program ([RUN])

When a program is stopped, pressing the [RUN] soft key causes
the system to display the inquiry message "ARE YOU SURE
YOU WANT TO RUN PROGRAM?". Pressing the [YES] soft
key in response to this message causes the program to start. The
status line display changes to "RUN". The sequence program
starts from the beginning. The soft key changes to [STOP].
(2) Stopping a sequence program ([STOP])
When a program is running, pressing the [STOP] soft key causes
the system to display the inquiry message "ARE YOU SURE
YOU WANT TO STOP PROGRAM?". Pressing the [YES] soft
key in response to this message causes the program to stop. The
status line display changes to "STOP". The soft key changes to
[RUN].

WARNING
If the sequence program is stopped while the
machine is operating, the machine may behave in an
unexpected way. Before stopping the sequence
program, ensure that there are no people near the
machine and that the tool cannot collide with the
workpiece or machine.
Otherwise, there is an extreme risk of death or
serious injury, as well as the likelihood of the tool,
workpiece, and machine being damaged.

(3) Automatic operation of a sequence program

When LADDER START is set to AUTO (bit 2 of the keep relay
K900 = 0) on the setting screen, a sequence program can be
executed automatically when the power is turned on.

- 710 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.7 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR THE

ONLINE FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN)

The online function allows PMC data to be displayed and edited on a

personal computer when the PMC is connected to FANUC LADDER-
III or Ladder Editing Package.
There is the following function in the online function.
• Ladder monitor display
• Online ladder editing
• PMC parameter display and editing
• Signal state monitor display and modifications
• Input/output to and from the PMC (loading from the PMC, storing
to the PMC)
• Writing to flash ROM
For detailed explanation of the online function, refer to the following
manuals:

Manual name Drawing Description

number
FANUC LADDER-III Operator's B-66234EN Online function by FANUC
Manual LADDER-III
Ladder Editing Package (Windows) B-63484EN Online function by Ladder Editing
Operator's Manual Package

CAUTION
1 When one of the following screens is displayed at
PMC, the online communication can not be used.
Change to other screens from the following screens,
and use the online function.
[LADDER], [I/O], [TITLE], [SYSTEM PARAM],
[TRACE], [SYMBOL], [MESAGE], [MODULE]
Also, you can not use the above screens at PMC
during the online communication.
2 When the online function is used with RS-232C, the
selected channel is occupied by the PMC system. To
use other functions with RS-232C, specify other
channel setting than the one used by online function.

- 711 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.7.1 Setting Parameters for the Online Function

The online function can be connected using one of the following three
methods.

Connection method Applicable software

Ethernet FANUC LADDER-III and Ladder
Editing Package
RS-232C FANUC LADDER-III
HSSB Ladder Editing Package

Before using the online function, put the online function into the
connection waiting state on the PMC.
To put the PMC into the connection waiting state, use the
PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen or relevant CNC
parameter.
To use Ethernet for connecting the online function, set Ethernet
communication parameters. For details of the Ethernet
communication parameters, see Subsection 9.7.3.

(1) Setting of online connection using the PARAMETERS FOR

ONLINE MONITOR screen
Press the [ONLINE] soft key to display the PARAMETERS
FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen.

NOTE
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the online setting screen is available. For details, see
Section 6.2.

- 712 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Fig. 9.7.1 PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE MONITOR screen

EMG STOP: Terminates communication forcibly. Use this key if

communication becomes abnormal and the connection
cannot be terminated normally.
INIT: Initializes the parameters to their default values.

CAUTION
In case of configuration of CNC with which neither
Ethernet nor HSSB is available, the item of "HIGH
SPEED " is not displayed.

(a) Case of connection by RS-232C (FANUC LADDER-III)

(i) Check that "NOT USE" is selected at the "RS-232C"
item.
(ii) Set the parameter of "CHANNEL" and "BAUD
RATE".
(iii) Move the cursor to the "RS-232C" item with Up or
Down Cursor key.
(iv) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key.
(b) Case of connection by Ethernet (FANUC LADDER-III,
Ladder Editing Package)
(i) Move the cursor to the "HIGH SPEED" item with Up
or Down Cursor key.
(ii) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key.

- 713 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(c) Case of connection by HSSB (Ladder Editing Package)

(i) Move the cursor to the "HIGH SPEED" item with Up
or Down Cursor key.
(ii) Select "USE" with Left or Right Cursor key.

NOTE
1 When both "RS-232C = USE" and "HIGH SPEED =
USE" are selected, the PMC system will
communicate with the application which is connected
at first. If PMC system is already connecting with an
application, it can not connect with other applications.
2 When you use the online function by Ethernet, the
setting of Ethernet parameters at CNC is necessary
in advance.

(2) Setting of online connection by NC parameter

You can enable and disable the online connection for Ethernet,
HSSB and RS-232C by NC parameter No.24 without setting on
the PMC online setting screen.
For details of the parameter, see Subsection 2.4.3.

- 714 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.7.2 Communication Status

The communication status of RS-232C and HIGH SPEED are

displayed at the online monitor screen during the online
communication.

Fig. 9.7.2 Communication status of online setting screen

RS-232C : The communication condition of RS-232C is displayed.

HIGH SPEED : The communication condition of high-speed I/F (HSSB or
Ethernet) is displayed.

- 715 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

The display messages and the meanings are shown in the table of
below.

Displayed messages Meanings

INACTIVE The communication is inactive.
STOPPING The communication is being stopped.(Wait for the
termination of communication)
STARTING The communication is being started.(Wait for the
termination of communication over another
communication path)
STAND-BY The communication is in standby mode.
CONNECTED The communication is being connected.
NO OPTION The port can be not opened because there is not
option of RS-232C.
BAD PARAMETER Invalid RS-232C parameters are specified.
TIMEOUT ERROR A time-out has occurred and communication is
aborted.
TIMEOUT(K) ERROR A time-out has occurred and communication is
aborted.
BCC ERROR Invalid Block Check Code (packet parity) is
specified.
PARITY ERROR A parity error has occurred.
OVER-RUN ERROR A reception overrun has occurred.
SEQUENCE ERROR Packets have been received in invalid sequence.
DATA ERROR Incorrect packet has been received.
QUEUE OVERFLOW The transmit/receive queue has overflowed.
DISCONNECTED Communication has been terminated successfully.
NO CONNECTION The cable is disconnected.

- 716 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.7.3 About Ethernet Communication Parameters

(1) Setting of ethernet parameters

When you try to connect FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder
Editing Package with CNC by Ethernet, it is necessary to set
some Ethernet parameters. The setting of Ethernet parameters
can be set in the following Ethernet parameter screen of CNC.
Please refer to "FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-63354EN) about the detail of the
setting screen and setting parameters.
The setting item necessary for Ethernet connection for PMC
online function is as follows.
• IP ADDRESS (Set the IP address of CNC.
192.168.0.1 etc.)
• SUBNET MASK (Set the mask address of the IP
address. 255.255.255.0 etc.)
• ROUTER IP ADDRESS (If you use the router, set the Router
IP Address.)
• PORT NUMBER (TCP) (8193 etc.)

Fig. 9.7.3 Ethernet parameter setting screen

(2) Starting online communication by offline programmer (Ethernet

connection)
The procedures for online connection with PMC and the offline
programmer (FANUC LADDER-III, Ladder Editing Package) by
Ethernet are as follows. (Example: FANUC LADDER-III)

- 717 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(a) Start up FANUC LADDER-III, and click the

[Communication] on [Tool] menu.

(b) Select the [Network Address] tab and push the <Add Host>
button. Input the "IP Address" and "Port No." inputted in
(1) of this subsection.

- 718 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(c) Select the [Setting] tab, and add the IP Address to "Use
device".

(d) Push the <Connect> button for start of the communication.

- 719 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.7.4 About connection log of Ethernet

If any errors have occurred during Ethernet connection, the contents

of the errors are displayed at "EMBEDDED LOG" screen of CNC.
Refer to this screen when the communication does not start.

Fig. 9.7.4 The log screen of embedded Ethernet

- 720 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Connection log Meanings and countermeasures

SnpErr: PDU = m, n, [x] date time An error has occurred during the online communication.
SnpErr: PDU = n, [x] date time m, n: Online communication information that is internal
SnpErr: TaskTimeOut[x] date time information of a system.
x: Error information
6001 PMC does not support the Ethernet.
Confirm the Series/Edition of PMC software.
6003 Unsupported command data was received.
Confirm the Series/Edition of Ethernet board
software.
6004 There was an error in command data.
Confirm the Series/Edition of Ethernet board
software.
6005 PMC does not receive command data.
Confirm the communication status at the online
setting screen of PMC.
6010 PMC does not receive command data.
Confirm if "HIGH SPEED = USE" is selected and
other application is not connected at the online
setting screen of PMC.
6011 Time-out error occurred at PMC.
Increase the value of "Time Out" in [Network
Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC
LADDER-III or Ladder Editing Package.
6012 PMC does not receive command data because it
is busy for processing.
Confirm the communication status at the online
setting screen of PMC.
6013 Time-out error occurred at PMC.
Increase the value of "Time Out" in [Network
Address] of [Communication] menu for FANUC
LADDER-III or Ladder Editing Package.
6101 PMC received an unsupported function code.
Confirm the Series/Edition of PMC software.
date time : The time when the error occurred.
Ex.) "0323" means March 23rd.
"1858" means 6:58 PM.
"21161714" means 21st 4:17 PM 14 seconds.

- 721 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.8 DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS)

On the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen, you can display and set the
following data items:

• Counter data type

• Parameters for an FS0 operator's panel
• Parameters for the selectable I/O Link assignment function

To switch to each data display/setting screen, use the page keys.

- 722 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.8.1 Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type

Display and set the type of counter data used by the functional
instruction counter.
Set BINARY or BCD.

Display screen

Screen operation

Switch to the edit screen

(1) Operation using the soft key

[EDIT] Switch to the edit screen
Switches to the system parameter edit screen.

CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the system parameter edit screen. For
details, see Section 6.2.

- 723 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Setting screen

Screen operation

Terminate setting Initialize settings

(1) Operation using the soft key

(a) [EXIT] Terminate setting
Switches to the system parameter display screen.

CAUTION
After changing the data type, set the counter value
again.
See Subsection 7.3.2.

(b) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes all system parameters.

(2) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor keys to switch between BINARY and BCD.

(3) RETURN key operation

On the system parameter edit screen, the return key operation is
disabled. To terminate system parameter editing and return to
the system parameter display screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 724 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.8.2 Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0 Operator's

Panel

Display and set parameters for using an FS0 operator's panel.

Display screen

• FS0 OPERATOR PANEL Whether to use an FS0 operator's

panel
• KEY DI ADDRESS Start address of actually connected
external DI
• LED DO ADDRESS Start address of actually connected
external DO
• KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Start address of the key image
referenced by user programs
• LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Start address of the LED image
generated by user programs

Screen operation

Move to the edit screen

(1) Operation using the soft key

[EDIT] Switch to the edit screen
Switches to the system parameter edit screen.

- 725 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the system parameter edit screen. For
details, see Section 6.2.

Setting screen

• FS0 OPERATOR PANEL

Specify whether to connect an FS0 operator's panel. When setting
this item to YES, set the addresses of the actual DI and DO
connected to the operator's panel, address of the key image
transferred from the operator's panel, and address of the LED
image transferred to the operator's panel.
• KEY DI ADDRESS
Set the start address of the actually connected external DI with a
PMC address (X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, or X600
to X727).
• LED DO ADDRESS
Set the start address of the actually connected external DO with a
PMC address (Y0 to Y127, Y200 to Y327, Y400 to Y527, or Y600
to Y727).
• KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
Set the start address of the key image referenced by user programs
with a PMC address. Normally, set an internal relay (R) area.
• LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS
Set the start address of the LED image generated by user programs
with a PMC address. Normally, set an internal relay (R) area.

- 726 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Screen operation

Terminate setting Initialize settings

(1) Operation using the soft key

(a) [EXIT] Terminate setting
Switches to the system parameter display screen.
(b) [INIT] Initialize settings
Initializes all system parameters.

(2) Screen operations using other keys

Use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to change the item to be edited.
Use the [←] and [→] cursor keys to change the setting.

(3) RETURN key operation

On the system parameter edit screen, the return key operation is
disabled. To terminate system parameter editing and return to
the system parameter display screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 727 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.8.3 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable I/O Link
Assignment Function

Display and set parameters for using the selectable I/O Link
assignment function.

Display screen

• ENABLE SELECTION
Whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O Link assignment
function
• BASIC GROUP COUNT
Number of groups always enabled for any machine configuration

Screen operation

Move to the edit screen

(1) Operation using the soft key

[EDIT] Switch to the edit screen
Switches to the system parameter edit screen.

CAUTION
When the programmer protection function is enabled,
the [EDIT] soft key appears and is available. When
the online monitor function is enabled, the system
parameter edit screen cannot be displayed. For
details, see Section 6.2.
- 728 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Setting screen

• ENABLE SELECTION
Specify whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O Link
assignment function with YES or NO. The initial setting is NO
(disabled).
• BASIC GROUP COUNT
Set the number of groups always enabled for any machine
configuration.

CAUTION
When enabling this function, set the setting
parameters (K920 to K927 described below) properly
according to the actually connected I/O devices. If
this function is enabled, but the DI/DO area is not
assigned to a hardware channel, the function does
not operate.

NOTE
The parameters can be set only for available
channels according to the I/O Link configuration. For
a channel for which the parameters cannot be set,
the BASIC GROUP COUNT field is left blank.

- 729 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

Screen operation

Terminate setting Initialize settings

(1) Operation using the soft key

(a) [EXIT] Terminate setting
Switches to the system parameter display screen.
(b) [INIT] Initialize settings
Initializes all system parameters.

(2) Screen operations using other keys

Use the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys to change the item to be edited.
Use the [←] and [→] cursor keys to change the setting.

(3) RETURN key operation

On the system parameter edit screen, the return key operation is
disabled. To terminate system parameter editing and return to
the system parameter display screen, use the [EXIT] soft key.

- 730 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.9 DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION

PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS)

Configuration parameter setting screens display the following NC

parameters related to PMCs in an easy-to-understand manner and
facilitate setting.

No. Settings Remarks

11900 to Execution priorities of multiple LADDER EXEC screen
11902 PMCs
11905 to Execution ratios of multiple LADDER EXEC screen
11907 PMCs
11910 to Input/output addresses of the I/O MACHINE I/F screen
11913 Link
11920 to G/F addresses of the CNC CNC I/F screen
11929 interface
11930 Level-1 execution cycle LADDER EXEC screen
11931 Start/stop mode of multiple LADDER EXEC screen
PMCs

CAUTION
1 For details of each NC parameter, see Subsection
2.4.3.
2 After setting these NC parameters, turn the power off,
then on again.

- 731 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.9.1 Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters

There are the following PMC configuration parameter setting screens:

• MENU screen
• CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen
• MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen
• LADDER EXECUTION screen

Move to each setting screen from the MENU screen.

- 732 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Soft key on the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen

Switch to each setting screen

Fig. 9.9.1 Soft key on the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen

(1) Operation using the soft key

(a) [SELECT] Switch to each setting screen

NOTE
Each setting screen can be protected using the
programmer protection function. If a setting screen is
protected, the [SELECT] soft key is not displayed.

(2) Screen operation using other keys

Use cursor keys to switch to a desired setting item.

- 733 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

9.9.2 Setting the CNC-PMC Interface

On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (CNC-PMC

INTERFACE) screen, set a correspondence between the G/F
addresses of each PMC and CNC-PMC interface.

NOTE
For details of the CNC-PMC interface, see the
description of the CNC-PMC interface in Subsection
2.4.3.

G/F addresses

CNC-PMC interface blocks

PMC

Help message

Key input line Message display line

PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (CNC-PMC INTERFACE) screen

CNC-PMC INTERFACE
Displays the number of each CNC-PMC interface block.
BLOCK 1: G0000 to G0768/F0000 to F0768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 2: G1000 to G1768/F1000 to F1768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 3: G2000 to G2768/F2000 to F2768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 4: G3000 to G3768/F3000 to F3768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 5: G4000 to G4768/F4000 to F4768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 6: G5000 to G5768/F5000 to F5768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 7: G6000 to G6768/F6000 to F6768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 8: G7000 to G7768/F7000 to F7768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 9: G8000 to G8768/F8000 to F8768 viewed from the CNC
BLOCK 10:G9000 to G9768/F9000 to F9768 viewed from the CNC

- 734 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

PMC
Assign a PMC to each CNC-PMC interface block.
PMC1: First PMC
PMC2: Second PMC
PMC3: Third PMC

G/F ADDRESS
Set the start G/F addresses.

NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter,
"ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below:

Help message
A help message for operation is displayed.

Example of screen setting and corresponding NC parameter settings

When values are set on the screen as shown in the figure above, the
following settings are input for the corresponding NC parameters:

Block NC parameter
Setting
number number
1 11920 100
2 11921 101
3 11922 102
4 11923 103
5 11924 104
6 11925 105
7 11926 200
8 11927 201
9 11928 300
10 11929 301

- 735 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

NOTE
This screen can be protected from editing using the
programmer protection function.

Screen operation
Soft keys on the CNC I/F screen
Initialize settings
Previous choice Delete the setting

Next choice Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen

Fig. 9.9.2 Soft keys on the CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [PREV] Previous choice
[NEXT] Next choice
Inputs the value of the previous or next choice for the item
at the cursor like a toggle switch.
PREV NEXT
To select a PMC
PMC1
PMC2
PMC3

PREV NEXT
To select G/F addresses
G0000 to G0768/F0000 to F0768
G1000 to G1768/F1000 to F1768
G2000 to G2768/F2000 to F2768
G3000 to G3768/F3000 to F3768
G4000 to G4768/F4000 to F4768
G5000 to G5768/F5000 to F5768
G6000 to G6768/F6000 to F6768
G7000 to G7768/F7000 to F7768
G8000 to G8768/F8000 to F8768
G9000 to G9768/F9000 to F9768

This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when

editing is allowed.

- 736 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(b) [DELETE] Delete the setting

Deletes the setting of the item at the cursor.
After data is deleted, "*****" is displayed as shown below:

This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when

editing is allowed.

CAUTION
When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial
status (for the initial status, see (d)) is set. Deleting
all items with this operation is equivalent to setting
the initial status. For this reason, if an attempt is
made to delete the last item, the following message
appears and the item cannot be deleted:
"LAST SETTING DATA CAN NOT BE DELETED."

(c) [MENU] Switch to the MENU screen

Switches to the MENU screen.

(d) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes the interface settings.
This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when
editing is allowed.
The initial settings are as follows:

- 737 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

(2) Screen operations using other keys

Cursor keys
Use them to change the CNC-PMC interface block to be set.

INPUT key
You can also set an item by entering a numeric value or string
and pressing the INPUT key.
To set a PMC
• Enter PMC1, PMC2, or PMC3.
• Enter a numeric value 1, 2, or 3.
To set G/F addresses
• Enter a displayed string such as G0000/F0000.
• Enter a start address such as 0, 1000, or 2000.

CAUTION
1 You can set an item on this screen regardless of the
NC mode.
2 If data is duplicate, the data is displayed in red and
the following message appears:
"DUPLICATE G/F ADDRESS"

- 738 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.9.3 Setting the Machine Signal Interface

On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MACHINE

INTERFACE) screen, set the input/output addresses of the I/O Link.
CAUTION
1 For details of input/output addresses of the I/O Link,
see the description of input/output addresses of the
I/O Link in Subsection 2.4.3.
2 For details of input/output addresses for virtual
channels of the I/O Link channel split function, see
the description of the setting related to the I/O Link
channel split function in Subsection 2.4.3.

X/Y addresses
I/O Link channels

PMC

Help message

Key input line Message display line

PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MACHINE INTERFACE) screen

I/O LINK CH
Displays I/O Link channel numbers.

PMC
Displays each PMC.
PMC1: First PMC
PMC2: Second PMC
PMC3: Third PMC
PMCDCS: Dual check safety ladder

- 739 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

X/Y ADDRESS
Set the start X/Y addresses.
NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter,
"ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below:

Help message
A help message for operation is displayed.

CAUTION
This screen can be protected from editing using the
programmer protection function.

For a channel for which the I/O Link expansion option is not used,
"NO OPTION" appears as shown below.

Settings of NC parameters corresponding to input/output addresses of

the I/O Link and input/output addresses for virtual channels of the I/O
Link channel split function
Channel NC parameter Setting
number
1 11910 100
2 11911 101
3 11912 0
4 11913 0

- 740 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

Screen operation

Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen

Previous choice Delete the setting Initialize settings

Next choice Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen

Fig. 9.9.3 Soft keys on the MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [PREV] Previous choice
[NEXT] Next choice
Inputs the value of the previous or next choice for the item
at the cursor like a toggle switch.
PREV NEXT
To select a PMC
PMC1
PMC2
PMC3
PMCDCS

To select X/Y addresses PREV NEXT

X0000 to X0127/Y0000 to Y0127
X0200 to X0327/Y0200 to Y0327
X0400 to X0527/Y0400 to Y0527
X0600 to X0727/Y0600 to Y0727

This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when

editing is allowed.

(b) [DELETE] Delete the setting

Deletes the setting of the item at the cursor.
After data is deleted, "*****" is displayed as shown below:

This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when

editing is allowed.

- 741 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

CAUTION
When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial
status (for the initial status, see (e)) is set. Deleting
all items with this operation is equivalent to setting
the initial status. For this reason, if an attempt is
made to delete the last item, the following message
appears and the item cannot be deleted:
"LAST SETTING DATA CAN NOT BE DELETED."

(c) [MENU] Switch to the MENU screen

Switches to the MENU screen.

(d) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes the interface settings.
This soft key is displayed and can be operated only when
editing is allowed.
The initial settings are as follows:

(2) Screen operations using other keys

Cursor keys
Use them to change the I/O Link channel to be set.

INPUT key
You can also set an item by entering a numeric value or string
and pressing the INPUT key.
To set a PMC
• Enter PMC1, PMC2, PMC3, or PMCDCS.
• Enter a numeric value 1, 2, 3, or 9.

To set X/Y addresses

• Enter a displayed string such as X0000/Y0000.
• Enter a start address such as 0, 200,400 or 600.

CAUTION
1 You can set an item on this screen regardless of the
NC mode.
2 If data is duplicate, the data is displayed in red and
the following message appears:
"DUPLICATE X/Y ADDRESS"

- 742 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

9.9.4 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution

On the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (LADDER EXEC)

screen, set the execution priorities of multiple PMCs, execution ratios
of multiple PMCs, level-1 execution cycle, and start/stop control of
multiple PMCs.

CAUTION
1 For details of execution priorities of multiple PMCs,
see the description of execution priorities of multiple
PMCs in Subsection 2.4.3.
2 For details of execution ratios of multiple PMCs, see
the description of execution ratios of multiple PMCs
in Subsection 2.4.3.
3 For details of the level-1 execution cycle, see the
description of level-1 execution cycle in Subsection
2.4.3.
4 For details of the start/stop mode of multiple PMCs,
see the description of start/stop control of multiple
PMCs in Subsection 2.4.3.

PMC

Execution priority
Execution time

Execution cycle

Ladder start/stop

Help message

Key input line

Message display line
EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC TIME RATIOS
Displays and sets the execution priority of each PMC. Also displays
and sets the execution time ratio of each PMC.

NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter,
"ILLEGAL" is displayed as shown below:

- 743 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

EXEC CYCLE
Set the PMC execution cycle (4 or 8 ms).

NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, the
cursor is not displayed. Press the [INIT] soft key to
release the invalid state.

LADDER RUN/STOP
Specify whether to start/stop the ladder programs of multiple PMCs
synchronously or control the start/stop of the ladder program of each
PMC independently.

Help message
A help message for operation is displayed.

CAUTION
This screen can be protected from editing using the
programmer protection function.

Screen operation

Soft keys for setting execution priorities on the LADDER EXECUTION screen

Move the priority up

Set the execution ratios automatically Initialize settings

Move the priority down Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen

Soft keys for setting the execution cycle and synchronous start on the LADDER EXECUTION screen

Move to the PMC CONFIGRATION PARAMETER (MENU) screen Initialize settings

Fig. 9.9.4 Soft keys on the LADDER EXECUTION screen

(1) Operations using the soft keys

(a) [MOVE UP] Move the execution priority up
Moves a PMC set under EXEC PRIORITY and changes its
execution priority.
The execution time ratio is not changed with this operation
because it is determined by the execution sequence.
This soft key is displayed only when the execution priority
is to be set.
- 744 -
B-63983EN/01 9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG])

(b) [MOVE DOWN] Move the execution priority down

Moves a PMC set under EXEC PRIORITY and changes its
execution priority.
The execution time ratio is not changed with this operation
because it is determined by the execution sequence.
This soft key is displayed only when the execution priority
is to be set.

(c) [AUTO] Set the execution time ratios automatically

Automatically sets the execution time ratios according to
the actual number of steps in the ladder programs.
This soft key is displayed only when the execution priority
is to be set.
Example: When PMC1 = 10000 steps, PMC2 = 5000 steps,
and PMC3 = 5000 steps
PMC1 = 10000/(10000 + 5000 + 5000) = 50%
PMC2 = 5000/(10000 + 5000 + 5000) = 25%
PMC3 = 5000/(10000 + 5000 + 5000) = 25%

(d) [MENU] Switch to the MENU screen

Switches to the MENU screen.

(e) [INIT] Initialize settings

Initializes settings.
• EXEC PRIORITY: Set to the default setting.
When the values are all set to 0, the following default
setting is used.
When only the first PMC is used
EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC RATIOS
1 PMC1 100%
2 − 0%
3 − 0%

When the first and second PMCs are used

EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC RATIOS
1 PMC1 85%
2 PMC2 15%
3 − 0%

When the first and third PMCs are used

EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC RATIOS
1 PMC1 85%
2 PMC3 15%
3 − 0%

- 745 -
9.PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) B-63983EN/01

When the first, second, and third PMCs are used

EXEC PRIORITY PMC EXEC RATIOS
1 PMC1 75%
2 PMC2 15%
3 PMC3 10%

• EXEC CYCLE : 8MS

• LADDER RUN/STOP : INDEPENDENT

NOTE
If an invalid value is set for an NC parameter, press
the [INIT] soft key to release the invalid state.

(2) Screen operations using other keys

Cursor keys
Use them to set an item for EXEC CYCLE and LADDER
RUN/STOP.

INPUT key
Use this key to input the execution time ratio in units of 1%.
If the total of values set for the PMCs exceeds 100%, the
following error message appears:
"TOTAL OF EXEC RATIO IS OVER 100%."

CAUTION
1 You can set an item on this screen regardless of the
NC mode.
2 When the NC parameters are all set to 0, the initial
status (for the initial status, see (d) in (1)) is set.
Setting all execution time ratios to 0 with this
operation is equivalent to setting the initial status.
For this reason, if an attempt is made to set the last
item to 0, the following message appears and the
item cannot be set to 0:
"CANNOT SET 0% TO ALL EXECUTION TIME
RATIOS."

- 746 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

10 PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS

TO TAKE

- 747 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

10.1 ALARM MESSAGE LIST

10.1.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen

The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be
displayed on the PMC alarm screen.

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR <1> Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is invalid.
<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program is too large
program. to load into the save area.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step The sequence program is invalid.
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program exceeds the
ERROR(OPTION) program. size specified by the ladder step
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step count option.
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH Change the sequence program so that it The PMC type specified in the
specifies the adequate PMC type, by using sequence program does not match
the programmer. the type of the PMC actually in use.
ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER <1> Restore the backup CNC parameter No ladder step count option is found.
STEP) data.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH Contact us. An unsupported function is used in
the sequence program.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK <1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, The nonvolatile memory of the PMC
ERROR by holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at system needs to be initialized in such
the same time. cases as when you have changed
<2> Replace the backup batteries. the PMC model.
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY <1> Enter the sequence program again. The parity of the sequence program
<2> If this error recurs even after you have is invalid.
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Enter the sequence program again. An interrupt was specified while the
BY I/O sequence program was being read.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR The ladder data is broken.
screen again, and terminate the editing
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.
ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT Display the SYMBOL & COMMENT The symbol/comment data is broken.
DATA ERROR EDITOR screen again, and terminate the
editing operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft
key.

- 748 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Display the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR The message data is broken.
screen again, and terminate the editing
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.
ER22 NO PROGRAM Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is empty.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS Correct the sequence program; change the An out-of-range parameter number is
OUT OF RANGE parameter number specified in a functional specified in the TMR, TMRB, CTR,
instruction to a value that is within the CTRB, DIFU, or DIFD functional
allowable range. instruction.
ER28 NO OPTION(I/O LINK Contact us; specify the I/O Link point count The I/O Link point count expansion
CHx) expansion option for the indicated channel. option is not specified for CHx.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE <1> Check whether the power of each I/O None of the I/O devices, such as the
device is on. I/O Link, connection unit, and Power
<2> Check whether the power of each I/O Mate, is connected.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Check cable connections.
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR Contact us; replace the faulty hardware. The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.
or
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn)
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(xx) <1> Check the cable connections to the An I/O device communication error
or devices of group xx. occurred on the slave side of group
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn xx) <2> Check whether the power of each I/O xx.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Replace any device of group xx in
which the PMC control module is
embedded.
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT Reduce the output data count of group xx. The output data count of I/O Link
DATA IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT regarded as invalid.
DATA IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA Reduce the input data count of group xx. The input data count of I/O Link
IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA regarded as invalid.
IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or The slot number for the I/O Link
BASE less. exceed the upper limit (10). The slot
or number larger than 11 is regarded as
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN invalid.
BASE(CHn)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT Reduce the total amount of output data of The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) all groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT and later on the output side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT Reduce the total amount of input data of all The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT and later on the input side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)

- 749 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER50 PMC EXECUTION ORDER Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to The set execution order of the multi-
ERROR 11902. PMC function is invalid.
ER51 PMC EXECUTION Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to The set execution percentage of the
PERCENTAGE ERROR 11907. multi-PMC function is invalid.
ER52 IOLINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to The I/O Link channel assignment to
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11913. the PMC system is invalid.
ER53 IOLINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11915 to The I/O Link channel division
DEVIDE ERROR 11918. function setting is invalid.
ER54 NC-PMC I/F Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to The interface assignment between
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11929. NC and PMC is invalid.
ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION Check CNC parameter No. 11930. The set ladder level 1 execution
CYCLE ERROR cycle is invalid.
ER56 TOTAL PROGRAM SIZE Contact us; check ladder step option In multi-PMC, Total ladder step is too
OVER(OPTION) large
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE(CHx <1> Check the cable connections to the I/O The I/O module assignment of group
yyGROUP) devices of group yy. yy does not match the number of the
<2> Check the power of each I/O device. I/O devices that are actually
<3> Check the parameter settings for the connected.
selectable I/O Link assignment No I/O device that is connected to
function. the channel associated with this
alarm will be linked.
The ladder program runs regardless
of the occurrence of this alarm.
WN02 OPERATE PANEL Correct the Series 0 operator's panel The Series 0 operator's panel
ADDRESS address that is set in the PMC system address that is set in the PMC
ERROR parameter. system parameter is invalid.
WN03 ABORT NC- <1> Check the ladder program to verify that The ladder program was stopped
WINDOW/EXIN it is free from errors, and then restart while communication was in
the ladder program (press the RUN progress between CNC and PMC.
key). This alarm may cause the WINDR,
<2> Turn on the power of the CNC again. WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB
functional instructions to malfunction.
WN07 LADDER SP Correct the sequence program so that the There are too many levels of nesting
ERROR(STACK) subprogram has eight or fewer levels of (levels more than 8) for the CALL or
nesting. CALLU functional instruction to call
the subprogram.
WN09 SEQUENCE PROGRAM If you want to use a changed sequence You have changed the sequence
IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH program again next time you power on the program using the LADDER
ROM system, write the sequence program to DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or DATA
flash ROM. If you have made any I/O screen, but you have not yet
unwanted change to the sequence program written the changed sequence
by mistake, read the original sequence program to flash ROM. If you shut
program from flash ROM. down the system without writing the
changed sequence program to flash
ROM, the changes you have made
will be nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
WN10 NO OPTION(STEP <1> Add the step sequence option. No step sequence option was found
SEQUENCE) <2> Arrange so that the step sequence when the system attempted to
subprogram will not be called. execute a step sequence.

- 750 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

10.1.2 PMC System Alarm Messages

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a A CPU error occurred in the PMC
PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy software/hardware fault; contact us with system.
PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy information on the circumstances under xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are internal
PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy which the alarm occurred (displayed error codes.
PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy message, system configuration,
operation suspected of causing the
alarm, timing of alarm occurrence,
frequency of occurrence, etc.) as well
as the displayed internal error codes.
PC030 RAM PARI xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM parity error occurred in the
fault; contact us with information on the PMC system.
circumstances under which the alarm xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are internal
occurred (displayed message, system error codes.
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC050 IOLINK ERR CHn:GRx:yy <1> Check whether the I/O assignment An I/O Link communication error
data matches the actual I/O device occurred.
connections. n is a channel number.
<2> Check whether all the cables are x is a group number of I/O unit. There
connected properly. is a possibility that a problem occurs
<3> Check the cable specifications. at the group n of the I/O unit or the
<4> Replace the interface module, neighborhood. However, please note
cable, master printed circuit board, that It may not show a correct group
and/or other components of the number as the condition of problem.
I/O device, as appropriate. The possible causes of this alarm are
as follows:
(1) No base is connected even if data
is assigned for base extension
when I/O Unit-Model A is used.
(2) One or more cables are
connected improperly.
(3) One or more cables are faulty.
(4) One or more I/O devices (I/O Unit,
Power Mate, etc.) are faulty.
(5) The power of the master and/or
slave I/O Link device is faulty.
(6) The DO output of the I/O device is
short-circuited.
(7) The master printed circuit board is
faulty.

- 751 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

PC060 BUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a A bus error occurred in the PMC
software/hardware fault; contact us with system.
information on the circumstances under
which the alarm occurred (displayed
message, system configuration,
operation suspected of causing the
alarm, timing of alarm occurrence,
frequency of occurrence, etc.) as well
as the displayed internal error codes.
PC070 LADDER SPE (PMCn) Check the correspondence between A stack error occurred with the SPE
the CALL or CALLU instruction and the functional instruction of the ladder
SPE instruction. program of n path.
PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR(PMCn) This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM check error occurred.
PC098 CODE PARITY ERR fault; contact us with information on the
circumstances under which the alarm
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.).
PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR Contact us with information on the The read or write operation between
PATHn circumstances under which the alarm CNC and PMC failed.
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.).
PC502 LADDER SUBaaa (PMCn) Correct the sequence program so that The sequence program uses the
the SUBaaa functional instruction will SUBaaa functional instruction that is
not be used. not supported in PMCn.

- 752 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

10.1.3 Operation Errors

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Input a valid address or numeric value. The input address or numeric value is
invalid.
LADDER PROGRAM IS Enter the password. The screen cannot be displayed because
PROTECTED BY PASSWORD the program is protected by the password.
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME Input a existent subprogram number or A nonexistent subprogram number or
symbol. symbol is specified.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Input a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string is
specified.
THE NET IS NOT FOUND The specified net is not found.
THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND The specified address is not found.
THE FUNCTIONAL The specified functional instruction is not
INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND found.
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT Specify a bit address for the write coil You entered a byte address when
ADDRESS search. specifying an address used for the write
coil search.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED The system cannot pick up all the nets. The system failed to pick up all the nets
Choose the nets to pick up, by using because there were 128 nets or more to
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER be picked up.
display screen, and then perform the
net pickup operation manually.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The ladder data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the ladder FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
data. another application is accessing the
ladder data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

- 753 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

THIS NET IS PROTECTED When you are editing data on a per-
subprogram basis, you cannot edit the
subprogram frame nets (END1, END2,
END3, SP, and SPE).
TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY Reduce the range of data to copy. The selected range of data exceeds the
Perform the copy operation several size of the copy buffer.
times, copying a smaller range of data
at a time.
TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE Reduce the size of data to paste. An attempt was made to paste data
whose size exceeded the free space of
the sequence program.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a bit
match for the alteration operation. address to a byte address.
BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a byte
match for the alteration operation. address to a bit address.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Check the address to be input, and • A character string was entered that was
then enter it correctly. unacceptable as a PMC address.
• A wildcard (*) was specified in an
inappropriate manner.
• Ether "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" was not entered.
THIS ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY Enter a write-permitted address. • An attempt was made to alter a write
coil address to a write-prohibited bit
address.
• An attempt was made to alter an
address set in an output parameter of a
functional instruction to a write-
prohibited bit address.
THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE Check the types of the address in The type of the addresses in "OLD
MISMATCHED "OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW ADDRESS" does not match that in "NEW
ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter ADDRESS".
the correct address or addresses.
***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL Define symbol data in "OLD No symbol data is defined in "OLD
ADDRESS". ADDRESS".
***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL Make sure that the address types Symbol data is already defined in "NEW
match for the alteration operation. ADDRESS".

- 754 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen (when updating)

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper There is no COME that corresponds to
position. If the COM is unnecessary, this COM.
remove it.
END IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN COM position. If COM is unnecessary, remove between COM and COME.
END2 IN COM it.
JMPE IN COM JMPE and corresponding JMP must JMPE is found between COM and COME,
have same COM/COME status. Review and JMP and corresponding JMPE have
JMP range and COM range, to adjust not different COM/COME status.
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
SP/SPE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between COM and
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
COME WITHOUT COM If COM is missing, add it in proper There is no COM that corresponds to this
position. If the COME is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural CTRs have the same number as
(WARN) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them unique.
(If two or more instructions with same
parameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct CTR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD If some of them are unnecessary, Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same
NUMBER remove them. If all of them are number as their parameter. (This is
(WARN) necessary, assign other number to warning.)
parameter of them to make them unique.
(If two or more instructions with same
parameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct DIFU or DIFD has parameter number that
number not to exceed the maximum is out of range.
number defined by each PMC model.

- 755 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

NO END Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in END, END1, END2 or END3 is not found.
NO END1 proper position.
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are found.
DUPLICATE END2
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END Remove unnecessary nets, and move There are some nets after END, END2 or
GARBAGE AFTER END2 necessary nets to proper position so that END3, which will not be executed.
GARBAGE AFTER END3 they will be executed.
OVERLAPPED JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper There is no JMPE that corresponds to this
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMP.
remove it.
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM JMP and corresponding JMPE must JMP and corresponding JMPE have
LEVEL have same COM/COME status. Review different COM/COME status.
JMP range and COM range, to adjust not
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
COME IN JMP COME and corresponding COM must COME is found between JMP and JMPE,
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review and COM and corresponding COME have
COM range and JMP range, to adjust not different JMP/JMPE status.
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
END IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN JMP position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove between JMP and JMPE.
END2 IN JMP it.
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between JMP and
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have JMPB and its destination differ in
same COM/COME status. Review range COM/COME status.
of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not to
overlap with each other: it is possible that
one range includes the other completely.
JMPB OVER LEVEL JMPB can only jump to the same JMPB jumps to different program level.
program level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.
is missing, add it in proper position.
JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a JMPC is used in other than subprogram.
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If it should be
JMPB or JMP, correct it.
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
is missing, add it in proper position:
JMPC jumps into level 2.

- 756 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL of
same L-address that the JMPC is
intended to jump exists in the
subprogram, assign different L-address
to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
JMPC INTO COM LBL for JMPC must be located out of any JMPC jumps to LBL between COM and
COM and COME pair. If the JMPC is COME.
unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct
position. If the L-address of JMPC is
wrong, correct it.
JMPE WITHOUT JMP If JMP is missing, add it in proper There is no JMP that corresponds to this
position. If the JMPE is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
TOO MANY LBL Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error There are too many LBLs.
still occurs, adjust the construction of
program to use less LBLs.
DUPLICATE LBL If some of these LBLs are unnecessary, Same L-address is used in plural LBLs.
remove them. If all of these LBLs is
necessary, assign other L-addresses to
them to make all LBLs unique.
OVERLAPPED SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper There is no SPE that corresponds to this
position. If the SP is unnecessary, SP.
remove it.
SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper position. There is no SP that corresponds to this
If the SPE is unnecessary, remove it. SPE.
END IN SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper END is found between SP and SPE.
position. If END is in wrong place, move
it to proper position.
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS If some of these SPs are unnecessary, Same P-address is used in plural SPs.
remove them. If all of these SPs is
necessary, assign other P-addresses to
them to make all SPs unique.
DUPLICATE TMRB NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRBs have the same number as
(WARN) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them unique.
(If two or more instructions with same
parameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMRB NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMRB has parameter number that is out
number not to exceed the maximum of range.
number defined by each PMC model.

- 757 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRs have the same number as
(WARNI) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them unique.
(If two or more instructions with same
parameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If Subprogram that is called by
the subprogram is missing, create it. CALL/CALLU is not found.
UNAVAILABLE INSTRUCTION Confirm that this ladder program is Unsupported instruction for this PMC
correct one. If this program is correct model is found.
one, all these unsupported instructions
have to be removed.
SP IN BAD LEVEL SP can be used at top of a subprogram. SP is found in wrong place.
Correct it so that no SP exists in other
place.
LADDER PROGRAM IS This ladder program must be all cleared Ladder program may be broken by some
BROKEN once, and remake ladder program. reason.
NO WRITE COIL Add proper write coil. Write coil is necessary, but is not found.
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 or CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
SP IN LEVEL3 If END3 is located wrong, move it to SP is found in level 3.
correct position. If the SP is
unnecessary, remove it.

- 758 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL Specify the name of an available The entered name of functional instruction
INSTRUCTION NAME functional instruction. is invalid.
TOO MANY FUNCTION IN ONE Only one functional instruction is Too many functional instructions are in
NET allowed to constitute a net. If one net.
necessary, divide the net into plural
nets.
TOO LARGE NET Divide the net into plural nets so that Net is too large. When a net is converted
step number in a net may become into the object, the net exceeds 256 steps.
small.
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to No signal is provided for logical operation.
output of functional instruction that has
no output, causes this error. If coil is
not necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
OPERATION AFTER FUNCTION Output of functional instruction can not No logical operation with functional
IS FORBIDDEN be connected to a contact, nor to instruction output is permitted, except
conjunction with other signal that will write coils.
be implemented by logical-or
operation.
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED Write coil is not found even if it is Write coil is expected, but not found.
expected. Add proper write coil to the
net.
BAD COIL LOCATION Coil can be located only at rightmost Coil is located in bad position.
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place
necessary coils in correct place.
SHORT CIRCUIT Find contact with terminals connected Some contacts are connected with short
by short circuit, and correct circuit. CTR has a parameter number that
connections. is out of the range.
FUNCTION AFTER Functional instruction can not be used Functional instruction is used in output
DIVERGENCE IS FORBIDDEN in output section of net. If necessary, section of net.
divide the net into plural nets.
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME Left terminals of all coils in a net must When a net contains more than one coil,
INPUT be connected to same input point. the coils should not have any contact
beside them affects only of the coils.
BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition Some condition input of functional
inputs of the functional instruction. instruction is not connected correctly.
Especially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition
inputs interfere with each other.
NO CONNECTION Find gap that is expected to be There is signal connected to nowhere.
connected, and correct the connection.
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED Examine every connection, and find Net is too complicated to analyze.
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED Enter all of the relay addresses, and Relay with blank address, or blank
parameters of functional instructions. parameter of functional instruction, is
found.

- 759 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TOO MANY Make sure that the entered character string The number of characters in the entered
CHARACTERS is within the allowable input length. character string exceeds the allowable input
length. Some of the characters are discarded.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication with The title data cannot be displayed because
MODIFIED FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other online communication with FANUC LADDER-
applications from accessing the title data. III is in progress or another application is
accessing the title data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TOO MANY Make sure that the entered address is The number of characters in the entered
CHARACTERS within the allowable input length. address exceeds the allowable address input
length.
ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Enter data in a batch correctly, as instructed No address was entered during the batch
in "Editing a set of symbol and comment input of address, symbol, and comment data
data" in Subsection 9.2.2. using the SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITOR
screen.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Enter an address correctly. The specified address is invalid, or the
entered address character string contains a
space or spaces.
THE ADDRESS Specify another address. An already registered address was entered.
ALREADY HAS AN
ENTRY
THE SYMBOL NAME IS Specify another symbol. An already registered symbol was entered.
ALREADY USED
PMC ADDRESS MUST Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS No PMC address was entered when new
BE ENTERED field. symbol/comment data is registered.
TOO LONG SYMBOL Make sure that the symbol consists of 16 The entered symbol exceeds the specified
NAME characters or less. number of characters.
TOO LONG COMMENT Make sure that the comment consists of 30 The entered comment exceeds the specified
STRING characters or less. number of characters.
BAD SYMBOL NAME Define a symbol that contains no space. The entered symbol contains a space or
spaces.
THE STRING IS NOT Specify another character string for the The search was done for the specified
FOUND search. character string but did not find it.
OUT OF SPACE Create free space for the sequence The symbol/comment editing area has no free
program, by deleting unnecessary ladder or space.
message data.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication with The symbol/comment data cannot be
MODIFIED FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another
symbol/comment data. application is accessing the symbol/comment
data.

- 760 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR

screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the The delimiter code - semicolon (;) - was
batch message input process. not entered in the batch message input
process.
ILLEGAL NUMBER Enter a four-digit number as the The entered message number contains
message number. any nonnumeric character, or a number
shorter than four digits was entered.
THE NUMBER IS OUT OF Make sure that the entered message The entered message number is out of the
RANGE number is in the range between 1000 1000-9999 range.
and 9999.
CLOSING "@" IS NOT FOUND When entering kana or other Japanese One of the @ sign pair is missing.
characters, make sure that they are
enclosed within a pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF Enter a character string correctly The number of characters entered
CHARACTERS IN "@-@" between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs is not even.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN "@-@" Enter a character string correctly One or more invalid character codes exist
between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF Enter a two-byte code correctly The number of characters in the two-byte
CHARACTERS FOR 2-BYTE between @02 and 01@. code (characters entered between @02
CODE and 01@) is not a multiple of four.
ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE Enter a two-byte code correctly The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@. between @02 and 01@) contains one or
more characters other than the JIS codes.
CLOSING CONTROL CODE "01" Enter the closing control code. The two-byte code (characters entered
IS NOT FOUND between @02 and 01@) lacks the closing
control code (01).
CONTROL CODE "XX" IS Remove any repeated control code. The starting control code (02), closing
REPEATED control code (01), and/or umlaut code (0D)
is repeated.
CLOSING "]" IS NOT FOUND Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes The delimiter codes for numerical data are
are entered in pairs. not entered in pairs.
BAD NUMERICAL DATA Specify the numerical data correctly. The format of the numerical data is invalid.
FORMAT
BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR Enter an available address. The address section of the numerical data
NUMERIAL DATA is invalid.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The message data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
message data. another application is accessing the
message data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

- 761 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

GROUP NUMBER IS TOO Specify 15 or a smaller value as the The entered group number is too large.
LARGE group number.
BASE NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B The entered base number is too large.
(##, #1 - #10).
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot The entered slot number is too large.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 10 or a
smaller value.
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO SMALL Specify 0 or a large value as the slot The entered slot number is too small.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 1 or a larger
value.
I/O UNIT NAME MISMATCH Check the I/O unit name or address. The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y
address, or the output I/O unit is
assigned to the X address.
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables The entered I/O unit name is invalid.
3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
NOT ENOUGH SPACE Enter the data again after creating free There is not enough free address space
space by deleting the data allocated for the size of the I/O unit you are going
behind the current cursor position or by to assign.
other adequate means. This error also occurs if you attempt to
assign the I/O unit to an already
allocated address space.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The I/O module data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the I/O with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress
module data. or another application is accessing the
I/O module data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-
level protection function. level protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in Section 9.8. format is invalid.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The system parameter data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
system parameter data. another application is accessing the
system parameter data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

- 762 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in "Screen operations using format is invalid.
other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in Section 7.3. format is invalid.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TRACE FUNCTION IS ALREADY Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or some FANUC LADDER-III or some other
IN USE other application finishes using the application is currently using the trace
trace function before executing it. function.
NO SAMPLING ADDRESS Specify a bit address as a sampling No sampling address is specified in the
address in the trace parameter. trace parameter.
NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS Specify a bit address as the stop The stop trigger address is not specified in
trigger address in the trace parameter. the trace parameter.
NO SAMPLING TRIGGER Specify a bit address as the sampling The sampling trigger address is not
ADDRESS trigger address in the trace parameter. specified in the trace parameter.

Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value that is within A nonnumeric value or an out-of-range
the specified data range of the relevant parameter value was entered.
trace parameter.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Specify a bit address as the stop or A byte address was specified as the stop
sampling trigger address. or sampling trigger address.
INVALID STOP TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the stop trigger
ADDRESS be used as the stop trigger address. address is invalid.
INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the sampling
ADDRESS be used as the sampling trigger trigger address is invalid.
address.

- 763 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

10.1.4 I/O Communication Error Messages

The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their
meanings and actions are listed below.

Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY Check whether a memory card is No memory card is installed.
installed.
MEMORYCARD IS FULL Delete files to create available space. There is no available space in the memory
card.
MEMORYCARD IS WRITE Release the write protection of the The memory card is write-protected.
PROTECTED memory card.
MEMORYCARD IS NOT Format the memory card. The memory card cannot be recognized.
FORMATTED
TOO MANY FILES IN Delete unnecessary files to reduce the There are too many files.
MEMORYCARD number of files.
FILE NOT FOUND On the list screen, check the file name The specified file cannot be found.
or file number.
FILE IS READ-ONLY Check the attributes of the file. Write to the specified file is not permitted.
FILE NAME IS INVALID Specify the file name in MS-DOS form. The file name is illegal.
COULD NOT FORMAT MEMORY The NC cannot format this memory The memory card cannot be formatted.
CARD card. Use another unit such as a
personal computer to format the
memory card.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORYCARD Replace the memory card with another This memory card is not supported.
one.
CAN NOT DELETE FILE Check the attributes of the file. An error occurred when a file was deleted
from the memory card.
MEMORYCARD BATTERY Replace the battery of the memory The battery of the memory card has
ALARM card. become weak.
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY Change the file name to another one. The file name is already used.
USED
MEMORYCARD ACCESS Replace the memory card with another The memory card cannot be accessed.
ERROR one.
DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a mismatch.
MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the memory
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry. card.
MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FILE NUMBER CAN NOT If the file does not exist, the key entry The file number cannot be selected.
SELECTED is invalid. If this error occurs even
when the cursor is placed at a file
name, contact the FANUC service
center.
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT Check the total number of files on the The entered file number is not present.
EXIST list screen. The entered number exceeds the total
number of files.
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED Enter a numeric value not exceeding A value up to 128 can be entered as the
TO "128" 128. file number.

- 764 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

MEMORY CARD IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other Some other function is currently using the
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the memory card.
memory card.
MEMORY CARD IS WRITE Cancel the write protection of the The memory card is write protected.
PROTECTED memory card, or use another memory
card that is not write protected.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORY Use another memory card. This is an unsupported type of memory
CARD card.
COULD NOT DELETE FILE Check the read/write permission The file cannot be deleted.
attribute of the file.
TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER Delete unnecessary old trace result file No more trace result file can be created
or files. because the maximum trace result file
number (file extension) has been reached.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.

Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

NOT IN EMG STOP MODE Place the system in the emergency The system is not in the emergency stop
stop state. state.
INVALID SEQUENCE PROGRAM Check the program. The transfer program is illegal.
DIFFERENCE FOUND A file comparison detected a mismatch.
FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the flash ROM.
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry.
FLASH ROM HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FLASH ROM IS USED BY This file cannot be read. Check the The ROM data ID of the file you attempted
OTHER FUNCTION type of the file. to read is invalid.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.

- 765 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O

operation.

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER Specify a file of the PMC parameter The specified file is not of the PMC
FORMAT format. Also, check the specified file parameter format.
to see whether its content is not
disrupted.
ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT Specify a file of the handy file format. The specified file is not of the handy file
Also, check the specified file to see format.
whether its content is not disrupted.
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT Specify file of recognizable format Can not recognize the format of specified
such as PMC parameter format, or file.
check the contents of the file.
FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER IS Specify file name or file number for the Need file name or file number to identify
REQUIRED operation. file to read, compare, or delete.
COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT Check the communication parameters Communication with the I/O device has
such as baud rate, and retry to been timeout.
communicate.
I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED Check the power of I/O device is ON. Any I/O device is not connected, or some
OR IN ERROR STATUS Check the I/O device is connected. error has occurred in it.
Check the cable that connects I/O
device with PMC is correct one. If
some error has occurred in I/O device,
solve it.
RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK Check the PMC's communication Invalid data has been received.
THE COMMUNICATION parameters such as baud rate match
PARAMETERS the ones of I/O device.
RECEIVED DATA HAS Check the communication parameters Too many data have received at once.
OVERRUN about flow control.
OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING Use the other channel, or stop the Others function is using this channel.
THIS CHANNEL function.
BAD COMMUNICATION Check the communication parameters Setting parameters of communication are
PARAMETER such as baud rate. not correct.
OTHER FUNCTION IS USING I/O Wait until function that using I/O Another function such as FANUC
FUNCTION function do finish, or stop the function. LADDER-III is using I/O function.
UNKNOWN HANDY FILE Check the file. The received data is not a program of the
FORMAT DATA PMC system or is a program of some
other incompatible type.
ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING Set a valid baud rate. The set baud rate is invalid.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER Set a valid channel number. The set channel number is invalid.
ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING Set a valid parity bit. The set parity bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING Set a valid stop bit. The set stop bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL WRITE CODE Set a valid output code. The set output code is invalid.
SETTING
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN Wait until On-line function, do finish Can not input/output of sequence
USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION the using I/O function. In general, both program, because On-line function is
of I/O function and On-line function using sequence program.
should not be used at the same time.

- 766 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during

the I/O operations

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ERROR OCCURS IN Check the PMC alarm screen and Data cannot be output because there is an
SEQUENCE PROGRAM correct the indicated program error error in the ladder program.
accordingly.
UNKNOWN DATA TYPE Check the file. The PMC type of the input data is
unknown.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT Check the related settings. There are not all the settings that are
ALLOWED needed to use this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be
PMC parameter. referenced by this function.
THIS DEVICE IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other The specified device is currently used by
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be used
specified device. by this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
PROTECTED BY OTHER function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be
FUNCTION PMC parameter. changed by this function.
LADDER TYPE UNMATCH Specify a program of a valid type. The specified program is of a different
type and cannot be read.
TOO LARGE SEQUENCE Check the file. Or, change to a step The ladder program is too large to read.
PROGRAM number option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS Retry after terminating the other The ladder program is currently used by
USED BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently displaying the some other function and cannot be
ladder program. referenced by this function.

- 767 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

10.2 I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND ACTIONS TO

TAKE

If an I/O Link communication error occurs, the system generates a

system alarm, displaying an error message of the following format.

PC050 IOLINK CHn GRa:bb

In this message format, CHn (where n is 1 or a higher number)

represents the number of the channel that has caused the
communication error. “Gra” represents a group number in which a
problem may occur. “bb” means internal code.
However, correct group number may not be shown depend on cause or
condition of the communication error. Please note that it is difficult to
identify the cause of the error or the location of the fault with these
values alone, for the following reasons.

(1) If the communication error has resulted from a hardware fault or

noise, these register values themselves may not be correct.
(2) Different register values may be presented for the same cause
depending on the timing of the error occurrence.

Therefore, it is important to consider other circumstantial factors in

addition to this displaying.

- 768 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

10.2.1 Causes of Communication Errors

An I/O Link communication error can stem from various types of

causes such as those described below.

(1) Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate connection

Several different types of I/O Link electrical cables are used, as
listed below. Check that the cable of the proper type is
connected to each device. Also, check the connection of each
cable, based on "Connection Manual (Hardware)". Pay
particular attention to those signals to be carried over a twisted-
pair cable. Make sure that the SIN signal is paired with the *SIN
signal and that the SOUT signal is paired with the *SOUT signal.
If any of these signals is paired with the wrong signal, the cable
will become more susceptible to noise. Do not connect any
unnecessary cable. Since the system has the +24V and +5V
power cables, connecting an unnecessary cable can lead to a
failure or malfunction.
• K1X: Used to connect groups.
• K2X: Used for base extension.
• K3X: Used to connect an optical I/O Link adapter or
I/O Link dummy unit.

(2) Connection to the wrong connector

The output end of a cable between I/O Link groups is connected
to "JD1A" and its input end is connected to "JD1B". Check each
cable to see whether it is not connected to the wrong connector.
(3) Loose connector connection
Check each cable to see whether it is firmly connected to the
relevant connector. The cable may be connected loosely.
(4) Assignment data mismatch
If the actual link configuration does not match the assignment
data, a communication error may result. For example, if base
extensions (bases 1 to 3) are assigned but if those bases are not
connected, a system alarm is generated when the CNC is started.
(5) Noise
Take necessary counter-noise measures, as instructed in
"Connection Manual (Hardware)". If the communication cables
are bundled together with the power cables, noise may be
introduced to the communication cables. To avoid such noise,
install the communication cables and the power cables in
separate bundles. Also, connect the shield of the communication
cable to the ground plate using a cable clamp. (Refer to
"Connection Manual (Hardware)".)

- 769 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

(6) DO connection to ground

With some types of operator's panel, a communication alarm
occurs if the DO terminal is connected to ground or to another
DO terminal due to inadequate cable connection, module
malfunction or failure, or other cause.
(7) Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage
Check whether the power capacity is insufficient. While the
machine had a sufficient power capacity when originally
designed, it may be suffering a power shortage due to such
factors as subsequent modifications to the machine design and/or
the factory facilities. Also, even if there is no problem under
normal operating conditions, certain operations may result in a
drop in voltage.
(8) Loose power connection
Check that the power cable is connected firmly. Several cases
have been identified in which intermittent errors occur at an
extremely low incidence because the power cable is loosely
connected to the power unit precluding the stable supply of
power to the slave.
(9) Power unit malfunction or failure
A communication error may result from an instantaneous
interruption of power supply due to a malfunction or failure of
the power unit.
(10) Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart
When the master I/O Link device is restarted, the slave needs to
be restarted as well. Particular care must be exercised about
intelligent-type slaves (those that exert standalone control
independently, such as FS0-C, Power Mate, β amplifier, and
spindle monitor unit) because, when the power of the master is
turned off, a system alarm is generated in the slave. If the CNC
alone is restarted in this situation, the system alarm in the slave
causes another system alarm to be generated in the master.
(11) System alarm in the slave
In cases where intelligent-type slaves are used, if a system alarm
occurs in any of the slaves, the master also generates a system
alarm. Similarly, if a system alarm occurs in the master, the
slave generates a system alarm as well. Therefore, when such
slaves are used, it is important to know which device (master or
slave) has generated a system alarm first.
If only the master is experiencing a system alarm while no such
alarm is occurring in the slave, the likely cause is that the power
of the slave was turned off instantaneously, causing a system
alarm in the master, and then the slave was restarted.

- 770 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

(12) Failure to connect the optical I/O Link adapter to ground

The optical I/O Link adapter, which accomplishes conversion
between electrical cable and optical cable, uses its own case as a
grounding body. Therefore, the case of the adapter must be
connected to ground.
(13) CNC or I/O device malfunction or failure
A communication error may stem from a hardware malfunction
or failure. Try replacing boards having an I/O Link connector
(master PCB and PMC boards), the PMC control module (which
may be attached directly to the master PCB in some PMC types),
back panel, individual slaves, or other adequate components.
(14) Operation mistake
If the error has occurred only once, it may be due to an operation
mistake, such as turning off the power of the slave inadvertently.

- 771 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

10.2.2 Check Items

Check the following items individually to make a judgment as to

whether any of the causes described in the preceding subsection is
present.

(1) Operation records

"Had the machine been operating normally before the

error occurred?"

If the machine suddenly starts to experience problems while it

has been operating normally all along, one potential cause of
those problems is noise, loose connector connection, or
insufficient power capacity due to such factors as modifications
to machine design and/or the factory facilities. Another highly
likely cause is a hardware failure.
If the machine is still in the startup phase and has no operation
records, you need to begin your investigation by checking the
assignment data and hardware connections.

(2) Configuration and assignment data

"How are the I/O Link devices configured?"

Examine the actual I/O Link configuration (types of the master

and slaves and their connections) and the assignment data.
Based on "Connection Manual (Hardware)", check whether the
assignment data matches the actual I/O Link configuration,
whether the I/O Link point count is within the limit, whether
terminal resistors and other connectors are properly connected,
whether a power cable is properly connected to each master and
slave, whether the power-on or power-off procedure has been
performed normally, and so on.

- 772 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

(3) Timing

"What did you do when the error occurred?"

If the error occurs when you turn on the power, first check
whether each cable connector is connected to the appropriate
device, as well as the assignment data. A system alarm occurs
when the power is turned on, if bases 1 to 3 are assigned while
bases 1 to 3 are actually not connected.
Also, when the master is restarted, the slave needs to be restarted
as well. Check that the power of the slave is off before turning
off the power of the master.
If the error repeats every time you carry out a certain operation,
the likely cause is that an inadequate voltage is applied to the
machine because of loose connector connection, noise,
insufficient power capacity, or DO connection to ground that is
caused by that particular operation.

(4) Operation

"Does the error occur every time you carry out the same
operation?"

If the error occurs every time you carry out the same operation,
you can locate the faulty part by removing the slaves sequentially
starting with the one having the largest group number. Note that
removing certain types of slaves (e.g., operator's panel) leaves
you unable to manipulate the machine. Take necessary
precautions for safety before removing such slaves.
If an error is unrepeatable and occurs with low frequency, its
cause is difficult to identify. In that case, there is no option but
to take every possible measure and see if the error will be
corrected. Such measures include replacing hardware
components (masters, slaves, cables, etc.), strengthening the
power supply (using an independent power source not shared
with other devices), enhancing the earth grounding system,
shielding the cables, and installing the PMC cables and other
cables in separate bundles.

- 773 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

(5) Phenomenon

"Does the error cause the same phenomenon every time?"

Each time the same error occurs, check the system alarm
message (register values), the LEDs on the slave, and the system
alarm message displayed by the slave. As described earlier,
these indications may vary depending on certain conditions. If
the status denoted by these indications changes every time, the
information given by the register values and LEDs is not reliable.

(6) Alarm history/system alarm history

"Is there any other alarm?"

The communication error may be due to another alarm event that

occurred before the I/O Link system alarm. Check the alarm
history and system alarm history records for any such alarm.
If the slave also has alarm history and system alarm history data,
check those history records as well.

(7) Register values

"What kind of alarm is occurring?"

If the same register values are displayed every time the system
alarm occurs, those register values may help you identify the
location or cause of the error. However, as described earlier,
these register values are not always valid.

- 774 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

(8) Retry counters

"Isn't the communication unstable?"

In response to an error that has occurred singly, the I/O Link

attempts to retransmit data. If the error cannot be avoided by this
retransmission attempt, then a system alarm is generated.
Every time such a retransmission takes place, one of the register
values is incremented by 1. The addresses of these registers are
the same regardless of the type of the PMC system.

Meaning of the register PMC address Size

Retry counter of channel 1 R9051 1 byte
Retry counter of channel 2 R9057 1 byte
Retry counter of channel 3 R9165 1 byte
Retry counter of channel 4 R9171 1 byte

By checking these register values, you can know whether the

communication had been unstable all along or a communication
error occurred suddenly after a reasonable period of stable
operation.
In cases where a communication error repeats intermittently and
the values of these registers are frequently updated, try replacing
adequate hardware components. If the register values come to
stay unchanged after you replace a certain hardware component,
then you can tell that particular hardware component is the cause
of the error.
These registers are volatile memory, and their values are cleared
to 0 at the time of powering on.

- 775 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

10.2.3 Sample Cases

A system alarm occurs once a day.

<Category> Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate

connection
<Configuration>

NC
Optical I/O link Optical I/O link
adapter adapter

Optical cable

Operator's Connector I/O Unit-A

panel I/O panel I/O

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2

<Cause> Groups 0 and 1 were connected using a cable to

which a +5 V power wire was attached.
<Explanation> The cable to which a +5V power wire is attached is
intended to connect optical I/O Link adapters.
When not using optical I/O Link adapters, use a
cable to which a +5V power wire is not attached.
Note that, when this troubleshooting work
(replacing the cable) was done, the operator's panel
I/O module was replaced as well. Therefore, the
direct cause of the error might have been the
operator's panel I/O module.

- 776 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

A system alarm occurs two or three times a day.

<Category> Improper cable type, cable cut, or inadequate

connection
<Configuration>

NC

Operator's β amplifier β amplifier Connector

panel I/O panel I/O

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

<Cause> The cable between groups 2 and 3 had a short

circuit inside it.
<Explanation> Because the alarm had been occurring with
relatively high frequency (two or three times a day),
the cause of the error was located by removing the
salve devices sequentially starting with the one
having the largest group number.

- 777 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

A system alarm occurs if you execute "I/O Link startup" after storing the
ladder program using the online monitor.

<Category> Assignment data mismatch

<Register> 83:41
<Configuration>

NC

I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2

<Cause> The groups and bases had been set mistakenly.

(Correct) (Wrong)
Group Base Slot Module name Group Base Slot Module name
0 0 N Module 1 0 0 n Module 1
1 0 N Module 2 0 1 n Module 2
2 0 N Module 3 0 2 n Module 3

<Explanation> If the base numbers are mistakenly assigned, the

error almost always occurs when the power of the
CNC is turned on.

- 778 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

A system alarm is prone to occur when the feeder starts to operate after the
machining process.

<Category> Noise
<Configuration>

NC

I/O Unit-A Operator's Power

panel Mate-D

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2

<Cause> None of the masters, slaves, or communication

cables were properly grounded to earth.
<Explanation> If a system alarm is prone to occur in response to a
specific operation, it is highly likely that a drop in
voltage, noise interference, loose cable connection,
or short circuit results from that operation.

- 779 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

A system alarm occurs almost every time the automatic operation begins.

<Category> Noise
<Configuration>

NC

I/O Unit-A Operator's

panel

Group 0 Group 1

<Cause> The communication cables and power cables were

installed in the same bundle.
<Explanation> The error no longer occurred after the
communication cables and power cables were
installed in separate bundles. In this case, too,
noise is considered to be the cause of the error.
Note, however, that such noise-caused errors do
not necessarily occur in response to one specific
operation. In many cases, they emerge as
intermittent errors that occur with extremely low
frequency and it is difficult to identify any
particular condition for them to arise. Therefore, if
an error is occurring intermittently and if you have
potential error factors, such as any hardware
component not connected to ground, poor
grounding, and cables installed near a noise source,
you need to take necessary measures for each of
those error factors and see if the error will be
corrected.

- 780 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

A system alarm occurs at a cycle start.

<Category> DO connection to ground

<Configuration>

NC

I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A Operator's

Connection
panel I/O
unit
Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

<Cause> DO was short-circuited due to a wiring mistake on

the operator's panel.
<Explanation> Some operator's panel I/O modules cause a system
alarm if the DO output is connected to ground. In
this case, we were able to identify the faulty
component by checking the signal which is turned
on at a cycle start on the operator's panel.

A system alarm occurs once every five times the feeder is moved.

<Category> Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage

<Configuration>

NC

I/O Unit-A

Group 0

<Cause> The power voltage of the slave dropped from 24

volts to 17 volts when the feeder was moved.
<Explanation> If a system alarm is prone to occur in response to a
specific operation, it is highly likely that a drop in
voltage, noise interference, or loose cable
connection results from that operation.

- 781 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

A system alarm occurs every time an external alarm is displayed.

<Category> Insufficient power capacity or drop in voltage

<Configuration>

NC

β amplifier I/O Unit-A

Group 0 Group 1

<Cause> A flashing lamp was lit when an alarm occurred,

which caused the power voltage of the slave to
drop from 24 volts to 10 volts.
<Explanation> We checked the LED of group 0 (β amplifier) and
found that an NMI had occurred. As a result of
examining the power supply of the β amplifier, we
were able to confirm that its voltage would drop
when its flashing lamp was lit.

- 782 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

A system alarm occurs intermittently (A).

<Category> Loose power connection

<Configuration>

NC

I/O Unit-A Spindle I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A

monitor unit

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

<Cause> The cable was loosely connected to the terminal

block of the slave power unit; it was merely in
touch of the block. We conducted a voltage
measurement and found that the voltage of the
slave sometimes dropped from the 24-volt level.
<Explanation> At the time when this measurement was conducted,
the voltage of the slave dropped only by 2 volts or
so and no system alarm occurred. However, when
the voltage level is unstable, any instantaneous yet
substantial change in voltage can lead to an error.
To prevent this, check that each cable is connected
firmly, replace the power supply unit, or use a
stable power supply.

A system alarm sometimes occurs at powering on.

<Category> Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart

<Configuration> (Unknown)
<Cause> Due to a wiring mistake, some slaves did not turn
off their power even when the power of the CNC
was turned off.
<Explanation> When the master I/O Link device is restarted, all
the slaves need to be restarted as well. The error
occurred intermittently because only the CNC
power was turned on or off rather than turning on
or off the main power.

- 783 -
10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE B-63983EN/01

A system alarm occurs when data is written using the BOOT screen.

<Category> Restart of the slave at the time of the CNC restart

<Configuration> (Unknown)
<Cause> When a macro was to be written using the BOOT
screen, only the power of the CNC was turned off
and then on while the power of the slaves remained
on.
<Explanation> When the master I/O Link device is restarted, all
the slaves need to be restarted as well.

A system alarm occurs every time the power is turned on.

<Category> System down of in the slave

<Configuration>

NC

Operator's I/O Unit-A Power Power

panel Mate-E Mate-E
connection unit

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

<Cause> A RAM parity error had occurred in Power Mate-E

of group 2.
<Explanation> Since group 2 was Power Mate-E, we checked the
alarm using the DPL and MDI and confirmed that
a RAM parity error had occurred in the device.

- 784 -
B-63983EN/01 10.PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO TAKE

System alarms began to occur after the machine had been in operation for
about one year.

<Category> Failure to connect the optical I/O Link adapter to

ground
<Configuration> (Unknown)
<Cause> The connection between the optical I/O Link
adapter case and the inside of the optical I/O Link
adapter was loose.
<Explanation> The case of the optical I/O Link adapter is not
painted and serves as a grounding body as well.
Therefore, the optical I/O Link adapter must be
connected to ground. In this case, the adapter was
properly grounded but, because it was installed in a
position subject to vibration, the connection
between the adapter case and the inside of the
adapter had been lost.

A system alarm occurs every time the power is turned on.

<Category> CNC or I/O device malfunction or failure

<Configuration>

NC

Operator's Spindle Connector Connector Connector Connector

panel I/O monitor unit panel I/O panel I/O panel I/O panel I/O

Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5

<Cause> The basic connector panel I/O module of group 5

was faulty.
<Explanation> Since the alarm had occurred every time the power
was turned on, we removed the devices
sequentially, starting with the one having the
largest group number, and checked whether an
alarm would arise. As a result, we found out that
the system would start normally when group 5 was
removed. We then conducted a test with the basic
module of group 5 attached to another CNC and
discovered that the error was due to the
malfunction of that individual module.

- 785 -
B-63983EN/01 INDEX

INDEX
<A> <C>
About connection log of Ethernet................................. 720 CALL (Conditional Subprogram Call: SUB 65) ......... 375
About Ethernet Communication Parameters................. 717 CALLU (Unconditional Subprogram Call: SUB 66)... 377
ADD (BCD Addition: SUB 19)................................... 310 Causes of Communication Errors ................................. 769
ADDB (Binary Addition: SUB 36).............................. 298 Cautions for Reading from/Writing to Nonvolatile
ADDRESS ALTERATION FUNCTION ..................... 656 Memory .......................................................................... 96
Address Map Display Screen........................................ 662 Check Items .................................................................. 772
Addresses........................................................................ 52 CHECKING PMC ALARMS
Addresses for Signals Between the PMC and CNC ([PMC ALARM] SCREEN)......................................... 500
(F, G) .............................................................................. 61 Checking Sequence Program .......................................... 13
Addresses of Signals Between the PMC and Machine CNC INFORMATION ................................................. 402
(X, Y) ............................................................................. 62 CNC Parameters Related to the PMCs ......................... 108
ALARM MESSAGE LIST ........................................... 748 COD (Code Conversion: SUB 7)................................. 279
AND (Logical AND: SUB 60) .................................... 267 CODB (Binary Code Conversion: SUB 27) ................ 283
AND Instruction ........................................................... 181 CODE CONVERSION................................................. 278
AND.NOT Instruction .................................................. 182 COIN (Coincidence Check: SUB 16) ........................... 251
AND.STK Instruction................................................... 187 Collective Monitor Function......................................... 650
ASSIGNMENT METHOD........................................... 128 COLLECTIVE MONITOR Function ........................... 652
Assignment Method for a Handy Machine Operator's COM (Common Line Control: SUB 9)........................ 361
Panel ............................................................................. 150 COME (Common Line Control End: SUB 29)............ 364
Assignment Method for an AS-i Converter Unit .......... 152 Comment .......................................................................... 7
Assignment Method for Distribution I/O Connection Communication Status.................................................. 715
Panel I/O Modules and Distribution I/O Operator's COMP (Comparison: SUB 15) ..................................... 249
Panel I/O Modules........................................................ 140 Comparing PMC Parameters with Files of Other
Assignment Method for I/O Link Connection Units..... 148 Devices (via the RS-232C Port)................................... 562
Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL A............... 133 Comparing PMC Parameters with FLOPPY Files........ 557
Assignment Method for I/O Unit-MODEL B............... 137 Comparing PMC Parameters with Memory Card Files 552
Assignment Method for the Power Mate ...................... 147 Comparing Sequence Programs with Files of Other
Automatic Start of Trace Setting .................................. 582 Devices (via the RS-232C Port).................................... 547
AUTOMATICALLY INPUTTING UNUSED Comparing Sequence Programs with Flash ROM Files 538
PARAMETER NUMBERS.......................................... 665 Comparing Sequence Programs with FLOPPY Files ... 542
AXCTL (Axis Control by PMC: SUB 53)................... 351 Comparing Sequence Programs with Memory Card
AXIS INFORMATION ................................................ 437 Files .............................................................................. 534
COMPARISON ............................................................ 245
<B>
COMPATIBILITY WITH CONVENTIONAL
Basic Configuration of PMC ............................................ 2
MODELS...................................................................... 118
Basic Instructions ........................................................... 54
Compatibility with the PMCs for the 15i-MODEL A/B120
BASIC INSTRUCTIONS............................................. 174
Compatibility with the PMCs for the 16i/18i/21i-B ..... 118
Basic Screen Operations ............................................... 468
COMPB (Comparison Between Binary Data: SUB 32) 246
Basic Specifications........................................................ 46
Configuration of an I/O Link ........................................ 125
BIT OPERATION ........................................................ 260
COUNTER ................................................................... 209
Counter Addresses (C).................................................... 77

i-1
INDEX B-63983EN/01

Creating Ladder Diagram ............................................... 10 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS FOR

CTR (Counter: SUB 5) ................................................. 210 THE ONLINE FUNCTION ([ONLINE] SCREEN)..... 711
CTRB (Fixed counter: SUB 56) ................................... 216 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Selectable
CTRC (Counter: SUB 55) ............................................ 219 I/O Link Assignment Function ..................................... 728
DISPLAYING AND SETTING SYSTEM
<D>
PARAMETERS ([SYSTEM PARAM] SCREENS)..... 722
DATA SEARCH........................................................... 253
Displaying and Setting the Counter Data Type............. 723
Data Table Addresses (D)............................................... 87
DISPLAYING I/O LINK CONNECTION STATUS
DATA TRANSFER ...................................................... 222
([I/O LINK] SCREEN)................................................. 567
DCNV (Data Conversion: SUB 14)............................. 286
Displaying I/O Module Allocation Data ....................... 695
DCNVB (Extended Data Conversion: SUB 31) .......... 288
Displaying Message Data.............................................. 684
DEC (Decode: SUB 4) ................................................ 291
Displaying Symbol and Comment Data........................ 673
DECB (Binary Decoding: SUB 25)............................. 293
DISPLAYING THE STATUS OF PMCS AND
Deleting Memory Card Files or Formatting a Memory
CHANGING THE TARGET PMC
Card .............................................................................. 563
([PMC STATUS] SCREENS) ...................................... 708
Deleting One or All FLOPPY Files.............................. 565
Displaying Title Data.................................................... 669
Details of the Basic Instructions ................................... 176
DIV (BCD Division: SUB 22)..................................... 316
DETECTION OF DOUBLE COILS ............................ 667
DIVB (Binary Division: SUB 39)................................ 307
Determining Specification .............................................. 10
DSCH (Data Search: SUB 17)...................................... 257
DIFD (Falling Edge Detection: SUB 58)..................... 263
DSCHB (Binary Data Search: SUB 34)........................ 254
Difference Between Relay Sequence Circuit and
Ladder Sequence Program................................................ 9 <E>
DIFU (Rising Edge Detection: SUB 57) ..................... 261 Editing Desired Message Data...................................... 691
DISPB (Display Message: SUB 41) ............................ 324 Editing I/O Module Allocation Data............................. 697
DISPLAY AND OPERATION CONDITIONS FOR EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS .............................. 619
SCREENS .................................................................... 470 Editing Message Data ................................................... 687
Display Format for Parameters ..................................... 612 Editing Sequence Program.............................................. 11
Displaying a File List ([LIST] Screen) ......................... 525 Editing Symbol and Comment Data ............................. 675
DISPLAYING A PROGRAM LIST Editing Title Data ......................................................... 671
([LIST] SCREEN) ........................................................ 591 END (End of a Ladder Program: SUB 64) .................. 381
DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O MODULE END1 (1st Level Sequence Program End: SUB 1)...... 380
ALLOCATION DATA ([MODULE] SCREENS) ....... 695 END2 (2nd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 2) .... 380
DISPLAYING AND EDITING MESSAGE DATA END3 (3rd Level Sequence Program End: SUB 48) ... 381
([MESAGE] SCREENS) .............................................. 684 Entering Data on the Program Check Screen
DISPLAYING AND EDITING PMC SETTINGS (Low-speed Response).................................................. 433
([SETING] SCREENS) ................................................ 700 Entering Torque Limit Data for the Digital Servo
DISPLAYING AND EDITING SYMBOL AND Motor (Low-speed Response)....................................... 460
COMMENT DATA ([SYMBOL] SCREENS)............. 673 EOR (Exclusive OR: SUB 59)..................................... 265
DISPLAYING AND EDITING TITLE DATA Example ........................................................................ 166
([TITLE] SCREENS) ................................................... 669 EXECUTION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM ................. 14
DISPLAYING AND SETTING CONFIGURATION Execution of Trace........................................................ 577
PARAMETERS ([CONFIG PARAM] SCREENS) ..... 731 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage .......... 40
Displaying and Setting Parameters for an FS0 Execution Procedure of Sequence Program.................... 15
Operator's Panel............................................................ 725 EXIN (External Data Input: SUB 42).......................... 339
Extended Relay Addresses (E)........................................ 74

i-2
B-63983EN/01 INDEX

<F> INVALID INSTRUCTIONS ........................................ 391

Forced I/O Function ..................................................... 492
Forced I/O Screen......................................................... 496
<J>
JMP (Jump: SUB 10)................................................... 365
Format of the Functional Instructions........................... 193
JMPB (Label Jump 1: SUB 68) ................................... 369
FORMATS OF CONTROL DATA.............................. 395
JMPC (Label Jump 2: SUB 73) ................................... 371
FS0 Operator's Panel .................................................... 154
JMPE (Jump End: SUB 30)......................................... 368
FUNCTION TO AUTOMATICALLY INPUT
UNSUSED ADDRESSES ............................................ 664 <K>
FUNCTION TO REFERENCE ADDRESSES IN USE661 Keep Relay Addresses (K).............................................. 79
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE
EDITOR Screen............................................................ 643 <L>
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE Label Number Addresses (L) .......................................... 94

VIEWER Screen........................................................... 616 Ladder Diagram Format.................................................... 6

FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION LIST Screen............. 641 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR

FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................... 193 SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])..................................... 588

Functional Instructions LADDER LANGUAGE ............................................... 173

(Arranged in Sequence of Instruction Group)................. 55 LBL (Label: SUB 69) .................................................. 373

Functional Instructions Line Number and Net Number.......................................... 8

(Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.) .............................. 58 LIST OF WINDOW FUNCTIONS .............................. 398
LOW-SPEED RESPONSE AND HIGH-SPEED
<G> RESPONSE .................................................................. 396
Graphic Symbols of Relays and Coils .............................. 8
<M>
<I> Menu for Setting Configuration Parameters ................. 732
I/O Communication Error Messages............................. 764 Message Display Addresses (A) ..................................... 75
I/O LINK ...................................................................... 123 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
I/O LINK COMMUNICATION ERRORS AND Screen ........................................................................... 748
ACTIONS TO TAKE ................................................... 768 MONITORING LADDER DIAGRAMS
I/O LINK CONNECTION CHECK FUNCTION ........ 172 ([LADDER] SCREEN)................................................. 596
I/O Signals of PMC .......................................................... 2 MONITORING PMC SIGNAL STATUS
Implementation ............................................................... 19 ([STATUS] SCREEN).................................................. 489
Inputting a Sequence Program from the FLOPPY........ 540 MOVB (Transfer of 1 Byte: SUB 43)........................... 223
Inputting a Sequence Program from the Memory Card 532 MOVD (Transfer of 4 Bytes: SUB 47) ......................... 225
Inputting PMC Parameters from Other Devices MOVE (Logical Product Transfer: SUB 8) .................. 228
(via the RS-232C Port) ................................................. 560 MOVN (Transfer of an Arbitrary Number of Bytes:
Inputting PMC Parameters from the FLOPPY ............. 555 SUB 45) ........................................................................ 226
Inputting PMC Parameters from the Memory Card...... 550 MOVOR (Data Transfer After Logical Sum: SUB 28). 230
Inputting Sequence Programs from Other Devices MOVW (Transfer of 2 Bytes: SUB 44) ........................ 224
(via the RS-232C Port) ................................................. 545 MUL (BCD Multiplication: SUB 21) .......................... 314
Inputting Sequence Programs from the Flash ROM ..... 537 MULB (Binary Multiplication: SUB 38)..................... 304
INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS 323 MULTI-PMC DISPLAY .............................................. 486
Interface Between CNC and PMC.................................. 43 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION............................................. 38
Interlock.......................................................................... 36
Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) .................. 66 <N>
Internal Relay Addresses (R) .......................................... 65 NET EDITOR Screen ................................................... 631
Nonvolatile Memory Control Address (K) ..................... 80

i-3
INDEX B-63983EN/01

NOP (No Operation: SUB 70)..................................... 381 PARI (Parity Check: SUB 11) ..................................... 273
NOT (Logical NOT: SUB 62) ..................................... 271 Partially Changing Symbol and Comment Data ........... 678
NOTE ON PROGRAMMING...................................... 392 Password Function........................................................ 483
Note on the Programming of a Low-speed Response PMC ALARM MESSAGES AND ACTIONS TO
Window Instruction ...................................................... 397 TAKE............................................................................ 747
Notes............................................................................. 171 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING
Notes on I/O Signals Updated by Other Than PMC....... 37 SCREENS ([PMC CONFIG]) ...................................... 668
Notes on using subroutines............................................. 29 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE
Numbers of Input Points and of Output Points of SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE])...................................... 488
the I/O Link .................................................................. 127 PMC Parameter Format .................................................. 97
NUME (BCD Definition of Constant: SUB 23) .......... 321 PMC Parameter Input/Output Conditions..................... 480
NUMEB (Definition of Binary Constants: SUB 40) ... 318 PMC PARAMETERS .................................................... 95
PMC Signal Addresses ..................................................... 3
<O>
PMC SIGNAL ADDRESSES......................................... 61
Operating on the FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION
PMC SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 45
DATA TABLE EDITOR Screen .................................. 644
PMC System Alarm Messages...................................... 751
Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
PMC System Parameters............................................... 106
Screen ........................................................................... 621
Presetting the Relative Coordinate (Low-speed Response)462
Operating on the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
Processing Priority (1st Level, 2nd Level, and 3rd Level)17
Screen ........................................................................... 599
Program Capacity ........................................................... 49
Operating on the Screen ............................................... 658
PROGRAM CONTROL............................................... 360
Operating on the Screen ............................................... 663
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen .............................. 647
OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ............................. 465
Programmer Protection Function.................................. 470
Operation after Execution of Trace............................... 579
Operation Errors ........................................................... 753 <R>
OPERATION INSTRUCTION .................................... 297 RD Instruction .............................................................. 177
OPERATION SCREENS OF THE PMC AND SOFT RD.NOT Instruction ..................................................... 178
KEY ORGANIZATION ............................................... 467 RD.NOT.STK Instruction............................................. 186
OR (Logical OR: SUB 61) .......................................... 269 RD.STK Instruction...................................................... 185
OR Instruction .............................................................. 183 Reading a Parameter (High-speed Response) ............... 413
OR.NOT Instruction ..................................................... 184 Reading a Real Type Parameter
OR.STK Instruction...................................................... 189 (High-speed Response) ................................................. 417
Outline .......................................................................... 163 Reading a Skip Position (Stop Coordinates of Skip
Outputting a Sequence Program to the FLOPPY ......... 539 Operation (G31)) of Controlled Axes
Outputting a Sequence Program to the Memory Card .. 531 (High-speed Response) ................................................. 444
Outputting PMC Parameters to Other Devices Reading a Tool Offset (High-speed Response)............. 404
(via the RS-232C Port) ................................................. 559 Reading a Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Outputting PMC Parameters to the FLOPPY ............... 554 (High-speed Response) ................................................. 409
Outputting PMC Parameters to the Memory Card........ 548 Reading Actual Spindle Speeds
Outputting Sequence Programs to Other Devices (High-speed Response) ................................................. 456
(via the RS-232C Port) ................................................. 544 Reading Clock Data (Date and Time)
OVERVIEW OF PMC ..................................................... 1 (High-speed Response) ................................................. 435
Reading CNC Status Information
<P>
(High-speed Response) ................................................. 429
PARAMETERS FOR THE PMC SYSTEM ................ 103

i-4
B-63983EN/01 INDEX

Reading CNC System Information Setting an I/O Target PMC ........................................... 528
(High-speed Response)................................................. 402 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR]
Reading Setting Data (High-speed Response) .............. 421 Screen).......................................................................... 505
Reading the Absolute Position (Absolute Coordinates) Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) . 510
of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response).................. 439 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays
Reading the Acceleration/Deceleration Delay on ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)............................................. 507
Controlled Axes (High-speed Response)...................... 448 SETTING AND DISPLAYING PMC PARAMETERS 501
Reading the Actual Spindle Speed Setting and Displaying Variable Timers
(High-speed Response)................................................. 450 ([TIMER] Screen)......................................................... 502
Reading the Actual Velocity of Controlled Axes Setting I/O Address for I/O Link .................................... 42
(High-speed Response)................................................. 437 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen)571
Reading the Current Program Number Setting Parameters ........................................................ 103
(8-digit Program Numbers) (High-speed Response)..... 431 Setting Parameters for the Online Function.................. 712
Reading the Current Program Number Setting the CNC-PMC Interface ................................... 734
(High-speed Response)................................................. 425 Setting the Communication Port
Reading the Current Sequence Number ([PORT SETING] Screen)............................................ 523
(High-speed Response)................................................. 427 Setting the Display Format of the LADDER
Reading the Machine Position (Machine Coordinates) DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen .................................... 605
of Controlled Axes (High-speed Response).................. 441 Setting the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR Screen ..... 625
Reading the Relative Position on a Controlled Axis Setting the Machine Signal Interface ............................ 739
(High-speed Response)................................................. 452 Setting the Parameters Related to Ladder Execution .... 743
Reading the Remaining Travel (High-speed Response) 454 Setting the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen ............ 649
Reading the Servo Delay for Controlled Axes Setting the Program List Screen ................................... 595
(High-speed Response)................................................. 446 SFT (Shift Register: SUB 33) ...................................... 275
Registering New Symbol and Comment Data .............. 681 Signal Name (Symbol Name) ........................................... 7
Repetitive Operation....................................................... 16 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen).................... 570
ROT (Rotation Control: SUB 6).................................. 383 SP (Subprogram: SUB 71)........................................... 378
ROTATION CONTROL .............................................. 382 SPE (End of a Subprogram: SUB 72).......................... 379
ROTB (Binary Rotation Control: SUB 26) ................. 387 SPECIFICATIONS......................................................... 46
RST Instruction ............................................................ 192 Starting and Stopping Sequence Programs ................... 710
Storage and Management of Sequence Program............. 13
<S>
Structure of Valid Net................................................... 640
Sample Cases................................................................ 776
Structured Sequence Program......................................... 19
Saving Sequence Programs to the Flash ROM ............. 536
SUB (BCD Subtraction: SUB 20) ............................... 312
Screen Structures .......................................................... 657
SUBB (Binary Subtraction: SUB 37) .......................... 301
SELECTABLE I/O LINK ASSIGNMENT
Subprogram Number Addresses (P) ............................... 93
FUNCTION .................................................................. 163
Subprogramming and nesting ......................................... 25
SELECTING AND DISPLAYING THE
Synchronization Processing of I/O Signals..................... 31
NECESSARY LADDER NET
System Keep Relay Addresses (K) ................................. 81
([SWITCH] SCREEN])................................................ 650
SEQUENCE PROGRAM AND PMC PARAMETER <T>
I/O ([I/O] SCREEN)..................................................... 518 The convert method of source program using
SEQUENCE PROGRAM CREATION PROCEDURE . 10 FANUC LADDER-III .................................................. 122
Sequence Program Memory Capacity............................. 50 TIMER.......................................................................... 201
SET Instruction............................................................. 191 Timer Addresses (T) ....................................................... 76

i-5
INDEX B-63983EN/01

TMR (Timer: SUB 3) ................................................... 202

TMRB (Fixed Timer: SUB 24)..................................... 204
TMRC (Timer: SUB 54)............................................... 206
Trace Result Output...................................................... 583
TRACING AND DISPLAYING PMC SIGNAL
STATUS ....................................................................... 569
Transferring and Writing Sequence Program to PMC .... 12
Transition of the PMC Screens..................................... 467

<W>
WHAT IS LADDER LANGUAGE? ................................ 6
WHAT IS PMC? .............................................................. 2
WHAT IS THE I/O LINK?........................................... 124
WINDOW FUNCTIONS.............................................. 394
WINDR (Reading CNC Window Data: SUB 51)........ 346
WINDW (Writing CNC Window Data: SUB 52)........ 349
Writing a Parameter (Low-speed Response)................. 415
Writing a Real Type Parameter (Low-speed Response) 419
Writing a Tool Offset (Low-speed Response) .............. 406
Writing a Workpiece Origin Offset Value
(Low-speed Response).................................................. 411
Writing Setting Data (Low-speed Response)................ 423
Writing to the Memory Card ........................................ 521
WRT Instruction ........................................................... 179
WRT.NOT Instruction .................................................. 180

<X>
XMOV (Indexed Data Transfer: SUB 18).................... 242
XMOVB (Binary Index Modifier Data Tranfer:
SUB 35)........................................................................ 232

i-6
 Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN)

01 May, 2003

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents